Changeset 594 for vendor/current/docs


Ignore:
Timestamp:
Jul 1, 2011, 4:02:23 PM (14 years ago)
Author:
Herwig Bauernfeind
Message:

Samba 3.5: Update vendor to version 3.5.8

Location:
vendor/current/docs/manpages
Files:
85 edited

Legend:

Unmodified
Added
Removed

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/cifs.upcall.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: cifs.upcall
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "CIFS\&.UPCALL" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "CIFS\&.UPCALL" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022cifs.upcall \- Userspace upcall helper for Common Internet File System (CIFS)
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCcifs\&.upcall\F[] [\-\-trust\-dns|\-t] [\-\-version|\-v] {keyid}
    175 .fam
     25cifs\&.upcall [\-\-trust\-dns|\-t] [\-\-version|\-v] {keyid}
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    22171.RS 4
    22272.\}
    223 .fam C
    224 .ps -1
    22573.nf
    226 .if t \{\
    227 .sp -1
    228 .\}
    229 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    230 .sp -1
    231 
    23274#OPERATION  TYPE           D C PROGRAM ARG1 ARG2\&.\&.\&.
    23375#=========  =============  = = ================================
    23476create      cifs\&.spnego    * * /usr/local/sbin/cifs\&.upcall %k
    23577create      dns_resolver   * * /usr/local/sbin/cifs\&.upcall %k
    236 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    237 .if t \{\
    238 .sp 1
    239 .\}
    24078.fi
    241 .fam
    242 .ps +1
    24379.if n \{\
    24480.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/eventlogadm.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: eventlogadm
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "EVENTLOGADM" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "EVENTLOGADM" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022eventlogadm \- push records into the Samba event log store
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCeventlogadm\F[] [\fB\-d\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] \fB\-o\fR\ \FCaddsource\F[]\ \fIEVENTLOG\fR\ \fISOURCENAME\fR\ \fIMSGFILE\fR
    175 .fam
    176 .fam C
     25eventlogadm [\fB\-d\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] \fB\-o\fR\ addsource\ \fIEVENTLOG\fR\ \fISOURCENAME\fR\ \fIMSGFILE\fR
    17726.HP \w'\ 'u
    178 \FCeventlogadm\F[] [\fB\-d\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] \fB\-o\fR\ \FCwrite\F[]\ \fIEVENTLOG\fR
    179 .fam
    180 .fam C
     27eventlogadm [\fB\-d\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] \fB\-o\fR\ write\ \fIEVENTLOG\fR
    18128.HP \w'\ 'u
    182 \FCeventlogadm\F[] [\fB\-d\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] \fB\-o\fR\ \FCdump\F[]\ \fIEVENTLOG\fR\ \fIRECORD_NUMBER\fR
    183 .fam
     29eventlogadm [\fB\-d\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] \fB\-o\fR\ dump\ \fIEVENTLOG\fR\ \fIRECORD_NUMBER\fR
    18430.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    18531.PP
    … …  
    18834suite\&.
    18935.PP
    190 \FCeventlogadm\F[]
     36eventlogadm
    19137is a filter that accepts formatted event log records on standard input and writes them to the Samba event log store\&. Windows client can then manipulate these record using the usual administration tools\&.
    19238.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    19541.RS 4
    19642The
    197 \FC\-d\F[]
     43\-d
    19844option causes
    199 \FCeventlogadm\F[]
     45eventlogadm
    20046to emit debugging information\&.
    20147.RE
    20248.PP
    203 \fB\-o\fR \FCaddsource\F[] \fIEVENTLOG\fR \fISOURCENAME\fR \fIMSGFILE\fR
     49\fB\-o\fR addsource \fIEVENTLOG\fR \fISOURCENAME\fR \fIMSGFILE\fR
    20450.RS 4
    20551The
    206 \FC\-o addsource\F[]
     52\-o addsource
    20753option creates a new event log source\&.
    20854.RE
    20955.PP
    210 \fB\-o\fR \FCwrite\F[] \fIEVENTLOG\fR
     56\fB\-o\fR write \fIEVENTLOG\fR
    21157.RS 4
    21258The
    213 \FC\-o write\F[]
     59\-o write
    21460reads event log records from standard input and writes them to the Samba event log store named by EVENTLOG\&.
    21561.RE
    21662.PP
    217 \fB\-o\fR \FCdump\F[] \fIEVENTLOG\fR \fIRECORD_NUMBER\fR
     63\fB\-o\fR dump \fIEVENTLOG\fR \fIRECORD_NUMBER\fR
    21864.RS 4
    21965The
    220 \FC\-o dump\F[]
     66\-o dump
    22167reads event log records from a EVENTLOG tdb and dumps them to standard output on screen\&.
    22268.RE
    … …  
    22975.PP
    23076For the write operation,
    231 \FCeventlogadm\F[]
     77eventlogadm
    23278expects to be able to read structured records from standard input\&. These records are a sequence of lines, with the record key and data separated by a colon character\&. Records are separated by at least one or more blank line\&.
    23379.PP
    … …  
    24389.\}
    24490
    245 \FCLEN\F[]
     91LEN
    24692\- This field should be 0, since
    247 \FCeventlogadm\F[]
     93eventlogadm
    24894will calculate this value\&.
    24995.RE
    … …  
    258104.\}
    259105
    260 \FCRS1\F[]
     106RS1
    261107\- This must be the value 1699505740\&.
    262108.RE
    … …  
    271117.\}
    272118
    273 \FCRCN\F[]
     119RCN
    274120\- This field should be 0\&.
    275121.RE
    … …  
    284130.\}
    285131
    286 \FCTMG\F[]
     132TMG
    287133\- The time the eventlog record was generated; format is the number of seconds since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970, UTC\&.
    288134.RE
    … …  
    297143.\}
    298144
    299 \FCTMW\F[]
     145TMW
    300146\- The time the eventlog record was written; format is the number of seconds since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970, UTC\&.
    301147.RE
    … …  
    310156.\}
    311157
    312 \FCEID\F[]
     158EID
    313159\- The eventlog ID\&.
    314160.RE
    … …  
    323169.\}
    324170
    325 \FCETP\F[]
     171ETP
    326172\- The event type \-\- one of "INFO", "ERROR", "WARNING", "AUDIT SUCCESS" or "AUDIT FAILURE"\&.
    327173.RE
    … …  
    336182.\}
    337183
    338 \FCECT\F[]
     184ECT
    339185\- The event category; this depends on the message file\&. It is primarily used as a means of filtering in the eventlog viewer\&.
    340186.RE
    … …  
    349195.\}
    350196
    351 \FCRS2\F[]
     197RS2
    352198\- This field should be 0\&.
    353199.RE
    … …  
    362208.\}
    363209
    364 \FCCRN\F[]
     210CRN
    365211\- This field should be 0\&.
    366212.RE
    … …  
    375221.\}
    376222
    377 \FCUSL\F[]
     223USL
    378224\- This field should be 0\&.
    379225.RE
    … …  
    388234.\}
    389235
    390 \FCSRC\F[]
     236SRC
    391237\- This field contains the source name associated with the event log\&. If a message file is used with an event log, there will be a registry entry for associating this source name with a message file DLL\&.
    392238.RE
    … …  
    401247.\}
    402248
    403 \FCSRN\F[]
     249SRN
    404250\- The name of the machine on which the eventlog was generated\&. This is typically the host name\&.
    405251.RE
    … …  
    414260.\}
    415261
    416 \FCSTR\F[]
     262STR
    417263\- The text associated with the eventlog\&. There may be more than one string in a record\&.
    418264.RE
    … …  
    427273.\}
    428274
    429 \FCDAT\F[]
     275DAT
    430276\- This field should be left unset\&.
    431277.SH "EXAMPLES"
    432278.PP
    433279An example of the record format accepted by
    434 \FCeventlogadm\F[]:
    435 .sp
    436 .if n \{\
    437 .RS 4
    438 .\}
    439 .fam C
    440 .ps -1
     280eventlogadm:
     281.sp
     282.if n \{\
     283.RS 4
     284.\}
    441285.nf
    442 .if t \{\
    443 .sp -1
    444 .\}
    445 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    446 .sp -1
    447 
    448286        LEN: 0
    449287        RS1: 1699505740
    … …  
    462300        DAT:
    463301       
    464 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    465 .if t \{\
    466 .sp 1
    467 .\}
    468302.fi
    469 .fam
    470 .ps +1
    471303.if n \{\
    472304.RE
    … …  
    478310.RS 4
    479311.\}
    480 .fam C
    481 .ps -1
    482312.nf
    483 .if t \{\
    484 .sp -1
    485 .\}
    486 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    487 .sp -1
    488 
    489313        eventlogadm \-o addsource Application MyApplication | \e\e
    490314                %SystemRoot%/system32/MyApplication\&.dll
    491315       
    492 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    493 .if t \{\
    494 .sp 1
    495 .\}
    496316.fi
    497 .fam
    498 .ps +1
    499317.if n \{\
    500318.RE
    … …  
    506324.RS 4
    507325.\}
    508 .fam C
    509 .ps -1
    510326.nf
    511 .if t \{\
    512 .sp -1
    513 .\}
    514 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    515 .sp -1
    516 
    517327        tail \-f /var/log/messages | \e\e
    518328                my_program_to_parse_into_eventlog_records | \e\e
    519329                eventlogadm SystemLogEvents
    520330       
    521 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    522 .if t \{\
    523 .sp 1
    524 .\}
    525331.fi
    526 .fam
    527 .ps +1
    528332.if n \{\
    529333.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/findsmb.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: findsmb
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "FINDSMB" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "FINDSMB" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022findsmb \- list info about machines that respond to SMB name queries on a subnet
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCfindsmb\F[] [subnet\ broadcast\ address]
    175 .fam
     25findsmb [subnet\ broadcast\ address]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCfindsmb\F[]
     32findsmb
    18333is a perl script that prints out several pieces of information about machines on a subnet that respond to SMB name query requests\&. It uses
    18434\fBnmblookup\fR(1)
    … …  
    19141.RS 4
    19242Controls whether
    193 \FCfindsmb\F[]
     43findsmb
    19444takes bugs in Windows95 into account when trying to find a Netbios name registered of the remote machine\&. This option is disabled by default because it is specific to Windows 95 and Windows 95 machines only\&. If set,
    19545\fBnmblookup\fR(1)
    … …  
    20252.RS 4
    20353Without this option,
    204 \FCfindsmb \F[]
     54findsmb
    20555will probe the subnet of the machine where
    20656\fBfindsmb\fR(1)
    … …  
    21464.PP
    21565The output of
    216 \FCfindsmb\F[]
     66findsmb
    21767lists the following information for all machines that respond to the initial
    218 \FCnmblookup\F[]
     68nmblookup
    21969for any name: IP address, NetBIOS name, Workgroup name, operating system, and SMB server version\&.
    22070.PP
    … …  
    22676\fBnmbd\fR(8)
    22777running\&. If
    228 \FCnmbd\F[]
     78nmbd
    22979is running on the system, you will only get the IP address and the DNS name of the machine\&. To get proper responses from Windows 95 and Windows 98 machines, the command must be run as root and with
    23080\fB\-r\fR
    23181option on a machine without
    232 \FCnmbd\F[]
     82nmbd
    23383running\&.
    23484.PP
    23585For example, running
    236 \FCfindsmb\F[]
     86findsmb
    23787without
    23888\fB\-r\fR
    … …  
    24292.RS 4
    24393.\}
    244 .fam C
    245 .ps -1
    24694.nf
    247 .if t \{\
    248 .sp -1
    249 .\}
    250 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    251 .sp -1
    252 
    25395IP ADDR         NETBIOS NAME   WORKGROUP/OS/VERSION
    25496\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-
    … …  
    263105192\&.168\&.35\&.93   FROGSTAR\-PC    [MVENGR] [Windows 5\&.0] [Windows 2000 LAN Manager]
    264106192\&.168\&.35\&.97   HERBNT1       *[HERB\-NT] [Windows NT 4\&.0] [NT LAN Manager 4\&.0]
    265 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    266 .if t \{\
    267 .sp 1
    268 .\}
    269107.fi
    270 .fam
    271 .ps +1
    272108.if n \{\
    273109.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/idmap_ad.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: idmap_ad
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "IDMAP_AD" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "IDMAP_AD" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022idmap_ad \- Samba\'s idmap_ad Backend for Winbind
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    19042.RS 4
    19143.\}
    192 .fam C
    193 .ps -1
    19444.nf
    195 .if t \{\
    196 .sp -1
    197 .\}
    198 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    199 .sp -1
    200 
    20145        [global]
    20246        idmap backend = tdb
    … …  
    20751        idmap config CORP : range = 1000\-999999
    20852       
    209 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    210 .if t \{\
    211 .sp 1
    212 .\}
    21353.fi
    214 .fam
    215 .ps +1
    21654.if n \{\
    21755.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/idmap_adex.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: idmap_adex
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "IDMAP_ADEX" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "IDMAP_ADEX" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022idmap_adex \- Samba\'s idmap_adex Backend for Winbind
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    18638.RS 4
    18739.\}
    188 .fam C
    189 .ps -1
    19040.nf
    191 .if t \{\
    192 .sp -1
    193 .\}
    194 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    195 .sp -1
    196 
    19741        [global]
    19842        idmap backend = adex
    … …  
    20347        winbind normalize names = yes
    20448       
    205 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    206 .if t \{\
    207 .sp 1
    208 .\}
    20949.fi
    210 .fam
    211 .ps +1
    21250.if n \{\
    21351.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/idmap_hash.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: idmap_hash
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "IDMAP_HASH" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "IDMAP_HASH" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022idmap_hash \- Samba\'s idmap_hash Backend for Winbind
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    18739.RS 4
    18840.\}
    189 .fam C
    190 .ps -1
    19141.nf
    192 .if t \{\
    193 .sp -1
    194 .\}
    195 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    196 .sp -1
    197 
    19842        [global]
    19943        idmap backend = hash
    … …  
    20549        idmap_hash:name_map = /etc/samba/name_map\&.cfg
    20650       
    207 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    208 .if t \{\
    209 .sp 1
    210 .\}
    21151.fi
    212 .fam
    213 .ps +1
    21452.if n \{\
    21553.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/idmap_ldap.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: idmap_ldap
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "IDMAP_LDAP" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "IDMAP_LDAP" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022idmap_ldap \- Samba\'s idmap_ldap Backend for Winbind
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    22375.RS 4
    22476.\}
    225 .fam C
    226 .ps -1
    22777.nf
    228 .if t \{\
    229 .sp -1
    230 .\}
    231 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    232 .sp -1
    233 
    23478        [global]
    23579        idmap backend = ldap:ldap://localhost/
    … …  
    24185        idmap alloc config : ldap_base_dn = ou=idmap,dc=example,dc=com
    24286       
    243 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    244 .if t \{\
    245 .sp 1
    246 .\}
    24787.fi
    248 .fam
    249 .ps +1
    25088.if n \{\
    25189.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/idmap_nss.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: idmap_nss
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "IDMAP_NSS" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "IDMAP_NSS" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022idmap_nss \- Samba\'s idmap_nss Backend for Winbind
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    17931.RS 4
    18032.\}
    181 .fam C
    182 .ps -1
    18333.nf
    184 .if t \{\
    185 .sp -1
    186 .\}
    187 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    188 .sp -1
    189 
    19034        [global]
    19135        idmap backend = tdb
    … …  
    19640        idmap config SAMBA : range = 1000\-999999
    19741       
    198 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    199 .if t \{\
    200 .sp 1
    201 .\}
    20242.fi
    203 .fam
    204 .ps +1
    20543.if n \{\
    20644.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/idmap_rid.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: idmap_rid
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "IDMAP_RID" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "IDMAP_RID" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022idmap_rid \- Samba\'s idmap_rid Backend for Winbind
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    19244.RS 4
    19345.\}
    194 .fam C
    195 .ps -1
    19646.nf
    197 .if t \{\
    198 .sp -1
    199 .\}
    200 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    201 .sp -1
    202 
    20347                        ID = RID \- BASE_RID + LOW_RANGE_ID\&.
    20448               
    205 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    206 .if t \{\
    207 .sp 1
    208 .\}
    20949.fi
    210 .fam
    211 .ps +1
    21250.if n \{\
    21351.RE
    … …  
    21957.RS 4
    22058.\}
    221 .fam C
    222 .ps -1
    22359.nf
    224 .if t \{\
    225 .sp -1
    226 .\}
    227 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    228 .sp -1
    229 
    23060                        RID = ID + BASE_RID \- LOW_RANGE_ID\&.
    23161               
    232 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    233 .if t \{\
    234 .sp 1
    235 .\}
    23662.fi
    237 .fam
    238 .ps +1
    23963.if n \{\
    24064.RE
    … …  
    24872.RS 4
    24973.\}
    250 .fam C
    251 .ps -1
    25274.nf
    253 .if t \{\
    254 .sp -1
    255 .\}
    256 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    257 .sp -1
    258 
    25975        [global]
    26076        security = domain
    … …  
    27288        idmap config TRUSTED : base_rid = 1000
    27389       
    274 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    275 .if t \{\
    276 .sp 1
    277 .\}
    27890.fi
    279 .fam
    280 .ps +1
    28191.if n \{\
    28292.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/idmap_tdb.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: idmap_tdb
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "IDMAP_TDB" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "IDMAP_TDB" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022idmap_tdb \- Samba\'s idmap_tdb Backend for Winbind
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    19244.RS 4
    19345.\}
    194 .fam C
    195 .ps -1
    19646.nf
    197 .if t \{\
    198 .sp -1
    199 .\}
    200 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    201 .sp -1
    202 
    20347        [global]
    20448        # "idmap backend = tdb" is redundant here since it is the default
    … …  
    20751        idmap gid = 1000000\-2000000
    20852       
    209 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    210 .if t \{\
    211 .sp 1
    212 .\}
    21353.fi
    214 .fam
    215 .ps +1
    21654.if n \{\
    21755.RE
    … …  
    22361.RS 4
    22462.\}
    225 .fam C
    226 .ps -1
    22763.nf
    228 .if t \{\
    229 .sp -1
    230 .\}
    231 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    232 .sp -1
    233 
    23464        [global]
    23565        idmap backend = ldap
    … …  
    24272        idmap config DOM1 : range = 1000000\-2000000
    24373       
    244 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    245 .if t \{\
    246 .sp 1
    247 .\}
    24874.fi
    249 .fam
    250 .ps +1
    25175.if n \{\
    25276.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/idmap_tdb2.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: idmap_tdb2
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "IDMAP_TDB2" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "IDMAP_TDB2" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022idmap_tdb2 \- Samba\'s idmap_tdb2 Backend for Winbind
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    19345.RS 4
    19446.\}
    195 .fam C
    196 .ps -1
    19747.nf
    198 .if t \{\
    199 .sp -1
    200 .\}
    201 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    202 .sp -1
    203 
    20448        SIDTOID S\-1\-xxxx
    20549        IDTOSID UID xxxx
    20650        IDTOSID GID xxxx
    20751       
    208 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    209 .if t \{\
    210 .sp 1
    211 .\}
    21252.fi
    213 .fam
    214 .ps +1
    21553.if n \{\
    21654.RE
    … …  
    22260.RS 4
    22361.\}
    224 .fam C
    225 .ps -1
    22662.nf
    227 .if t \{\
    228 .sp -1
    229 .\}
    230 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    231 .sp -1
    232 
    23363        UID:yyyy
    23464        GID:yyyy
    … …  
    23666        ERR:yyyy
    23767       
    238 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    239 .if t \{\
    240 .sp 1
    241 .\}
    24268.fi
    243 .fam
    244 .ps +1
    24569.if n \{\
    24670.RE
    … …  
    25579.RS 4
    25680.\}
    257 .fam C
    258 .ps -1
    25981.nf
    260 .if t \{\
    261 .sp -1
    262 .\}
    263 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    264 .sp -1
    265 
    26682        [global]
    26783        idmap backend = tdb2
    … …  
    26985        idmap gid = 1000000\-2000000
    27086       
    271 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    272 .if t \{\
    273 .sp 1
    274 .\}
    27587.fi
    276 .fam
    277 .ps +1
    27888.if n \{\
    27989.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/ldb.3

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: ldb
    23.\"    Author: [see the "Author" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: C Library Functions
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "LDB" "3" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "C Library Functions"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "LDB" "3" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "C Library Functions"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022ldb \- A light\-weight database library
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .sp
    173 .fam C
    174 .ps -1
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
     24.sp
    17525.nf
    17626#include <ldb\&.h>
    17727.fi
    178 .fam
    179 .ps +1
    180 .SH "description"
     28.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    18129.PP
    18230ldb is a light weight embedded database library and API\&. With a programming interface that is very similar to LDAP, ldb can store its data either in a tdb(3) database or in a real LDAP database\&.
    … …  
    581429\fBldb_set_debug_stderr(3)\fR
    582430\- set a debug handler for stderr output
    583 .SH "Author"
     431.SH "AUTHOR"
    584432.PP
    585433ldb was written by

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/ldbadd.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: ldbadd
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "LDBADD" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "LDBADD" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022ldbadd \- Command\-line utility for adding records to an LDB
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCldbadd\F[] [\-h] [\-H\ LDB\-URL] [ldif\-file1] [ldif\-file2] [\&.\&.\&.]
    175 .fam
     25ldbadd [\-h] [\-H\ LDB\-URL] [ldif\-file1] [ldif\-file2] [\&.\&.\&.]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/ldbdel.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: ldbdel
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "LDBDEL" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "LDBDEL" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022ldbdel \- Command\-line program for deleting LDB records
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCldbdel\F[] [\-h] [\-H\ LDB\-URL] [dn] [\&.\&.\&.]
    175 .fam
     25ldbdel [\-h] [\-H\ LDB\-URL] [dn] [\&.\&.\&.]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/ldbedit.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: ldbedit
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "LDBEDIT" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "LDBEDIT" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022ldbedit \- Edit LDB databases using your preferred editor
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCldbedit\F[] [\-?] [\-\-usage] [\-s\ base|one|sub] [\-b\ basedn] [\-a] [\-e\ editor] [\-H\ LDB\-URL] [expression] [attributes...]
    175 .fam
     25ldbedit [\-?] [\-\-usage] [\-s\ base|one|sub] [\-b\ basedn] [\-a] [\-e\ editor] [\-H\ LDB\-URL] [expression] [attributes...]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/ldbmodify.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: ldbmodify
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "LDBMODIFY" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "LDBMODIFY" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022ldbmodify \- Modify records in a LDB database
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCldbmodify\F[] [\-H\ LDB\-URL] [ldif\-file]
    175 .fam
     25ldbmodify [\-H\ LDB\-URL] [ldif\-file]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/ldbrename.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: ldbrename
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "LDBRENAME" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "LDBRENAME" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022ldbrename \- Edit LDB databases using your favorite editor
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCldbrename\F[] [\-h] [\-o\ options] {olddn} {newdb}
    175 .fam
     25ldbrename [\-h] [\-o\ options] {olddn} {newdb}
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/ldbsearch.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: ldbsearch
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "LDBSEARCH" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "LDBSEARCH" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022ldbsearch \- Search for records in a LDB database
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCldbsearch\F[] [\-h] [\-s\ base|one|sub] [\-b\ basedn] [\-i] [\-H\ LDB\-URL] [expression] [attributes]
    175 .fam
     25ldbsearch [\-h] [\-s\ base|one|sub] [\-b\ basedn] [\-i] [\-H\ LDB\-URL] [expression] [attributes]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/libsmbclient.7

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: libsmbclient
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: 7
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "LIBSMBCLIENT" "7" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "7"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "LIBSMBCLIENT" "7" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "7"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022libsmbclient \- An extension library for browsers and that can be used as a generic browsing API\&.
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    17425.PP
    17526Browser URL:
    176 \FCsmb://[[[domain:]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]] [?options] \F[]
    177 .fam
     27smb://[[[domain:]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]] [?options]
    17828.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17929.PP
    … …  
    18333.PP
    18434
    185 \FClibsmbclient\F[]
     35libsmbclient
    18636is a library toolset that permits applications to manipulate CIFS/SMB network resources using many of the standards POSIX functions available for manipulating local UNIX/Linux files\&. It permits much more than just browsing, files can be opened and read or written, permissions changed, file times modified, attributes and ACL\'s can be manipulated, and so on\&. Of course, its functionality includes all the capabilities commonly called browsing\&.
    18737.PP
    18838
    189 \FClibsmbclient\F[]
     39libsmbclient
    19040can not be used directly from the command line, instead it provides an extension of the capabilities of tools such as file managers and browsers\&. This man page describes the configuration options for this tool so that the user may obtain greatest utility of use\&.
    19141.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    19848.sp
    19949The method of locating the list of workgroups (domains also) varies depending on the setting of the context variable
    200 \FC(context\->options\&.browse_max_lmb_count)\F[]\&. It is the responsibility of the application that calls this library to set this to a sensible value\&. This is a compile\-time option\&. This value determines the maximum number of local master browsers to query for the list of workgroups\&. In order to ensure that the list is complete for those present on the network, all master browsers must be querried\&. If there are a large number of workgroups on the network, the time spent querying will be significant\&. For small networks (just a few workgroups), it is suggested to set this value to 0, instructing libsmbclient to query all local master browsers\&. In an environment that has many workgroups a more reasonable setting may be around 3\&.
     50(context\->options\&.browse_max_lmb_count)\&. It is the responsibility of the application that calls this library to set this to a sensible value\&. This is a compile\-time option\&. This value determines the maximum number of local master browsers to query for the list of workgroups\&. In order to ensure that the list is complete for those present on the network, all master browsers must be querried\&. If there are a large number of workgroups on the network, the time spent querying will be significant\&. For small networks (just a few workgroups), it is suggested to set this value to 0, instructing libsmbclient to query all local master browsers\&. In an environment that has many workgroups a more reasonable setting may be around 3\&.
    20151.RE
    20252.PP
    … …  
    20757.PP
    20858When libsmbclient is invoked by an application it searches for a directory called
    209 \FC\&.smb\F[]
     59\&.smb
    21060in the $HOME directory that is specified in the users shell environment\&. It then searches for a file called
    211 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     61smb\&.conf
    21262which, if present, will fully over\-ride the system
    213 \FC/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\F[]
     63/etc/samba/smb\&.conf
    21464file\&. If instead libsmbclient finds a file called
    215 \FC~/\&.smb/smb\&.conf\&.append\F[], it will read the system
    216 \FC/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\F[]
     65~/\&.smb/smb\&.conf\&.append, it will read the system
     66/etc/samba/smb\&.conf
    21767and then append the contents of the
    218 \FC~/\&.smb/smb\&.conf\&.append\F[]
     68~/\&.smb/smb\&.conf\&.append
    21969to it\&.
    22070.PP
    22171
    222 \FClibsmbclient\F[]
     72libsmbclient
    22373will check the users shell environment for the
    224 \FCUSER\F[]
     74USER
    22575parameter and will use its value when if the
    226 \FCuser\F[]
     76user
    22777parameter was not included in the URL\&.
    22878.SH "PROGRAMMERS GUIDE"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/lmhosts.5

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: lmhosts
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: File Formats and Conventions
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "LMHOSTS" "5" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "File Formats and Conventions"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "LMHOSTS" "5" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "File Formats and Conventions"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022lmhosts \- The Samba NetBIOS hosts file
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17224.PP
    173 \FClmhosts\F[]
     25lmhosts
    17426is the
    17527\fBsamba\fR(7)
    … …  
    18133suite\&.
    18234.PP
    183 \FClmhosts\F[]
     35lmhosts
    18436is the
    18537\fISamba \fR
    18638NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file\&. It is very similar to the
    187 \FC/etc/hosts\F[]
     39/etc/hosts
    18840file format, except that the hostname component must correspond to the NetBIOS naming format\&.
    18941.SH "FILE FORMAT"
    … …  
    22173.RS 4
    22274.\}
    223 .fam C
    224 .ps -1
    22575.nf
    226 .if t \{\
    227 .sp -1
    228 .\}
    229 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    230 .sp -1
    231 
    23276#
    23377# Sample Samba lmhosts file\&.
    … …  
    23680192\&.9\&.200\&.20      NTSERVER#20
    23781192\&.9\&.200\&.21      SAMBASERVER
    238 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    239 .if t \{\
    240 .sp 1
    241 .\}
    24282.fi
    243 .fam
    244 .ps +1
    24583.if n \{\
    24684.RE
    … …  
    25290.PP
    25391The default location of the
    254 \FClmhosts\F[]
     92lmhosts
    25593file is in the same directory as the
    25694\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    … …  
    25997.PP
    26098lmhosts is loaded from the configuration directory\&. This is usually
    261 \FC/etc/samba\F[]
     99/etc/samba
    262100or
    263 \FC/usr/local/samba/lib\F[]\&.
     101/usr/local/samba/lib\&.
    264102.SH "VERSION"
    265103.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/log2pcap.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: log2pcap
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "LOG2PCAP" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "LOG2PCAP" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022log2pcap \- Extract network traces from Samba log files
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FClog2pcap\F[] [\-h] [\-q] [logfile] [pcap_file]
    175 .fam
     25log2pcap [\-h] [\-q] [logfile] [pcap_file]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FClog2pcap\F[]
     32log2pcap
    18333reads in a samba log file and generates a pcap file (readable by most sniffers, such as ethereal or tcpdump) based on the packet dumps in the log file\&.
    18434.PP
    … …  
    22777.RS 4
    22878.\}
    229 .fam C
    230 .ps -1
    23179.nf
    232 .if t \{\
    233 .sp -1
    234 .\}
    235 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    236 .sp -1
    237 
    238                         \FC$\F[] log2pcap < /var/log/* > trace\&.pcap
     80                        $ log2pcap < /var/log/* > trace\&.pcap
    23981       
    240 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    241 .if t \{\
    242 .sp 1
    243 .\}
    24482.fi
    245 .fam
    246 .ps +1
    24783.if n \{\
    24884.RE
    … …  
    25490.RS 4
    25591.\}
    256 .fam C
    257 .ps -1
    25892.nf
    259 .if t \{\
    260 .sp -1
    261 .\}
    262 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    263 .sp -1
    264 
    265         \FC$\F[] log2pcap \-h samba\&.log | text2pcap \-T 139,139 \- trace\&.pcap
     93        $ log2pcap \-h samba\&.log | text2pcap \-T 139,139 \- trace\&.pcap
    26694       
    267 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    268 .if t \{\
    269 .sp 1
    270 .\}
    27195.fi
    272 .fam
    273 .ps +1
    27496.if n \{\
    27597.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/mount.cifs.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: mount.cifs
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "MOUNT\&.CIFS" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "MOUNT\&.CIFS" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022mount.cifs \- mount using the Common Internet File System (CIFS)
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCmount\&.cifs\F[] {service} {mount\-point} [\-o\ options]
    175 .fam
     25mount\&.cifs {service} {mount\-point} [\-o\ options]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    21464.\}
    21565.RS 4
    216 .BM yellow
    21766.it 1 an-trap
    21867.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    23079\fIcred=\fR\&.
    23180.sp .5v
    232 .EM yellow
    23381.RE
    23482.RE
    … …  
    252100.RS 4
    253101.\}
    254 .fam C
    255 .ps -1
    256102.nf
    257 .if t \{\
    258 .sp -1
    259 .\}
    260 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    261 .sp -1
    262 
    263103                username=\fIvalue\fR
    264104                password=\fIvalue\fR
    265105                domain=\fIvalue\fR
    266 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    267 .if t \{\
    268 .sp 1
    269 .\}
    270106.fi
    271 .fam
    272 .ps +1
    273107.if n \{\
    274108.RE
    … …  
    276110.sp
    277111This is preferred over having passwords in plaintext in a shared file, such as
    278 \FC/etc/fstab\F[]\&. Be sure to protect any credentials file properly\&.
     112/etc/fstab\&. Be sure to protect any credentials file properly\&.
    279113.RE
    280114.PP
    … …  
    610444.PP
    611445The primary mechanism for making configuration changes and for reading debug information for the cifs vfs is via the Linux /proc filesystem\&. In the directory
    612 \FC/proc/fs/cifs\F[]
     446/proc/fs/cifs
    613447are various configuration files and pseudo files which can display debug information\&. There are additional startup options such as maximum buffer size and number of buffers which only may be set when the kernel cifs vfs (cifs\&.ko module) is loaded\&. These can be seen by running the modinfo utility against the file cifs\&.ko which will list the options that may be passed to cifs during module installation (device driver load)\&. For more information see the kernel file
    614 \FCfs/cifs/README\F[]\&.
     448fs/cifs/README\&.
    615449.SH "BUGS"
    616450.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/net.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: net
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "NET" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "NET" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022net \- Tool for administration of Samba and remote CIFS servers\&.
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCnet\F[] {<ads|rap|rpc>} [\-h] [\-w\ workgroup] [\-W\ myworkgroup] [\-U\ user] [\-I\ ip\-address] [\-p\ port] [\-n\ myname] [\-s\ conffile] [\-S\ server] [\-l] [\-P] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-V] [\-\-request\-timeout\ seconds]
    175 .fam
     25net {<ads|rap|rpc>} [\-h] [\-w\ workgroup] [\-W\ myworkgroup] [\-U\ user] [\-I\ ip\-address] [\-p\ port] [\-n\ myname] [\-s\ conffile] [\-S\ server] [\-l] [\-P] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-V] [\-\-request\-timeout\ seconds]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    21868\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    21969parameter in the
    220 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     70smb\&.conf
    22171file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in
    222 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&.
     72smb\&.conf\&.
    22373.RE
    22474.PP
    … …  
    22676.RS 4
    22777The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    228 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     78smb\&.conf
    22979for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    23080.RE
    … …  
    262112\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    263113parameter in the
    264 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     114smb\&.conf
    265115file\&.
    266116.RE
    … …  
    272122.PP
    273123The
    274 \FCNET TIME\F[]
     124NET TIME
    275125command allows you to view the time on a remote server or synchronise the time on the local server with the time on the remote server\&.
    276126.SS "TIME"
    277127.PP
    278128Without any options, the
    279 \FCNET TIME\F[]
     129NET TIME
    280130command displays the time on the remote server\&.
    281131.SS "TIME SYSTEM"
    282132.PP
    283133Displays the time on the remote server in a format ready for
    284 \FC/bin/date\F[]\&.
     134/bin/date\&.
    285135.SS "TIME SET"
    286136.PP
    287137Tries to set the date and time of the local server to that on the remote server using
    288 \FC/bin/date\F[]\&.
     138/bin/date\&.
    289139.SS "TIME ZONE"
    290140.PP
    … …  
    355205List files opened by specified
    356206\fIuser\fR\&. Please note that
    357 \FCnet rap file user\F[]
     207net rap file user
    358208does not work against Samba servers\&.
    359209.SS "SESSION"
    … …  
    389239.\}
    390240.RS 4
    391 .BM yellow
    392241.it 1 an-trap
    393242.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    401250Currently NOT implemented\&.
    402251.sp .5v
    403 .EM yellow
    404252.RE
    405253.SS "RAP GROUPMEMBER"
    … …  
    422270.\}
    423271.RS 4
    424 .BM yellow
    425272.it 1 an-trap
    426273.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    434281Currently NOT implemented\&.
    435282.sp .5v
    436 .EM yellow
    437283.RE
    438284.SS "RAP SERVICE"
    … …  
    444290.\}
    445291.RS 4
    446 .BM yellow
    447292.it 1 an-trap
    448293.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    456301Currently NOT implemented\&.
    457302.sp .5v
    458 .EM yellow
    459303.RE
    460304.SS "RAP SERVICE STOP"
    … …  
    465309.\}
    466310.RS 4
    467 .BM yellow
    468311.it 1 an-trap
    469312.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    477320Currently NOT implemented\&.
    478321.sp .5v
    479 .EM yellow
    480322.RE
    481323.SS "RAP PASSWORD \fIUSER\fR \fIOLDPASS\fR \fINEWPASS\fR"
    … …  
    635477.RS 4
    636478.\}
    637 .fam C
    638 .ps -1
    639479.nf
    640 .if t \{\
    641 .sp -1
    642 .\}
    643 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    644 .sp -1
    645 
    646480net groupmap add {rid=int|sid=string} unixgroup=string \e
    647481        [type={domain|local}] [ntgroup=string] [comment=string]
    648 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    649 .if t \{\
    650 .sp 1
    651 .\}
    652482.fi
    653 .fam
    654 .ps +1
    655483.if n \{\
    656484.RE
    … …  
    672500.RS 4
    673501.\}
    674 .fam C
    675 .ps -1
    676502.nf
    677 .if t \{\
    678 .sp -1
    679 .\}
    680 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    681 .sp -1
    682 
    683503net groupmap modify {ntgroup=string|sid=SID} [unixgroup=string] \e
    684504       [comment=string] [type={domain|local}]
    685 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    686 .if t \{\
    687 .sp 1
    688 .\}
    689505.fi
    690 .fam
    691 .ps +1
    692506.if n \{\
    693507.RE
    … …  
    721535\fB\'I\'\fR
    722536(interdomain trust account)\&. This is required for incoming trusts to work\&. It makes Samba be a trusted domain of the foreign (trusting) domain\&. Users of the Samba domain will be made available in the foreign domain\&. If the command is used against localhost it has the same effect as
    723 \FCsmbpasswd \-a \-i DOMAIN\F[]\&. Please note that both commands expect a appropriate UNIX account\&.
     537smbpasswd \-a \-i DOMAIN\&. Please note that both commands expect a appropriate UNIX account\&.
    724538.SS "RPC TRUSTDOM DEL DOMAIN"
    725539.PP
    726540Remove interdomain trust account for
    727541\fIDOMAIN\fR\&. If it is used against localhost it has the same effect as
    728 \FCsmbpasswd \-x DOMAIN$\F[]\&.
     542smbpasswd \-x DOMAIN$\&.
    729543.SS "RPC TRUSTDOM ESTABLISH DOMAIN"
    730544.PP
    … …  
    783597.PP
    784598Fetch domain SID and store it in the local
    785 \FCsecrets\&.tdb\F[]\&.
     599secrets\&.tdb\&.
    786600.SS "ADS LEAVE"
    787601.PP
    … …  
    790604.PP
    791605Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS\&. Prints out quite some debug info\&. Aimed at developers, regular users should use
    792 \FCNET ADS TESTJOIN\F[]\&.
     606NET ADS TESTJOIN\&.
    793607.SS "ADS PRINTER"
    794608.SS "ADS PRINTER INFO [PRINTER] [SERVER]"
    … …  
    13301144.PP
    13311145Execute a shell command under a global lock\&. This might be useful to define the order in which several shell commands will be executed\&. The locking information is stored in a file called
    1332 \FCg_lock\&.tdb\F[]\&. In setups with CTDB running, the locking information will be available on all cluster nodes\&.
     1146g_lock\&.tdb\&. In setups with CTDB running, the locking information will be available on all cluster nodes\&.
    13331147.sp
    13341148.RS 4

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/nmbd.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: nmbd
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "NMBD" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "NMBD" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022nmbd \- NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS over IP naming services to clients
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCnmbd\F[] [\-D] [\-F] [\-S] [\-a] [\-i] [\-o] [\-h] [\-V] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-H\ <lmhosts\ file>] [\-l\ <log\ directory>] [\-p\ <port\ number>] [\-s\ <configuration\ file>]
    175 .fam
     25nmbd [\-D] [\-F] [\-S] [\-a] [\-i] [\-o] [\-h] [\-V] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-H\ <lmhosts\ file>] [\-l\ <log\ directory>] [\-p\ <port\ number>] [\-s\ <configuration\ file>]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCnmbd\F[]
     32nmbd
    18333is a server that understands and can reply to NetBIOS over IP name service requests, like those produced by SMB/CIFS clients such as Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and LanManager clients\&. It also participates in the browsing protocols which make up the Windows "Network Neighborhood" view\&.
    18434.PP
    … …  
    18636.PP
    18737Amongst other services,
    188 \FCnmbd\F[]
     38nmbd
    18939will listen for such requests, and if its own NetBIOS name is specified it will respond with the IP number of the host it is running on\&. Its "own NetBIOS name" is by default the primary DNS name of the host it is running on, but this can be overridden by the
    19040\m[blue]\fBnetbios name\fR\m[]
    19141in
    192 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&. Thus
    193 \FCnmbd\F[]
     42smb\&.conf\&. Thus
     43nmbd
    19444will reply to broadcast queries for its own name(s)\&. Additional names for
    195 \FCnmbd\F[]
     45nmbd
    19646to respond on can be set via parameters in the
    19747\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    19848configuration file\&.
    19949.PP
    200 \FCnmbd\F[]
     50nmbd
    20151can also be used as a WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) server\&. What this basically means is that it will act as a WINS database server, creating a database from name registration requests that it receives and replying to queries from clients for these names\&.
    20252.PP
    20353In addition,
    204 \FCnmbd\F[]
     54nmbd
    20555can act as a WINS proxy, relaying broadcast queries from clients that do not understand how to talk the WINS protocol to a WINS server\&.
    20656.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    20959.RS 4
    21060If specified, this parameter causes
    211 \FCnmbd\F[]
     61nmbd
    21262to operate as a daemon\&. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port\&. By default,
    213 \FCnmbd\F[]
     63nmbd
    21464will operate as a daemon if launched from a command shell\&. nmbd can also be operated from the
    215 \FCinetd\F[]
     65inetd
    21666meta\-daemon, although this is not recommended\&.
    21767.RE
    … …  
    22070.RS 4
    22171If specified, this parameter causes the main
    222 \FCnmbd\F[]
     72nmbd
    22373process to not daemonize, i\&.e\&. double\-fork and disassociate with the terminal\&. Child processes are still created as normal to service each connection request, but the main process does not exit\&. This operation mode is suitable for running
    224 \FCnmbd\F[]
     74nmbd
    22575under process supervisors such as
    226 \FCsupervise\F[]
     76supervise
    22777and
    228 \FCsvscan\F[]
     78svscan
    22979from Daniel J\&. Bernstein\'s
    230 \FCdaemontools\F[]
     80daemontools
    23181package, or the AIX process monitor\&.
    23282.RE
    … …  
    23585.RS 4
    23686If specified, this parameter causes
    237 \FCnmbd\F[]
     87nmbd
    23888to log to standard output rather than a file\&.
    23989.RE
    … …  
    24292.RS 4
    24393If this parameter is specified it causes the server to run "interactively", not as a daemon, even if the server is executed on the command line of a shell\&. Setting this parameter negates the implicit daemon mode when run from the command line\&.
    244 \FCnmbd\F[]
     94nmbd
    24595also logs to standard output, as if the
    24696\fB\-S\fR
    … …  
    262112\fINOT\fR
    263113used by
    264 \FCnmbd\F[]
     114nmbd
    265115to answer any name queries\&. Adding a line to this file affects name NetBIOS resolution from this host
    266116\fIONLY\fR\&.
    267117.sp
    268118The default path to this file is compiled into Samba as part of the build process\&. Common defaults are
    269 \FC/usr/local/samba/lib/lmhosts\F[],
    270 \FC/usr/samba/lib/lmhosts\F[]
     119/usr/local/samba/lib/lmhosts,
     120/usr/samba/lib/lmhosts
    271121or
    272 \FC/etc/samba/lmhosts\F[]\&. See the
     122/etc/samba/lmhosts\&. See the
    273123\fBlmhosts\fR(5)
    274124man page for details on the contents of this file\&.
    … …  
    287137\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    288138parameter in the
    289 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     139smb\&.conf
    290140file\&.
    291141.RE
    … …  
    299149.RS 4
    300150The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    301 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     151smb\&.conf
    302152for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    303153.RE
    … …  
    313163.RS 4
    314164UDP port number is a positive integer value\&. This option changes the default UDP port number (normally 137) that
    315 \FCnmbd\F[]
     165nmbd
    316166responds to name queries on\&. Don\'t use this option unless you are an expert, in which case you won\'t need help!
    317167.RE
    318168.SH "FILES"
    319169.PP
    320 \FC/etc/inetd\&.conf\F[]
     170/etc/inetd\&.conf
    321171.RS 4
    322172If the server is to be run by the
    323 \FCinetd\F[]
     173inetd
    324174meta\-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta\-daemon\&.
    325175.RE
    326176.PP
    327 \FC/etc/rc\F[]
     177/etc/rc
    328178.RS 4
    329179or whatever initialization script your system uses)\&.
    … …  
    332182.RE
    333183.PP
    334 \FC/etc/services\F[]
     184/etc/services
    335185.RS 4
    336186If running the server via the meta\-daemon
    337 \FCinetd\F[], this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios\-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&.
    338 .RE
    339 .PP
    340 \FC/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\F[]
     187inetd, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios\-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&.
     188.RE
     189.PP
     190/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf
    341191.RS 4
    342192This is the default location of the
    343193\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    344194server configuration file\&. Other common places that systems install this file are
    345 \FC/usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\F[]
     195/usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf
    346196and
    347 \FC/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\F[]\&.
     197/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\&.
    348198.sp
    349199When run as a WINS server (see the
    … …  
    352202\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    353203man page),
    354 \FCnmbd\F[]
     204nmbd
    355205will store the WINS database in the file
    356 \FCwins\&.dat\F[]
     206wins\&.dat
    357207in the
    358 \FCvar/locks\F[]
     208var/locks
    359209directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself\&.
    360210.sp
    361211If
    362 \FCnmbd\F[]
     212nmbd
    363213is acting as a
    364214\fI browse master\fR
    … …  
    368218\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    369219man page,
    370 \FCnmbd\F[]
     220nmbd
    371221will store the browsing database in the file
    372 \FCbrowse\&.dat \F[]
     222browse\&.dat
    373223in the
    374 \FCvar/locks\F[]
     224var/locks
    375225directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself\&.
    376226.RE
    … …  
    378228.PP
    379229To shut down an
    380 \FCnmbd\F[]
     230nmbd
    381231process it is recommended that SIGKILL (\-9)
    382232\fINOT\fR
    383233be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the name database in an inconsistent state\&. The correct way to terminate
    384 \FCnmbd\F[]
     234nmbd
    385235is to send it a SIGTERM (\-15) signal and wait for it to die on its own\&.
    386236.PP
    387 \FCnmbd\F[]
     237nmbd
    388238will accept SIGHUP, which will cause it to dump out its namelists into the file
    389 \FCnamelist\&.debug \F[]
     239namelist\&.debug
    390240in the
    391 \FC/usr/local/samba/var/locks\F[]
     241/usr/local/samba/var/locks
    392242directory (or the
    393 \FCvar/locks\F[]
     243var/locks
    394244directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself)\&. This will also cause
    395 \FCnmbd\F[]
     245nmbd
    396246to dump out its server database in the
    397 \FClog\&.nmb\F[]
     247log\&.nmb
    398248file\&.
    399249.PP
    … …  
    413263\fBtestparm\fR(1),
    414264\fBtestprns\fR(1), and the Internet RFC\'s
    415 \FCrfc1001\&.txt\F[],
    416 \FCrfc1002\&.txt\F[]\&. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page
     265rfc1001\&.txt,
     266rfc1002\&.txt\&. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page
    417267http://samba\&.org/cifs/\&.
    418268.SH "AUTHOR"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/nmblookup.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: nmblookup
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "NMBLOOKUP" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "NMBLOOKUP" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022nmblookup \- NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS names
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCnmblookup\F[] [\-M] [\-R] [\-S] [\-r] [\-A] [\-h] [\-B\ <broadcast\ address>] [\-U\ <unicast\ address>] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-i\ <NetBIOS\ scope>] [\-T] [\-f] {name}
    175 .fam
     25nmblookup [\-M] [\-R] [\-S] [\-r] [\-A] [\-h] [\-B\ <broadcast\ address>] [\-U\ <unicast\ address>] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-i\ <NetBIOS\ scope>] [\-T] [\-f] {name}
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCnmblookup\F[]
     32nmblookup
    18333is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP addresses in a network using NetBIOS over TCP/IP queries\&. The options allow the name queries to be directed at a particular IP broadcast area or to a particular machine\&. All queries are done over UDP\&.
    18434.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    22575\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    22676parameter in the
    227 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     77smb\&.conf
    22878file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in
    229 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&.
     79smb\&.conf\&.
    23080.RE
    23181.PP
    … …  
    23383.RS 4
    23484This specifies a NetBIOS scope that
    235 \FCnmblookup\F[]
     85nmblookup
    23686will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names\&. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001\&.txt and rfc1002\&.txt\&. NetBIOS scopes are
    23787\fIvery\fR
    … …  
    24797.RS 4
    24898TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the
    249 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     99smb\&.conf
    250100manual page for the list of valid options\&.
    251101.RE
    … …  
    285135\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    286136parameter in the
    287 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     137smb\&.conf
    288138file\&.
    289139.RE
    … …  
    297147.RS 4
    298148The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    299 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     149smb\&.conf
    300150for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    301151.RE
    … …  
    328178.SH "EXAMPLES"
    329179.PP
    330 \FCnmblookup\F[]
     180nmblookup
    331181can be used to query a WINS server (in the same way
    332 \FCnslookup\F[]
     182nslookup
    333183is used to query DNS servers)\&. To query a WINS server,
    334 \FCnmblookup\F[]
     184nmblookup
    335185must be called like this:
    336186.PP
    337 \FCnmblookup \-U server \-R \'name\'\F[]
     187nmblookup \-U server \-R \'name\'
    338188.PP
    339189For example, running :
    340190.PP
    341 \FCnmblookup \-U samba\&.org \-R \'IRIX#1B\'\F[]
     191nmblookup \-U samba\&.org \-R \'IRIX#1B\'
    342192.PP
    343193would query the WINS server samba\&.org for the domain master browser (1B name type) for the IRIX workgroup\&.

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: ntlm_auth
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "NTLM_AUTH" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "NTLM_AUTH" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022ntlm_auth \- tool to allow external access to Winbind\'s NTLM authentication function
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCntlm_auth\F[] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-l\ logdir] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>]
    175 .fam
     25ntlm_auth [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-l\ logdir] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCntlm_auth\F[]
     32ntlm_auth
    18333is a helper utility that authenticates users using NT/LM authentication\&. It returns 0 if the users is authenticated successfully and 1 if access was denied\&. ntlm_auth uses winbind to access the user and authentication data for a domain\&. This utility is only intended to be used by other programs (currently
    18434Squid
    … …  
    19242.PP
    19343Some of these commands also require access to the directory
    194 \FCwinbindd_privileged\F[]
     44winbindd_privileged
    19545in
    196 \FC$LOCKDIR\F[]\&. This should be done either by running this command as root or providing group access to the
    197 \FCwinbindd_privileged\F[]
     46$LOCKDIR\&. This should be done either by running this command as root or providing group access to the
     47winbindd_privileged
    19848directory\&. For security reasons, this directory should not be world\-accessable\&.
    19949.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    21868.sp
    21969Requires access to the directory
    220 \FCwinbindd_privileged\F[]
     70winbindd_privileged
    22171in
    222 \FC$LOCKDIR\F[]\&. The protocol used is described here:
     72$LOCKDIR\&. The protocol used is described here:
    22373http://devel\&.squid\-cache\&.org/ntlm/squid_helper_protocol\&.html\&. This protocol has been extended to allow the NTLMSSP Negotiate packet to be included as an argument to the
    224 \FCYR\F[]
     74YR
    22575command\&. (Thus avoiding loss of information in the protocol exchange)\&.
    22676.RE
    … …  
    23181.sp
    23282This helper is a client, and as such may be run by any user\&. The protocol used is effectively the reverse of the previous protocol\&. A
    233 \FCYR\F[]
     83YR
    23484command (without any arguments) starts the authentication exchange\&.
    23585.RE
    … …  
    23888.RS 4
    23989Server\-side helper that implements GSS\-SPNEGO\&. This uses a protocol that is almost the same as
    240 \FCsquid\-2\&.5\-ntlmssp\F[], but has some subtle differences that are undocumented outside the source at this stage\&.
     90squid\-2\&.5\-ntlmssp, but has some subtle differences that are undocumented outside the source at this stage\&.
    24191.sp
    24292Requires access to the directory
    243 \FCwinbindd_privileged\F[]
     93winbindd_privileged
    24494in
    245 \FC$LOCKDIR\F[]\&.
     95$LOCKDIR\&.
    24696.RE
    24797.PP
    … …  
    256106.sp
    257107This protocol consists of lines in the form:
    258 \FCParameter: value\F[]
     108Parameter: value
    259109and
    260 \FCParameter:: Base64\-encode value\F[]\&. The presence of a single period
    261 \FC\&.\F[]
     110Parameter:: Base64\-encode value\&. The presence of a single period
     111\&.
    262112indicates that one side has finished supplying data to the other\&. (Which in turn could cause the helper to authenticate the user)\&.
    263113.sp
    … …  
    293143.RS 4
    294144The 8 byte
    295 \FCLANMAN Challenge\F[]
     145LANMAN Challenge
    296146value, generated randomly by the server, or (in cases such as MSCHAPv2) generated in some way by both the server and the client\&.
    297147.PP \fBExample\ \&7.\ \&\fR LANMAN\-Challege: 0102030405060708
    … …  
    301151.RS 4
    302152The 24 byte
    303 \FCLANMAN Response\F[]
     153LANMAN Response
    304154value, calculated from the user\'s password and the supplied
    305 \FCLANMAN Challenge\F[]\&. Typically, this is provided over the network by a client wishing to authenticate\&.
     155LANMAN Challenge\&. Typically, this is provided over the network by a client wishing to authenticate\&.
    306156.PP \fBExample\ \&8.\ \&\fR LANMAN\-Response: 0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718
    307157.RE
    … …  
    310160.RS 4
    311161The >= 24 byte
    312 \FCNT Response\F[]
     162NT Response
    313163calculated from the user\'s password and the supplied
    314 \FCLANMAN Challenge\F[]\&. Typically, this is provided over the network by a client wishing to authenticate\&.
     164LANMAN Challenge\&. Typically, this is provided over the network by a client wishing to authenticate\&.
    315165.PP \fBExample\ \&9.\ \&\fR NT\-Response: 0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718
    316166.RE
    … …  
    338188.\}
    339189.RS 4
    340 .BM yellow
    341190.it 1 an-trap
    342191.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    351200                a newline\&.  They may also need to decode strings from
    352201                the helper, which likewise may have been base64 encoded\&..sp .5v
    353 .EM yellow
    354202.RE
    355203.RE
    … …  
    408256.RS 4
    409257Perform Diagnostics on the authentication chain\&. Uses the password from
    410 \FC\-\-password\F[]
     258\-\-password
    411259or prompts for one\&.
    412260.RE
    … …  
    429277\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    430278parameter in the
    431 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     279smb\&.conf
    432280file\&.
    433281.RE
    … …  
    441289.RS 4
    442290The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    443 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     291smb\&.conf
    444292for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    445293.RE
    … …  
    459307.PP
    460308To setup ntlm_auth for use by squid 2\&.5, with both basic and NTLMSSP authentication, the following should be placed in the
    461 \FCsquid\&.conf\F[]
     309squid\&.conf
    462310file\&.
    463311.sp
    … …  
    465313.RS 4
    466314.\}
    467 .fam C
    468 .ps -1
    469315.nf
    470 .if t \{\
    471 .sp -1
    472 .\}
    473 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    474 .sp -1
    475 
    476316auth_param ntlm program ntlm_auth \-\-helper\-protocol=squid\-2\&.5\-ntlmssp
    477317auth_param basic program ntlm_auth \-\-helper\-protocol=squid\-2\&.5\-basic
    … …  
    479319auth_param basic realm Squid proxy\-caching web server
    480320auth_param basic credentialsttl 2 hours
    481 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    482 .if t \{\
    483 .sp 1
    484 .\}
    485321.fi
    486 .fam
    487 .ps +1
    488 .if n \{\
    489 .RE
    490 .\}
    491 .if n \{\
    492 .sp
    493 .\}
    494 .RS 4
    495 .BM yellow
     322.if n \{\
     323.RE
     324.\}
     325.if n \{\
     326.sp
     327.\}
     328.RS 4
    496329.it 1 an-trap
    497330.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    504337.PP
    505338This example assumes that ntlm_auth has been installed into your path, and that the group permissions on
    506 \FCwinbindd_privileged\F[]
     339winbindd_privileged
    507340are as described above\&.
    508341.sp .5v
    509 .EM yellow
    510342.RE
    511343.PP
    512344To setup ntlm_auth for use by squid 2\&.5 with group limitation in addition to the above example, the following should be added to the
    513 \FCsquid\&.conf\F[]
     345squid\&.conf
    514346file\&.
    515347.sp
    … …  
    517349.RS 4
    518350.\}
    519 .fam C
    520 .ps -1
    521351.nf
    522 .if t \{\
    523 .sp -1
    524 .\}
    525 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    526 .sp -1
    527 
    528352auth_param ntlm program ntlm_auth \-\-helper\-protocol=squid\-2\&.5\-ntlmssp \-\-require\-membership\-of=\'WORKGROUP\eDomain Users\'
    529353auth_param basic program ntlm_auth \-\-helper\-protocol=squid\-2\&.5\-basic \-\-require\-membership\-of=\'WORKGROUP\eDomain Users\'
    530 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    531 .if t \{\
    532 .sp 1
    533 .\}
    534354.fi
    535 .fam
    536 .ps +1
    537355.if n \{\
    538356.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/pam_winbind.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: pam_winbind
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: 8
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "PAM_WINBIND" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "8"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "PAM_WINBIND" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "8"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022pam_winbind \- PAM module for Winbind
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    18335.RS 4
    18436.\}
    185 .fam C
    186 .ps -1
    18737.nf
    188 .if t \{\
    189 .sp -1
    190 .\}
    191 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    192 .sp -1
    193 
    19438                            \&.\&.\&.
    19539                            auth      required        pam_env\&.so
    … …  
    20549                            \&.\&.\&.
    20650               
    207 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    208 .if t \{\
    209 .sp 1
    210 .\}
    21151.fi
    212 .fam
    213 .ps +1
    21452.if n \{\
    21553.RE
    … …  
    22058.PP
    22159pam_winbind supports several options which can either be set in the PAM configuration files or in the pam_winbind configuration file situated at
    222 \FC/etc/security/pam_winbind\&.conf\F[]\&. Options from the PAM configuration file take precedence to those from the configuration file\&. See
     60/etc/security/pam_winbind\&.conf\&. Options from the PAM configuration file take precedence to those from the configuration file\&. See
    22361\fBpam_winbind.conf\fR(5)
    22462for further details\&.
    … …  
    24078or
    24179\fIMYDOMAIN\e\emyuser\fR\&. pam_winbind will, in that case, lookup the SID internally\&. Note that NAME may not contain any spaces\&. It is thus recommended to only use SIDs\&. You can verify the list of SIDs a user is a member of with
    242 \FCwbinfo \-\-user\-sids=SID\F[]\&.
     80wbinfo \-\-user\-sids=SID\&.
    24381.RE
    24482.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/pam_winbind.conf.5

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: pam_winbind.conf
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: 5
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.6
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "PAM_WINBIND\&.CONF" "5" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.6" "5"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "PAM_WINBIND\&.CONF" "5" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.6" "5"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022pam_winbind.conf \- Configuration file of PAM module for Winbind
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    18436.PP
    18537pam_winbind supports several options which can either be set in the PAM configuration files or in the pam_winbind configuration file situated at
    186 \FC/etc/security/pam_winbind\&.conf\F[]\&. Options from the PAM configuration file take precedence to those from the pam_winbind\&.conf configuration file\&.
     38/etc/security/pam_winbind\&.conf\&. Options from the PAM configuration file take precedence to those from the pam_winbind\&.conf configuration file\&.
    18739.PP
    18840debug = yes|no
    … …  
    20254or
    20355\fIMYDOMAIN\e\emyuser\fR\&. pam_winbind will, in that case, lookup the SID internally\&. Note that NAME may not contain any spaces\&. It is thus recommended to only use SIDs\&. You can verify the list of SIDs a user is a member of with
    204 \FCwbinfo \-\-user\-sids=SID\F[]\&. This setting is empty by default\&.
     56wbinfo \-\-user\-sids=SID\&. This setting is empty by default\&.
    20557.RE
    20658.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/pdbedit.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: pdbedit
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "PDBEDIT" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "PDBEDIT" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022pdbedit \- manage the SAM database (Database of Samba Users)
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCpdbedit\F[] [\-a] [\-b\ passdb\-backend] [\-c\ account\-control] [\-C\ value] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-D\ drive] [\-e\ passdb\-backend] [\-f\ fullname] [\-\-force\-initialized\-passwords] [\-g] [\-h\ homedir] [\-i\ passdb\-backend] [\-I\ domain] [\-K] [\-L] [\-m] [\-M\ SID|RID] [\-N\ description] [\-P\ account\-policy] [\-p\ profile] [\-\-policies\-reset] [\-r] [\-s\ configfile] [\-S\ script] [\-t] [\-\-time\-format] [\-u\ username] [\-U\ SID|RID] [\-v] [\-V] [\-w] [\-x] [\-y] [\-z] [\-Z]
    175 .fam
     25pdbedit [\-a] [\-b\ passdb\-backend] [\-c\ account\-control] [\-C\ value] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-D\ drive] [\-e\ passdb\-backend] [\-f\ fullname] [\-\-force\-initialized\-passwords] [\-g] [\-h\ homedir] [\-i\ passdb\-backend] [\-I\ domain] [\-K] [\-L] [\-m] [\-M\ SID|RID] [\-N\ description] [\-P\ account\-policy] [\-p\ profile] [\-\-policies\-reset] [\-r] [\-s\ configfile] [\-S\ script] [\-t] [\-\-time\-format] [\-u\ username] [\-U\ SID|RID] [\-v] [\-V] [\-w] [\-x] [\-y] [\-z] [\-Z]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    19242.sp
    19343Example:
    194 \FCpdbedit \-L\F[]
    195 .sp
    196 .if n \{\
    197 .RS 4
    198 .\}
    199 .fam C
    200 .ps -1
     44pdbedit \-L
     45.sp
     46.if n \{\
     47.RS 4
     48.\}
    20149.nf
    202 .if t \{\
    203 .sp -1
    204 .\}
    205 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    206 .sp -1
    207 
    20850sorce:500:Simo Sorce
    20951samba:45:Test User
    210 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    211 .if t \{\
    212 .sp 1
    213 .\}
    21452.fi
    215 .fam
    216 .ps +1
    21753.if n \{\
    21854.RE
    … …  
    22561.sp
    22662Example:
    227 \FCpdbedit \-L \-v\F[]
    228 .sp
    229 .if n \{\
    230 .RS 4
    231 .\}
    232 .fam C
    233 .ps -1
     63pdbedit \-L \-v
     64.sp
     65.if n \{\
     66.RS 4
     67.\}
    23468.nf
    235 .if t \{\
    236 .sp -1
    237 .\}
    238 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    239 .sp -1
    240 
    24169\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-
    24270username:       sorce
    … …  
    25785Logon Script:   
    25886Profile Path:   \e\eBERSERKER\eprofile
    259 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    260 .if t \{\
    261 .sp 1
    262 .\}
    26387.fi
    264 .fam
    265 .ps +1
    26688.if n \{\
    26789.RE
    … …  
    27294.RS 4
    27395This option sets the "smbpasswd" listing format\&. It will make pdbedit list the users in the database, printing out the account fields in a format compatible with the
    274 \FCsmbpasswd\F[]
     96smbpasswd
    27597file format\&. (see the
    27698\fBsmbpasswd\fR(5)
    … …  
    278100.sp
    279101Example:
    280 \FCpdbedit \-L \-w\F[]
    281 .sp
    282 .if n \{\
    283 .RS 4
    284 .\}
    285 .fam C
    286 .ps -1
     102pdbedit \-L \-w
     103.sp
     104.if n \{\
     105.RS 4
     106.\}
    287107.nf
    288 .if t \{\
    289 .sp -1
    290 .\}
    291 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    292 .sp -1
    293 
    294108sorce:500:508818B733CE64BEAAD3B435B51404EE:
    295109          D2A2418EFC466A8A0F6B1DBB5C3DB80C:
    … …  
    298112          BC281CE3F53B6A5146629CD4751D3490:
    299113          [UX         ]:LCT\-3BFA1E8D:
    300 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    301 .if t \{\
    302 .sp 1
    303 .\}
    304114.fi
    305 .fam
    306 .ps +1
    307115.if n \{\
    308116.RE
    … …  
    324132.sp
    325133Example:
    326 \FC\-f "Simo Sorce"\F[]
     134\-f "Simo Sorce"
    327135.RE
    328136.PP
    … …  
    332140.sp
    333141Example:
    334 \FC\-h "\e\e\e\eBERSERKER\e\esorce"\F[]
     142\-h "\e\e\e\eBERSERKER\e\esorce"
    335143.RE
    336144.PP
    … …  
    340148.sp
    341149Example:
    342 \FC\-D "H:"\F[]
     150\-D "H:"
    343151.RE
    344152.PP
    … …  
    348156.sp
    349157Example:
    350 \FC\-S "\e\e\e\eBERSERKER\e\enetlogon\e\esorce\&.bat"\F[]
     158\-S "\e\e\e\eBERSERKER\e\enetlogon\e\esorce\&.bat"
    351159.RE
    352160.PP
    … …  
    356164.sp
    357165Example:
    358 \FC\-p "\e\e\e\eBERSERKER\e\enetlogon"\F[]
     166\-p "\e\e\e\eBERSERKER\e\enetlogon"
    359167.RE
    360168.PP
    … …  
    364172.sp
    365173Example:
    366 \FC\-M S\-1\-5\-21\-2447931902\-1787058256\-3961074038\-1201\F[]
     174\-M S\-1\-5\-21\-2447931902\-1787058256\-3961074038\-1201
    367175.RE
    368176.PP
    … …  
    372180.sp
    373181Example:
    374 \FC\-U S\-1\-5\-21\-2447931902\-1787058256\-3961074038\-5004\F[]
    375 .sp
    376 Example:
    377 \FC\'\-\-user SID\' S\-1\-5\-21\-2447931902\-1787058256\-3961074038\-5004\F[]
    378 .sp
    379 Example:
    380 \FC\-U 5004\F[]
    381 .sp
    382 Example:
    383 \FC\'\-\-user SID\' 5004\F[]
     182\-U S\-1\-5\-21\-2447931902\-1787058256\-3961074038\-5004
     183.sp
     184Example:
     185\'\-\-user SID\' S\-1\-5\-21\-2447931902\-1787058256\-3961074038\-5004
     186.sp
     187Example:
     188\-U 5004
     189.sp
     190Example:
     191\'\-\-user SID\' 5004
    384192.RE
    385193.PP
    … …  
    513321.sp
    514322Example:
    515 \FC\-c "[X ]"\F[]
     323\-c "[X ]"
    516324.RE
    517325.PP
    … …  
    521329.sp
    522330Example:
    523 \FCpdbedit \-K never user\F[]
     331pdbedit \-K never user
    524332.RE
    525333.PP
    … …  
    529337.sp
    530338Example:
    531 \FCpdbedit \-a \-u sorce\F[]
    532 .sp
    533 .if n \{\
    534 .RS 4
    535 .\}
    536 .fam C
    537 .ps -1
     339pdbedit \-a \-u sorce
     340.sp
     341.if n \{\
     342.RS 4
     343.\}
    538344.nf
    539 .BB lightgray
    540345new password:
    541346retype new password
    542 .EB lightgray
    543347.fi
    544 .fam
    545 .ps +1
    546 .if n \{\
    547 .RE
    548 .\}
    549 .sp
    550 .if n \{\
    551 .sp
    552 .\}
    553 .RS 4
    554 .BM yellow
     348.if n \{\
     349.RE
     350.\}
     351.sp
     352.if n \{\
     353.sp
     354.\}
     355.RS 4
    555356.it 1 an-trap
    556357.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    566367.sp
    567368If you wish to add a user and synchronise the password that immediately, use
    568 \FCsmbpasswd\F[]\'s
     369smbpasswd\'s
    569370\fB\-a\fR
    570371option\&.
    571372.sp .5v
    572 .EM yellow
    573373.RE
    574374.RE
    … …  
    577377.RS 4
    578378This option causes pdbedit to read the password from standard input, rather than from /dev/tty (like the
    579 \FCpasswd(1)\F[]
     379passwd(1)
    580380program does)\&. The password has to be submitted twice and terminated by a newline each\&.
    581381.RE
    … …  
    593393.sp
    594394Example:
    595 \FCpdbedit \-a \-m \-u w2k\-wks\F[]
     395pdbedit \-a \-m \-u w2k\-wks
    596396.RE
    597397.PP
    … …  
    601401.sp
    602402Example:
    603 \FCpdbedit \-x \-u bob\F[]
     403pdbedit \-x \-u bob
    604404.RE
    605405.PP
    … …  
    611411.sp
    612412Example:
    613 \FCpdbedit \-i smbpasswd:/etc/smbpasswd\&.old \F[]
     413pdbedit \-i smbpasswd:/etc/smbpasswd\&.old
    614414.RE
    615415.PP
    … …  
    621421.sp
    622422Example:
    623 \FCpdbedit \-e smbpasswd:/root/samba\-users\&.backup\F[]
     423pdbedit \-e smbpasswd:/root/samba\-users\&.backup
    624424.RE
    625425.PP
    … …  
    639439.sp
    640440Example:
    641 \FCpdbedit \-b xml:/root/pdb\-backup\&.xml \-l\F[]
     441pdbedit \-b xml:/root/pdb\-backup\&.xml \-l
    642442.RE
    643443.PP
    … …  
    649449.sp
    650450Example:
    651 \FCpdbedit \-P "bad lockout attempt"\F[]
    652 .sp
    653 .if n \{\
    654 .RS 4
    655 .\}
    656 .fam C
    657 .ps -1
     451pdbedit \-P "bad lockout attempt"
     452.sp
     453.if n \{\
     454.RS 4
     455.\}
    658456.nf
    659 .if t \{\
    660 .sp -1
    661 .\}
    662 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    663 .sp -1
    664 
    665457account policy value for bad lockout attempt is 0
    666 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    667 .if t \{\
    668 .sp 1
    669 .\}
    670458.fi
    671 .fam
    672 .ps +1
    673459.if n \{\
    674460.RE
    … …  
    683469.sp
    684470Example:
    685 \FCpdbedit \-P "bad lockout attempt" \-C 3\F[]
    686 .sp
    687 .if n \{\
    688 .RS 4
    689 .\}
    690 .fam C
    691 .ps -1
     471pdbedit \-P "bad lockout attempt" \-C 3
     472.sp
     473.if n \{\
     474.RS 4
     475.\}
    692476.nf
    693 .if t \{\
    694 .sp -1
    695 .\}
    696 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    697 .sp -1
    698 
    699477account policy value for bad lockout attempt was 0
    700478account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3
    701 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    702 .if t \{\
    703 .sp 1
    704 .\}
    705479.fi
    706 .fam
    707 .ps +1
    708480.if n \{\
    709481.RE
    … …  
    721493.sp
    722494Example:
    723 \FCpdbedit \-y \-i tdbsam: \-e ldapsam:ldap://my\&.ldap\&.host\F[]
     495pdbedit \-y \-i tdbsam: \-e ldapsam:ldap://my\&.ldap\&.host
    724496.RE
    725497.PP
    … …  
    734506.sp
    735507Example:
    736 \FC\-N "test description"\F[]
     508\-N "test description"
    737509.RE
    738510.PP
    … …  
    742514.sp
    743515Example:
    744 \FC\-Z\F[]
     516\-Z
    745517.RE
    746518.PP
    … …  
    750522.sp
    751523Example:
    752 \FC\-z\F[]
     524\-z
    753525.RE
    754526.PP
    … …  
    758530.sp
    759531Example:
    760 \FC\-\-policies\-reset\F[]
     532\-\-policies\-reset
    761533.RE
    762534.PP
    … …  
    766538.sp
    767539Example:
    768 \FC\-I "MYDOMAIN"\F[]
     540\-I "MYDOMAIN"
    769541.RE
    770542.PP
    … …  
    791563\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    792564parameter in the
    793 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     565smb\&.conf
    794566file\&.
    795567.RE
    … …  
    803575.RS 4
    804576The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    805 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     577smb\&.conf
    806578for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    807579.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/profiles.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: profiles
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "PROFILES" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "PROFILES" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022profiles \- A utility to report and change SIDs in registry files
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCprofiles\F[] [\-v] [\-c\ SID] [\-n\ SID] {file}
    175 .fam
     25profiles [\-v] [\-c\ SID] [\-n\ SID] {file}
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCprofiles\F[]
     32profiles
    18333is a utility that reports and changes SIDs in windows registry files\&. It currently only supports NT\&.
    18434.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    19747.RS 4
    19848Change all occurences of SID1 in
    199 \FCfile\F[]
     49file
    20050by SID2\&.
    20151.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/rpcclient.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: rpcclient
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "RPCCLIENT" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "RPCCLIENT" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022rpcclient \- tool for executing client side MS\-RPC functions
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCrpcclient\F[] [\-A\ authfile] [\-c\ <command\ string>] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-h] [\-l\ logdir] [\-N] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-U\ username[%password]] [\-W\ workgroup] [\-I\ destinationIP] {server}
    175 .fam
     25rpcclient [\-A\ authfile] [\-c\ <command\ string>] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-h] [\-l\ logdir] [\-N] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-U\ username[%password]] [\-W\ workgroup] [\-I\ destinationIP] {server}
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCrpcclient\F[]
     32rpcclient
    18333is a utility initially developed to test MS\-RPC functionality in Samba itself\&. It has undergone several stages of development and stability\&. Many system administrators have now written scripts around it to manage Windows NT clients from their UNIX workstation\&.
    18434.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    22676\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    22777parameter in the
    228 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     78smb\&.conf
    22979file\&.
    23080.RE
    … …  
    23888.RS 4
    23989The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    240 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     90smb\&.conf
    24191for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    24292.RE
    … …  
    275125.RS 4
    276126.\}
    277 .fam C
    278 .ps -1
    279127.nf
    280 .if t \{\
    281 .sp -1
    282 .\}
    283 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    284 .sp -1
    285 
    286128username = <value>
    287129password = <value>
    288130domain   = <value>
    289 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    290 .if t \{\
    291 .sp 1
    292 .\}
    293131.fi
    294 .fam
    295 .ps +1
    296132.if n \{\
    297133.RE
    … …  
    318154.sp
    319155Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the
    320 \FCps\F[]
     156ps
    321157command\&. To be safe always allow
    322 \FCrpcclient\F[]
     158rpcclient
    323159to prompt for a password and type it in directly\&.
    324160.RE
    … …  
    329165\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    330166parameter in the
    331 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     167smb\&.conf
    332168file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in
    333 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&.
     169smb\&.conf\&.
    334170.RE
    335171.PP
    … …  
    337173.RS 4
    338174This specifies a NetBIOS scope that
    339 \FCnmblookup\F[]
     175nmblookup
    340176will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names\&. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001\&.txt and rfc1002\&.txt\&. NetBIOS scopes are
    341177\fIvery\fR
    … …  
    351187.RS 4
    352188TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the
    353 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     189smb\&.conf
    354190manual page for the list of valid options\&.
    355191.RE
    … …  
    588424.RS 4
    589425Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver information on the server\&. Note that the driver files should already exist in the directory returned by
    590 \FCgetdriverdir\F[]\&. Possible values for
     426getdriverdir\&. Possible values for
    591427\fIarch\fR
    592428are the same as those for the
    593 \FCgetdriverdir\F[]
     429getdriverdir
    594430command\&. The
    595431\fIconfig\fR
    … …  
    599435.RS 4
    600436.\}
    601 .fam C
    602 .ps -1
    603437.nf
    604 .if t \{\
    605 .sp -1
    606 .\}
    607 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    608 .sp -1
    609 
    610438Long Printer Name:\e
    611439Driver File Name:\e
    … …  
    616444Default Data Type:\e
    617445Comma Separated list of Files
    618 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    619 .if t \{\
    620 .sp 1
    621 .\}
    622446.fi
    623 .fam
    624 .ps +1
    625447.if n \{\
    626448.RE
    … …  
    639461.RS 4
    640462Add a printer on the remote server\&. This printer will be automatically shared\&. Be aware that the printer driver must already be installed on the server (see
    641 \FCadddriver\F[]) and the
     463adddriver) and the
    642464\fIport\fRmust be a valid port name (see
    643 \FCenumports\F[]\&.
     465enumports\&.
    644466.RE
    645467.PP
    … …  
    692514.RS 4
    693515Retrieve the data for a given printer setting\&. See the
    694 \FCenumdata\F[]
     516enumdata
    695517command for more information\&. This command corresponds to the GetPrinterData() MS Platform SDK function\&.
    696518.RE
    … …  
    733555.sp
    734556See also the
    735 \FCenumprinters\F[]
     557enumprinters
    736558and
    737 \FCenumdrivers\F[]
     559enumdrivers
    738560commands for obtaining a list of of installed printers and drivers\&.
    739561.RE
    … …  
    824646.RS 4
    825647Exit
    826 \FCrpcclient \F[]\&.
     648rpcclient\&.
    827649.RE
    828650.SH "BUGS"
    829651.PP
    830 \FCrpcclient\F[]
     652rpcclient
    831653is designed as a developer testing tool and may not be robust in certain areas (such as command line parsing)\&. It has been known to generate a core dump upon failures when invalid parameters where passed to the interpreter\&.
    832654.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/samba.7

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: samba
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: Miscellanea
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SAMBA" "7" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "Miscellanea"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SAMBA" "7" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "Miscellanea"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022samba \- A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsamba\F[]
    175 .fam
     25samba
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18232.RS 4
    18333The
    184 \FCsmbd\F[]
     34smbd
    18535daemon provides the file and print services to SMB clients, such as Windows 95/98, Windows NT, Windows for Workgroups or LanManager\&. The configuration file for this daemon is described in
    18636\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    … …  
    19040.RS 4
    19141The
    192 \FCnmbd\F[]
     42nmbd
    19343daemon provides NetBIOS nameservice and browsing support\&. The configuration file for this daemon is described in
    19444\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    … …  
    19848.RS 4
    19949The
    200 \FCsmbclient\F[]
     50smbclient
    20151program implements a simple ftp\-like client\&. This is useful for accessing SMB shares on other compatible servers (such as Windows NT), and can also be used to allow a UNIX box to print to a printer attached to any SMB server (such as a PC running Windows NT)\&.
    20252.RE
    … …  
    20555.RS 4
    20656The
    207 \FCtestparm\F[]
     57testparm
    20858utility is a simple syntax checker for Samba\'s
    20959\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    … …  
    21464.RS 4
    21565The
    216 \FCtestprns\F[]
     66testprns
    21767utility supports testing printer names defined in your
    218 \FCprintcap\F[]
     68printcap
    21969file used by Samba\&.
    22070.RE
    … …  
    22373.RS 4
    22474The
    225 \FCsmbstatus\F[]
     75smbstatus
    22676tool provides access to information about the current connections to
    227 \FCsmbd\F[]\&.
     77smbd\&.
    22878.RE
    22979.PP
    … …  
    23181.RS 4
    23282The
    233 \FCnmblookup\F[]
     83nmblookup
    23484tools allows NetBIOS name queries to be made from a UNIX host\&.
    23585.RE
    … …  
    23888.RS 4
    23989The
    240 \FCsmbpasswd\F[]
     90smbpasswd
    24191command is a tool for changing LanMan and Windows NT password hashes on Samba and Windows NT servers\&.
    24292.RE
    … …  
    24595.RS 4
    24696The
    247 \FCsmbcacls\F[]
     97smbcacls
    24898command is a tool to set ACL\'s on remote CIFS servers\&.
    24999.RE
    … …  
    252102.RS 4
    253103The
    254 \FCsmbsh\F[]
     104smbsh
    255105command is a program that allows you to run a unix shell with with an overloaded VFS\&.
    256106.RE
    … …  
    259109.RS 4
    260110The
    261 \FCsmbtree\F[]
     111smbtree
    262112command is a text\-based network neighborhood tool\&.
    263113.RE
    … …  
    266116.RS 4
    267117The
    268 \FCsmbtar\F[]
     118smbtar
    269119can make backups of data on CIFS/SMB servers\&.
    270120.RE
    … …  
    272122\fBsmbspool\fR(8)
    273123.RS 4
    274 \FCsmbspool\F[]
     124smbspool
    275125is a helper utility for printing on printers connected to CIFS servers\&.
    276126.RE
    … …  
    278128\fBsmbcontrol\fR(1)
    279129.RS 4
    280 \FCsmbcontrol\F[]
     130smbcontrol
    281131is a utility that can change the behaviour of running samba daemons\&.
    282132.RE
    … …  
    284134\fBrpcclient\fR(1)
    285135.RS 4
    286 \FCrpcclient\F[]
     136rpcclient
    287137is a utility that can be used to execute RPC commands on remote CIFS servers\&.
    288138.RE
    … …  
    291141.RS 4
    292142The
    293 \FCpdbedit\F[]
     143pdbedit
    294144command can be used to maintain the local user database on a samba server\&.
    295145.RE
    … …  
    298148.RS 4
    299149The
    300 \FCfindsmb\F[]
     150findsmb
    301151command can be used to find SMB servers on the local network\&.
    302152.RE
    … …  
    305155.RS 4
    306156The
    307 \FCnet\F[]
     157net
    308158command is supposed to work similar to the DOS/Windows NET\&.EXE command\&.
    309159.RE
    … …  
    311161\fBswat\fR(8)
    312162.RS 4
    313 \FCswat\F[]
     163swat
    314164is a web\-based interface to configuring
    315 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&.
     165smb\&.conf\&.
    316166.RE
    317167.PP
    318168\fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    319169.RS 4
    320 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     170winbindd
    321171is a daemon that is used for integrating authentication and the user database into unix\&.
    322172.RE
    … …  
    324174\fBwbinfo\fR(1)
    325175.RS 4
    326 \FCwbinfo\F[]
     176wbinfo
    327177is a utility that retrieves and stores information related to winbind\&.
    328178.RE
    … …  
    330180\fBprofiles\fR(1)
    331181.RS 4
    332 \FCprofiles\F[]
     182profiles
    333183is a command\-line utility that can be used to replace all occurences of a certain SID with another SID\&.
    334184.RE
    … …  
    336186\fBlog2pcap\fR(1)
    337187.RS 4
    338 \FClog2pcap\F[]
     188log2pcap
    339189is a utility for generating pcap trace files from Samba log files\&.
    340190.RE
    … …  
    342192\fBvfstest\fR(1)
    343193.RS 4
    344 \FCvfstest\F[]
     194vfstest
    345195is a utility that can be used to test vfs modules\&.
    346196.RE
    … …  
    348198\fBntlm_auth\fR(1)
    349199.RS 4
    350 \FCntlm_auth\F[]
     200ntlm_auth
    351201is a helper\-utility for external programs wanting to do NTLM\-authentication\&.
    352202.RE
    … …  
    354204\fBsmbmount\fR(8), \fBsmbumount\fR(8), \fBsmbmnt\fR(8)
    355205.RS 4
    356 \FCsmbmount\F[],\FCsmbumount\F[]
     206smbmount,smbumount
    357207and
    358 \FCsmbmnt\F[]
     208smbmnt
    359209are commands that can be used to mount CIFS/SMB shares on Linux\&.
    360210.RE
    … …  
    362212\fBsmbcquotas\fR(1)
    363213.RS 4
    364 \FCsmbcquotas\F[]
     214smbcquotas
    365215is a tool that can set remote QUOTA\'s on server with NTFS 5\&.
    366216.RE
    … …  
    397247http://devel\&.samba\&.org/
    398248for information on how to do it properly\&. We prefer patches in
    399 \FCdiff \-u\F[]
     249diff \-u
    400250format\&.
    401251.SH "CONTRIBUTORS"
    402252.PP
    403253Contributors to the project are now too numerous to mention here but all deserve the thanks of all Samba users\&. To see a full list, look at the
    404 \FCchange\-log\F[]
     254change\-log
    405255in the source package for the pre\-CVS changes and at
    406256http://cvs\&.samba\&.org/

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/sharesec.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: sharesec
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SHARESEC" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SHARESEC" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022sharesec \- Set or get share ACLs
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsharesec\F[] {sharename} [\-r,\ \-\-remove=ACL] [\-m,\ \-\-modify=ACL] [\-a,\ \-\-add=ACL] [\-R,\ \-\-replace=ACLs] [\-D,\ \-\-delete] [\-v,\ \-\-view] [\-M,\ \-\-machine\-sid] [\-F,\ \-\-force] [\-d,\ \-\-debuglevel=DEBUGLEVEL] [\-s,\ \-\-configfile=CONFIGFILE] [\-l,\ \-\-log\-basename=LOGFILEBASE] [\-V,\ \-\-version] [\-?,\ \-\-help] [\-\-usage]
    175 .fam
     25sharesec {sharename} [\-r,\ \-\-remove=ACL] [\-m,\ \-\-modify=ACL] [\-a,\ \-\-add=ACL] [\-R,\ \-\-replace=ACLs] [\-D,\ \-\-delete] [\-v,\ \-\-view] [\-M,\ \-\-machine\-sid] [\-F,\ \-\-force] [\-d,\ \-\-debuglevel=DEBUGLEVEL] [\-s,\ \-\-configfile=CONFIGFILE] [\-l,\ \-\-log\-basename=LOGFILEBASE] [\-V,\ \-\-version] [\-?,\ \-\-help] [\-\-usage]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCsharesec\F[]
     33sharesec
    18434program manipulates share permissions on SMB file shares\&.
    18535.SH "OPTIONS"
    18636.PP
    18737The following options are available to the
    188 \FCsharesec\F[]
     38sharesec
    18939program\&. The format of ACLs is described in the section ACL FORMAT
    19040.PP
    … …  
    24191\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    24292parameter in the
    243 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     93smb\&.conf
    24494file\&.
    24595.RE
    … …  
    253103.RS 4
    254104The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    255 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     105smb\&.conf
    256106for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    257107.RE
    … …  
    270120.RS 4
    271121.\}
    272 .fam C
    273 .ps -1
    274122.nf
    275 .if t \{\
    276 .sp -1
    277 .\}
    278 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    279 .sp -1
    280 
    281123        REVISION:<revision number>
    282124        OWNER:<sid or name>
    … …  
    284126        ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask>
    285127       
    286 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    287 .if t \{\
    288 .sp 1
    289 .\}
    290128.fi
    291 .fam
    292 .ps +1
    293129.if n \{\
    294130.RE
    … …  
    417253.PP
    418254The
    419 \FCsharesec\F[]
     255sharesec
    420256program sets the exit status depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed\&. The exit status may be one of the following values\&.
    421257.PP
    422258If the operation succeeded, sharesec returns and exit status of 0\&. If
    423 \FCsharesec\F[]
     259sharesec
    424260couldn\'t connect to the specified server, or there was an error getting or setting the ACLs, an exit status of 1 is returned\&. If there was an error parsing any command line arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned\&.
    425261.SH "EXAMPLES"
    … …  
    433269.RS 4
    434270.\}
    435 .fam C
    436 .ps -1
    437271.nf
    438 .if t \{\
    439 .sp -1
    440 .\}
    441 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    442 .sp -1
    443 
    444272        host:~ # sharesec share \-a S\-1\-5\-21\-1866488690\-1365729215\-3963860297\-17724:ALLOWED/0/FULL
    445273       
    446 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    447 .if t \{\
    448 .sp 1
    449 .\}
    450274.fi
    451 .fam
    452 .ps +1
    453275.if n \{\
    454276.RE
    … …  
    461283.RS 4
    462284.\}
    463 .fam C
    464 .ps -1
    465285.nf
    466 .if t \{\
    467 .sp -1
    468 .\}
    469 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    470 .sp -1
    471 
    472286        host:~ # sharesec share \-v
    473287        REVISION:1
    … …  
    477291        ACL:S\-1\-5\-21\-1866488690\-1365729215\-3963860297\-17724:ALLOWED/0/FULL
    478292       
    479 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    480 .if t \{\
    481 .sp 1
    482 .\}
    483293.fi
    484 .fam
    485 .ps +1
    486294.if n \{\
    487295.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smb.conf
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: File Formats and Conventions
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMB\&.CONF" "5" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "File Formats and Conventions"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMB\&.CONF" "5" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "File Formats and Conventions"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smb.conf \- The configuration file for the Samba suite
    17123.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17224.PP
    17325The
    174 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     26smb\&.conf
    17527file is a configuration file for the Samba suite\&.
    176 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     28smb\&.conf
    17729contains runtime configuration information for the Samba programs\&. The
    178 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     30smb\&.conf
    17931file is designed to be configured and administered by the
    18032\fBswat\fR(8)
    … …  
    18739.RS 4
    18840.\}
    189 .fam C
    190 .ps -1
    191 .nf
    192 .if t \{\
    193 .sp -1
    194 .\}
    195 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    196 .sp -1
    197 
     41.nf
    19842\fIname\fR = \fIvalue \fR
    199 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    200 .if t \{\
    201 .sp 1
    202 .\}
    203 .fi
    204 .fam
    205 .ps +1
     43.fi
    20644.if n \{\
    20745.RE
    … …  
    21755.PP
    21856Any line ending in a
    219 \(lq\FC\e\F[]\(rq
     57\(lq\e\(rq
    22058is continued on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion\&.
    22159.PP
    … …  
    24078.PP
    24179Sections other than guest services will require a password to access them\&. The client provides the username\&. As older clients only provide passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list of usernames to check against the password using the
    242 \FCuser =\F[]
     80user =
    24381option in the share definition\&. For modern clients such as Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000, this should not be necessary\&.
    24482.PP
    … …  
    24684.PP
    24785The following sample section defines a file space share\&. The user has write access to the path
    248 \FC/home/bar\F[]\&. The share is accessed via the share name
    249 \FCfoo\F[]:
    250 .sp
    251 .if n \{\
    252 .RS 4
    253 .\}
    254 .fam C
    255 .ps -1
    256 .nf
    257 .if t \{\
    258 .sp -1
    259 .\}
    260 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    261 .sp -1
    262 
     86/home/bar\&. The share is accessed via the share name
     87foo:
     88.sp
     89.if n \{\
     90.RS 4
     91.\}
     92.nf
    26393        \fI[foo]\fR
    26494        \m[blue]\fBpath = /home/bar\fR\m[]
    26595        \m[blue]\fBread only = no\fR\m[]
    266 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    267 .if t \{\
    268 .sp 1
    269 .\}
    270 .fi
    271 .fam
    272 .ps +1
     96.fi
    27397.if n \{\
    27498.RE
    … …  
    282106.RS 4
    283107.\}
    284 .fam C
    285 .ps -1
    286 .nf
    287 .if t \{\
    288 .sp -1
    289 .\}
    290 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    291 .sp -1
    292 
     108.nf
    293109        \fI[aprinter]\fR
    294110        \m[blue]\fBpath = /usr/spool/public\fR\m[]
    … …  
    296112        \m[blue]\fBprintable = yes\fR\m[]
    297113        \m[blue]\fBguest ok = yes\fR\m[]
    298 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    299 .if t \{\
    300 .sp 1
    301 .\}
    302 .fi
    303 .fam
    304 .ps +1
     114.fi
    305115.if n \{\
    306116.RE
    … …  
    349159.RS 4
    350160.\}
    351 .fam C
    352 .ps -1
    353 .nf
    354 .if t \{\
    355 .sp -1
    356 .\}
    357 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    358 .sp -1
    359 
     161.nf
    360162\fBpath = /data/pchome/%S\fR
    361 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    362 .if t \{\
    363 .sp 1
    364 .\}
    365 .fi
    366 .fam
    367 .ps +1
     163.fi
    368164.if n \{\
    369165.RE
    … …  
    382178.RS 4
    383179.\}
    384 .fam C
    385 .ps -1
    386 .nf
    387 .if t \{\
    388 .sp -1
    389 .\}
    390 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    391 .sp -1
    392 
     180.nf
    393181\fI[homes]\fR
    394182\m[blue]\fBread only = no\fR\m[]
    395 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    396 .if t \{\
    397 .sp 1
    398 .\}
    399 .fi
    400 .fam
    401 .ps +1
     183.fi
    402184.if n \{\
    403185.RE
    … …  
    464246.RS 4
    465247.\}
    466 .fam C
    467 .ps -1
    468 .nf
    469 .if t \{\
    470 .sp -1
    471 .\}
    472 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    473 .sp -1
    474 
     248.nf
    475249\fI[printers]\fR
    476250\m[blue]\fBpath = /usr/spool/public\fR\m[]
    477251\m[blue]\fBguest ok = yes\fR\m[]
    478252\m[blue]\fBprintable = yes\fR\m[]
    479 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    480 .if t \{\
    481 .sp 1
    482 .\}
    483 .fi
    484 .fam
    485 .ps +1
     253.fi
    486254.if n \{\
    487255.RE
    … …  
    493261.RS 4
    494262.\}
    495 .fam C
    496 .ps -1
    497 .nf
    498 .if t \{\
    499 .sp -1
    500 .\}
    501 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    502 .sp -1
    503 
     263.nf
    504264alias|alias|alias|alias\&.\&.\&.   
    505 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    506 .if t \{\
    507 .sp 1
    508 .\}
    509 .fi
    510 .fam
    511 .ps +1
     265.fi
    512266.if n \{\
    513267.RE
    … …  
    516270Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for your printing subsystem\&. In the [global] section, specify the new file as your printcap\&. The server will only recognize names found in your pseudo\-printcap, which of course can contain whatever aliases you like\&. The same technique could be used simply to limit access to a subset of your local printers\&.
    517271.PP
    518 An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the first entry of a printcap record\&. Records are separated by newlines, components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols (\FC|\F[])\&.
    519 .if n \{\
    520 .sp
    521 .\}
    522 .RS 4
    523 .BM yellow
     272An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the first entry of a printcap record\&. Records are separated by newlines, components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols (|)\&.
     273.if n \{\
     274.sp
     275.\}
     276.RS 4
    524277.it 1 an-trap
    525278.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    532285.PP
    533286On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are defined on the system you may be able to use
    534 \FCprintcap name = lpstat\F[]
     287printcap name = lpstat
    535288to automatically obtain a list of printers\&. See the
    536 \FCprintcap name\F[]
     289printcap name
    537290option for more details\&.
    538291.sp .5v
    539 .EM yellow
    540292.RE
    541293.SH "USERSHARES"
    … …  
    581333.PP
    582334To allow members of the UNIX group
    583 \FCfoo\F[]
     335foo
    584336to create user defined shares, create the directory to contain the share definitions as follows:
    585337.PP
    … …  
    589341.RS 4
    590342.\}
    591 .fam C
    592 .ps -1
    593 .nf
    594 .if t \{\
    595 .sp -1
    596 .\}
    597 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    598 .sp -1
    599 
     343.nf
    600344mkdir /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
    601345chgrp foo /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
    602346chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares
    603 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    604 .if t \{\
    605 .sp 1
    606 .\}
    607 .fi
    608 .fam
    609 .ps +1
     347.fi
    610348.if n \{\
    611349.RE
    … …  
    617355.RS 4
    618356.\}
    619 .fam C
    620 .ps -1
    621 .nf
    622 .if t \{\
    623 .sp -1
    624 .\}
    625 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    626 .sp -1
    627 
     357.nf
    628358        \m[blue]\fBusershare path = /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares\fR\m[]
    629359        \m[blue]\fBusershare max shares = 10\fR\m[] # (or the desired number of shares)
    630 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    631 .if t \{\
    632 .sp 1
    633 .\}
    634 .fi
    635 .fam
    636 .ps +1
     360.fi
    637361.if n \{\
    638362.RE
    … …  
    640364.sp
    641365to the global section of your
    642 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&. Members of the group foo may then manipulate the user defined shares using the following commands\&.
     366smb\&.conf\&. Members of the group foo may then manipulate the user defined shares using the following commands\&.
    643367.PP
    644368net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]]
    … …  
    804528.RS 4
    805529the path of the service\'s home directory, obtained from your NIS auto\&.map entry\&. The NIS auto\&.map entry is split up as
    806 \FC%N:%p\F[]\&.
     530%N:%p\&.
    807531.RE
    808532.PP
    809533There are some quite creative things that can be done with these substitutions and other
    810 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     534smb\&.conf
    811535options\&.
    812536.SH "NAME MANGLING"
    813537.PP
    814538Samba supports
    815 \FCname mangling\F[]
     539name mangling
    816540so that DOS and Windows clients can use files that don\'t conform to the 8\&.3 format\&. It can also be set to adjust the case of 8\&.3 format filenames\&.
    817541.PP
    … …  
    843567.RS 4
    844568controls whether new files (ie\&. files that don\'t currently exist in the filesystem) are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the
    845 \FCdefault\F[]
     569default
    846570case\&. Default
    847571\fIyes\fR\&.
    … …  
    851575.RS 4
    852576controls if new files (ie\&. files that don\'t currently exist in the filesystem) which conform to 8\&.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the
    853 \FCdefault\F[]
     577default
    854578case\&. This option can be used with
    855 \FCpreserve case = yes\F[]
     579preserve case = yes
    856580to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowercased\&. Default
    857581\fIyes\fR\&.
    … …  
    876600.\}
    877601If the client has passed a username/password pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX system\'s password programs, the connection is made as that username\&. This includes the
    878 \FC\e\eserver\eservice\F[]%\fIusername\fR
     602\e\eserver\eservice%\fIusername\fR
    879603method of passing a username\&.
    880604.RE
    … …  
    922646.\}
    923647If a
    924 \FCuser = \F[]
     648user =
    925649field is given in the
    926 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     650smb\&.conf
    927651file for the service and the client has supplied a password, and that password matches (according to the UNIX system\'s password checking) with one of the usernames from the
    928 \FCuser =\F[]
     652user =
    929653field, the connection is made as the username in the
    930 \FCuser =\F[]
     654user =
    931655line\&. If one of the usernames in the
    932 \FCuser =\F[]
     656user =
    933657list begins with a
    934 \FC@\F[], that name expands to a list of names in the group of the same name\&.
     658@, that name expands to a list of names in the group of the same name\&.
    935659.RE
    936660.sp
    … …  
    944668.\}
    945669If the service is a guest service, a connection is made as the username given in the
    946 \FCguest account =\F[]
     670guest account =
    947671for the service, irrespective of the supplied password\&.
    948672.RE
    … …  
    950674.PP
    951675Starting with Samba version 3\&.2\&.0, the capability to store Samba configuration in the registry is available\&. The configuration is stored in the registry key
    952 \fI\FCHKLM\eSoftware\eSamba\esmbconf\F[]\fR\&. There are two levels of registry configuration:
     676\fIHKLM\eSoftware\eSamba\esmbconf\fR\&. There are two levels of registry configuration:
    953677.sp
    954678.RS 4
    … …  
    1013737\fInet (rpc) registry\fR
    1014738in the key
    1015 \fI\FCHKLM\eSoftware\eSamba\esmbconf\F[]\fR\&. More conveniently, the
     739\fIHKLM\eSoftware\eSamba\esmbconf\fR\&. More conveniently, the
    1016740\fIconf\fR
    1017741subcommand of the
    … …  
    1019743utility offers a dedicated interface to read and write the registry based configuration locally, i\&.e\&. directly accessing the database file, circumventing the server\&.
    1020744.SH "EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER"
    1021 
    1022 
    1023 abort shutdown script (G)
    1024 .\" abort shutdown script
    1025 .PP
    1026 .RS 4
    1027 This a full path name to a script called by
    1028 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1029 that should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the
    1030 \m[blue]\fBshutdown script\fR\m[]\&.
    1031 .sp
    1032 If the connected user posseses the
    1033 \fBSeRemoteShutdownPrivilege\fR, right, this command will be run as root\&.
    1034 .sp
    1035 Default:
    1036 \fI\fIabort shutdown script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC""\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1037 .sp
    1038 Example:
    1039 \fI\fIabort shutdown script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/sbin/shutdown \-c\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1040 .RE
    1041 
    1042 access based share enum (S)
    1043 .\" access based share enum
    1044 .PP
    1045 .RS 4
    1046 If this parameter is
    1047 \fByes\fR
    1048 for a service, then the share hosted by the service will only be visible to users who have read or write access to the share during share enumeration (for example net view \e\esambaserver)\&. This has parallels to access based enumeration, the main difference being that only share permissions are evaluated, and security descriptors on files contained on the share are not used in computing enumeration access rights\&.
    1049 .sp
    1050 Default:
    1051 \fI\fIaccess based share enum\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1052 .RE
    1053 
    1054 acl check permissions (S)
    1055 .\" acl check permissions
    1056 .PP
    1057 .RS 4
    1058 This boolean parameter controls what
    1059 \fBsmbd\fR(8)does on receiving a protocol request of "open for delete" from a Windows client\&. If a Windows client doesn\'t have permissions to delete a file then they expect this to be denied at open time\&. POSIX systems normally only detect restrictions on delete by actually attempting to delete the file or directory\&. As Windows clients can (and do) "back out" a delete request by unsetting the "delete on close" bit Samba cannot delete the file immediately on "open for delete" request as we cannot restore such a deleted file\&. With this parameter set to true (the default) then smbd checks the file system permissions directly on "open for delete" and denies the request without actually deleting the file if the file system permissions would seem to deny it\&. This is not perfect, as it\'s possible a user could have deleted a file without Samba being able to check the permissions correctly, but it is close enough to Windows semantics for mostly correct behaviour\&. Samba will correctly check POSIX ACL semantics in this case\&.
    1060 .sp
    1061 If this parameter is set to "false" Samba doesn\'t check permissions on "open for delete" and allows the open\&. If the user doesn\'t have permission to delete the file this will only be discovered at close time, which is too late for the Windows user tools to display an error message to the user\&. The symptom of this is files that appear to have been deleted "magically" re\-appearing on a Windows explorer refresh\&. This is an extremely advanced protocol option which should not need to be changed\&. This parameter was introduced in its final form in 3\&.0\&.21, an earlier version with slightly different semantics was introduced in 3\&.0\&.20\&. That older version is not documented here\&.
    1062 .sp
    1063 Default:
    1064 \fI\fIacl check permissions\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCTrue\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1065 .RE
    1066 
    1067 acl compatibility (G)
    1068 .\" acl compatibility
    1069 .PP
    1070 .RS 4
    1071 This parameter specifies what OS ACL semantics should be compatible with\&. Possible values are
    1072 \fIwinnt\fR
    1073 for Windows NT 4,
    1074 \fIwin2k\fR
    1075 for Windows 2000 and above and
    1076 \fIauto\fR\&. If you specify
    1077 \fIauto\fR, the value for this parameter will be based upon the version of the client\&. There should be no reason to change this parameter from the default\&.
    1078 .sp
    1079 Default:
    1080 \fI\fIacl compatibility\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCAuto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1081 .sp
    1082 Example:
    1083 \fI\fIacl compatibility\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCwin2k\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1084 .RE
    1085 
    1086 acl group control (S)
    1087 .\" acl group control
    1088 .PP
    1089 .RS 4
    1090 In a POSIX filesystem, only the owner of a file or directory and the superuser can modify the permissions and ACLs on a file\&. If this parameter is set, then Samba overrides this restriction, and also allows the
    1091 \fIprimary group owner\fR
    1092 of a file or directory to modify the permissions and ACLs on that file\&.
    1093 .sp
    1094 On a Windows server, groups may be the owner of a file or directory \- thus allowing anyone in that group to modify the permissions on it\&. This allows the delegation of security controls on a point in the filesystem to the group owner of a directory and anything below it also owned by that group\&. This means there are multiple people with permissions to modify ACLs on a file or directory, easing managability\&.
    1095 .sp
    1096 This parameter allows Samba to also permit delegation of the control over a point in the exported directory hierarchy in much the same way as Windows\&. This allows all members of a UNIX group to control the permissions on a file or directory they have group ownership on\&.
    1097 .sp
    1098 This parameter is best used with the
    1099 \m[blue]\fBinherit owner\fR\m[]
    1100 option and also on on a share containing directories with the UNIX
    1101 \fIsetgid bit\fR
    1102 set on them, which causes new files and directories created within it to inherit the group ownership from the containing directory\&.
    1103 .sp
    1104 This is parameter has been was deprecated in Samba 3\&.0\&.23, but re\-activated in Samba 3\&.0\&.31 and above, as it now only controls permission changes if the user is in the owning primary group\&. It is now no longer equivalent to the
    1105 \fIdos filemode\fR
    1106 option\&.
    1107 .sp
    1108 Default:
    1109 \fI\fIacl group control\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1110 .RE
    1111 
    1112 acl map full control (S)
    1113 .\" acl map full control
    1114 .PP
    1115 .RS 4
    1116 This boolean parameter controls whether
    1117 \fBsmbd\fR(8)maps a POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" (read/write/execute), the maximum allowed POSIX permission set, into a Windows ACL of "FULL CONTROL"\&. If this parameter is set to true any POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" will be returned in a Windows ACL as "FULL CONTROL", is this parameter is set to false any POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" will be returned as the specific Windows ACL bits representing read, write and execute\&.
    1118 .sp
    1119 Default:
    1120 \fI\fIacl map full control\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCTrue\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1121 .RE
    1122 
    1123 add group script (G)
    1124 .\" add group script
    1125 .PP
    1126 .RS 4
    1127 This is the full pathname to a script that will be run
    1128 \fIAS ROOT\fR
    1129 by
    1130 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1131 when a new group is requested\&. It will expand any
    1132 \fI%g\fR
    1133 to the group name passed\&. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&. The script is free to create a group with an arbitrary name to circumvent unix group name restrictions\&. In that case the script must print the numeric gid of the created group on stdout\&.
    1134 .sp
    1135 Default:
    1136 \fI\fIadd group script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1137 .sp
    1138 Example:
    1139 \fI\fIadd group script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/sbin/groupadd %g\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1140 .RE
    1141 
    1142 add machine script (G)
    1143 .\" add machine script
    1144 .PP
    1145 .RS 4
    1146 This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by
    1147 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1148 when a machine is added to Samba\'s domain and a Unix account matching the machine\'s name appended with a "$" does not already exist\&.
    1149 .sp
    1150 This option is very similar to the
    1151 \m[blue]\fBadd user script\fR\m[], and likewise uses the %u substitution for the account name\&. Do not use the %m substitution\&.
    1152 .sp
    1153 Default:
    1154 \fI\fIadd machine script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1155 .sp
    1156 Example:
    1157 \fI\fIadd machine script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/sbin/adduser \-n \-g machines \-c Machine \-d /var/lib/nobody \-s /bin/false %u\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1158 .RE
    1159 
    1160 add port command (G)
    1161 .\" add port command
    1162 .PP
    1163 .RS 4
    1164 Samba 3\&.0\&.23 introduced support for adding printer ports remotely using the Windows "Add Standard TCP/IP Port Wizard"\&. This option defines an external program to be executed when smbd receives a request to add a new Port to the system\&. The script is passed two parameters:
    1165 .sp
    1166 .RS 4
    1167 .ie n \{\
    1168 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1169 .\}
    1170 .el \{\
    1171 .sp -1
    1172 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1173 .\}
    1174 \fIport name\fR
    1175 .RE
    1176 .sp
    1177 .RS 4
    1178 .ie n \{\
    1179 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1180 .\}
    1181 .el \{\
    1182 .sp -1
    1183 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1184 .\}
    1185 \fIdevice URI\fR
    1186 .sp
    1187 .RE
    1188 The deviceURI is in the for of socket://<hostname>[:<portnumber>] or lpd://<hostname>/<queuename>\&.
    1189 .sp
    1190 Default:
    1191 \fI\fIadd port command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1192 .sp
    1193 Example:
    1194 \fI\fIadd port command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/etc/samba/scripts/addport\&.sh\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1195 .RE
    1196 
    1197 addprinter command (G)
    1198 .\" addprinter command
    1199 .PP
    1200 .RS 4
    1201 With the introduction of MS\-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2\&.2, The MS Add Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the "Printers\&.\&.\&." folder displayed a share listing\&. The APW allows for printers to be add remotely to a Samba or Windows NT/2000 print server\&.
    1202 .sp
    1203 For a Samba host this means that the printer must be physically added to the underlying printing system\&. The
    1204 \fIaddprinter command\fR
    1205 defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer to the print system and to add the appropriate service definition to the
    1206 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
    1207 file in order that it can be shared by
    1208 \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&.
    1209 .sp
    1210 The
    1211 \fIaddprinter command\fR
    1212 is automatically invoked with the following parameter (in order):
    1213 .sp
    1214 .RS 4
    1215 .ie n \{\
    1216 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1217 .\}
    1218 .el \{\
    1219 .sp -1
    1220 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1221 .\}
    1222 \fIprinter name\fR
    1223 .RE
    1224 .sp
    1225 .RS 4
    1226 .ie n \{\
    1227 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1228 .\}
    1229 .el \{\
    1230 .sp -1
    1231 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1232 .\}
    1233 \fIshare name\fR
    1234 .RE
    1235 .sp
    1236 .RS 4
    1237 .ie n \{\
    1238 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1239 .\}
    1240 .el \{\
    1241 .sp -1
    1242 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1243 .\}
    1244 \fIport name\fR
    1245 .RE
    1246 .sp
    1247 .RS 4
    1248 .ie n \{\
    1249 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1250 .\}
    1251 .el \{\
    1252 .sp -1
    1253 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1254 .\}
    1255 \fIdriver name\fR
    1256 .RE
    1257 .sp
    1258 .RS 4
    1259 .ie n \{\
    1260 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1261 .\}
    1262 .el \{\
    1263 .sp -1
    1264 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1265 .\}
    1266 \fIlocation\fR
    1267 .RE
    1268 .sp
    1269 .RS 4
    1270 .ie n \{\
    1271 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1272 .\}
    1273 .el \{\
    1274 .sp -1
    1275 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1276 .\}
    1277 \fIWindows 9x driver location\fR
    1278 .sp
    1279 .RE
    1280 All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent by the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception\&. The "Windows 9x driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility only\&. The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers to the APW questions\&.
    1281 .sp
    1282 Once the
    1283 \fIaddprinter command\fR
    1284 has been executed,
    1285 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1286 will reparse the
    1287 \FC smb\&.conf\F[]
    1288 to determine if the share defined by the APW exists\&. If the sharename is still invalid, then
    1289 \FCsmbd \F[]
    1290 will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client\&.
    1291 .sp
    1292 The
    1293 \fIaddprinter command\fR
    1294 program can output a single line of text, which Samba will set as the port the new printer is connected to\&. If this line isn\'t output, Samba won\'t reload its printer shares\&.
    1295 .sp
    1296 Default:
    1297 \fI\fIaddprinter command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1298 .sp
    1299 Example:
    1300 \fI\fIaddprinter command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/bin/addprinter\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1301 .RE
    1302 
    1303 add share command (G)
    1304 .\" add share command
    1305 .PP
    1306 .RS 4
    1307 Samba 2\&.2\&.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4\&.0 Server Manager\&. The
    1308 \fIadd share command\fR
    1309 is used to define an external program or script which will add a new service definition to
    1310 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&.
    1311 .sp
    1312 In order to successfully execute the
    1313 \fIadd share command\fR,
    1314 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1315 requires that the administrator connects using a root account (i\&.e\&. uid == 0) or has the
    1316 \FCSeDiskOperatorPrivilege\F[]\&. Scripts defined in the
    1317 \fIadd share command\fR
    1318 parameter are executed as root\&.
    1319 .sp
    1320 When executed,
    1321 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1322 will automatically invoke the
    1323 \fIadd share command\fR
    1324 with five parameters\&.
    1325 .sp
    1326 .RS 4
    1327 .ie n \{\
    1328 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1329 .\}
    1330 .el \{\
    1331 .sp -1
    1332 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1333 .\}
    1334 \fIconfigFile\fR
    1335 \- the location of the global
    1336 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
    1337 file\&.
    1338 .RE
    1339 .sp
    1340 .RS 4
    1341 .ie n \{\
    1342 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1343 .\}
    1344 .el \{\
    1345 .sp -1
    1346 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1347 .\}
    1348 \fIshareName\fR
    1349 \- the name of the new share\&.
    1350 .RE
    1351 .sp
    1352 .RS 4
    1353 .ie n \{\
    1354 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1355 .\}
    1356 .el \{\
    1357 .sp -1
    1358 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1359 .\}
    1360 \fIpathName\fR
    1361 \- path to an **existing** directory on disk\&.
    1362 .RE
    1363 .sp
    1364 .RS 4
    1365 .ie n \{\
    1366 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1367 .\}
    1368 .el \{\
    1369 .sp -1
    1370 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1371 .\}
    1372 \fIcomment\fR
    1373 \- comment string to associate with the new share\&.
    1374 .RE
    1375 .sp
    1376 .RS 4
    1377 .ie n \{\
    1378 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1379 .\}
    1380 .el \{\
    1381 .sp -1
    1382 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1383 .\}
    1384 \fImax connections\fR
    1385 Number of maximum simultaneous connections to this share\&.
    1386 .sp
    1387 .RE
    1388 This parameter is only used to add file shares\&. To add printer shares, see the
    1389 \m[blue]\fBaddprinter command\fR\m[]\&.
    1390 .sp
    1391 Default:
    1392 \fI\fIadd share command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1393 .sp
    1394 Example:
    1395 \fI\fIadd share command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/bin/addshare\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1396 .RE
    1397 
    1398 add user script (G)
    1399 .\" add user script
    1400 .PP
    1401 .RS 4
    1402 This is the full pathname to a script that will be run
    1403 \fIAS ROOT\fR
    1404 by
    1405 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1406 under special circumstances described below\&.
    1407 .sp
    1408 Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are created for all users accessing files on this server\&. For sites that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the Windows NT PDC is an onerous task\&. This option allows smbd to create the required UNIX users
    1409 \fION DEMAND\fR
    1410 when a user accesses the Samba server\&.
    1411 .sp
    1412 In order to use this option,
    1413 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1414 must
    1415 \fINOT\fR
    1416 be set to
    1417 \m[blue]\fBsecurity = share\fR\m[]
    1418 and
    1419 \m[blue]\fBadd user script\fR\m[]
    1420 must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX user given one argument of
    1421 \fI%u\fR, which expands into the UNIX user name to create\&.
    1422 .sp
    1423 When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time,
    1424 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1425 contacts the
    1426 \m[blue]\fBpassword server\fR\m[]
    1427 and attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password\&. If the authentication succeeds then
    1428 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1429 attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the Windows user into\&. If this lookup fails, and
    1430 \m[blue]\fBadd user script\fR\m[]
    1431 is set then
    1432 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1433 will call the specified script
    1434 \fIAS ROOT\fR, expanding any
    1435 \fI%u\fR
    1436 argument to be the user name to create\&.
    1437 .sp
    1438 If this script successfully creates the user then
    1439 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1440 will continue on as though the UNIX user already existed\&. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to match existing Windows NT accounts\&.
    1441 .sp
    1442 See also
    1443 \m[blue]\fBsecurity\fR\m[],
    1444 \m[blue]\fBpassword server\fR\m[],
    1445 \m[blue]\fBdelete user script\fR\m[]\&.
    1446 .sp
    1447 Default:
    1448 \fI\fIadd user script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1449 .sp
    1450 Example:
    1451 \fI\fIadd user script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/samba/bin/add_user %u\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1452 .RE
    1453 
    1454 add user to group script (G)
    1455 .\" add user to group script
    1456 .PP
    1457 .RS 4
    1458 Full path to the script that will be called when a user is added to a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&. It will be run by
    1459 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1460 \fIAS ROOT\fR\&. Any
    1461 \fI%g\fR
    1462 will be replaced with the group name and any
    1463 \fI%u\fR
    1464 will be replaced with the user name\&.
    1465 .sp
    1466 Note that the
    1467 \FCadduser\F[]
    1468 command used in the example below does not support the used syntax on all systems\&.
    1469 .sp
    1470 Default:
    1471 \fI\fIadd user to group script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1472 .sp
    1473 Example:
    1474 \fI\fIadd user to group script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/sbin/adduser %u %g\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1475 .RE
    1476 
    1477 administrative share (S)
    1478 .\" administrative share
    1479 .PP
    1480 .RS 4
    1481 If this parameter is set to
    1482 \fByes\fR
    1483 for a share, then the share will be an administrative share\&. The Administrative Shares are the default network shares created by all Windows NT\-based operating systems\&. These are shares like C$, D$ or ADMIN$\&. The type of these shares is STYPE_DISKTREE_HIDDEN\&.
    1484 .sp
    1485 See the section below on
    1486 \m[blue]\fBsecurity\fR\m[]
    1487 for more information about this option\&.
    1488 .sp
    1489 Default:
    1490 \fI\fIadministrative share\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1491 .RE
    1492 
    1493 admin users (S)
    1494 .\" admin users
    1495 .PP
    1496 .RS 4
    1497 This is a list of users who will be granted administrative privileges on the share\&. This means that they will do all file operations as the super\-user (root)\&.
    1498 .sp
    1499 You should use this option very carefully, as any user in this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, irrespective of file permissions\&.
    1500 .sp
    1501 This parameter will not work with the
    1502 \m[blue]\fBsecurity = share\fR\m[]
    1503 in Samba 3\&.0\&. This is by design\&.
    1504 .sp
    1505 Default:
    1506 \fI\fIadmin users\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1507 .sp
    1508 Example:
    1509 \fI\fIadmin users\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCjason\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1510 .RE
    1511 
    1512 afs share (S)
    1513 .\" afs share
    1514 .PP
    1515 .RS 4
    1516 This parameter controls whether special AFS features are enabled for this share\&. If enabled, it assumes that the directory exported via the
    1517 \fIpath\fR
    1518 parameter is a local AFS import\&. The special AFS features include the attempt to hand\-craft an AFS token if you enabled \-\-with\-fake\-kaserver in configure\&.
    1519 .sp
    1520 Default:
    1521 \fI\fIafs share\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1522 .RE
    1523 
    1524 afs username map (G)
    1525 .\" afs username map
    1526 .PP
    1527 .RS 4
    1528 If you are using the fake kaserver AFS feature, you might want to hand\-craft the usernames you are creating tokens for\&. For example this is necessary if you have users from several domain in your AFS Protection Database\&. One possible scheme to code users as DOMAIN+User as it is done by winbind with the + as a separator\&.
    1529 .sp
    1530 The mapped user name must contain the cell name to log into, so without setting this parameter there will be no token\&.
    1531 .sp
    1532 Default:
    1533 \fI\fIafs username map\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1534 .sp
    1535 Example:
    1536 \fI\fIafs username map\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC%u@afs\&.samba\&.org\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1537 .RE
    1538 
    1539 aio read size (S)
    1540 .\" aio read size
    1541 .PP
    1542 .RS 4
    1543 If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this integer parameter is set to non\-zero value, Samba will read from file asynchronously when size of request is bigger than this value\&. Note that it happens only for non\-chained and non\-chaining reads and when not using write cache\&.
    1544 .sp
    1545 Current implementation of asynchronous I/O in Samba 3\&.0 does support only up to 10 outstanding asynchronous requests, read and write combined\&.
    1546 .sp
    1547 Related command:
    1548 \m[blue]\fBwrite cache size\fR\m[]
    1549 .sp
    1550 Related command:
    1551 \m[blue]\fBaio write size\fR\m[]
    1552 .sp
    1553 Default:
    1554 \fI\fIaio read size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1555 .sp
    1556 Example:
    1557 \fI\fIaio read size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC16384 # Use asynchronous I/O for reads bigger than 16KB request size\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1558 .RE
    1559 
    1560 aio write behind (S)
    1561 .\" aio write behind
    1562 .PP
    1563 .RS 4
    1564 If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support, Samba will not wait until write requests are finished before returning the result to the client for files listed in this parameter\&. Instead, Samba will immediately return that the write request has been finished successfully, no matter if the operation will succeed or not\&. This might speed up clients without aio support, but is really dangerous, because data could be lost and files could be damaged\&.
    1565 .sp
    1566 The syntax is identical to the
    1567 \m[blue]\fBveto files\fR\m[]
    1568 parameter\&.
    1569 .sp
    1570 Default:
    1571 \fI\fIaio write behind\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1572 .sp
    1573 Example:
    1574 \fI\fIaio write behind\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/*\&.tmp/\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1575 .RE
    1576 
    1577 aio write size (S)
    1578 .\" aio write size
    1579 .PP
    1580 .RS 4
    1581 If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this integer parameter is set to non\-zero value, Samba will write to file asynchronously when size of request is bigger than this value\&. Note that it happens only for non\-chained and non\-chaining reads and when not using write cache\&.
    1582 .sp
    1583 Current implementation of asynchronous I/O in Samba 3\&.0 does support only up to 10 outstanding asynchronous requests, read and write combined\&.
    1584 .sp
    1585 Related command:
    1586 \m[blue]\fBwrite cache size\fR\m[]
    1587 .sp
    1588 Related command:
    1589 \m[blue]\fBaio read size\fR\m[]
    1590 .sp
    1591 Default:
    1592 \fI\fIaio write size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1593 .sp
    1594 Example:
    1595 \fI\fIaio write size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC16384 # Use asynchronous I/O for writes bigger than 16KB request size\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1596 .RE
    1597 
    1598 algorithmic rid base (G)
    1599 .\" algorithmic rid base
    1600 .PP
    1601 .RS 4
    1602 This determines how Samba will use its algorithmic mapping from uids/gid to the RIDs needed to construct NT Security Identifiers\&.
    1603 .sp
    1604 Setting this option to a larger value could be useful to sites transitioning from WinNT and Win2k, as existing user and group rids would otherwise clash with sytem users etc\&.
    1605 .sp
    1606 All UIDs and GIDs must be able to be resolved into SIDs for the correct operation of ACLs on the server\&. As such the algorithmic mapping can\'t be \'turned off\', but pushing it \'out of the way\' should resolve the issues\&. Users and groups can then be assigned \'low\' RIDs in arbitrary\-rid supporting backends\&.
    1607 .sp
    1608 Default:
    1609 \fI\fIalgorithmic rid base\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1610 .sp
    1611 Example:
    1612 \fI\fIalgorithmic rid base\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC100000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1613 .RE
    1614 
    1615 allocation roundup size (S)
    1616 .\" allocation roundup size
    1617 .PP
    1618 .RS 4
    1619 This parameter allows an administrator to tune the allocation size reported to Windows clients\&. The default size of 1Mb generally results in improved Windows client performance\&. However, rounding the allocation size may cause difficulties for some applications, e\&.g\&. MS Visual Studio\&. If the MS Visual Studio compiler starts to crash with an internal error, set this parameter to zero for this share\&.
    1620 .sp
    1621 The integer parameter specifies the roundup size in bytes\&.
    1622 .sp
    1623 Default:
    1624 \fI\fIallocation roundup size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1048576\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1625 .sp
    1626 Example:
    1627 \fI\fIallocation roundup size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0 # (to disable roundups)\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1628 .RE
    1629 
    1630 allow trusted domains (G)
    1631 .\" allow trusted domains
    1632 .PP
    1633 .RS 4
    1634 This option only takes effect when the
    1635 \m[blue]\fBsecurity\fR\m[]
    1636 option is set to
    1637 \fBserver\fR,
    1638 \fBdomain\fR
    1639 or
    1640 \fBads\fR\&. If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbd is running in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the remote server doing the authentication\&.
    1641 .sp
    1642 This is useful if you only want your Samba server to serve resources to users in the domain it is a member of\&. As an example, suppose that there are two domains DOMA and DOMB\&. DOMB is trusted by DOMA, which contains the Samba server\&. Under normal circumstances, a user with an account in DOMB can then access the resources of a UNIX account with the same account name on the Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA\&. This can make implementing a security boundary difficult\&.
    1643 .sp
    1644 Default:
    1645 \fI\fIallow trusted domains\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1646 .RE
    1647 
    1648 announce as (G)
    1649 .\" announce as
    1650 .PP
    1651 .RS 4
    1652 This specifies what type of server
    1653 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    1654 will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse list\&. By default this is set to Windows NT\&. The valid options are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"), "NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups respectively\&. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server as this may prevent Samba servers from participating as browser servers correctly\&.
    1655 .sp
    1656 Default:
    1657 \fI\fIannounce as\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNT Server\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1658 .sp
    1659 Example:
    1660 \fI\fIannounce as\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCWin95\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1661 .RE
    1662 
    1663 announce version (G)
    1664 .\" announce version
    1665 .PP
    1666 .RS 4
    1667 This specifies the major and minor version numbers that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server\&. The default is 4\&.9\&. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server\&.
    1668 .sp
    1669 Default:
    1670 \fI\fIannounce version\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC4\&.9\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1671 .sp
    1672 Example:
    1673 \fI\fIannounce version\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC2\&.0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1674 .RE
    1675 
    1676 auth methods (G)
    1677 .\" auth methods
    1678 .PP
    1679 .RS 4
    1680 This option allows the administrator to chose what authentication methods
    1681 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1682 will use when authenticating a user\&. This option defaults to sensible values based on
    1683 \m[blue]\fBsecurity\fR\m[]\&. This should be considered a developer option and used only in rare circumstances\&. In the majority (if not all) of production servers, the default setting should be adequate\&.
    1684 .sp
    1685 Each entry in the list attempts to authenticate the user in turn, until the user authenticates\&. In practice only one method will ever actually be able to complete the authentication\&.
    1686 .sp
    1687 Possible options include
    1688 \fBguest\fR
    1689 (anonymous access),
    1690 \fBsam\fR
    1691 (lookups in local list of accounts based on netbios name or domain name),
    1692 \fBwinbind\fR
    1693 (relay authentication requests for remote users through winbindd),
    1694 \fBntdomain\fR
    1695 (pre\-winbindd method of authentication for remote domain users; deprecated in favour of winbind method),
    1696 \fBtrustdomain\fR
    1697 (authenticate trusted users by contacting the remote DC directly from smbd; deprecated in favour of winbind method)\&.
    1698 .sp
    1699 Default:
    1700 \fI\fIauth methods\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1701 .sp
    1702 Example:
    1703 \fI\fIauth methods\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCguest sam winbind\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1704 .RE
    1705 
    1706 available (S)
    1707 .\" available
    1708 .PP
    1709 .RS 4
    1710 This parameter lets you "turn off" a service\&. If
    1711 \fIavailable = no\fR, then
    1712 \fIALL\fR
    1713 attempts to connect to the service will fail\&. Such failures are logged\&.
    1714 .sp
    1715 Default:
    1716 \fI\fIavailable\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1717 .RE
    1718 
    1719 bind interfaces only (G)
    1720 .\" bind interfaces only
    1721 .PP
    1722 .RS 4
    1723 This global parameter allows the Samba admin to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests\&. It affects file service
    1724 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1725 and name service
    1726 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    1727 in a slightly different ways\&.
    1728 .sp
    1729 For name service it causes
    1730 \FCnmbd\F[]
    1731 to bind to ports 137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the
    1732 \m[blue]\fBinterfaces\fR\m[]
    1733 parameter\&.
    1734 \FCnmbd\F[]
    1735 also binds to the "all addresses" interface (0\&.0\&.0\&.0) on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of reading broadcast messages\&. If this option is not set then
    1736 \FCnmbd\F[]
    1737 will service name requests on all of these sockets\&. If
    1738 \m[blue]\fBbind interfaces only\fR\m[]
    1739 is set then
    1740 \FCnmbd\F[]
    1741 will check the source address of any packets coming in on the broadcast sockets and discard any that don\'t match the broadcast addresses of the interfaces in the
    1742 \m[blue]\fBinterfaces\fR\m[]
    1743 parameter list\&. As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it allows
    1744 \FCnmbd\F[]
    1745 to refuse to serve names to machines that send packets that arrive through any interfaces not listed in the
    1746 \m[blue]\fBinterfaces\fR\m[]
    1747 list\&. IP Source address spoofing does defeat this simple check, however, so it must not be used seriously as a security feature for
    1748 \FCnmbd\F[]\&.
    1749 .sp
    1750 For file service it causes
    1751 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1752 to bind only to the interface list given in the
    1753 \m[blue]\fBinterfaces\fR\m[]
    1754 parameter\&. This restricts the networks that
    1755 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1756 will serve, to packets coming in on those interfaces\&. Note that you should not use this parameter for machines that are serving PPP or other intermittent or non\-broadcast network interfaces as it will not cope with non\-permanent interfaces\&.
    1757 .sp
    1758 If
    1759 \m[blue]\fBbind interfaces only\fR\m[]
    1760 is set and the network address
    1761 \fI127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR
    1762 is not added to the
    1763 \m[blue]\fBinterfaces\fR\m[]
    1764 parameter list
    1765 \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8)
    1766 and
    1767 \fBswat\fR(8)
    1768 may not work as expected due to the reasons covered below\&.
    1769 .sp
    1770 To change a users SMB password, the
    1771 \FCsmbpasswd\F[]
    1772 by default connects to the
    1773 \fIlocalhost \- 127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR
    1774 address as an SMB client to issue the password change request\&. If
    1775 \m[blue]\fBbind interfaces only\fR\m[]
    1776 is set then unless the network address
    1777 \fI127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR
    1778 is added to the
    1779 \m[blue]\fBinterfaces\fR\m[]
    1780 parameter list then
    1781 \FC smbpasswd\F[]
    1782 will fail to connect in it\'s default mode\&.
    1783 \FCsmbpasswd\F[]
    1784 can be forced to use the primary IP interface of the local host by using its
    1785 \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8)
    1786 \fI\-r \fR\fI\fIremote machine\fR\fR
    1787 parameter, with
    1788 \fIremote machine\fR
    1789 set to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host\&.
    1790 .sp
    1791 The
    1792 \FCswat\F[]
    1793 status page tries to connect with
    1794 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1795 and
    1796 \FCnmbd\F[]
    1797 at the address
    1798 \fI127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR
    1799 to determine if they are running\&. Not adding
    1800 \fI127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR
    1801 will cause
    1802 \FC smbd\F[]
    1803 and
    1804 \FCnmbd\F[]
    1805 to always show "not running" even if they really are\&. This can prevent
    1806 \FC swat\F[]
    1807 from starting/stopping/restarting
    1808 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1809 and
    1810 \FCnmbd\F[]\&.
    1811 .sp
    1812 Default:
    1813 \fI\fIbind interfaces only\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1814 .RE
    1815 
    1816 blocking locks (S)
    1817 .\" blocking locks
    1818 .PP
    1819 .RS 4
    1820 This parameter controls the behavior of
    1821 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1822 when given a request by a client to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the request has a time limit associated with it\&.
    1823 .sp
    1824 If this parameter is set and the lock range requested cannot be immediately satisfied, samba will internally queue the lock request, and periodically attempt to obtain the lock until the timeout period expires\&.
    1825 .sp
    1826 If this parameter is set to
    1827 \fBno\fR, then samba will behave as previous versions of Samba would and will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range cannot be obtained\&.
    1828 .sp
    1829 Default:
    1830 \fI\fIblocking locks\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1831 .RE
    1832 
    1833 block size (S)
    1834 .\" block size
    1835 .PP
    1836 .RS 4
    1837 This parameter controls the behavior of
    1838 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1839 when reporting disk free sizes\&. By default, this reports a disk block size of 1024 bytes\&.
    1840 .sp
    1841 Changing this parameter may have some effect on the efficiency of client writes, this is not yet confirmed\&. This parameter was added to allow advanced administrators to change it (usually to a higher value) and test the effect it has on client write performance without re\-compiling the code\&. As this is an experimental option it may be removed in a future release\&.
    1842 .sp
    1843 Changing this option does not change the disk free reporting size, just the block size unit reported to the client\&.
    1844 .sp
    1845 Default:
    1846 \fI\fIblock size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1024\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1847 .sp
    1848 Example:
    1849 \fI\fIblock size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC4096\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1850 .RE
    1851 
    1852 browsable
    1853 .\" browsable
    1854 .PP
    1855 .RS 4
    1856 This parameter is a synonym for
    1857 browseable\&.
    1858 .RE
    1859 
    1860 browseable (S)
    1861 .\" browseable
    1862 .PP
    1863 .RS 4
    1864 This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list\&.
    1865 .sp
    1866 Default:
    1867 \fI\fIbrowseable\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1868 .RE
    1869 
    1870 browse list (G)
    1871 .\" browse list
    1872 .PP
    1873 .RS 4
    1874 This controls whether
    1875 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    1876 will serve a browse list to a client doing a
    1877 \FCNetServerEnum\F[]
    1878 call\&. Normally set to
    1879 \fByes\fR\&. You should never need to change this\&.
    1880 .sp
    1881 Default:
    1882 \fI\fIbrowse list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1883 .RE
    1884 
    1885 cache directory (G)
    1886 .\" cache directory
    1887 .PP
    1888 .RS 4
    1889 Usually, most of the TDB files are stored in the
    1890 \fIlock directory\fR\&. Since Samba 3\&.4\&.0, it is possible to differentiate between TDB files with persistent data and TDB files with non\-persistent data using the
    1891 \fIstate directory\fR
    1892 and the
    1893 \fIcache directory\fR
    1894 options\&.
    1895 .sp
    1896 This option specifies the directory where TDB files containing non\-persistent data will be stored\&.
    1897 .sp
    1898 Default:
    1899 \fI\fIcache directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC${prefix}/var/locks\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1900 .sp
    1901 Example:
    1902 \fI\fIcache directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/var/run/samba/locks/cache\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1903 .RE
    1904 
    1905 casesignames
    1906 .\" casesignames
    1907 .PP
    1908 .RS 4
    1909 This parameter is a synonym for
    1910 case sensitive\&.
    1911 .RE
    1912 
    1913 case sensitive (S)
    1914 .\" case sensitive
    1915 .PP
    1916 .RS 4
    1917 See the discussion in the section
    1918 \m[blue]\fBname mangling\fR\m[]\&.
    1919 .sp
    1920 Default:
    1921 \fI\fIcase sensitive\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1922 .RE
    1923 
    1924 change notify (S)
    1925 .\" change notify
    1926 .PP
    1927 .RS 4
    1928 This parameter specifies whether Samba should reply to a client\'s file change notify requests\&.
    1929 .sp
    1930 You should never need to change this parameter
    1931 .sp
    1932 Default:
    1933 \fI\fIchange notify\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    1934 .RE
    1935 
    1936 change share command (G)
    1937 .\" change share command
    1938 .PP
    1939 .RS 4
    1940 Samba 2\&.2\&.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4\&.0 Server Manager\&. The
    1941 \fIchange share command\fR
    1942 is used to define an external program or script which will modify an existing service definition in
    1943 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&.
    1944 .sp
    1945 In order to successfully execute the
    1946 \fIchange share command\fR,
    1947 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1948 requires that the administrator connects using a root account (i\&.e\&. uid == 0) or has the
    1949 \FCSeDiskOperatorPrivilege\F[]\&. Scripts defined in the
    1950 \fIchange share command\fR
    1951 parameter are executed as root\&.
    1952 .sp
    1953 When executed,
    1954 \FCsmbd\F[]
    1955 will automatically invoke the
    1956 \fIchange share command\fR
    1957 with five parameters\&.
    1958 .sp
    1959 .RS 4
    1960 .ie n \{\
    1961 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1962 .\}
    1963 .el \{\
    1964 .sp -1
    1965 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1966 .\}
    1967 \fIconfigFile\fR
    1968 \- the location of the global
    1969 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
    1970 file\&.
    1971 .RE
    1972 .sp
    1973 .RS 4
    1974 .ie n \{\
    1975 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1976 .\}
    1977 .el \{\
    1978 .sp -1
    1979 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1980 .\}
    1981 \fIshareName\fR
    1982 \- the name of the new share\&.
    1983 .RE
    1984 .sp
    1985 .RS 4
    1986 .ie n \{\
    1987 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    1988 .\}
    1989 .el \{\
    1990 .sp -1
    1991 .IP \(bu 2.3
    1992 .\}
    1993 \fIpathName\fR
    1994 \- path to an **existing** directory on disk\&.
    1995 .RE
    1996 .sp
    1997 .RS 4
    1998 .ie n \{\
    1999 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    2000 .\}
    2001 .el \{\
    2002 .sp -1
    2003 .IP \(bu 2.3
    2004 .\}
    2005 \fIcomment\fR
    2006 \- comment string to associate with the new share\&.
    2007 .RE
    2008 .sp
    2009 .RS 4
    2010 .ie n \{\
    2011 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    2012 .\}
    2013 .el \{\
    2014 .sp -1
    2015 .IP \(bu 2.3
    2016 .\}
    2017 \fImax connections\fR
    2018 Number of maximum simultaneous connections to this share\&.
    2019 .sp
    2020 .RE
    2021 This parameter is only used to modify existing file share definitions\&. To modify printer shares, use the "Printers\&.\&.\&." folder as seen when browsing the Samba host\&.
    2022 .sp
    2023 Default:
    2024 \fI\fIchange share command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2025 .sp
    2026 Example:
    2027 \fI\fIchange share command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/bin/changeshare\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2028 .RE
    2029 
    2030 check password script (G)
    2031 .\" check password script
    2032 .PP
    2033 .RS 4
    2034 The name of a program that can be used to check password complexity\&. The password is sent to the program\'s standard input\&.
    2035 .sp
    2036 The program must return 0 on a good password, or any other value if the password is bad\&. In case the password is considered weak (the program does not return 0) the user will be notified and the password change will fail\&.
    2037 .sp
    2038 Note: In the example directory is a sample program called
    2039 \FCcrackcheck\F[]
    2040 that uses cracklib to check the password quality\&.
    2041 .sp
    2042 Default:
    2043 \fI\fIcheck password script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCDisabled\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2044 .sp
    2045 Example:
    2046 \fI\fIcheck password script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/sbin/crackcheck\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2047 .RE
    2048 
    2049 client lanman auth (G)
    2050 .\" client lanman auth
    2051 .PP
    2052 .RS 4
    2053 This parameter determines whether or not
    2054 \fBsmbclient\fR(8)
    2055 and other samba client tools will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the weaker LANMAN password hash\&. If disabled, only server which support NT password hashes (e\&.g\&. Windows NT/2000, Samba, etc\&.\&.\&. but not Windows 95/98) will be able to be connected from the Samba client\&.
    2056 .sp
    2057 The LANMAN encrypted response is easily broken, due to its case\-insensitive nature, and the choice of algorithm\&. Clients without Windows 95/98 servers are advised to disable this option\&.
    2058 .sp
    2059 Disabling this option will also disable the
    2060 \FCclient plaintext auth\F[]
    2061 option\&.
    2062 .sp
    2063 Likewise, if the
    2064 \FCclient ntlmv2 auth\F[]
    2065 parameter is enabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be attempted\&.
    2066 .sp
    2067 Default:
    2068 \fI\fIclient lanman auth\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2069 .RE
    2070 
    2071 client ldap sasl wrapping (G)
    2072 .\" client ldap sasl wrapping
    2073 .PP
    2074 .RS 4
    2075 The
    2076 \m[blue]\fBclient ldap sasl wrapping\fR\m[]
    2077 defines whether ldap traffic will be signed or signed and encrypted (sealed)\&. Possible values are
    2078 \fIplain\fR,
    2079 \fIsign\fR
    2080 and
    2081 \fIseal\fR\&.
    2082 .sp
    2083 The values
    2084 \fIsign\fR
    2085 and
    2086 \fIseal\fR
    2087 are only available if Samba has been compiled against a modern OpenLDAP version (2\&.3\&.x or higher)\&.
    2088 .sp
    2089 This option is needed in the case of Domain Controllers enforcing the usage of signed LDAP connections (e\&.g\&. Windows 2000 SP3 or higher)\&. LDAP sign and seal can be controlled with the registry key "\FCHKLM\eSystem\eCurrentControlSet\eServices\e\F[]
    2090 \FCNTDS\eParameters\eLDAPServerIntegrity\F[]" on the Windows server side\&.
    2091 .sp
    2092 Depending on the used KRB5 library (MIT and older Heimdal versions) it is possible that the message "integrity only" is not supported\&. In this case,
    2093 \fIsign\fR
    2094 is just an alias for
    2095 \fIseal\fR\&.
    2096 .sp
    2097 The default value is
    2098 \fIplain\fR
    2099 which is not irritable to KRB5 clock skew errors\&. That implies synchronizing the time with the KDC in the case of using
    2100 \fIsign\fR
    2101 or
    2102 \fIseal\fR\&.
    2103 .sp
    2104 Default:
    2105 \fI\fIclient ldap sasl wrapping\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCplain\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2106 .RE
    2107 
    2108 client ntlmv2 auth (G)
    2109 .\" client ntlmv2 auth
    2110 .PP
    2111 .RS 4
    2112 This parameter determines whether or not
    2113 \fBsmbclient\fR(8)
    2114 will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the NTLMv2 encrypted password response\&.
    2115 .sp
    2116 If enabled, only an NTLMv2 and LMv2 response (both much more secure than earlier versions) will be sent\&. Many servers (including NT4 < SP4, Win9x and Samba 2\&.2) are not compatible with NTLMv2\&.
    2117 .sp
    2118 Similarly, if enabled, NTLMv1,
    2119 \FCclient lanman auth\F[]
    2120 and
    2121 \FCclient plaintext auth\F[]
    2122 authentication will be disabled\&. This also disables share\-level authentication\&.
    2123 .sp
    2124 If disabled, an NTLM response (and possibly a LANMAN response) will be sent by the client, depending on the value of
    2125 \FCclient lanman auth\F[]\&.
    2126 .sp
    2127 Note that some sites (particularly those following \'best practice\' security polices) only allow NTLMv2 responses, and not the weaker LM or NTLM\&.
    2128 .sp
    2129 Default:
    2130 \fI\fIclient ntlmv2 auth\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2131 .RE
    2132 
    2133 client plaintext auth (G)
    2134 .\" client plaintext auth
    2135 .PP
    2136 .RS 4
    2137 Specifies whether a client should send a plaintext password if the server does not support encrypted passwords\&.
    2138 .sp
    2139 Default:
    2140 \fI\fIclient plaintext auth\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2141 .RE
    2142 
    2143 client schannel (G)
    2144 .\" client schannel
    2145 .PP
    2146 .RS 4
    2147 This controls whether the client offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel\&.
    2148 \m[blue]\fBclient schannel = no\fR\m[]
    2149 does not offer the schannel,
    2150 \m[blue]\fBclient schannel = auto\fR\m[]
    2151 offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and
    2152 \m[blue]\fBclient schannel = yes\fR\m[]
    2153 denies access if the server is not able to speak netlogon schannel\&.
    2154 .sp
    2155 Default:
    2156 \fI\fIclient schannel\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCauto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2157 .sp
    2158 Example:
    2159 \fI\fIclient schannel\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2160 .RE
    2161 
    2162 client signing (G)
    2163 .\" client signing
    2164 .PP
    2165 .RS 4
    2166 This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB signing\&. Possible values are
    2167 \fIauto\fR,
    2168 \fImandatory\fR
    2169 and
    2170 \fIdisabled\fR\&.
    2171 .sp
    2172 When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced\&. When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either\&.
    2173 .sp
    2174 Default:
    2175 \fI\fIclient signing\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCauto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2176 .RE
    2177 
    2178 client use spnego (G)
    2179 .\" client use spnego
    2180 .PP
    2181 .RS 4
    2182 This variable controls whether Samba clients will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with supporting servers (including WindowsXP, Windows2000 and Samba 3\&.0) to agree upon an authentication mechanism\&. This enables Kerberos authentication in particular\&.
    2183 .sp
    2184 Default:
    2185 \fI\fIclient use spnego\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2186 .RE
    2187 
    2188 cluster addresses (G)
    2189 .\" cluster addresses
    2190 .PP
    2191 .RS 4
    2192 With this parameter you can add additional addresses nmbd will register with a WINS server\&. These addresses are not necessarily present on all nodes simultaneously, but they will be registered with the WINS server so that clients can contact any of the nodes\&.
    2193 .sp
    2194 Default:
    2195 \fI\fIcluster addresses\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2196 .sp
    2197 Example:
    2198 \fI\fIcluster addresses\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC10\&.0\&.0\&.1 10\&.0\&.0\&.2 10\&.0\&.0\&.3\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2199 .RE
    2200 
    2201 clustering (G)
    2202 .\" clustering
    2203 .PP
    2204 .RS 4
    2205 This parameter specifies whether Samba should contact ctdb for accessing its tdb files and use ctdb as a backend for its messaging backend\&.
    2206 .sp
    2207 Set this parameter to
    2208 \FCyes\F[]
    2209 only if you have a cluster setup with ctdb running\&.
    2210 .sp
    2211 Default:
    2212 \fI\fIclustering\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2213 .RE
    2214 
    2215 comment (S)
    2216 .\" comment
    2217 .PP
    2218 .RS 4
    2219 This is a text field that is seen next to a share when a client does a queries the server, either via the network neighborhood or via
    2220 \FCnet view\F[]
    2221 to list what shares are available\&.
    2222 .sp
    2223 If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the machine name then see the
    2224 \m[blue]\fBserver string\fR\m[]
    2225 parameter\&.
    2226 .sp
    2227 Default:
    2228 \fI\fIcomment\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # No comment\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2229 .sp
    2230 Example:
    2231 \fI\fIcomment\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCFred\'s Files\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2232 .RE
    2233 
    2234 config backend (G)
    2235 .\" config backend
    2236 .PP
    2237 .RS 4
    2238 This controls the backend for storing the configuration\&. Possible values are
    2239 \fIfile\fR
    2240 (the default) and
    2241 \fIregistry\fR\&. When
    2242 \m[blue]\fBconfig backend = registry\fR\m[]
    2243 is encountered while loading
    2244 \fIsmb\&.conf\fR, the configuration read so far is dropped and the global options are read from registry instead\&. So this triggers a registry only configuration\&. Share definitions are not read immediately but instead
    2245 \fIregistry shares\fR
    2246 is set to
    2247 \fIyes\fR\&.
    2248 .sp
    2249 Note: This option can not be set inside the registry configuration itself\&.
    2250 .sp
    2251 Default:
    2252 \fI\fIconfig backend\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCfile\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2253 .sp
    2254 Example:
    2255 \fI\fIconfig backend\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCregistry\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2256 .RE
    2257 
    2258 config file (G)
    2259 .\" config file
    2260 .PP
    2261 .RS 4
    2262 This allows you to override the config file to use, instead of the default (usually
    2263 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[])\&. There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set in the config file!
    2264 .sp
    2265 For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed when the parameters are loaded then it will reload them from the new config file\&.
    2266 .sp
    2267 This option takes the usual substitutions, which can be very useful\&.
    2268 .sp
    2269 If the config file doesn\'t exist then it won\'t be loaded (allowing you to special case the config files of just a few clients)\&.
    2270 .sp
    2271 \fINo default\fR
    2272 .sp
    2273 Example:
    2274 \fI\fIconfig file\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\&.%m\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2275 .RE
    2276 
    2277 copy (S)
    2278 .\" copy
    2279 .PP
    2280 .RS 4
    2281 This parameter allows you to "clone" service entries\&. The specified service is simply duplicated under the current service\'s name\&. Any parameters specified in the current section will override those in the section being copied\&.
    2282 .sp
    2283 This feature lets you set up a \'template\' service and create similar services easily\&. Note that the service being copied must occur earlier in the configuration file than the service doing the copying\&.
    2284 .sp
    2285 Default:
    2286 \fI\fIcopy\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2287 .sp
    2288 Example:
    2289 \fI\fIcopy\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCotherservice\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2290 .RE
    2291 
    2292 create krb5 conf (G)
    2293 .\" create krb5 conf
    2294 .PP
    2295 .RS 4
    2296 Setting this paramter to
    2297 \FCno\F[]
    2298 prevents winbind from creating custom krb5\&.conf files\&. Winbind normally does this because the krb5 libraries are not AD\-site\-aware and thus would pick any domain controller out of potentially very many\&. Winbind is site\-aware and makes the krb5 libraries use a local DC by creating its own krb5\&.conf files\&.
    2299 .sp
    2300 Preventing winbind from doing this might become necessary if you have to add special options into your system\-krb5\&.conf that winbind does not see\&.
    2301 .sp
    2302 Default:
    2303 \fI\fIcreate krb5 conf\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2304 .RE
    2305 
    2306 create mode
    2307 .\" create mode
    2308 .PP
    2309 .RS 4
    2310 This parameter is a synonym for
    2311 create mask\&.
    2312 .RE
    2313 
    2314 create mask (S)
    2315 .\" create mask
    2316 .PP
    2317 .RS 4
    2318 When a file is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit\-wise \'AND\'ed with this parameter\&. This parameter may be thought of as a bit\-wise MASK for the UNIX modes of a file\&. Any bit
    2319 \fInot\fR
    2320 set here will be removed from the modes set on a file when it is created\&.
    2321 .sp
    2322 The default value of this parameter removes the
    2323 \FCgroup\F[]
    2324 and
    2325 \FCother\F[]
    2326 write and execute bits from the UNIX modes\&.
    2327 .sp
    2328 Following this Samba will bit\-wise \'OR\' the UNIX mode created from this parameter with the value of the
    2329 \m[blue]\fBforce create mode\fR\m[]
    2330 parameter which is set to 000 by default\&.
    2331 .sp
    2332 This parameter does not affect directory masks\&. See the parameter
    2333 \m[blue]\fBdirectory mask\fR\m[]
    2334 for details\&.
    2335 .sp
    2336 Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors\&. If the administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the
    2337 \m[blue]\fBsecurity mask\fR\m[]\&.
    2338 .sp
    2339 Default:
    2340 \fI\fIcreate mask\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0744\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2341 .sp
    2342 Example:
    2343 \fI\fIcreate mask\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0775\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2344 .RE
    2345 
    2346 csc policy (S)
    2347 .\" csc policy
    2348 .PP
    2349 .RS 4
    2350 This stands for
    2351 \fIclient\-side caching policy\fR, and specifies how clients capable of offline caching will cache the files in the share\&. The valid values are: manual, documents, programs, disable\&.
    2352 .sp
    2353 These values correspond to those used on Windows servers\&.
    2354 .sp
    2355 For example, shares containing roaming profiles can have offline caching disabled using
    2356 \m[blue]\fBcsc policy = disable\fR\m[]\&.
    2357 .sp
    2358 Default:
    2359 \fI\fIcsc policy\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCmanual\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2360 .sp
    2361 Example:
    2362 \fI\fIcsc policy\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCprograms\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2363 .RE
    2364 
    2365 ctdbd socket (G)
    2366 .\" ctdbd socket
    2367 .PP
    2368 .RS 4
    2369 If you set
    2370 \FCclustering=yes\F[], you need to tell Samba where ctdbd listens on its unix domain socket\&. The default path as of ctdb 1\&.0 is /tmp/ctdb\&.socket which you have to explicitly set for Samba in smb\&.conf\&.
    2371 .sp
    2372 Default:
    2373 \fI\fIctdbd socket\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2374 .sp
    2375 Example:
    2376 \fI\fIctdbd socket\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/tmp/ctdb\&.socket\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2377 .RE
    2378 
    2379 ctdb timeout (G)
    2380 .\" ctdb timeout
    2381 .PP
    2382 .RS 4
    2383 This parameter specifies a timeout in seconds for the connection between Samba and ctdb\&. It is only valid if you have compiled Samba with clustering and if you have set
    2384 \fIclustering=yes\fR\&.
    2385 .sp
    2386 When something in the cluster blocks, it can happen that we wait indefinitely long for ctdb, just adding to the blocking condition\&. In a well\-running cluster this should never happen, but there are too many components in a cluster that might have hickups\&. Choosing the right balance for this value is very tricky, because on a busy cluster long service times to transfer something across the cluster might be valid\&. Setting it too short will degrade the service your cluster presents, setting it too long might make the cluster itself not recover from something severely broken for too long\&.
    2387 .sp
    2388 Be aware that if you set this parameter, this needs to be in the file smb\&.conf, it is not really helpful to put this into a registry configuration (typical on a cluster), because to access the registry contact to ctdb is requred\&.
    2389 .sp
    2390 Setting
    2391 \fIctdb timeout\fR
    2392 to n makes any process waiting longer than n seconds for a reply by the cluster panic\&. Setting it to 0 (the default) makes Samba block forever, which is the highly recommended default\&.
    2393 .sp
    2394 Default:
    2395 \fI\fIctdb timeout\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2396 .RE
    2397 
    2398 cups connection timeout (G)
    2399 .\" cups connection timeout
    2400 .PP
    2401 .RS 4
    2402 This parameter is only applicable if
    2403 \m[blue]\fBprinting\fR\m[]
    2404 is set to
    2405 \fBcups\fR\&.
    2406 .sp
    2407 If set, this option specifies the number of seconds that smbd will wait whilst trying to contact to the CUPS server\&. The connection will fail if it takes longer than this number of seconds\&.
    2408 .sp
    2409 Default:
    2410 \fI\fIcups connection timeout\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC30\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2411 .sp
    2412 Example:
    2413 \fI\fIcups connection timeout\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC60\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2414 .RE
    2415 
    2416 cups encrypt (G)
    2417 .\" cups encrypt
    2418 .PP
    2419 .RS 4
    2420 This parameter is only applicable if
    2421 \m[blue]\fBprinting\fR\m[]
    2422 is set to
    2423 \fBcups\fR
    2424 and if you use CUPS newer than 1\&.0\&.x\&.It is used to define whether or not Samba should use encryption when talking to the CUPS server\&. Possible values are
    2425 \fIauto\fR,
    2426 \fIyes\fR
    2427 and
    2428 \fIno\fR
    2429 .sp
    2430 When set to auto we will try to do a TLS handshake on each CUPS connection setup\&. If that fails, we will fall back to unencrypted operation\&.
    2431 .sp
    2432 Default:
    2433 \fI\fIcups encrypt\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC"no"\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2434 .RE
    2435 
    2436 cups options (S)
    2437 .\" cups options
    2438 .PP
    2439 .RS 4
    2440 This parameter is only applicable if
    2441 \m[blue]\fBprinting\fR\m[]
    2442 is set to
    2443 \fBcups\fR\&. Its value is a free form string of options passed directly to the cups library\&.
    2444 .sp
    2445 You can pass any generic print option known to CUPS (as listed in the CUPS "Software Users\' Manual")\&. You can also pass any printer specific option (as listed in "lpoptions \-d printername \-l") valid for the target queue\&. Multiple parameters should be space\-delimited name/value pairs according to the PAPI text option ABNF specification\&. Collection values ("name={a=\&.\&.\&. b=\&.\&.\&. c=\&.\&.\&.}") are stored with the curley brackets intact\&.
    2446 .sp
    2447 You should set this parameter to
    2448 \fBraw\fR
    2449 if your CUPS server
    2450 \FCerror_log\F[]
    2451 file contains messages such as "Unsupported format \'application/octet\-stream\'" when printing from a Windows client through Samba\&. It is no longer necessary to enable system wide raw printing in
    2452 \FC/etc/cups/mime\&.{convs,types}\F[]\&.
    2453 .sp
    2454 Default:
    2455 \fI\fIcups options\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC""\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2456 .sp
    2457 Example:
    2458 \fI\fIcups options\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC"raw media=a4"\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2459 .RE
    2460 
    2461 cups server (G)
    2462 .\" cups server
    2463 .PP
    2464 .RS 4
    2465 This parameter is only applicable if
    2466 \m[blue]\fBprinting\fR\m[]
    2467 is set to
    2468 \fBcups\fR\&.
    2469 .sp
    2470 If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS
    2471 \FCclient\&.conf\F[]\&. This is necessary if you have virtual samba servers that connect to different CUPS daemons\&.
    2472 .sp
    2473 Optionally, a port can be specified by separating the server name and port number with a colon\&. If no port was specified, the default port for IPP (631) will be used\&.
    2474 .sp
    2475 Default:
    2476 \fI\fIcups server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC""\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2477 .sp
    2478 Example:
    2479 \fI\fIcups server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCmycupsserver\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2480 .sp
    2481 Example:
    2482 \fI\fIcups server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCmycupsserver:1631\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2483 .RE
    2484 
    2485 deadtime (G)
    2486 .\" deadtime
    2487 .PP
    2488 .RS 4
    2489 The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and it is disconnected\&. The deadtime only takes effect if the number of open files is zero\&.
    2490 .sp
    2491 This is useful to stop a server\'s resources being exhausted by a large number of inactive connections\&.
    2492 .sp
    2493 Most clients have an auto\-reconnect feature when a connection is broken so in most cases this parameter should be transparent to users\&.
    2494 .sp
    2495 Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes is recommended for most systems\&.
    2496 .sp
    2497 A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto\-disconnection should be performed\&.
    2498 .sp
    2499 Default:
    2500 \fI\fIdeadtime\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2501 .sp
    2502 Example:
    2503 \fI\fIdeadtime\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC15\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2504 .RE
    2505 
    2506 debug class (G)
    2507 .\" debug class
    2508 .PP
    2509 .RS 4
    2510 With this boolean parameter enabled, the debug class (DBGC_CLASS) will be displayed in the debug header\&.
    2511 .sp
    2512 For more information about currently available debug classes, see section about
    2513 \m[blue]\fBlog level\fR\m[]\&.
    2514 .sp
    2515 Default:
    2516 \fI\fIdebug class\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2517 .RE
    2518 
    2519 debug hires timestamp (G)
    2520 .\" debug hires timestamp
    2521 .PP
    2522 .RS 4
    2523 Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp message header when turned on\&.
    2524 .sp
    2525 Note that the parameter
    2526 \m[blue]\fBdebug timestamp\fR\m[]
    2527 must be on for this to have an effect\&.
    2528 .sp
    2529 Default:
    2530 \fI\fIdebug hires timestamp\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2531 .RE
    2532 
    2533 debug pid (G)
    2534 .\" debug pid
    2535 .PP
    2536 .RS 4
    2537 When using only one log file for more then one forked
    2538 \fBsmbd\fR(8)\-process there may be hard to follow which process outputs which message\&. This boolean parameter is adds the process\-id to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on\&.
    2539 .sp
    2540 Note that the parameter
    2541 \m[blue]\fBdebug timestamp\fR\m[]
    2542 must be on for this to have an effect\&.
    2543 .sp
    2544 Default:
    2545 \fI\fIdebug pid\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2546 .RE
    2547 
    2548 debug prefix timestamp (G)
    2549 .\" debug prefix timestamp
    2550 .PP
    2551 .RS 4
    2552 With this option enabled, the timestamp message header is prefixed to the debug message without the filename and function information that is included with the
    2553 \m[blue]\fBdebug timestamp\fR\m[]
    2554 parameter\&. This gives timestamps to the messages without adding an additional line\&.
    2555 .sp
    2556 Note that this parameter overrides the
    2557 \m[blue]\fBdebug timestamp\fR\m[]
    2558 parameter\&.
    2559 .sp
    2560 Default:
    2561 \fI\fIdebug prefix timestamp\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2562 .RE
    2563 
    2564 timestamp logs
    2565 .\" timestamp logs
    2566 .PP
    2567 .RS 4
    2568 This parameter is a synonym for
    2569 debug timestamp\&.
    2570 .RE
    2571 
    2572 debug timestamp (G)
    2573 .\" debug timestamp
    2574 .PP
    2575 .RS 4
    2576 Samba debug log messages are timestamped by default\&. If you are running at a high
    2577 \m[blue]\fBdebug level\fR\m[]
    2578 these timestamps can be distracting\&. This boolean parameter allows timestamping to be turned off\&.
    2579 .sp
    2580 Default:
    2581 \fI\fIdebug timestamp\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2582 .RE
    2583 
    2584 debug uid (G)
    2585 .\" debug uid
    2586 .PP
    2587 .RS 4
    2588 Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers in the log file if turned on\&.
    2589 .sp
    2590 Note that the parameter
    2591 \m[blue]\fBdebug timestamp\fR\m[]
    2592 must be on for this to have an effect\&.
    2593 .sp
    2594 Default:
    2595 \fI\fIdebug uid\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2596 .RE
    2597 
    2598 dedicated keytab file (G)
    2599 .\" dedicated keytab file
    2600 .PP
    2601 .RS 4
    2602 Specifies the path to the kerberos keytab file when
    2603 \m[blue]\fBkerberos method\fR\m[]
    2604 is set to "dedicated keytab"\&.
    2605 .sp
    2606 Default:
    2607 \fI\fIdedicated keytab file\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2608 .sp
    2609 Example:
    2610 \fI\fIdedicated keytab file\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/etc/krb5\&.keytab\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2611 .RE
    2612 
    2613 default case (S)
    2614 .\" default case
    2615 .PP
    2616 .RS 4
    2617 See the section on
    2618 \m[blue]\fBname mangling\fR\m[]\&. Also note the
    2619 \m[blue]\fBshort preserve case\fR\m[]
    2620 parameter\&.
    2621 .sp
    2622 Default:
    2623 \fI\fIdefault case\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FClower\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2624 .RE
    2625 
    2626 default devmode (S)
    2627 .\" default devmode
    2628 .PP
    2629 .RS 4
    2630 This parameter is only applicable to
    2631 \m[blue]\fBprintable\fR\m[]
    2632 services\&. When smbd is serving Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba server has a Device Mode which defines things such as paper size and orientation and duplex settings\&. The device mode can only correctly be generated by the printer driver itself (which can only be executed on a Win32 platform)\&. Because smbd is unable to execute the driver code to generate the device mode, the default behavior is to set this field to NULL\&.
    2633 .sp
    2634 Most problems with serving printer drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients can be traced to a problem with the generated device mode\&. Certain drivers will do things such as crashing the client\'s Explorer\&.exe with a NULL devmode\&. However, other printer drivers can cause the client\'s spooler service (spoolsv\&.exe) to die if the devmode was not created by the driver itself (i\&.e\&. smbd generates a default devmode)\&.
    2635 .sp
    2636 This parameter should be used with care and tested with the printer driver in question\&. It is better to leave the device mode to NULL and let the Windows client set the correct values\&. Because drivers do not do this all the time, setting
    2637 \FCdefault devmode = yes\F[]
    2638 will instruct smbd to generate a default one\&.
    2639 .sp
    2640 For more information on Windows NT/2k printing and Device Modes, see the
    2641 MSDN documentation\&.
    2642 .sp
    2643 Default:
    2644 \fI\fIdefault devmode\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2645 .RE
    2646 
    2647 default
    2648 .\" default
    2649 .PP
    2650 .RS 4
    2651 This parameter is a synonym for
    2652 default service\&.
    2653 .RE
    2654 
    2655 default service (G)
    2656 .\" default service
    2657 .PP
    2658 .RS 4
    2659 This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot be found\&. Note that the square brackets are
    2660 \fINOT\fR
    2661 given in the parameter value (see example below)\&.
    2662 .sp
    2663 There is no default value for this parameter\&. If this parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent service results in an error\&.
    2664 .sp
    2665 Typically the default service would be a
    2666 \m[blue]\fBguest ok\fR\m[],
    2667 \m[blue]\fBread\-only\fR\m[]
    2668 service\&.
    2669 .sp
    2670 Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it allows you to use macros like
    2671 \fI%S\fR
    2672 to make a wildcard service\&.
    2673 .sp
    2674 Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service used in the default service will get mapped to a "/"\&. This allows for interesting things\&.
    2675 .sp
    2676 Default:
    2677 \fI\fIdefault service\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2678 .sp
    2679 Example:
    2680 \fI\fIdefault service\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCpub\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2681 .RE
    2682 
    2683 defer sharing violations (G)
    2684 .\" defer sharing violations
    2685 .PP
    2686 .RS 4
    2687 Windows allows specifying how a file will be shared with other processes when it is opened\&. Sharing violations occur when a file is opened by a different process using options that violate the share settings specified by other processes\&. This parameter causes smbd to act as a Windows server does, and defer returning a "sharing violation" error message for up to one second, allowing the client to close the file causing the violation in the meantime\&.
    2688 .sp
    2689 UNIX by default does not have this behaviour\&.
    2690 .sp
    2691 There should be no reason to turn off this parameter, as it is designed to enable Samba to more correctly emulate Windows\&.
    2692 .sp
    2693 Default:
    2694 \fI\fIdefer sharing violations\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCTrue\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2695 .RE
    2696 
    2697 delete group script (G)
    2698 .\" delete group script
    2699 .PP
    2700 .RS 4
    2701 This is the full pathname to a script that will be run
    2702 \fIAS ROOT\fR
    2703 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    2704 when a group is requested to be deleted\&. It will expand any
    2705 \fI%g\fR
    2706 to the group name passed\&. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&.
    2707 .sp
    2708 Default:
    2709 \fI\fIdelete group script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2710 .RE
    2711 
    2712 deleteprinter command (G)
    2713 .\" deleteprinter command
    2714 .PP
    2715 .RS 4
    2716 With the introduction of MS\-RPC based printer support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2\&.2, it is now possible to delete a printer at run time by issuing the DeletePrinter() RPC call\&.
    2717 .sp
    2718 For a Samba host this means that the printer must be physically deleted from the underlying printing system\&. The
    2719 \m[blue]\fBdeleteprinter command\fR\m[]
    2720 defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer from the print system and from
    2721 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&.
    2722 .sp
    2723 The
    2724 \m[blue]\fBdeleteprinter command\fR\m[]
    2725 is automatically called with only one parameter:
    2726 \m[blue]\fBprinter name\fR\m[]\&.
    2727 .sp
    2728 Once the
    2729 \m[blue]\fBdeleteprinter command\fR\m[]
    2730 has been executed,
    2731 \FCsmbd\F[]
    2732 will reparse the
    2733 \FC smb\&.conf\F[]
    2734 to check that the associated printer no longer exists\&. If the sharename is still valid, then
    2735 \FCsmbd \F[]
    2736 will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client\&.
    2737 .sp
    2738 Default:
    2739 \fI\fIdeleteprinter command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2740 .sp
    2741 Example:
    2742 \fI\fIdeleteprinter command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/bin/removeprinter\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2743 .RE
    2744 
    2745 delete readonly (S)
    2746 .\" delete readonly
    2747 .PP
    2748 .RS 4
    2749 This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted\&. This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX\&.
    2750 .sp
    2751 This option may be useful for running applications such as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file\&.
    2752 .sp
    2753 Default:
    2754 \fI\fIdelete readonly\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2755 .RE
    2756 
    2757 delete share command (G)
    2758 .\" delete share command
    2759 .PP
    2760 .RS 4
    2761 Samba 2\&.2\&.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4\&.0 Server Manager\&. The
    2762 \fIdelete share command\fR
    2763 is used to define an external program or script which will remove an existing service definition from
    2764 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&.
    2765 .sp
    2766 In order to successfully execute the
    2767 \fIdelete share command\fR,
    2768 \FCsmbd\F[]
    2769 requires that the administrator connects using a root account (i\&.e\&. uid == 0) or has the
    2770 \FCSeDiskOperatorPrivilege\F[]\&. Scripts defined in the
    2771 \fIdelete share command\fR
    2772 parameter are executed as root\&.
    2773 .sp
    2774 When executed,
    2775 \FCsmbd\F[]
    2776 will automatically invoke the
    2777 \fIdelete share command\fR
    2778 with two parameters\&.
    2779 .sp
    2780 .RS 4
    2781 .ie n \{\
    2782 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    2783 .\}
    2784 .el \{\
    2785 .sp -1
    2786 .IP \(bu 2.3
    2787 .\}
    2788 \fIconfigFile\fR
    2789 \- the location of the global
    2790 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
    2791 file\&.
    2792 .RE
    2793 .sp
    2794 .RS 4
    2795 .ie n \{\
    2796 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    2797 .\}
    2798 .el \{\
    2799 .sp -1
    2800 .IP \(bu 2.3
    2801 .\}
    2802 \fIshareName\fR
    2803 \- the name of the existing service\&.
    2804 .sp
    2805 .RE
    2806 This parameter is only used to remove file shares\&. To delete printer shares, see the
    2807 \m[blue]\fBdeleteprinter command\fR\m[]\&.
    2808 .sp
    2809 Default:
    2810 \fI\fIdelete share command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2811 .sp
    2812 Example:
    2813 \fI\fIdelete share command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/bin/delshare\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2814 .RE
    2815 
    2816 delete user from group script (G)
    2817 .\" delete user from group script
    2818 .PP
    2819 .RS 4
    2820 Full path to the script that will be called when a user is removed from a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&. It will be run by
    2821 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    2822 \fIAS ROOT\fR\&. Any
    2823 \fI%g\fR
    2824 will be replaced with the group name and any
    2825 \fI%u\fR
    2826 will be replaced with the user name\&.
    2827 .sp
    2828 Default:
    2829 \fI\fIdelete user from group script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2830 .sp
    2831 Example:
    2832 \fI\fIdelete user from group script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/sbin/deluser %u %g\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2833 .RE
    2834 
    2835 delete user script (G)
    2836 .\" delete user script
    2837 .PP
    2838 .RS 4
    2839 This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by
    2840 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    2841 when managing users with remote RPC (NT) tools\&.
    2842 .sp
    2843 This script is called when a remote client removes a user from the server, normally using \'User Manager for Domains\' or
    2844 \FCrpcclient\F[]\&.
    2845 .sp
    2846 This script should delete the given UNIX username\&.
    2847 .sp
    2848 Default:
    2849 \fI\fIdelete user script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2850 .sp
    2851 Example:
    2852 \fI\fIdelete user script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/samba/bin/del_user %u\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2853 .RE
    2854 
    2855 delete veto files (S)
    2856 .\" delete veto files
    2857 .PP
    2858 .RS 4
    2859 This option is used when Samba is attempting to delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories (see the
    2860 \m[blue]\fBveto files\fR\m[]
    2861 option)\&. If this option is set to
    2862 \fBno\fR
    2863 (the default) then if a vetoed directory contains any non\-vetoed files or directories then the directory delete will fail\&. This is usually what you want\&.
    2864 .sp
    2865 If this option is set to
    2866 \fByes\fR, then Samba will attempt to recursively delete any files and directories within the vetoed directory\&. This can be useful for integration with file serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta\-files within directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing (e\&.g\&.
    2867 \FC\&.AppleDouble\F[])
    2868 .sp
    2869 Setting
    2870 \m[blue]\fBdelete veto files = yes\fR\m[]
    2871 allows these directories to be transparently deleted when the parent directory is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so)\&.
    2872 .sp
    2873 Default:
    2874 \fI\fIdelete veto files\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2875 .RE
    2876 
    2877 dfree cache time (S)
    2878 .\" dfree cache time
    2879 .PP
    2880 .RS 4
    2881 The
    2882 \fIdfree cache time\fR
    2883 should only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations\&. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating systems\&. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the end of each directory listing\&.
    2884 .sp
    2885 This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version 3\&.0\&.21\&. It specifies in seconds the time that smbd will cache the output of a disk free query\&. If set to zero (the default) no caching is done\&. This allows a heavily loaded server to prevent rapid spawning of
    2886 \m[blue]\fBdfree command\fR\m[]
    2887 scripts increasing the load\&.
    2888 .sp
    2889 By default this parameter is zero, meaning no caching will be done\&.
    2890 .sp
    2891 \fINo default\fR
    2892 .sp
    2893 Example:
    2894 \fI\fIdfree cache time\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCdfree cache time = 60\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2895 .RE
    2896 
    2897 dfree command (S)
    2898 .\" dfree command
    2899 .PP
    2900 .RS 4
    2901 The
    2902 \fIdfree command\fR
    2903 setting should only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations\&. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating systems\&. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the end of each directory listing\&.
    2904 .sp
    2905 This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to calculate the total disk space and amount available with an external routine\&. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill this function\&.
    2906 .sp
    2907 In Samba version 3\&.0\&.21 this parameter has been changed to be a per\-share parameter, and in addition the parameter
    2908 \m[blue]\fBdfree cache time\fR\m[]
    2909 was added to allow the output of this script to be cached for systems under heavy load\&.
    2910 .sp
    2911 The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating a directory in the filesystem being queried\&. This will typically consist of the string
    2912 \FC\&./\F[]\&. The script should return two integers in ASCII\&. The first should be the total disk space in blocks, and the second should be the number of available blocks\&. An optional third return value can give the block size in bytes\&. The default blocksize is 1024 bytes\&.
    2913 .sp
    2914 Note: Your script should
    2915 \fINOT\fR
    2916 be setuid or setgid and should be owned by (and writeable only by) root!
    2917 .sp
    2918 Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:
    2919 .sp
    2920 .if n \{\
    2921 .RS 4
    2922 .\}
    2923 .fam C
    2924 .ps -1
    2925 .nf
    2926 .BB lightgray
    2927  
    2928 #!/bin/sh
    2929 df $1 | tail \-1 | awk \'{print $(NF\-4),$(NF\-2)}\'
    2930 .EB lightgray
    2931 .fi
    2932 .fam
    2933 .ps +1
    2934 .if n \{\
    2935 .RE
    2936 .\}
    2937 .sp
    2938 or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):
    2939 .sp
    2940 .if n \{\
    2941 .RS 4
    2942 .\}
    2943 .fam C
    2944 .ps -1
    2945 .nf
    2946 .BB lightgray
    2947  
    2948 #!/bin/sh
    2949 /usr/bin/df \-k $1 | tail \-1 | awk \'{print $3" "$5}\'
    2950 .EB lightgray
    2951 .fi
    2952 .fam
    2953 .ps +1
    2954 .if n \{\
    2955 .RE
    2956 .\}
    2957 .sp
    2958 Note that you may have to replace the command names with full path names on some systems\&.
    2959 .sp
    2960 By default internal routines for determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used\&.
    2961 .sp
    2962 \fINo default\fR
    2963 .sp
    2964 Example:
    2965 \fI\fIdfree command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/samba/bin/dfree\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2966 .RE
    2967 
    2968 directory mode
    2969 .\" directory mode
    2970 .PP
    2971 .RS 4
    2972 This parameter is a synonym for
    2973 directory mask\&.
    2974 .RE
    2975 
    2976 directory mask (S)
    2977 .\" directory mask
    2978 .PP
    2979 .RS 4
    2980 This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories\&.
    2981 .sp
    2982 When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit\-wise \'AND\'ed with this parameter\&. This parameter may be thought of as a bit\-wise MASK for the UNIX modes of a directory\&. Any bit
    2983 \fInot\fR
    2984 set here will be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is created\&.
    2985 .sp
    2986 The default value of this parameter removes the \'group\' and \'other\' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the user who owns the directory to modify it\&.
    2987 .sp
    2988 Following this Samba will bit\-wise \'OR\' the UNIX mode created from this parameter with the value of the
    2989 \m[blue]\fBforce directory mode\fR\m[]
    2990 parameter\&. This parameter is set to 000 by default (i\&.e\&. no extra mode bits are added)\&.
    2991 .sp
    2992 Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors\&. If the administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the
    2993 \m[blue]\fBdirectory security mask\fR\m[]\&.
    2994 .sp
    2995 Default:
    2996 \fI\fIdirectory mask\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0755\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    2997 .sp
    2998 Example:
    2999 \fI\fIdirectory mask\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0775\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3000 .RE
    3001 
    3002 directory name cache size (S)
    3003 .\" directory name cache size
    3004 .PP
    3005 .RS 4
    3006 This parameter specifies the the size of the directory name cache\&. It will be needed to turn this off for *BSD systems\&.
    3007 .sp
    3008 Default:
    3009 \fI\fIdirectory name cache size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC100\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3010 .RE
    3011 
    3012 directory security mask (S)
    3013 .\" directory security mask
    3014 .PP
    3015 .RS 4
    3016 This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits will be set when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box\&.
    3017 .sp
    3018 This parameter is applied as a mask (AND\'ed with) to the incoming permission bits, thus resetting any bits not in this mask\&. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with
    3019 \m[blue]\fBforce directory security mode\fR\m[], which works similar like this one but uses logical OR instead of AND\&. Essentially, zero bits in this mask are a set of bits that will always be set to zero\&.
    3020 .sp
    3021 Essentially, all bits set to zero in this mask will result in setting to zero the corresponding bits on the file permissions regardless of the previous status of this bits on the file\&.
    3022 .sp
    3023 If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0777 meaning a user is allowed to set all the user/group/world permissions on a directory\&.
    3024 .sp
    3025 \fINote\fR
    3026 that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it as the default of
    3027 \fB0777\fR\&.
    3028 .sp
    3029 Default:
    3030 \fI\fIdirectory security mask\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0777\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3031 .sp
    3032 Example:
    3033 \fI\fIdirectory security mask\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0700\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3034 .RE
    3035 
    3036 disable netbios (G)
    3037 .\" disable netbios
    3038 .PP
    3039 .RS 4
    3040 Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support in Samba\&. Netbios is the only available form of browsing in all windows versions except for 2000 and XP\&.
    3041 .if n \{\
    3042 .sp
    3043 .\}
    3044 .RS 4
    3045 .BM yellow
    3046 .it 1 an-trap
    3047 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    3048 .nr an-break-flag 1
    3049 .br
    3050 .ps +1
    3051 \fBNote\fR
    3052 .ps -1
    3053 .br
    3054 Clients that only support netbios won\'t be able to see your samba server when netbios support is disabled\&.
    3055 .sp .5v
    3056 .EM yellow
    3057 .RE
    3058 Default:
    3059 \fI\fIdisable netbios\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3060 .RE
    3061 
    3062 disable spoolss (G)
    3063 .\" disable spoolss
    3064 .PP
    3065 .RS 4
    3066 Enabling this parameter will disable Samba\'s support for the SPOOLSS set of MS\-RPC\'s and will yield identical behavior as Samba 2\&.0\&.x\&. Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using Lanman style printing commands\&. Windows 9x/ME will be unaffected by the parameter\&. However, this will also disable the ability to upload printer drivers to a Samba server via the Windows NT Add Printer Wizard or by using the NT printer properties dialog window\&. It will also disable the capability of Windows NT/2000 clients to download print drivers from the Samba host upon demand\&.
    3067 \fIBe very careful about enabling this parameter\&.\fR
    3068 .sp
    3069 Default:
    3070 \fI\fIdisable spoolss\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3071 .RE
    3072 
    3073 display charset (G)
    3074 .\" display charset
    3075 .PP
    3076 .RS 4
    3077 Specifies the charset that samba will use to print messages to stdout and stderr\&. The default value is "LOCALE", which means automatically set, depending on the current locale\&. The value should generally be the same as the value of the parameter
    3078 \m[blue]\fBunix charset\fR\m[]\&.
    3079 .sp
    3080 Default:
    3081 \fI\fIdisplay charset\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC"LOCALE" or "ASCII" (depending on the system)\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3082 .sp
    3083 Example:
    3084 \fI\fIdisplay charset\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCUTF8\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3085 .RE
    3086 
    3087 dmapi support (S)
    3088 .\" dmapi support
    3089 .PP
    3090 .RS 4
    3091 This parameter specifies whether Samba should use DMAPI to determine whether a file is offline or not\&. This would typically be used in conjunction with a hierarchical storage system that automatically migrates files to tape\&.
    3092 .sp
    3093 Note that Samba infers the status of a file by examining the events that a DMAPI application has registered interest in\&. This heuristic is satisfactory for a number of hierarchical storage systems, but there may be system for which it will fail\&. In this case, Samba may erroneously report files to be offline\&.
    3094 .sp
    3095 This parameter is only available if a supported DMAPI implementation was found at compilation time\&. It will only be used if DMAPI is found to enabled on the system at run time\&.
    3096 .sp
    3097 Default:
    3098 \fI\fIdmapi support\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3099 .RE
    3100 
    3101 dns proxy (G)
    3102 .\" dns proxy
    3103 .PP
    3104 .RS 4
    3105 Specifies that
    3106 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    3107 when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word\-for\-word as a DNS name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of the name\-querying client\&.
    3108 .sp
    3109 Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 characters, so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be 15 characters, maximum\&.
    3110 .sp
    3111 \FCnmbd\F[]
    3112 spawns a second copy of itself to do the DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking action\&.
    3113 .sp
    3114 Default:
    3115 \fI\fIdns proxy\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3116 .RE
    3117 
    3118 domain logons (G)
    3119 .\" domain logons
    3120 .PP
    3121 .RS 4
    3122 If set to
    3123 \fByes\fR, the Samba server will provide the netlogon service for Windows 9X network logons for the
    3124 \m[blue]\fBworkgroup\fR\m[]
    3125 it is in\&. This will also cause the Samba server to act as a domain controller for NT4 style domain services\&. For more details on setting up this feature see the Domain Control chapter of the Samba HOWTO Collection\&.
    3126 .sp
    3127 Default:
    3128 \fI\fIdomain logons\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3129 .RE
    3130 
    3131 domain master (G)
    3132 .\" domain master
    3133 .PP
    3134 .RS 4
    3135 Tell
    3136 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    3137 to enable WAN\-wide browse list collation\&. Setting this option causes
    3138 \FCnmbd\F[]
    3139 to claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a domain master browser for its given
    3140 \m[blue]\fBworkgroup\fR\m[]\&. Local master browsers in the same
    3141 \m[blue]\fBworkgroup\fR\m[]
    3142 on broadcast\-isolated subnets will give this
    3143 \FCnmbd\F[]
    3144 their local browse lists, and then ask
    3145 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    3146 for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area network\&. Browser clients will then contact their local master browser, and will receive the domain\-wide browse list, instead of just the list for their broadcast\-isolated subnet\&.
    3147 .sp
    3148 Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to claim this
    3149 \m[blue]\fBworkgroup\fR\m[]
    3150 specific special NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for that
    3151 \m[blue]\fBworkgroup\fR\m[]
    3152 by default (i\&.e\&. there is no way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this)\&. This means that if this parameter is set and
    3153 \FCnmbd\F[]
    3154 claims the special name for a
    3155 \m[blue]\fBworkgroup\fR\m[]
    3156 before a Windows NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave strangely and may fail\&.
    3157 .sp
    3158 If
    3159 \m[blue]\fBdomain logons = yes\fR\m[], then the default behavior is to enable the
    3160 \m[blue]\fBdomain master\fR\m[]
    3161 parameter\&. If
    3162 \m[blue]\fBdomain logons\fR\m[]
    3163 is not enabled (the default setting), then neither will
    3164 \m[blue]\fBdomain master\fR\m[]
    3165 be enabled by default\&.
    3166 .sp
    3167 When
    3168 \m[blue]\fBdomain logons = Yes\fR\m[]
    3169 the default setting for this parameter is Yes, with the result that Samba will be a PDC\&. If
    3170 \m[blue]\fBdomain master = No\fR\m[], Samba will function as a BDC\&. In general, this parameter should be set to \'No\' only on a BDC\&.
    3171 .sp
    3172 Default:
    3173 \fI\fIdomain master\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCauto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3174 .RE
    3175 
    3176 dont descend (S)
    3177 .\" dont descend
    3178 .PP
    3179 .RS 4
    3180 There are certain directories on some systems (e\&.g\&., the
    3181 \FC/proc\F[]
    3182 tree under Linux) that are either not of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive)\&. This parameter allows you to specify a comma\-delimited list of directories that the server should always show as empty\&.
    3183 .sp
    3184 Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format of the "dont descend" entries\&. For example you may need
    3185 \FC \&./proc\F[]
    3186 instead of just
    3187 \FC/proc\F[]\&. Experimentation is the best policy :\-)
    3188 .sp
    3189 Default:
    3190 \fI\fIdont descend\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3191 .sp
    3192 Example:
    3193 \fI\fIdont descend\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/proc,/dev\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3194 .RE
    3195 
    3196 dos charset (G)
    3197 .\" dos charset
    3198 .PP
    3199 .RS 4
    3200 DOS SMB clients assume the server has the same charset as they do\&. This option specifies which charset Samba should talk to DOS clients\&.
    3201 .sp
    3202 The default depends on which charsets you have installed\&. Samba tries to use charset 850 but falls back to ASCII in case it is not available\&. Run
    3203 \fBtestparm\fR(1)
    3204 to check the default on your system\&.
    3205 .sp
    3206 \fINo default\fR
    3207 .RE
    3208 
    3209 dos filemode (S)
    3210 .\" dos filemode
    3211 .PP
    3212 .RS 4
    3213 The default behavior in Samba is to provide UNIX\-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is able to change the permissions on it\&. However, this behavior is often confusing to DOS/Windows users\&. Enabling this parameter allows a user who has write access to the file (by whatever means, including an ACL permission) to modify the permissions (including ACL) on it\&. Note that a user belonging to the group owning the file will not be allowed to change permissions if the group is only granted read access\&. Ownership of the file/directory may also be changed\&. Note that using the VFS modules acl_xattr or acl_tdb which store native Windows as meta\-data will automatically turn this option on for any share for which they are loaded, as they require this option to emulate Windows ACLs correctly\&.
    3214 .sp
    3215 Default:
    3216 \fI\fIdos filemode\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3217 .RE
    3218 
    3219 dos filetime resolution (S)
    3220 .\" dos filetime resolution
    3221 .PP
    3222 .RS 4
    3223 Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest granularity on time resolution is two seconds\&. Setting this parameter for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second resolution is made to
    3224 \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&.
    3225 .sp
    3226 This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++ when used against Samba shares\&. If oplocks are enabled on a share, Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a file has changed since it was last read\&. One of these calls uses a one\-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity\&. As the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has changed\&. Setting this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is happy\&.
    3227 .sp
    3228 Default:
    3229 \fI\fIdos filetime resolution\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3230 .RE
    3231 
    3232 dos filetimes (S)
    3233 .\" dos filetimes
    3234 .PP
    3235 .RS 4
    3236 Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a file they can change the timestamp on it\&. Under POSIX semantics, only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp\&. By default, Samba emulates the DOS semantics and allows to change the timestamp on a file if the user
    3237 \FCsmbd\F[]
    3238 is acting on behalf has write permissions\&. Due to changes in Microsoft Office 2000 and beyond, the default for this parameter has been changed from "no" to "yes" in Samba 3\&.0\&.14 and above\&. Microsoft Excel will display dialog box warnings about the file being changed by another user if this parameter is not set to "yes" and files are being shared between users\&.
    3239 .sp
    3240 Default:
    3241 \fI\fIdos filetimes\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3242 .RE
    3243 
    3244 ea support (S)
    3245 .\" ea support
    3246 .PP
    3247 .RS 4
    3248 This boolean parameter controls whether
    3249 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    3250 will allow clients to attempt to store OS/2 style Extended attributes on a share\&. In order to enable this parameter the underlying filesystem exported by the share must support extended attributes (such as provided on XFS and EXT3 on Linux, with the correct kernel patches)\&. On Linux the filesystem must have been mounted with the mount option user_xattr in order for extended attributes to work, also extended attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel\&.
    3251 .sp
    3252 Default:
    3253 \fI\fIea support\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3254 .RE
    3255 
    3256 enable asu support (G)
    3257 .\" enable asu support
    3258 .PP
    3259 .RS 4
    3260 Hosts running the "Advanced Server for Unix (ASU)" product require some special accomodations such as creating a builtin [ADMIN$] share that only supports IPC connections\&. The has been the default behavior in smbd for many years\&. However, certain Microsoft applications such as the Print Migrator tool require that the remote server support an [ADMIN$} file share\&. Disabling this parameter allows for creating an [ADMIN$] file share in smb\&.conf\&.
    3261 .sp
    3262 Default:
    3263 \fI\fIenable asu support\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3264 .RE
    3265 
    3266 enable core files (G)
    3267 .\" enable core files
    3268 .PP
    3269 .RS 4
    3270 This parameter specifies whether core dumps should be written on internal exits\&. Normally set to
    3271 \fByes\fR\&. You should never need to change this\&.
    3272 .sp
    3273 Default:
    3274 \fI\fIenable core files\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3275 .sp
    3276 Example:
    3277 \fI\fIenable core files\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3278 .RE
    3279 
    3280 enable privileges (G)
    3281 .\" enable privileges
    3282 .PP
    3283 .RS 4
    3284 This parameter controls whether or not smbd will honor privileges assigned to specific SIDs via either
    3285 \FCnet rpc rights\F[]
    3286 or one of the Windows user and group manager tools\&. This parameter is enabled by default\&. It can be disabled to prevent members of the Domain Admins group from being able to assign privileges to users or groups which can then result in certain smbd operations running as root that would normally run under the context of the connected user\&.
    3287 .sp
    3288 An example of how privileges can be used is to assign the right to join clients to a Samba controlled domain without providing root access to the server via smbd\&.
    3289 .sp
    3290 Please read the extended description provided in the Samba HOWTO documentation\&.
    3291 .sp
    3292 Default:
    3293 \fI\fIenable privileges\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3294 .RE
    3295 
    3296 enable spoolss (G)
    3297 .\" enable spoolss
    3298 .PP
    3299 .RS 4
    3300 Inverted synonym for
    3301 \m[blue]\fBdisable spoolss\fR\m[]\&.
    3302 .sp
    3303 Default:
    3304 \fI\fIenable spoolss\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3305 .RE
    3306 
    3307 encrypt passwords (G)
    3308 .\" encrypt passwords
    3309 .PP
    3310 .RS 4
    3311 This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be negotiated with the client\&. Note that Windows NT 4\&.0 SP3 and above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords unless a registry entry is changed\&. To use encrypted passwords in Samba see the chapter "User Database" in the Samba HOWTO Collection\&.
    3312 .sp
    3313 MS Windows clients that expect Microsoft encrypted passwords and that do not have plain text password support enabled will be able to connect only to a Samba server that has encrypted password support enabled and for which the user accounts have a valid encrypted password\&. Refer to the smbpasswd command man page for information regarding the creation of encrypted passwords for user accounts\&.
    3314 .sp
    3315 The use of plain text passwords is NOT advised as support for this feature is no longer maintained in Microsoft Windows products\&. If you want to use plain text passwords you must set this parameter to no\&.
    3316 .sp
    3317 In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly
    3318 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    3319 must either have access to a local
    3320 \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5)
    3321 file (see the
    3322 \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8)
    3323 program for information on how to set up and maintain this file), or set the
    3324 \m[blue]\fBsecurity = [server|domain|ads]\fR\m[]
    3325 parameter which causes
    3326 \FCsmbd\F[]
    3327 to authenticate against another server\&.
    3328 .sp
    3329 Default:
    3330 \fI\fIencrypt passwords\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3331 .RE
    3332 
    3333 enhanced browsing (G)
    3334 .\" enhanced browsing
    3335 .PP
    3336 .RS 4
    3337 This option enables a couple of enhancements to cross\-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations\&.
    3338 .sp
    3339 The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular wildcard query to a Samba WINS server for all Domain Master Browsers, followed by a browse synchronization with each of the returned DMBs\&. The second enhancement consists of a regular randomised browse synchronization with all currently known DMBs\&.
    3340 .sp
    3341 You may wish to disable this option if you have a problem with empty workgroups not disappearing from browse lists\&. Due to the restrictions of the browse protocols, these enhancements can cause a empty workgroup to stay around forever which can be annoying\&.
    3342 .sp
    3343 In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes cross\-subnet browse propagation much more reliable\&.
    3344 .sp
    3345 Default:
    3346 \fI\fIenhanced browsing\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3347 .RE
    3348 
    3349 enumports command (G)
    3350 .\" enumports command
    3351 .PP
    3352 .RS 4
    3353 The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign to UNIX hosts\&. Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of a local port (i\&.e\&. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port (i\&.e\&. LPD Port Monitor, etc\&.\&.\&.)\&. By default, Samba has only one port defined\-\-\fB"Samba Printer Port"\fR\&. Under Windows NT/2000, all printers must have a valid port name\&. If you wish to have a list of ports displayed (\FCsmbd \F[]
    3354 does not use a port name for anything) other than the default
    3355 \fB"Samba Printer Port"\fR, you can define
    3356 \fIenumports command\fR
    3357 to point to a program which should generate a list of ports, one per line, to standard output\&. This listing will then be used in response to the level 1 and 2 EnumPorts() RPC\&.
    3358 .sp
    3359 Default:
    3360 \fI\fIenumports command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3361 .sp
    3362 Example:
    3363 \fI\fIenumports command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/bin/listports\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3364 .RE
    3365 
    3366 eventlog list (G)
    3367 .\" eventlog list
    3368 .PP
    3369 .RS 4
    3370 This option defines a list of log names that Samba will report to the Microsoft EventViewer utility\&. The listed eventlogs will be associated with tdb file on disk in the
    3371 \FC$(lockdir)/eventlog\F[]\&.
    3372 .sp
    3373 The administrator must use an external process to parse the normal Unix logs such as
    3374 \FC/var/log/messages\F[]
    3375 and write then entries to the eventlog tdb files\&. Refer to the eventlogadm(8) utility for how to write eventlog entries\&.
    3376 .sp
    3377 Default:
    3378 \fI\fIeventlog list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3379 .sp
    3380 Example:
    3381 \fI\fIeventlog list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCSecurity Application Syslog Apache\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3382 .RE
    3383 
    3384 fake directory create times (S)
    3385 .\" fake directory create times
    3386 .PP
    3387 .RS 4
    3388 NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create time for all files and directories\&. This is not the same as the ctime \- status change time \- that Unix keeps, so Samba by default reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep\&. Setting this parameter for a share causes Samba to always report midnight 1\-1\-1980 as the create time for directories\&.
    3389 .sp
    3390 This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++ when used against Samba shares\&. Visual C++ generated makefiles have the object directory as a dependency for each object file, and a make rule to create the directory\&. Also, when NMAKE compares timestamps it uses the creation time when examining a directory\&. Thus the object directory will be created if it does not exist, but once it does exist it will always have an earlier timestamp than the object files it contains\&.
    3391 .sp
    3392 However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or or deleted in the directory\&. NMAKE finds all object files in the object directory\&. The timestamp of the last one built is then compared to the timestamp of the object directory\&. If the directory\'s timestamp if newer, then all object files will be rebuilt\&. Enabling this option ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build will proceed as expected\&.
    3393 .sp
    3394 Default:
    3395 \fI\fIfake directory create times\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3396 .RE
    3397 
    3398 fake oplocks (S)
    3399 .\" fake oplocks
    3400 .PP
    3401 .RS 4
    3402 Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to locally cache file operations\&. If a server grants an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively cache file data\&. With some oplock types the client may even cache file open/close operations\&. This can give enormous performance benefits\&.
    3403 .sp
    3404 When you set
    3405 \FCfake oplocks = yes\F[],
    3406 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    3407 will always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using the file\&.
    3408 .sp
    3409 It is generally much better to use the real
    3410 \m[blue]\fBoplocks\fR\m[]
    3411 support rather than this parameter\&.
    3412 .sp
    3413 If you enable this option on all read\-only shares or shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a time such as physically read\-only media like CDROMs, you will see a big performance improvement on many operations\&. If you enable this option on shares where multiple clients may be accessing the files read\-write at the same time you can get data corruption\&. Use this option carefully!
    3414 .sp
    3415 Default:
    3416 \fI\fIfake oplocks\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3417 .RE
    3418 
    3419 follow symlinks (S)
    3420 .\" follow symlinks
    3421 .PP
    3422 .RS 4
    3423 This parameter allows the Samba administrator to stop
    3424 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    3425 from following symbolic links in a particular share\&. Setting this parameter to
    3426 \fBno\fR
    3427 prevents any file or directory that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an error)\&. This option is very useful to stop users from adding a symbolic link to
    3428 \FC/etc/passwd\F[]
    3429 in their home directory for instance\&. However it will slow filename lookups down slightly\&.
    3430 .sp
    3431 This option is enabled (i\&.e\&.
    3432 \FCsmbd\F[]
    3433 will follow symbolic links) by default\&.
    3434 .sp
    3435 Default:
    3436 \fI\fIfollow symlinks\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3437 .RE
    3438 
    3439 force create mode (S)
    3440 .\" force create mode
    3441 .PP
    3442 .RS 4
    3443 This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will
    3444 \fIalways\fR
    3445 be set on a file created by Samba\&. This is done by bitwise \'OR\'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a file that is being created\&. The default for this parameter is (in octal) 000\&. The modes in this parameter are bitwise \'OR\'ed onto the file mode after the mask set in the
    3446 \fIcreate mask\fR
    3447 parameter is applied\&.
    3448 .sp
    3449 The example below would force all newly created files to have read and execute permissions set for \'group\' and \'other\' as well as the read/write/execute bits set for the \'user\'\&.
    3450 .sp
    3451 Default:
    3452 \fI\fIforce create mode\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3453 .sp
    3454 Example:
    3455 \fI\fIforce create mode\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0755\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3456 .RE
    3457 
    3458 force directory mode (S)
    3459 .\" force directory mode
    3460 .PP
    3461 .RS 4
    3462 This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will
    3463 \fIalways\fR
    3464 be set on a directory created by Samba\&. This is done by bitwise \'OR\'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a directory that is being created\&. The default for this parameter is (in octal) 0000 which will not add any extra permission bits to a created directory\&. This operation is done after the mode mask in the parameter
    3465 \fIdirectory mask\fR
    3466 is applied\&.
    3467 .sp
    3468 The example below would force all created directories to have read and execute permissions set for \'group\' and \'other\' as well as the read/write/execute bits set for the \'user\'\&.
    3469 .sp
    3470 Default:
    3471 \fI\fIforce directory mode\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3472 .sp
    3473 Example:
    3474 \fI\fIforce directory mode\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0755\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3475 .RE
    3476 
    3477 force directory security mode (S)
    3478 .\" force directory security mode
    3479 .PP
    3480 .RS 4
    3481 This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box\&.
    3482 .sp
    3483 This parameter is applied as a mask (OR\'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that the user may have modified to be on\&. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with
    3484 \m[blue]\fBdirectory security mask\fR\m[], which works in a similar manner to this one, but uses a logical AND instead of an OR\&.
    3485 .sp
    3486 Essentially, this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a directory, to will enable (1) any flags that are off (0) but which the mask has set to on (1)\&.
    3487 .sp
    3488 If not set explicitly this parameter is 0000, which allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory without restrictions\&.
    3489 .if n \{\
    3490 .sp
    3491 .\}
    3492 .RS 4
    3493 .BM yellow
    3494 .it 1 an-trap
    3495 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    3496 .nr an-break-flag 1
    3497 .br
    3498 .ps +1
    3499 \fBNote\fR
    3500 .ps -1
    3501 .br
    3502 Users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it set as 0000\&.
    3503 .sp .5v
    3504 .EM yellow
    3505 .RE
    3506 Default:
    3507 \fI\fIforce directory security mode\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3508 .sp
    3509 Example:
    3510 \fI\fIforce directory security mode\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC700\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3511 .RE
    3512 
    3513 group
    3514 .\" group
    3515 .PP
    3516 .RS 4
    3517 This parameter is a synonym for
    3518 force group\&.
    3519 .RE
    3520 
    3521 force group (S)
    3522 .\" force group
    3523 .PP
    3524 .RS 4
    3525 This specifies a UNIX group name that will be assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting to this service\&. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring that all access to files on service will use the named group for their permissions checking\&. Thus, by assigning permissions for this group to the files and directories within this service the Samba administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these files\&.
    3526 .sp
    3527 In Samba 2\&.0\&.5 and above this parameter has extended functionality in the following way\&. If the group name listed here has a \'+\' character prepended to it then the current user accessing the share only has the primary group default assigned to this group if they are already assigned as a member of that group\&. This allows an administrator to decide that only users who are already in a particular group will create files with group ownership set to that group\&. This gives a finer granularity of ownership assignment\&. For example, the setting
    3528 \FCforce group = +sys\F[]
    3529 means that only users who are already in group sys will have their default primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share\&. All other users will retain their ordinary primary group\&.
    3530 .sp
    3531 If the
    3532 \m[blue]\fBforce user\fR\m[]
    3533 parameter is also set the group specified in
    3534 \fIforce group\fR
    3535 will override the primary group set in
    3536 \fIforce user\fR\&.
    3537 .sp
    3538 Default:
    3539 \fI\fIforce group\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3540 .sp
    3541 Example:
    3542 \fI\fIforce group\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCagroup\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3543 .RE
    3544 
    3545 force printername (S)
    3546 .\" force printername
    3547 .PP
    3548 .RS 4
    3549 When printing from Windows NT (or later), each printer in
    3550 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
    3551 has two associated names which can be used by the client\&. The first is the sharename (or shortname) defined in smb\&.conf\&. This is the only printername available for use by Windows 9x clients\&. The second name associated with a printer can be seen when browsing to the "Printers" (or "Printers and Faxes") folder on the Samba server\&. This is referred to simply as the printername (not to be confused with the
    3552 \fIprinter name\fR
    3553 option)\&.
    3554 .sp
    3555 When assigning a new driver to a printer on a remote Windows compatible print server such as Samba, the Windows client will rename the printer to match the driver name just uploaded\&. This can result in confusion for users when multiple printers are bound to the same driver\&. To prevent Samba from allowing the printer\'s printername to differ from the sharename defined in smb\&.conf, set
    3556 \fIforce printername = yes\fR\&.
    3557 .sp
    3558 Be aware that enabling this parameter may affect migrating printers from a Windows server to Samba since Windows has no way to force the sharename and printername to match\&.
    3559 .sp
    3560 It is recommended that this parameter\'s value not be changed once the printer is in use by clients as this could cause a user not be able to delete printer connections from their local Printers folder\&.
    3561 .sp
    3562 Default:
    3563 \fI\fIforce printername\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3564 .RE
    3565 
    3566 force security mode (S)
    3567 .\" force security mode
    3568 .PP
    3569 .RS 4
    3570 This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box\&.
    3571 .sp
    3572 This parameter is applied as a mask (OR\'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that the user may have modified to be on\&. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with
    3573 \m[blue]\fBsecurity mask\fR\m[], which works similar like this one but uses logical AND instead of OR\&.
    3574 .sp
    3575 Essentially, one bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be on\&.
    3576 .sp
    3577 If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0, and allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, with no restrictions\&.
    3578 .sp
    3579 \fI Note\fR
    3580 that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave this set to 0000\&.
    3581 .sp
    3582 Default:
    3583 \fI\fIforce security mode\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3584 .sp
    3585 Example:
    3586 \fI\fIforce security mode\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC700\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3587 .RE
    3588 
    3589 force unknown acl user (S)
    3590 .\" force unknown acl user
    3591 .PP
    3592 .RS 4
    3593 If this parameter is set, a Windows NT ACL that contains an unknown SID (security descriptor, or representation of a user or group id) as the owner or group owner of the file will be silently mapped into the current UNIX uid or gid of the currently connected user\&.
    3594 .sp
    3595 This is designed to allow Windows NT clients to copy files and folders containing ACLs that were created locally on the client machine and contain users local to that machine only (no domain users) to be copied to a Samba server (usually with XCOPY /O) and have the unknown userid and groupid of the file owner map to the current connected user\&. This can only be fixed correctly when winbindd allows arbitrary mapping from any Windows NT SID to a UNIX uid or gid\&.
    3596 .sp
    3597 Try using this parameter when XCOPY /O gives an ACCESS_DENIED error\&.
    3598 .sp
    3599 Default:
    3600 \fI\fIforce unknown acl user\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3601 .RE
    3602 
    3603 force user (S)
    3604 .\" force user
    3605 .PP
    3606 .RS 4
    3607 This specifies a UNIX user name that will be assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service\&. This is useful for sharing files\&. You should also use it carefully as using it incorrectly can cause security problems\&.
    3608 .sp
    3609 This user name only gets used once a connection is established\&. Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a valid password\&. Once connected, all file operations will be performed as the "forced user", no matter what username the client connected as\&. This can be very useful\&.
    3610 .sp
    3611 In Samba 2\&.0\&.5 and above this parameter also causes the primary group of the forced user to be used as the primary group for all file activity\&. Prior to 2\&.0\&.5 the primary group was left as the primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug)\&.
    3612 .sp
    3613 Default:
    3614 \fI\fIforce user\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3615 .sp
    3616 Example:
    3617 \fI\fIforce user\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCauser\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3618 .RE
    3619 
    3620 fstype (S)
    3621 .\" fstype
    3622 .PP
    3623 .RS 4
    3624 This parameter allows the administrator to configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share is using that is reported by
    3625 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    3626 when a client queries the filesystem type for a share\&. The default type is
    3627 \fBNTFS\fR
    3628 for compatibility with Windows NT but this can be changed to other strings such as
    3629 \fBSamba\fR
    3630 or
    3631 \fBFAT\fR
    3632 if required\&.
    3633 .sp
    3634 Default:
    3635 \fI\fIfstype\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNTFS\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3636 .sp
    3637 Example:
    3638 \fI\fIfstype\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCSamba\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3639 .RE
    3640 
    3641 get quota command (G)
    3642 .\" get quota command
    3643 .PP
    3644 .RS 4
    3645 The
    3646 \FCget quota command\F[]
    3647 should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use\&.
    3648 .sp
    3649 This option is only available you have compiled Samba with the
    3650 \FC\-\-with\-sys\-quotas\F[]
    3651 option or on Linux with
    3652 \FC\-\-with\-quotas\F[]
    3653 and a working quota api was found in the system\&.
    3654 .sp
    3655 This parameter should specify the path to a script that queries the quota information for the specified user/group for the partition that the specified directory is on\&.
    3656 .sp
    3657 Such a script should take 3 arguments:
    3658 .sp
    3659 .RS 4
    3660 .ie n \{\
    3661 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3662 .\}
    3663 .el \{\
    3664 .sp -1
    3665 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3666 .\}
    3667 directory
    3668 .RE
    3669 .sp
    3670 .RS 4
    3671 .ie n \{\
    3672 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3673 .\}
    3674 .el \{\
    3675 .sp -1
    3676 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3677 .\}
    3678 type of query
    3679 .RE
    3680 .sp
    3681 .RS 4
    3682 .ie n \{\
    3683 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3684 .\}
    3685 .el \{\
    3686 .sp -1
    3687 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3688 .\}
    3689 uid of user or gid of group
    3690 .sp
    3691 .RE
    3692 The type of query can be one of :
    3693 .sp
    3694 .RS 4
    3695 .ie n \{\
    3696 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3697 .\}
    3698 .el \{\
    3699 .sp -1
    3700 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3701 .\}
    3702 1 \- user quotas
    3703 .RE
    3704 .sp
    3705 .RS 4
    3706 .ie n \{\
    3707 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3708 .\}
    3709 .el \{\
    3710 .sp -1
    3711 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3712 .\}
    3713 2 \- user default quotas (uid = \-1)
    3714 .RE
    3715 .sp
    3716 .RS 4
    3717 .ie n \{\
    3718 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3719 .\}
    3720 .el \{\
    3721 .sp -1
    3722 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3723 .\}
    3724 3 \- group quotas
    3725 .RE
    3726 .sp
    3727 .RS 4
    3728 .ie n \{\
    3729 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3730 .\}
    3731 .el \{\
    3732 .sp -1
    3733 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3734 .\}
    3735 4 \- group default quotas (gid = \-1)
    3736 .sp
    3737 .RE
    3738 This script should print one line as output with spaces between the arguments\&. The arguments are:
    3739 .sp
    3740 .RS 4
    3741 .ie n \{\
    3742 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3743 .\}
    3744 .el \{\
    3745 .sp -1
    3746 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3747 .\}
    3748 Arg 1 \- quota flags (0 = no quotas, 1 = quotas enabled, 2 = quotas enabled and enforced)
    3749 .RE
    3750 .sp
    3751 .RS 4
    3752 .ie n \{\
    3753 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3754 .\}
    3755 .el \{\
    3756 .sp -1
    3757 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3758 .\}
    3759 Arg 2 \- number of currently used blocks
    3760 .RE
    3761 .sp
    3762 .RS 4
    3763 .ie n \{\
    3764 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3765 .\}
    3766 .el \{\
    3767 .sp -1
    3768 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3769 .\}
    3770 Arg 3 \- the softlimit number of blocks
    3771 .RE
    3772 .sp
    3773 .RS 4
    3774 .ie n \{\
    3775 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3776 .\}
    3777 .el \{\
    3778 .sp -1
    3779 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3780 .\}
    3781 Arg 4 \- the hardlimit number of blocks
    3782 .RE
    3783 .sp
    3784 .RS 4
    3785 .ie n \{\
    3786 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3787 .\}
    3788 .el \{\
    3789 .sp -1
    3790 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3791 .\}
    3792 Arg 5 \- currently used number of inodes
    3793 .RE
    3794 .sp
    3795 .RS 4
    3796 .ie n \{\
    3797 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3798 .\}
    3799 .el \{\
    3800 .sp -1
    3801 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3802 .\}
    3803 Arg 6 \- the softlimit number of inodes
    3804 .RE
    3805 .sp
    3806 .RS 4
    3807 .ie n \{\
    3808 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3809 .\}
    3810 .el \{\
    3811 .sp -1
    3812 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3813 .\}
    3814 Arg 7 \- the hardlimit number of inodes
    3815 .RE
    3816 .sp
    3817 .RS 4
    3818 .ie n \{\
    3819 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    3820 .\}
    3821 .el \{\
    3822 .sp -1
    3823 .IP \(bu 2.3
    3824 .\}
    3825 Arg 8(optional) \- the number of bytes in a block(default is 1024)
    3826 .sp
    3827 .RE
    3828 Default:
    3829 \fI\fIget quota command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3830 .sp
    3831 Example:
    3832 \fI\fIget quota command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/sbin/query_quota\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3833 .RE
    3834 
    3835 getwd cache (G)
    3836 .\" getwd cache
    3837 .PP
    3838 .RS 4
    3839 This is a tuning option\&. When this is enabled a caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls\&. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially when the
    3840 \m[blue]\fBwide smbconfoptions\fR\m[]
    3841 parameter is set to
    3842 \fBno\fR\&.
    3843 .sp
    3844 Default:
    3845 \fI\fIgetwd cache\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3846 .RE
    3847 
    3848 guest account (G)
    3849 .\" guest account
    3850 .PP
    3851 .RS 4
    3852 This is a username which will be used for access to services which are specified as
    3853 \m[blue]\fBguest ok\fR\m[]
    3854 (see below)\&. Whatever privileges this user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service\&. This user must exist in the password file, but does not require a valid login\&. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice for this parameter\&.
    3855 .sp
    3856 On some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not be able to print\&. Use another account in this case\&. You should test this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the
    3857 \FCsu \-\F[]
    3858 command) and trying to print using the system print command such as
    3859 \FClpr(1)\F[]
    3860 or
    3861 \FC lp(1)\F[]\&.
    3862 .sp
    3863 This parameter does not accept % macros, because many parts of the system require this value to be constant for correct operation\&.
    3864 .sp
    3865 Default:
    3866 \fI\fIguest account\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCnobody # default can be changed at compile\-time\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3867 .sp
    3868 Example:
    3869 \fI\fIguest account\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCftp\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3870 .RE
    3871 
    3872 public
    3873 .\" public
    3874 .PP
    3875 .RS 4
    3876 This parameter is a synonym for
    3877 guest ok\&.
    3878 .RE
    3879 
    3880 guest ok (S)
    3881 .\" guest ok
    3882 .PP
    3883 .RS 4
    3884 If this parameter is
    3885 \fByes\fR
    3886 for a service, then no password is required to connect to the service\&. Privileges will be those of the
    3887 \m[blue]\fBguest account\fR\m[]\&.
    3888 .sp
    3889 This paramater nullifies the benifits of setting
    3890 \m[blue]\fBrestrict anonymous = 2\fR\m[]
    3891 .sp
    3892 See the section below on
    3893 \m[blue]\fBsecurity\fR\m[]
    3894 for more information about this option\&.
    3895 .sp
    3896 Default:
    3897 \fI\fIguest ok\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3898 .RE
    3899 
    3900 only guest
    3901 .\" only guest
    3902 .PP
    3903 .RS 4
    3904 This parameter is a synonym for
    3905 guest only\&.
    3906 .RE
    3907 
    3908 guest only (S)
    3909 .\" guest only
    3910 .PP
    3911 .RS 4
    3912 If this parameter is
    3913 \fByes\fR
    3914 for a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted\&. This parameter will have no effect if
    3915 \m[blue]\fBguest ok\fR\m[]
    3916 is not set for the service\&.
    3917 .sp
    3918 See the section below on
    3919 \m[blue]\fBsecurity\fR\m[]
    3920 for more information about this option\&.
    3921 .sp
    3922 Default:
    3923 \fI\fIguest only\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3924 .RE
    3925 
    3926 hide dot files (S)
    3927 .\" hide dot files
    3928 .PP
    3929 .RS 4
    3930 This is a boolean parameter that controls whether files starting with a dot appear as hidden files\&.
    3931 .sp
    3932 Default:
    3933 \fI\fIhide dot files\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3934 .RE
    3935 
    3936 hide files (S)
    3937 .\" hide files
    3938 .PP
    3939 .RS 4
    3940 This is a list of files or directories that are not visible but are accessible\&. The DOS \'hidden\' attribute is applied to any files or directories that match\&.
    3941 .sp
    3942 Each entry in the list must be separated by a \'/\', which allows spaces to be included in the entry\&. \'*\' and \'?\' can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards\&.
    3943 .sp
    3944 Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must not include the Unix directory separator \'/\'\&.
    3945 .sp
    3946 Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable in hiding files\&.
    3947 .sp
    3948 Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as they are scanned\&.
    3949 .sp
    3950 The example shown above is based on files that the Macintosh SMB client (DAVE) available from
    3951 Thursby
    3952 creates for internal use, and also still hides all files beginning with a dot\&.
    3953 .sp
    3954 An example of us of this parameter is:
    3955 .sp
    3956 .if n \{\
    3957 .RS 4
    3958 .\}
    3959 .fam C
    3960 .ps -1
    3961 .nf
    3962 .if t \{\
    3963 .sp -1
    3964 .\}
    3965 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    3966 .sp -1
    3967 
    3968 hide files = /\&.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource\&.frk/
    3969 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    3970 .if t \{\
    3971 .sp 1
    3972 .\}
    3973 .fi
    3974 .fam
    3975 .ps +1
    3976 .if n \{\
    3977 .RE
    3978 .\}
    3979 .sp
    3980 Default:
    3981 \fI\fIhide files\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # no file are hidden\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3982 .RE
    3983 
    3984 hide special files (S)
    3985 .\" hide special files
    3986 .PP
    3987 .RS 4
    3988 This parameter prevents clients from seeing special files such as sockets, devices and fifo\'s in directory listings\&.
    3989 .sp
    3990 Default:
    3991 \fI\fIhide special files\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    3992 .RE
    3993 
    3994 hide unreadable (S)
    3995 .\" hide unreadable
    3996 .PP
    3997 .RS 4
    3998 This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be read\&. Defaults to off\&.
    3999 .sp
    4000 Default:
    4001 \fI\fIhide unreadable\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4002 .RE
    4003 
    4004 hide unwriteable files (S)
    4005 .\" hide unwriteable files
    4006 .PP
    4007 .RS 4
    4008 This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be written to\&. Defaults to off\&. Note that unwriteable directories are shown as usual\&.
    4009 .sp
    4010 Default:
    4011 \fI\fIhide unwriteable files\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4012 .RE
    4013 
    4014 homedir map (G)
    4015 .\" homedir map
    4016 .PP
    4017 .RS 4
    4018 If
    4019 \m[blue]\fBnis homedir\fR\m[]
    4020 is
    4021 \fByes\fR, and
    4022 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    4023 is also acting as a Win95/98
    4024 \fIlogon server\fR
    4025 then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user\'s home directory should be extracted\&. At present, only the Sun auto\&.home map format is understood\&. The form of the map is:
    4026 .sp
    4027 .if n \{\
    4028 .RS 4
    4029 .\}
    4030 .fam C
    4031 .ps -1
    4032 .nf
    4033 .if t \{\
    4034 .sp -1
    4035 .\}
    4036 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    4037 .sp -1
    4038 
    4039 \FCusername server:/some/file/system\F[]
    4040 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    4041 .if t \{\
    4042 .sp 1
    4043 .\}
    4044 .fi
    4045 .fam
    4046 .ps +1
    4047 .if n \{\
    4048 .RE
    4049 .\}
    4050 .sp
    4051 and the program will extract the servername from before the first \':\'\&. There should probably be a better parsing system that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another automounter) maps\&.
    4052 .if n \{\
    4053 .sp
    4054 .\}
    4055 .RS 4
    4056 .BM yellow
    4057 .it 1 an-trap
    4058 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    4059 .nr an-break-flag 1
    4060 .br
    4061 .ps +1
    4062 \fBNote\fR
    4063 .ps -1
    4064 .br
    4065 A working NIS client is required on the system for this option to work\&.
    4066 .sp .5v
    4067 .EM yellow
    4068 .RE
    4069 Default:
    4070 \fI\fIhomedir map\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4071 .sp
    4072 Example:
    4073 \fI\fIhomedir map\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCamd\&.homedir\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4074 .RE
    4075 
    4076 host msdfs (G)
    4077 .\" host msdfs
    4078 .PP
    4079 .RS 4
    4080 If set to
    4081 \fByes\fR, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs\-aware clients to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server\&.
    4082 .sp
    4083 See also the
    4084 \m[blue]\fBmsdfs root\fR\m[]
    4085 share level parameter\&. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to the MSFDS chapter in the book Samba3\-HOWTO\&.
    4086 .sp
    4087 Default:
    4088 \fI\fIhost msdfs\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4089 .RE
    4090 
    4091 hostname lookups (G)
    4092 .\" hostname lookups
    4093 .PP
    4094 .RS 4
    4095 Specifies whether samba should use (expensive) hostname lookups or use the ip addresses instead\&. An example place where hostname lookups are currently used is when checking the
    4096 \FChosts deny\F[]
    4097 and
    4098 \FChosts allow\F[]\&.
    4099 .sp
    4100 Default:
    4101 \fI\fIhostname lookups\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4102 .sp
    4103 Example:
    4104 \fI\fIhostname lookups\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4105 .RE
    4106 
    4107 allow hosts
    4108 .\" allow hosts
    4109 .PP
    4110 .RS 4
    4111 This parameter is a synonym for
    4112 hosts allow\&.
    4113 .RE
    4114 
    4115 hosts allow (S)
    4116 .\" hosts allow
    4117 .PP
    4118 .RS 4
    4119 A synonym for this parameter is
    4120 \m[blue]\fBallow hosts\fR\m[]\&.
    4121 .sp
    4122 This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited set of hosts which are permitted to access a service\&.
    4123 .sp
    4124 If specified in the [global] section then it will apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual service has a different setting\&.
    4125 .sp
    4126 You can specify the hosts by name or IP number\&. For example, you could restrict access to only the hosts on a Class C subnet with something like
    4127 \FCallow hosts = 150\&.203\&.5\&.\F[]\&. The full syntax of the list is described in the man page
    4128 \FChosts_access(5)\F[]\&. Note that this man page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will be given here also\&.
    4129 .sp
    4130 Note that the localhost address 127\&.0\&.0\&.1 will always be allowed access unless specifically denied by a
    4131 \m[blue]\fBhosts deny\fR\m[]
    4132 option\&.
    4133 .sp
    4134 You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups\&. The
    4135 \fIEXCEPT\fR
    4136 keyword can also be used to limit a wildcard list\&. The following examples may provide some help:
    4137 .sp
    4138 Example 1: allow all IPs in 150\&.203\&.*\&.*; except one
    4139 .sp
    4140 \FChosts allow = 150\&.203\&. EXCEPT 150\&.203\&.6\&.66\F[]
    4141 .sp
    4142 Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask
    4143 .sp
    4144 \FChosts allow = 150\&.203\&.15\&.0/255\&.255\&.255\&.0\F[]
    4145 .sp
    4146 Example 3: allow a couple of hosts
    4147 .sp
    4148 \FChosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur\F[]
    4149 .sp
    4150 Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but deny access from one particular host
    4151 .sp
    4152 \FChosts allow = @foonet\F[]
    4153 .sp
    4154 \FChosts deny = pirate\F[]
    4155 .if n \{\
    4156 .sp
    4157 .\}
    4158 .RS 4
    4159 .BM yellow
    4160 .it 1 an-trap
    4161 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    4162 .nr an-break-flag 1
    4163 .br
    4164 .ps +1
    4165 \fBNote\fR
    4166 .ps -1
    4167 .br
    4168 Note that access still requires suitable user\-level passwords\&.
    4169 .sp .5v
    4170 .EM yellow
    4171 .RE
    4172 See
    4173 \fBtestparm\fR(1)
    4174 for a way of testing your host access to see if it does what you expect\&.
    4175 .sp
    4176 Default:
    4177 \fI\fIhosts allow\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # none (i\&.e\&., all hosts permitted access)\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4178 .sp
    4179 Example:
    4180 \fI\fIhosts allow\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC150\&.203\&.5\&. myhost\&.mynet\&.edu\&.au\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4181 .RE
    4182 
    4183 deny hosts
    4184 .\" deny hosts
    4185 .PP
    4186 .RS 4
    4187 This parameter is a synonym for
    4188 hosts deny\&.
    4189 .RE
    4190 
    4191 hosts deny (S)
    4192 .\" hosts deny
    4193 .PP
    4194 .RS 4
    4195 The opposite of
    4196 \fIhosts allow\fR
    4197 \- hosts listed here are
    4198 \fINOT\fR
    4199 permitted access to services unless the specific services have their own lists to override this one\&. Where the lists conflict, the
    4200 \fIallow\fR
    4201 list takes precedence\&.
    4202 .sp
    4203 In the event that it is necessary to deny all by default, use the keyword ALL (or the netmask
    4204 \FC0\&.0\&.0\&.0/0\F[]) and then explicitly specify to the
    4205 \m[blue]\fBhosts allow = hosts allow\fR\m[]
    4206 parameter those hosts that should be permitted access\&.
    4207 .sp
    4208 Default:
    4209 \fI\fIhosts deny\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # none (i\&.e\&., no hosts specifically excluded)\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4210 .sp
    4211 Example:
    4212 \fI\fIhosts deny\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC150\&.203\&.4\&. badhost\&.mynet\&.edu\&.au\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4213 .RE
    4214 
    4215 idmap alloc backend (G)
    4216 .\" idmap alloc backend
    4217 .PP
    4218 .RS 4
    4219 The idmap alloc backend provides a plugin interface for Winbind to use when allocating Unix uids/gids for Windows SIDs\&. This option refers to the name of the idmap module which will provide the id allocation functionality\&. Please refer to the man page for each idmap plugin to determine whether or not the module implements the allocation feature\&. The most common plugins are the tdb (\fBidmap_tdb\fR(8)) and ldap (\fBidmap_ldap\fR(8)) libraries\&.
    4220 .sp
    4221 This parameter defaults to the value
    4222 \m[blue]\fBidmap backend\fR\m[]
    4223 was set to, so by default winbind will allocate Unix IDs from the default backend\&. You will only need to set this parameter explicitly if you have an external source for Unix IDs, like a central database service somewhere in your company\&.
    4224 .sp
    4225 Also refer to the
    4226 \m[blue]\fBidmap alloc config\fR\m[]
    4227 option\&.
    4228 .sp
    4229 \fINo default\fR
    4230 .sp
    4231 Example:
    4232 \fI\fIidmap alloc backend\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCtdb\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4233 .RE
    4234 
    4235 idmap alloc config (G)
    4236 .\" idmap alloc config
    4237 .PP
    4238 .RS 4
    4239 The idmap alloc config prefix provides a means of managing settings for the backend defined by the
    4240 \m[blue]\fBidmap alloc backend\fR\m[]
    4241 parameter\&. Refer to the man page for each idmap plugin regarding specific configuration details\&.
    4242 .sp
    4243 \fINo default\fR
    4244 .RE
    4245 
    4246 idmap backend (G)
    4247 .\" idmap backend
    4248 .PP
    4249 .RS 4
    4250 The idmap backend provides a plugin interface for Winbind to use varying backends to store SID/uid/gid mapping tables\&.
    4251 .sp
    4252 This option specifies the default backend that is used when no special configuration set by
    4253 \m[blue]\fBidmap config\fR\m[]
    4254 matches the specific request\&.
    4255 .sp
    4256 This default backend also specifies the place where winbind\-generated idmap entries will be stored\&. So it is highly recommended that you specify a writable backend like
    4257 \fBidmap_tdb\fR(8)
    4258 or
    4259 \fBidmap_ldap\fR(8)
    4260 as the idmap backend\&. The
    4261 \fBidmap_rid\fR(8)
    4262 and
    4263 \fBidmap_ad\fR(8)
    4264 backends are not writable and thus will generate unexpected results if set as idmap backend\&.
    4265 .sp
    4266 To use the rid and ad backends, please specify them via the
    4267 \m[blue]\fBidmap config\fR\m[]
    4268 parameter, possibly also for the domain your machine is member of, specified by
    4269 \m[blue]\fBworkgroup\fR\m[]\&.
    4270 .sp
    4271 Examples of SID/uid/gid backends include tdb (\fBidmap_tdb\fR(8)), ldap (\fBidmap_ldap\fR(8)), rid (\fBidmap_rid\fR(8)), and ad (\fBidmap_ad\fR(8))\&.
    4272 .sp
    4273 Default:
    4274 \fI\fIidmap backend\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCtdb\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4275 .RE
    4276 
    4277 idmap cache time (G)
    4278 .\" idmap cache time
    4279 .PP
    4280 .RS 4
    4281 This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind\'s idmap interface will cache positive SID/uid/gid query results\&.
    4282 .sp
    4283 Default:
    4284 \fI\fIidmap cache time\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC604800 (one week)\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4285 .RE
    4286 
    4287 idmap config (G)
    4288 .\" idmap config
    4289 .PP
    4290 .RS 4
    4291 The idmap config prefix provides a means of managing each trusted domain separately\&. The idmap config prefix should be followed by the name of the domain, a colon, and a setting specific to the chosen backend\&. There are three options available for all domains:
    4292 .PP
    4293 backend = backend_name
    4294 .RS 4
    4295 Specifies the name of the idmap plugin to use as the SID/uid/gid backend for this domain\&.
    4296 .RE
    4297 .PP
    4298 range = low \- high
    4299 .RS 4
    4300 Defines the available matching uid and gid range for which the backend is authoritative\&. Note that the range commonly matches the allocation range due to the fact that the same backend will store and retrieve SID/uid/gid mapping entries\&.
    4301 .sp
    4302 winbind uses this parameter to find the backend that is authoritative for a unix ID to SID mapping, so it must be set for each individually configured domain, and it must be disjoint from the ranges set via
    4303 \m[blue]\fBidmap uid\fR\m[]
    4304 and
    4305 \m[blue]\fBidmap gid\fR\m[]\&.
    4306 .RE
    4307 .sp
    4308 The following example illustrates how to configure the
    4309 \fBidmap_ad\fR(8)
    4310 for the CORP domain and the
    4311 \fBidmap_tdb\fR(8)
    4312 backend for all other domains\&. This configuration assumes that the admin of CORP assigns unix ids below 1000000 via the SFU extensions, and winbind is supposed to use the next million entries for its own mappings from trusted domains and for local groups for example\&.
    4313 .sp
    4314 .if n \{\
    4315 .RS 4
    4316 .\}
    4317 .fam C
    4318 .ps -1
    4319 .nf
    4320 .if t \{\
    4321 .sp -1
    4322 .\}
    4323 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    4324 .sp -1
    4325 
    4326         idmap backend = tdb
    4327         idmap uid = 1000000\-1999999
    4328         idmap gid = 1000000\-1999999
    4329 
    4330         idmap config CORP : backend  = ad
    4331         idmap config CORP : range = 1000\-999999
    4332        
    4333 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    4334 .if t \{\
    4335 .sp 1
    4336 .\}
    4337 .fi
    4338 .fam
    4339 .ps +1
    4340 .if n \{\
    4341 .RE
    4342 .\}
    4343 .sp
    4344 \fINo default\fR
    4345 .RE
    4346 
    4347 winbind gid
    4348 .\" winbind gid
    4349 .PP
    4350 .RS 4
    4351 This parameter is a synonym for
    4352 idmap gid\&.
    4353 .RE
    4354 
    4355 idmap gid (G)
    4356 .\" idmap gid
    4357 .PP
    4358 .RS 4
    4359 The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for the purpose of mapping UNX groups to NT group SIDs\&. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&.
    4360 .sp
    4361 See also the
    4362 \m[blue]\fBidmap backend\fR\m[], and
    4363 \m[blue]\fBidmap config\fR\m[]
    4364 options\&.
    4365 .sp
    4366 Default:
    4367 \fI\fIidmap gid\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4368 .sp
    4369 Example:
    4370 \fI\fIidmap gid\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC10000\-20000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4371 .RE
    4372 
    4373 idmap negative cache time (G)
    4374 .\" idmap negative cache time
    4375 .PP
    4376 .RS 4
    4377 This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind\'s idmap interface will cache negative SID/uid/gid query results\&.
    4378 .sp
    4379 Default:
    4380 \fI\fIidmap negative cache time\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC120\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4381 .RE
    4382 
    4383 winbind uid
    4384 .\" winbind uid
    4385 .PP
    4386 .RS 4
    4387 This parameter is a synonym for
    4388 idmap uid\&.
    4389 .RE
    4390 
    4391 idmap uid (G)
    4392 .\" idmap uid
    4393 .PP
    4394 .RS 4
    4395 The idmap uid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are allocated for use in mapping UNIX users to NT user SIDs\&. This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&.
    4396 .sp
    4397 See also the
    4398 \m[blue]\fBidmap backend\fR\m[]
    4399 and
    4400 \m[blue]\fBidmap config\fR\m[]
    4401 options\&.
    4402 .sp
    4403 Default:
    4404 \fI\fIidmap uid\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4405 .sp
    4406 Example:
    4407 \fI\fIidmap uid\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC10000\-20000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4408 .RE
    4409 
    4410 include (G)
    4411 .\" include
    4412 .PP
    4413 .RS 4
    4414 This allows you to include one config file inside another\&. The file is included literally, as though typed in place\&.
    4415 .sp
    4416 It takes the standard substitutions, except
    4417 \fI%u\fR,
    4418 \fI%P\fR
    4419 and
    4420 \fI%S\fR\&.
    4421 .sp
    4422 The parameter
    4423 \fIinclude = registry\fR
    4424 has a special meaning: It does
    4425 \fInot\fR
    4426 include a file named
    4427 \fIregistry\fR
    4428 from the current working directory, but instead reads the global configuration options from the registry\&. See the section on registry\-based configuration for details\&. Note that this option automatically activates registry shares\&.
    4429 .sp
    4430 Default:
    4431 \fI\fIinclude\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4432 .sp
    4433 Example:
    4434 \fI\fIinclude\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb\&.conf\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4435 .RE
    4436 
    4437 inherit acls (S)
    4438 .\" inherit acls
    4439 .PP
    4440 .RS 4
    4441 This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls exist on parent directories, they are always honored when creating a new file or subdirectory in these parent directories\&. The default behavior is to use the unix mode specified when creating the directory\&. Enabling this option sets the unix mode to 0777, thus guaranteeing that default directory acls are propagated\&. Note that using the VFS modules acl_xattr or acl_tdb which store native Windows as meta\-data will automatically turn this option on for any share for which they are loaded, as they require this option to emulate Windows ACLs correctly\&.
    4442 .sp
    4443 Default:
    4444 \fI\fIinherit acls\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4445 .RE
    4446 
    4447 inherit owner (S)
    4448 .\" inherit owner
    4449 .PP
    4450 .RS 4
    4451 The ownership of new files and directories is normally governed by effective uid of the connected user\&. This option allows the Samba administrator to specify that the ownership for new files and directories should be controlled by the ownership of the parent directory\&.
    4452 .sp
    4453 Common scenarios where this behavior is useful is in implementing drop\-boxes where users can create and edit files but not delete them and to ensure that newly create files in a user\'s roaming profile directory are actually owner by the user\&.
    4454 .sp
    4455 Default:
    4456 \fI\fIinherit owner\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4457 .RE
    4458 
    4459 inherit permissions (S)
    4460 .\" inherit permissions
    4461 .PP
    4462 .RS 4
    4463 The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by
    4464 \m[blue]\fBcreate mask\fR\m[],
    4465 \m[blue]\fBdirectory mask\fR\m[],
    4466 \m[blue]\fBforce create mode\fR\m[]
    4467 and
    4468 \m[blue]\fBforce directory mode\fR\m[]
    4469 but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this\&.
    4470 .sp
    4471 New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, including bits such as setgid\&.
    4472 .sp
    4473 New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent directory\&. Their execute bits continue to be determined by
    4474 \m[blue]\fBmap archive\fR\m[],
    4475 \m[blue]\fBmap hidden\fR\m[]
    4476 and
    4477 \m[blue]\fBmap system\fR\m[]
    4478 as usual\&.
    4479 .sp
    4480 Note that the setuid bit is
    4481 \fInever\fR
    4482 set via inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this)\&.
    4483 .sp
    4484 This can be particularly useful on large systems with many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] share to be used flexibly by each user\&.
    4485 .sp
    4486 Default:
    4487 \fI\fIinherit permissions\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4488 .RE
    4489 
    4490 init logon delayed hosts (G)
    4491 .\" init logon delayed hosts
    4492 .PP
    4493 .RS 4
    4494 This parameter takes a list of host names, addresses or networks for which the initial samlogon reply should be delayed (so other DCs get preferred by XP workstations if there are any)\&.
    4495 .sp
    4496 The length of the delay can be specified with the
    4497 \m[blue]\fBinit logon delay\fR\m[]
    4498 parameter\&.
    4499 .sp
    4500 Default:
    4501 \fI\fIinit logon delayed hosts\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4502 .sp
    4503 Example:
    4504 \fI\fIinit logon delayed hosts\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC150\&.203\&.5\&. myhost\&.mynet\&.de\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4505 .RE
    4506 
    4507 init logon delay (G)
    4508 .\" init logon delay
    4509 .PP
    4510 .RS 4
    4511 This parameter specifies a delay in milliseconds for the hosts configured for delayed initial samlogon with
    4512 \m[blue]\fBinit logon delayed hosts\fR\m[]\&.
    4513 .sp
    4514 Default:
    4515 \fI\fIinit logon delay\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC100\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4516 .RE
    4517 
    4518 interfaces (G)
    4519 .\" interfaces
    4520 .PP
    4521 .RS 4
    4522 This option allows you to override the default network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name registration and other NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NBT) traffic\&. By default Samba will query the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any interfaces except 127\&.0\&.0\&.1 that are broadcast capable\&.
    4523 .sp
    4524 The option takes a list of interface strings\&. Each string can be in any of the following forms:
    4525 .sp
    4526 .RS 4
    4527 .ie n \{\
    4528 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    4529 .\}
    4530 .el \{\
    4531 .sp -1
    4532 .IP \(bu 2.3
    4533 .\}
    4534 a network interface name (such as eth0)\&. This may include shell\-like wildcards so eth* will match any interface starting with the substring "eth"
    4535 .RE
    4536 .sp
    4537 .RS 4
    4538 .ie n \{\
    4539 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    4540 .\}
    4541 .el \{\
    4542 .sp -1
    4543 .IP \(bu 2.3
    4544 .\}
    4545 an IP address\&. In this case the netmask is determined from the list of interfaces obtained from the kernel
    4546 .RE
    4547 .sp
    4548 .RS 4
    4549 .ie n \{\
    4550 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    4551 .\}
    4552 .el \{\
    4553 .sp -1
    4554 .IP \(bu 2.3
    4555 .\}
    4556 an IP/mask pair\&.
    4557 .RE
    4558 .sp
    4559 .RS 4
    4560 .ie n \{\
    4561 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    4562 .\}
    4563 .el \{\
    4564 .sp -1
    4565 .IP \(bu 2.3
    4566 .\}
    4567 a broadcast/mask pair\&.
    4568 .sp
    4569 .RE
    4570 The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted decimal form\&.
    4571 .sp
    4572 The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via the OS\'s normal hostname resolution mechanisms\&.
    4573 .sp
    4574 By default Samba enables all active interfaces that are broadcast capable except the loopback adaptor (IP address 127\&.0\&.0\&.1)\&.
    4575 .sp
    4576 The example below configures three network interfaces corresponding to the eth0 device and IP addresses 192\&.168\&.2\&.10 and 192\&.168\&.3\&.10\&. The netmasks of the latter two interfaces would be set to 255\&.255\&.255\&.0\&.
    4577 .sp
    4578 Default:
    4579 \fI\fIinterfaces\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4580 .sp
    4581 Example:
    4582 \fI\fIinterfaces\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCeth0 192\&.168\&.2\&.10/24 192\&.168\&.3\&.10/255\&.255\&.255\&.0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4583 .RE
    4584 
    4585 invalid users (S)
    4586 .\" invalid users
    4587 .PP
    4588 .RS 4
    4589 This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this service\&. This is really a
    4590 \fIparanoid\fR
    4591 check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach your security\&.
    4592 .sp
    4593 A name starting with a \'@\' is interpreted as an NIS netgroup first (if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX group if the name was not found in the NIS netgroup database\&.
    4594 .sp
    4595 A name starting with \'+\' is interpreted only by looking in the UNIX group database via the NSS getgrnam() interface\&. A name starting with \'&\' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database (this requires NIS to be working on your system)\&. The characters \'+\' and \'&\' may be used at the start of the name in either order so the value
    4596 \fI+&group\fR
    4597 means check the UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and the value
    4598 \fI&+group\fR
    4599 means check the NIS netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the same as the \'@\' prefix)\&.
    4600 .sp
    4601 The current servicename is substituted for
    4602 \fI%S\fR\&. This is useful in the [homes] section\&.
    4603 .sp
    4604 Default:
    4605 \fI\fIinvalid users\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # no invalid users\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4606 .sp
    4607 Example:
    4608 \fI\fIinvalid users\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCroot fred admin @wheel\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4609 .RE
    4610 
    4611 iprint server (G)
    4612 .\" iprint server
    4613 .PP
    4614 .RS 4
    4615 This parameter is only applicable if
    4616 \m[blue]\fBprinting\fR\m[]
    4617 is set to
    4618 \fBiprint\fR\&.
    4619 .sp
    4620 If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS
    4621 \FCclient\&.conf\F[]\&. This is necessary if you have virtual samba servers that connect to different CUPS daemons\&.
    4622 .sp
    4623 Default:
    4624 \fI\fIiprint server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC""\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4625 .sp
    4626 Example:
    4627 \fI\fIiprint server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCMYCUPSSERVER\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4628 .RE
    4629 
    4630 keepalive (G)
    4631 .\" keepalive
    4632 .PP
    4633 .RS 4
    4634 The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of seconds between
    4635 \fIkeepalive\fR
    4636 packets\&. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be sent\&. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether a client is still present and responding\&.
    4637 .sp
    4638 Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it by default\&. (see
    4639 \m[blue]\fBsocket options\fR\m[])\&. Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties\&.
    4640 .sp
    4641 Default:
    4642 \fI\fIkeepalive\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC300\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4643 .sp
    4644 Example:
    4645 \fI\fIkeepalive\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC600\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4646 .RE
    4647 
    4648 kerberos method (G)
    4649 .\" kerberos method
    4650 .PP
    4651 .RS 4
    4652 Controls how kerberos tickets are verified\&.
    4653 .sp
    4654 Valid options are:
    4655 .sp
    4656 .RS 4
    4657 .ie n \{\
    4658 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    4659 .\}
    4660 .el \{\
    4661 .sp -1
    4662 .IP \(bu 2.3
    4663 .\}
    4664 secrets only \- use only the secrets\&.tdb for ticket verification (default)
    4665 .RE
    4666 .sp
    4667 .RS 4
    4668 .ie n \{\
    4669 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    4670 .\}
    4671 .el \{\
    4672 .sp -1
    4673 .IP \(bu 2.3
    4674 .\}
    4675 system keytab \- use only the system keytab for ticket verification
    4676 .RE
    4677 .sp
    4678 .RS 4
    4679 .ie n \{\
    4680 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    4681 .\}
    4682 .el \{\
    4683 .sp -1
    4684 .IP \(bu 2.3
    4685 .\}
    4686 dedicated keytab \- use a dedicated keytab for ticket verification
    4687 .RE
    4688 .sp
    4689 .RS 4
    4690 .ie n \{\
    4691 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    4692 .\}
    4693 .el \{\
    4694 .sp -1
    4695 .IP \(bu 2.3
    4696 .\}
    4697 secrets and keytab \- use the secrets\&.tdb first, then the system keytab
    4698 .sp
    4699 .RE
    4700 The major difference between "system keytab" and "dedicated keytab" is that the latter method relies on kerberos to find the correct keytab entry instead of filtering based on expected principals\&.
    4701 .sp
    4702 When the kerberos method is in "dedicated keytab" mode,
    4703 \m[blue]\fBdedicated keytab file\fR\m[]
    4704 must be set to specify the location of the keytab file\&.
    4705 .sp
    4706 Default:
    4707 \fI\fIkerberos method\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCsecrets only\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4708 .RE
    4709 
    4710 kernel change notify (S)
    4711 .\" kernel change notify
    4712 .PP
    4713 .RS 4
    4714 This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the kernel for change notifications in directories so that SMB clients can refresh whenever the data on the server changes\&.
    4715 .sp
    4716 This parameter is only used when your kernel supports change notification to user programs using the inotify interface\&.
    4717 .sp
    4718 Default:
    4719 \fI\fIkernel change notify\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4720 .RE
    4721 
    4722 kernel oplocks (G)
    4723 .\" kernel oplocks
    4724 .PP
    4725 .RS 4
    4726 For UNIXes that support kernel based
    4727 \m[blue]\fBoplocks\fR\m[]
    4728 (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2\&.4 kernel), this parameter allows the use of them to be turned on or off\&.
    4729 .sp
    4730 Kernel oplocks support allows Samba
    4731 \fIoplocks \fR
    4732 to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation accesses a file that
    4733 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    4734 has oplocked\&. This allows complete data consistency between SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a
    4735 \fIvery\fR
    4736 cool feature :\-)\&.
    4737 .sp
    4738 This parameter defaults to
    4739 \fBon\fR, but is translated to a no\-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support\&. You should never need to touch this parameter\&.
    4740 .sp
    4741 Default:
    4742 \fI\fIkernel oplocks\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4743 .RE
    4744 
    4745 lanman auth (G)
    4746 .\" lanman auth
    4747 .PP
    4748 .RS 4
    4749 This parameter determines whether or not
    4750 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    4751 will attempt to authenticate users or permit password changes using the LANMAN password hash\&. If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e\&.g\&. Windows NT/2000 clients, smbclient, but not Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host\&.
    4752 .sp
    4753 The LANMAN encrypted response is easily broken, due to its case\-insensitive nature, and the choice of algorithm\&. Servers without Windows 95/98/ME or MS DOS clients are advised to disable this option\&.
    4754 .sp
    4755 When this parameter is set to
    4756 \FCno\F[]
    4757 this will also result in sambaLMPassword in Samba\'s passdb being blanked after the next password change\&. As a result of that lanman clients won\'t be able to authenticate, even if lanman auth is reenabled later on\&.
    4758 .sp
    4759 Unlike the
    4760 \FCencrypt passwords\F[]
    4761 option, this parameter cannot alter client behaviour, and the LANMAN response will still be sent over the network\&. See the
    4762 \FCclient lanman auth\F[]
    4763 to disable this for Samba\'s clients (such as smbclient)
    4764 .sp
    4765 If this option, and
    4766 \FCntlm auth\F[]
    4767 are both disabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be permited\&. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to use it\&.
    4768 .sp
    4769 Default:
    4770 \fI\fIlanman auth\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4771 .RE
    4772 
    4773 large readwrite (G)
    4774 .\" large readwrite
    4775 .PP
    4776 .RS 4
    4777 This parameter determines whether or not
    4778 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    4779 supports the new 64k streaming read and write variant SMB requests introduced with Windows 2000\&. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs this requires Samba to be running on a 64\-bit capable operating system such as IRIX, Solaris or a Linux 2\&.4 kernel\&. Can improve performance by 10% with Windows 2000 clients\&. Defaults to on\&. Not as tested as some other Samba code paths\&.
    4780 .sp
    4781 Default:
    4782 \fI\fIlarge readwrite\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4783 .RE
    4784 
    4785 ldap admin dn (G)
    4786 .\" ldap admin dn
    4787 .PP
    4788 .RS 4
    4789 The
    4790 \m[blue]\fBldap admin dn\fR\m[]
    4791 defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact the ldap server when retreiving user account information\&. The
    4792 \m[blue]\fBldap admin dn\fR\m[]
    4793 is used in conjunction with the admin dn password stored in the
    4794 \FCprivate/secrets\&.tdb\F[]
    4795 file\&. See the
    4796 \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8)
    4797 man page for more information on how to accomplish this\&.
    4798 .sp
    4799 The
    4800 \m[blue]\fBldap admin dn\fR\m[]
    4801 requires a fully specified DN\&. The
    4802 \m[blue]\fBldap suffix\fR\m[]
    4803 is not appended to the
    4804 \m[blue]\fBldap admin dn\fR\m[]\&.
    4805 .sp
    4806 \fINo default\fR
    4807 .RE
    4808 
    4809 ldap connection timeout (G)
    4810 .\" ldap connection timeout
    4811 .PP
    4812 .RS 4
    4813 This parameter tells the LDAP library calls which timeout in seconds they should honor during initial connection establishments to LDAP servers\&. It is very useful in failover scenarios in particular\&. If one or more LDAP servers are not reachable at all, we do not have to wait until TCP timeouts are over\&. This feature must be supported by your LDAP library\&.
    4814 .sp
    4815 This parameter is different from
    4816 \m[blue]\fBldap timeout\fR\m[]
    4817 which affects operations on LDAP servers using an existing connection and not establishing an initial connection\&.
    4818 .sp
    4819 Default:
    4820 \fI\fIldap connection timeout\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC2\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4821 .RE
    4822 
    4823 ldap debug level (G)
    4824 .\" ldap debug level
    4825 .PP
    4826 .RS 4
    4827 This parameter controls the debug level of the LDAP library calls\&. In the case of OpenLDAP, it is the same bit\-field as understood by the server and documented in the
    4828 \fBslapd.conf\fR(5)
    4829 manpage\&. A typical useful value will be
    4830 \fI1\fR
    4831 for tracing function calls\&.
    4832 .sp
    4833 The debug ouput from the LDAP libraries appears with the prefix [LDAP] in Samba\'s logging output\&. The level at which LDAP logging is printed is controlled by the parameter
    4834 \fIldap debug threshold\fR\&.
    4835 .sp
    4836 Default:
    4837 \fI\fIldap debug level\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4838 .sp
    4839 Example:
    4840 \fI\fIldap debug level\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4841 .RE
    4842 
    4843 ldap debug threshold (G)
    4844 .\" ldap debug threshold
    4845 .PP
    4846 .RS 4
    4847 This parameter controls the Samba debug level at which the ldap library debug output is printed in the Samba logs\&. See the description of
    4848 \fIldap debug level\fR
    4849 for details\&.
    4850 .sp
    4851 Default:
    4852 \fI\fIldap debug threshold\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC10\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4853 .sp
    4854 Example:
    4855 \fI\fIldap debug threshold\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC5\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4856 .RE
    4857 
    4858 ldap delete dn (G)
    4859 .\" ldap delete dn
    4860 .PP
    4861 .RS 4
    4862 This parameter specifies whether a delete operation in the ldapsam deletes the complete entry or only the attributes specific to Samba\&.
    4863 .sp
    4864 Default:
    4865 \fI\fIldap delete dn\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4866 .RE
    4867 
    4868 ldap deref (G)
    4869 .\" ldap deref
    4870 .PP
    4871 .RS 4
    4872 This option controls whether Samba should tell the LDAP library to use a certain alias dereferencing method\&. The default is
    4873 \fIauto\fR, which means that the default setting of the ldap client library will be kept\&. Other possible values are
    4874 \fInever\fR,
    4875 \fIfinding\fR,
    4876 \fIsearching\fR
    4877 and
    4878 \fIalways\fR\&. Grab your LDAP manual for more information\&.
    4879 .sp
    4880 Default:
    4881 \fI\fIldap deref\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCauto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4882 .sp
    4883 Example:
    4884 \fI\fIldap deref\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCsearching\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4885 .RE
    4886 
    4887 ldap follow referral (G)
    4888 .\" ldap follow referral
    4889 .PP
    4890 .RS 4
    4891 This option controls whether to follow LDAP referrals or not when searching for entries in the LDAP database\&. Possible values are
    4892 \fIon\fR
    4893 to enable following referrals,
    4894 \fIoff\fR
    4895 to disable this, and
    4896 \fIauto\fR, to use the libldap default settings\&. libldap\'s choice of following referrals or not is set in /etc/openldap/ldap\&.conf with the REFERRALS parameter as documented in ldap\&.conf(5)\&.
    4897 .sp
    4898 Default:
    4899 \fI\fIldap follow referral\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCauto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4900 .sp
    4901 Example:
    4902 \fI\fIldap follow referral\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCoff\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4903 .RE
    4904 
    4905 ldap group suffix (G)
    4906 .\" ldap group suffix
    4907 .PP
    4908 .RS 4
    4909 This parameter specifies the suffix that is used for groups when these are added to the LDAP directory\&. If this parameter is unset, the value of
    4910 \m[blue]\fBldap suffix\fR\m[]
    4911 will be used instead\&. The suffix string is pre\-pended to the
    4912 \m[blue]\fBldap suffix\fR\m[]
    4913 string so use a partial DN\&.
    4914 .sp
    4915 Default:
    4916 \fI\fIldap group suffix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4917 .sp
    4918 Example:
    4919 \fI\fIldap group suffix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCou=Groups\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4920 .RE
    4921 
    4922 ldap idmap suffix (G)
    4923 .\" ldap idmap suffix
    4924 .PP
    4925 .RS 4
    4926 This parameters specifies the suffix that is used when storing idmap mappings\&. If this parameter is unset, the value of
    4927 \m[blue]\fBldap suffix\fR\m[]
    4928 will be used instead\&. The suffix string is pre\-pended to the
    4929 \m[blue]\fBldap suffix\fR\m[]
    4930 string so use a partial DN\&.
    4931 .sp
    4932 Default:
    4933 \fI\fIldap idmap suffix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4934 .sp
    4935 Example:
    4936 \fI\fIldap idmap suffix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCou=Idmap\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4937 .RE
    4938 
    4939 ldap machine suffix (G)
    4940 .\" ldap machine suffix
    4941 .PP
    4942 .RS 4
    4943 It specifies where machines should be added to the ldap tree\&. If this parameter is unset, the value of
    4944 \m[blue]\fBldap suffix\fR\m[]
    4945 will be used instead\&. The suffix string is pre\-pended to the
    4946 \m[blue]\fBldap suffix\fR\m[]
    4947 string so use a partial DN\&.
    4948 .sp
    4949 Default:
    4950 \fI\fIldap machine suffix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4951 .sp
    4952 Example:
    4953 \fI\fIldap machine suffix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCou=Computers\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4954 .RE
    4955 
    4956 ldap page size (G)
    4957 .\" ldap page size
    4958 .PP
    4959 .RS 4
    4960 This parameter specifies the number of entries per page\&.
    4961 .sp
    4962 If the LDAP server supports paged results, clients can request subsets of search results (pages) instead of the entire list\&. This parameter specifies the size of these pages\&.
    4963 .sp
    4964 Default:
    4965 \fI\fIldap page size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1024\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4966 .sp
    4967 Example:
    4968 \fI\fIldap page size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC512\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    4969 .RE
    4970 
    4971 ldap passwd sync (G)
    4972 .\" ldap passwd sync
    4973 .PP
    4974 .RS 4
    4975 This option is used to define whether or not Samba should sync the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes for normal accounts (NOT for workstation, server or domain trusts) on a password change via SAMBA\&.
    4976 .sp
    4977 The
    4978 \m[blue]\fBldap passwd sync\fR\m[]
    4979 can be set to one of three values:
    4980 .sp
    4981 .RS 4
    4982 .ie n \{\
    4983 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    4984 .\}
    4985 .el \{\
    4986 .sp -1
    4987 .IP \(bu 2.3
    4988 .\}
    4989 \fIYes\fR
    4990 = Try to update the LDAP, NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time\&.
    4991 .RE
    4992 .sp
    4993 .RS 4
    4994 .ie n \{\
    4995 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    4996 .\}
    4997 .el \{\
    4998 .sp -1
    4999 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5000 .\}
    5001 \fINo\fR
    5002 = Update NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time\&.
    5003 .RE
    5004 .sp
    5005 .RS 4
    5006 .ie n \{\
    5007 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5008 .\}
    5009 .el \{\
    5010 .sp -1
    5011 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5012 .\}
    5013 \fIOnly\fR
    5014 = Only update the LDAP password and let the LDAP server do the rest\&.
    5015 .sp
    5016 .RE
    5017 Default:
    5018 \fI\fIldap passwd sync\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5019 .RE
    5020 
    5021 ldap replication sleep (G)
    5022 .\" ldap replication sleep
    5023 .PP
    5024 .RS 4
    5025 When Samba is asked to write to a read\-only LDAP replica, we are redirected to talk to the read\-write master server\&. This server then replicates our changes back to the \'local\' server, however the replication might take some seconds, especially over slow links\&. Certain client activities, particularly domain joins, can become confused by the \'success\' that does not immediately change the LDAP back\-end\'s data\&.
    5026 .sp
    5027 This option simply causes Samba to wait a short time, to allow the LDAP server to catch up\&. If you have a particularly high\-latency network, you may wish to time the LDAP replication with a network sniffer, and increase this value accordingly\&. Be aware that no checking is performed that the data has actually replicated\&.
    5028 .sp
    5029 The value is specified in milliseconds, the maximum value is 5000 (5 seconds)\&.
    5030 .sp
    5031 Default:
    5032 \fI\fIldap replication sleep\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5033 .RE
    5034 
    5035 ldapsam:editposix (G)
    5036 .\" ldapsam:editposix
    5037 .PP
    5038 .RS 4
    5039 Editposix is an option that leverages ldapsam:trusted to make it simpler to manage a domain controller eliminating the need to set up custom scripts to add and manage the posix users and groups\&. This option will instead directly manipulate the ldap tree to create, remove and modify user and group entries\&. This option also requires a running winbindd as it is used to allocate new uids/gids on user/group creation\&. The allocation range must be therefore configured\&.
    5040 .sp
    5041 To use this option, a basic ldap tree must be provided and the ldap suffix parameters must be properly configured\&. On virgin servers the default users and groups (Administrator, Guest, Domain Users, Domain Admins, Domain Guests) can be precreated with the command
    5042 \FCnet sam provision\F[]\&. To run this command the ldap server must be running, Winindd must be running and the smb\&.conf ldap options must be properly configured\&. The typical ldap setup used with the
    5043 \m[blue]\fBldapsam:trusted = yes\fR\m[]
    5044 option is usually sufficient to use
    5045 \m[blue]\fBldapsam:editposix = yes\fR\m[]
    5046 as well\&.
    5047 .sp
    5048 An example configuration can be the following:
    5049 .sp
    5050 .if n \{\
    5051 .RS 4
    5052 .\}
    5053 .fam C
    5054 .ps -1
    5055 .nf
    5056 .if t \{\
    5057 .sp -1
    5058 .\}
    5059 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    5060 .sp -1
    5061 
    5062         encrypt passwords = true
    5063         passdb backend = ldapsam
    5064 
    5065         ldapsam:trusted=yes
    5066         ldapsam:editposix=yes
    5067 
    5068         ldap admin dn = cn=admin,dc=samba,dc=org
    5069         ldap delete dn = yes
    5070         ldap group suffix = ou=groups
    5071         ldap idmap suffix = ou=idmap
    5072         ldap machine suffix = ou=computers
    5073         ldap user suffix = ou=users
    5074         ldap suffix = dc=samba,dc=org
    5075 
    5076         idmap backend = ldap:"ldap://localhost"
    5077 
    5078         idmap uid = 5000\-50000
    5079         idmap gid = 5000\-50000
    5080        
    5081 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    5082 .if t \{\
    5083 .sp 1
    5084 .\}
    5085 .fi
    5086 .fam
    5087 .ps +1
    5088 .if n \{\
    5089 .RE
    5090 .\}
    5091 .sp
    5092 This configuration assumes a directory layout like described in the following ldif:
    5093 .sp
    5094 .if n \{\
    5095 .RS 4
    5096 .\}
    5097 .fam C
    5098 .ps -1
    5099 .nf
    5100 .if t \{\
    5101 .sp -1
    5102 .\}
    5103 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    5104 .sp -1
    5105 
    5106         dn: dc=samba,dc=org
    5107         objectClass: top
    5108         objectClass: dcObject
    5109         objectClass: organization
    5110         o: samba\&.org
    5111         dc: samba
    5112 
    5113         dn: cn=admin,dc=samba,dc=org
    5114         objectClass: simpleSecurityObject
    5115         objectClass: organizationalRole
    5116         cn: admin
    5117         description: LDAP administrator
    5118         userPassword: secret
    5119 
    5120         dn: ou=users,dc=samba,dc=org
    5121         objectClass: top
    5122         objectClass: organizationalUnit
    5123         ou: users
    5124 
    5125         dn: ou=groups,dc=samba,dc=org
    5126         objectClass: top
    5127         objectClass: organizationalUnit
    5128         ou: groups
    5129 
    5130         dn: ou=idmap,dc=samba,dc=org
    5131         objectClass: top
    5132         objectClass: organizationalUnit
    5133         ou: idmap
    5134 
    5135         dn: ou=computers,dc=samba,dc=org
    5136         objectClass: top
    5137         objectClass: organizationalUnit
    5138         ou: computers
    5139        
    5140 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    5141 .if t \{\
    5142 .sp 1
    5143 .\}
    5144 .fi
    5145 .fam
    5146 .ps +1
    5147 .if n \{\
    5148 .RE
    5149 .\}
    5150 .sp
    5151 Default:
    5152 \fI\fIldapsam:editposix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5153 .RE
    5154 
    5155 ldapsam:trusted (G)
    5156 .\" ldapsam:trusted
    5157 .PP
    5158 .RS 4
    5159 By default, Samba as a Domain Controller with an LDAP backend needs to use the Unix\-style NSS subsystem to access user and group information\&. Due to the way Unix stores user information in /etc/passwd and /etc/group this inevitably leads to inefficiencies\&. One important question a user needs to know is the list of groups he is member of\&. The plain UNIX model involves a complete enumeration of the file /etc/group and its NSS counterparts in LDAP\&. UNIX has optimized functions to enumerate group membership\&. Sadly, other functions that are used to deal with user and group attributes lack such optimization\&.
    5160 .sp
    5161 To make Samba scale well in large environments, the
    5162 \m[blue]\fBldapsam:trusted = yes\fR\m[]
    5163 option assumes that the complete user and group database that is relevant to Samba is stored in LDAP with the standard posixAccount/posixGroup attributes\&. It further assumes that the Samba auxiliary object classes are stored together with the POSIX data in the same LDAP object\&. If these assumptions are met,
    5164 \m[blue]\fBldapsam:trusted = yes\fR\m[]
    5165 can be activated and Samba can bypass the NSS system to query user group memberships\&. Optimized LDAP queries can greatly speed up domain logon and administration tasks\&. Depending on the size of the LDAP database a factor of 100 or more for common queries is easily achieved\&.
    5166 .sp
    5167 Default:
    5168 \fI\fIldapsam:trusted\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5169 .RE
    5170 
    5171 ldap ssl ads (G)
    5172 .\" ldap ssl ads
    5173 .PP
    5174 .RS 4
    5175 This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL when connecting to the ldap server using
    5176 \fIads\fR
    5177 methods\&. Rpc methods are not affected by this parameter\&. Please note, that this parameter won\'t have any effect if
    5178 \m[blue]\fBldap ssl\fR\m[]
    5179 is set to
    5180 \fIno\fR\&.
    5181 .sp
    5182 See
    5183 smb\&.conf(5)
    5184 for more information on
    5185 \m[blue]\fBldap ssl\fR\m[]\&.
    5186 .sp
    5187 Default:
    5188 \fI\fIldap ssl ads\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5189 .RE
    5190 
    5191 ldap ssl (G)
    5192 .\" ldap ssl
    5193 .PP
    5194 .RS 4
    5195 This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL when connecting to the ldap server This is
    5196 \fINOT\fR
    5197 related to Samba\'s previous SSL support which was enabled by specifying the
    5198 \FC\-\-with\-ssl\F[]
    5199 option to the
    5200 \FCconfigure\F[]
    5201 script\&.
    5202 .sp
    5203 LDAP connections should be secured where possible\&. This may be done setting
    5204 \fIeither\fR
    5205 this parameter to
    5206 \fIStart_tls\fR
    5207 \fIor\fR
    5208 by specifying
    5209 \fIldaps://\fR
    5210 in the URL argument of
    5211 \m[blue]\fBpassdb backend\fR\m[]\&.
    5212 .sp
    5213 The
    5214 \m[blue]\fBldap ssl\fR\m[]
    5215 can be set to one of two values:
    5216 .sp
    5217 .RS 4
    5218 .ie n \{\
    5219 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5220 .\}
    5221 .el \{\
    5222 .sp -1
    5223 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5224 .\}
    5225 \fIOff\fR
    5226 = Never use SSL when querying the directory\&.
    5227 .RE
    5228 .sp
    5229 .RS 4
    5230 .ie n \{\
    5231 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5232 .\}
    5233 .el \{\
    5234 .sp -1
    5235 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5236 .\}
    5237 \fIstart tls\fR
    5238 = Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server\&.
    5239 .sp
    5240 .RE
    5241 Please note that this parameter does only affect
    5242 \fIrpc\fR
    5243 methods\&. To enable the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for
    5244 \fIads\fR, set
    5245 \m[blue]\fBldap ssl = yes\fR\m[]
    5246 \fIand\fR
    5247 \m[blue]\fBldap ssl ads = yes\fR\m[]\&. See
    5248 smb\&.conf(5)
    5249 for more information on
    5250 \m[blue]\fBldap ssl ads\fR\m[]\&.
    5251 .sp
    5252 Default:
    5253 \fI\fIldap ssl\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCstart tls\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5254 .RE
    5255 
    5256 ldap suffix (G)
    5257 .\" ldap suffix
    5258 .PP
    5259 .RS 4
    5260 Specifies the base for all ldap suffixes and for storing the sambaDomain object\&.
    5261 .sp
    5262 The ldap suffix will be appended to the values specified for the
    5263 \m[blue]\fBldap user suffix\fR\m[],
    5264 \m[blue]\fBldap group suffix\fR\m[],
    5265 \m[blue]\fBldap machine suffix\fR\m[], and the
    5266 \m[blue]\fBldap idmap suffix\fR\m[]\&. Each of these should be given only a DN relative to the
    5267 \m[blue]\fBldap suffix\fR\m[]\&.
    5268 .sp
    5269 Default:
    5270 \fI\fIldap suffix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5271 .sp
    5272 Example:
    5273 \fI\fIldap suffix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCdc=samba,dc=org\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5274 .RE
    5275 
    5276 ldap timeout (G)
    5277 .\" ldap timeout
    5278 .PP
    5279 .RS 4
    5280 This parameter defines the number of seconds that Samba should use as timeout for LDAP operations\&.
    5281 .sp
    5282 Default:
    5283 \fI\fIldap timeout\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC15\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5284 .RE
    5285 
    5286 ldap user suffix (G)
    5287 .\" ldap user suffix
    5288 .PP
    5289 .RS 4
    5290 This parameter specifies where users are added to the tree\&. If this parameter is unset, the value of
    5291 \m[blue]\fBldap suffix\fR\m[]
    5292 will be used instead\&. The suffix string is pre\-pended to the
    5293 \m[blue]\fBldap suffix\fR\m[]
    5294 string so use a partial DN\&.
    5295 .sp
    5296 Default:
    5297 \fI\fIldap user suffix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5298 .sp
    5299 Example:
    5300 \fI\fIldap user suffix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCou=people\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5301 .RE
    5302 
    5303 level2 oplocks (S)
    5304 .\" level2 oplocks
    5305 .PP
    5306 .RS 4
    5307 This parameter controls whether Samba supports level2 (read\-only) oplocks on a share\&.
    5308 .sp
    5309 Level2, or read\-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read\-write oplock to a read\-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead of releasing all oplocks on a second open, as in traditional, exclusive oplocks)\&. This allows all openers of the file that support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read\-ahead only (ie\&. they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases performance for many accesses of files that are not commonly written (such as application \&.EXE files)\&.
    5310 .sp
    5311 Once one of the clients which have a read\-only oplock writes to the file all clients are notified (no reply is needed or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and delete any read\-ahead caches\&.
    5312 .sp
    5313 It is recommended that this parameter be turned on to speed access to shared executables\&.
    5314 .sp
    5315 For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec\&.
    5316 .sp
    5317 Currently, if
    5318 \m[blue]\fBkernel oplocks\fR\m[]
    5319 are supported then level2 oplocks are not granted (even if this parameter is set to
    5320 \fByes\fR)\&. Note also, the
    5321 \m[blue]\fBoplocks\fR\m[]
    5322 parameter must be set to
    5323 \fByes\fR
    5324 on this share in order for this parameter to have any effect\&.
    5325 .sp
    5326 Default:
    5327 \fI\fIlevel2 oplocks\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5328 .RE
    5329 
    5330 lm announce (G)
    5331 .\" lm announce
    5332 .PP
    5333 .RS 4
    5334 This parameter determines if
    5335 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    5336 will produce Lanman announce broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see the Samba server in their browse list\&. This parameter can have three values,
    5337 \fByes\fR,
    5338 \fBno\fR, or
    5339 \fBauto\fR\&. The default is
    5340 \fBauto\fR\&. If set to
    5341 \fBno\fR
    5342 Samba will never produce these broadcasts\&. If set to
    5343 \fByes\fR
    5344 Samba will produce Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter
    5345 \m[blue]\fBlm interval\fR\m[]\&. If set to
    5346 \fBauto\fR
    5347 Samba will not send Lanman announce broadcasts by default but will listen for them\&. If it hears such a broadcast on the wire it will then start sending them at a frequency set by the parameter
    5348 \m[blue]\fBlm interval\fR\m[]\&.
    5349 .sp
    5350 Default:
    5351 \fI\fIlm announce\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCauto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5352 .sp
    5353 Example:
    5354 \fI\fIlm announce\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5355 .RE
    5356 
    5357 lm interval (G)
    5358 .\" lm interval
    5359 .PP
    5360 .RS 4
    5361 If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the
    5362 \m[blue]\fBlm announce\fR\m[]
    5363 parameter) then this parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be made\&. If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be made despite the setting of the
    5364 \m[blue]\fBlm announce\fR\m[]
    5365 parameter\&.
    5366 .sp
    5367 Default:
    5368 \fI\fIlm interval\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC60\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5369 .sp
    5370 Example:
    5371 \fI\fIlm interval\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC120\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5372 .RE
    5373 
    5374 load printers (G)
    5375 .\" load printers
    5376 .PP
    5377 .RS 4
    5378 A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default\&. See the
    5379 \m[blue]\fBprinters\fR\m[]
    5380 section for more details\&.
    5381 .sp
    5382 Default:
    5383 \fI\fIload printers\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5384 .RE
    5385 
    5386 local master (G)
    5387 .\" local master
    5388 .PP
    5389 .RS 4
    5390 This option allows
    5391 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    5392 to try and become a local master browser on a subnet\&. If set to
    5393 \fBno\fR
    5394 then
    5395 \FC nmbd\F[]
    5396 will not attempt to become a local master browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections\&. By default this value is set to
    5397 \fByes\fR\&. Setting this value to
    5398 \fByes\fR
    5399 doesn\'t mean that Samba will
    5400 \fIbecome\fR
    5401 the local master browser on a subnet, just that
    5402 \FCnmbd\F[]
    5403 will
    5404 \fIparticipate\fR
    5405 in elections for local master browser\&.
    5406 .sp
    5407 Setting this value to
    5408 \fBno\fR
    5409 will cause
    5410 \FCnmbd\F[]
    5411 \fInever\fR
    5412 to become a local master browser\&.
    5413 .sp
    5414 Default:
    5415 \fI\fIlocal master\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5416 .RE
    5417 
    5418 lock dir
    5419 .\" lock dir
    5420 .PP
    5421 .RS 4
    5422 This parameter is a synonym for
    5423 lock directory\&.
    5424 .RE
    5425 
    5426 lock directory (G)
    5427 .\" lock directory
    5428 .PP
    5429 .RS 4
    5430 This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed\&. The lock files are used to implement the
    5431 \m[blue]\fBmax connections\fR\m[]
    5432 option\&.
    5433 .sp
    5434 Note: This option can not be set inside registry configurations\&.
    5435 .sp
    5436 Default:
    5437 \fI\fIlock directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC${prefix}/var/locks\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5438 .sp
    5439 Example:
    5440 \fI\fIlock directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/var/run/samba/locks\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5441 .RE
    5442 
    5443 locking (S)
    5444 .\" locking
    5445 .PP
    5446 .RS 4
    5447 This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server in response to lock requests from the client\&.
    5448 .sp
    5449 If
    5450 \FClocking = no\F[], all lock and unlock requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report that the file in question is available for locking\&.
    5451 .sp
    5452 If
    5453 \FClocking = yes\F[], real locking will be performed by the server\&.
    5454 .sp
    5455 This option
    5456 \fImay\fR
    5457 be useful for read\-only filesystems which
    5458 \fImay\fR
    5459 not need locking (such as CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of
    5460 \fBno\fR
    5461 is not really recommended even in this case\&.
    5462 .sp
    5463 Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption\&. You should never need to set this parameter\&.
    5464 .sp
    5465 \fINo default\fR
    5466 .RE
    5467 
    5468 lock spin count (G)
    5469 .\" lock spin count
    5470 .PP
    5471 .RS 4
    5472 This parameter has been made inoperative in Samba 3\&.0\&.24\&. The functionality it contolled is now controlled by the parameter
    5473 \m[blue]\fBlock spin time\fR\m[]\&.
    5474 .sp
    5475 Default:
    5476 \fI\fIlock spin count\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5477 .RE
    5478 
    5479 lock spin time (G)
    5480 .\" lock spin time
    5481 .PP
    5482 .RS 4
    5483 The time in milliseconds that smbd should keep waiting to see if a failed lock request can be granted\&. This parameter has changed in default value from Samba 3\&.0\&.23 from 10 to 200\&. The associated
    5484 \m[blue]\fBlock spin count\fR\m[]
    5485 parameter is no longer used in Samba 3\&.0\&.24\&. You should not need to change the value of this parameter\&.
    5486 .sp
    5487 Default:
    5488 \fI\fIlock spin time\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC200\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5489 .RE
    5490 
    5491 log file (G)
    5492 .\" log file
    5493 .PP
    5494 .RS 4
    5495 This option allows you to override the name of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file)\&.
    5496 .sp
    5497 This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate log files for each user or machine\&.
    5498 .sp
    5499 \fINo default\fR
    5500 .sp
    5501 Example:
    5502 \fI\fIlog file\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/samba/var/log\&.%m\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5503 .RE
    5504 
    5505 debuglevel
    5506 .\" debuglevel
    5507 .PP
    5508 .RS 4
    5509 This parameter is a synonym for
    5510 log level\&.
    5511 .RE
    5512 
    5513 log level (G)
    5514 .\" log level
    5515 .PP
    5516 .RS 4
    5517 The value of the parameter (a astring) allows the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the
    5518 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
    5519 file\&.
    5520 .sp
    5521 This parameter has been extended since the 2\&.2\&.x series, now it allows to specify the debug level for multiple debug classes\&. This is to give greater flexibility in the configuration of the system\&. The following debug classes are currently implemented:
    5522 .sp
    5523 .RS 4
    5524 .ie n \{\
    5525 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5526 .\}
    5527 .el \{\
    5528 .sp -1
    5529 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5530 .\}
    5531 \fIall\fR
    5532 .RE
    5533 .sp
    5534 .RS 4
    5535 .ie n \{\
    5536 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5537 .\}
    5538 .el \{\
    5539 .sp -1
    5540 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5541 .\}
    5542 \fItdb\fR
    5543 .RE
    5544 .sp
    5545 .RS 4
    5546 .ie n \{\
    5547 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5548 .\}
    5549 .el \{\
    5550 .sp -1
    5551 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5552 .\}
    5553 \fIprintdrivers\fR
    5554 .RE
    5555 .sp
    5556 .RS 4
    5557 .ie n \{\
    5558 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5559 .\}
    5560 .el \{\
    5561 .sp -1
    5562 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5563 .\}
    5564 \fIlanman\fR
    5565 .RE
    5566 .sp
    5567 .RS 4
    5568 .ie n \{\
    5569 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5570 .\}
    5571 .el \{\
    5572 .sp -1
    5573 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5574 .\}
    5575 \fIsmb\fR
    5576 .RE
    5577 .sp
    5578 .RS 4
    5579 .ie n \{\
    5580 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5581 .\}
    5582 .el \{\
    5583 .sp -1
    5584 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5585 .\}
    5586 \fIrpc_parse\fR
    5587 .RE
    5588 .sp
    5589 .RS 4
    5590 .ie n \{\
    5591 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5592 .\}
    5593 .el \{\
    5594 .sp -1
    5595 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5596 .\}
    5597 \fIrpc_srv\fR
    5598 .RE
    5599 .sp
    5600 .RS 4
    5601 .ie n \{\
    5602 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5603 .\}
    5604 .el \{\
    5605 .sp -1
    5606 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5607 .\}
    5608 \fIrpc_cli\fR
    5609 .RE
    5610 .sp
    5611 .RS 4
    5612 .ie n \{\
    5613 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5614 .\}
    5615 .el \{\
    5616 .sp -1
    5617 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5618 .\}
    5619 \fIpassdb\fR
    5620 .RE
    5621 .sp
    5622 .RS 4
    5623 .ie n \{\
    5624 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5625 .\}
    5626 .el \{\
    5627 .sp -1
    5628 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5629 .\}
    5630 \fIsam\fR
    5631 .RE
    5632 .sp
    5633 .RS 4
    5634 .ie n \{\
    5635 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5636 .\}
    5637 .el \{\
    5638 .sp -1
    5639 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5640 .\}
    5641 \fIauth\fR
    5642 .RE
    5643 .sp
    5644 .RS 4
    5645 .ie n \{\
    5646 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5647 .\}
    5648 .el \{\
    5649 .sp -1
    5650 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5651 .\}
    5652 \fIwinbind\fR
    5653 .RE
    5654 .sp
    5655 .RS 4
    5656 .ie n \{\
    5657 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5658 .\}
    5659 .el \{\
    5660 .sp -1
    5661 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5662 .\}
    5663 \fIvfs\fR
    5664 .RE
    5665 .sp
    5666 .RS 4
    5667 .ie n \{\
    5668 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5669 .\}
    5670 .el \{\
    5671 .sp -1
    5672 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5673 .\}
    5674 \fIidmap\fR
    5675 .RE
    5676 .sp
    5677 .RS 4
    5678 .ie n \{\
    5679 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5680 .\}
    5681 .el \{\
    5682 .sp -1
    5683 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5684 .\}
    5685 \fIquota\fR
    5686 .RE
    5687 .sp
    5688 .RS 4
    5689 .ie n \{\
    5690 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5691 .\}
    5692 .el \{\
    5693 .sp -1
    5694 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5695 .\}
    5696 \fIacls\fR
    5697 .RE
    5698 .sp
    5699 .RS 4
    5700 .ie n \{\
    5701 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5702 .\}
    5703 .el \{\
    5704 .sp -1
    5705 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5706 .\}
    5707 \fIlocking\fR
    5708 .RE
    5709 .sp
    5710 .RS 4
    5711 .ie n \{\
    5712 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5713 .\}
    5714 .el \{\
    5715 .sp -1
    5716 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5717 .\}
    5718 \fImsdfs\fR
    5719 .RE
    5720 .sp
    5721 .RS 4
    5722 .ie n \{\
    5723 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5724 .\}
    5725 .el \{\
    5726 .sp -1
    5727 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5728 .\}
    5729 \fIdmapi\fR
    5730 .RE
    5731 .sp
    5732 .RS 4
    5733 .ie n \{\
    5734 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    5735 .\}
    5736 .el \{\
    5737 .sp -1
    5738 .IP \(bu 2.3
    5739 .\}
    5740 \fIregistry\fR
    5741 .sp
    5742 .RE
    5743 Default:
    5744 \fI\fIlog level\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5745 .sp
    5746 Example:
    5747 \fI\fIlog level\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC3 passdb:5 auth:10 winbind:2\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5748 .RE
    5749 
    5750 logon drive (G)
    5751 .\" logon drive
    5752 .PP
    5753 .RS 4
    5754 This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory will be connected (see
    5755 \m[blue]\fBlogon home\fR\m[]) and is only used by NT Workstations\&.
    5756 .sp
    5757 Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&.
    5758 .sp
    5759 Default:
    5760 \fI\fIlogon drive\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5761 .sp
    5762 Example:
    5763 \fI\fIlogon drive\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCh:\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5764 .RE
    5765 
    5766 logon home (G)
    5767 .\" logon home
    5768 .PP
    5769 .RS 4
    5770 This parameter specifies the home directory location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC\&. It allows you to do
    5771 .sp
    5772 
    5773 \FCC:\e>\F[]\fBNET USE H: /HOME\fR
    5774 .sp
    5775 from a command prompt, for example\&.
    5776 .sp
    5777 This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&.
    5778 .sp
    5779 This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure that roaming profiles are stored in a subdirectory of the user\'s home directory\&. This is done in the following way:
    5780 .sp
    5781 
    5782 \FClogon home = \e\e%N\e%U\eprofile\F[]
    5783 .sp
    5784 This tells Samba to return the above string, with substitutions made when a client requests the info, generally in a NetUserGetInfo request\&. Win9X clients truncate the info to \e\eserver\eshare when a user does
    5785 \FCnet use /home\F[]
    5786 but use the whole string when dealing with profiles\&.
    5787 .sp
    5788 Note that in prior versions of Samba, the
    5789 \m[blue]\fBlogon path\fR\m[]
    5790 was returned rather than
    5791 \fIlogon home\fR\&. This broke
    5792 \FCnet use /home\F[]
    5793 but allowed profiles outside the home directory\&. The current implementation is correct, and can be used for profiles if you use the above trick\&.
    5794 .sp
    5795 Disable this feature by setting
    5796 \m[blue]\fBlogon home = ""\fR\m[]
    5797 \- using the empty string\&.
    5798 .sp
    5799 This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&.
    5800 .sp
    5801 Default:
    5802 \fI\fIlogon home\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\e\e%N\e%U\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5803 .sp
    5804 Example:
    5805 \fI\fIlogon home\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\e\eremote_smb_server\e%U\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5806 .RE
    5807 
    5808 logon path (G)
    5809 .\" logon path
    5810 .PP
    5811 .RS 4
    5812 This parameter specifies the directory where roaming profiles (Desktop, NTuser\&.dat, etc) are stored\&. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles\&. To find out how to handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the
    5813 \m[blue]\fBlogon home\fR\m[]
    5814 parameter\&.
    5815 .sp
    5816 This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&. It also specifies the directory from which the "Application Data",
    5817 \FCdesktop\F[],
    5818 \FCstart menu\F[],
    5819 \FCnetwork neighborhood\F[],
    5820 \FCprograms\F[]
    5821 and other folders, and their contents, are loaded and displayed on your Windows NT client\&.
    5822 .sp
    5823 The share and the path must be readable by the user for the preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT client\&. The share must be writeable when the user logs in for the first time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the NTuser\&.dat and other directories\&. Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can, if required, be made read\-only\&. It is not advisable that the NTuser\&.dat file be made read\-only \- rename it to NTuser\&.man to achieve the desired effect (a
    5824 \fIMAN\fRdatory profile)\&.
    5825 .sp
    5826 Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to the [homes] share, even though there is no user logged in\&. Therefore, it is vital that the logon path does not include a reference to the homes share (i\&.e\&. setting this parameter to \e\e%N\ehomes\eprofile_path will cause problems)\&.
    5827 .sp
    5828 This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&.
    5829 .if n \{\
    5830 .sp
    5831 .\}
    5832 .RS 4
    5833 .BM yellow
    5834 .it 1 an-trap
    5835 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    5836 .nr an-break-flag 1
    5837 .br
    5838 .ps +1
    5839 \fBWarning\fR
    5840 .ps -1
    5841 .br
    5842 Do not quote the value\&. Setting this as
    5843 \(lq\e\e%N\eprofile\e%U\(rq
    5844 will break profile handling\&. Where the tdbsam or ldapsam passdb backend is used, at the time the user account is created the value configured for this parameter is written to the passdb backend and that value will over\-ride the parameter value present in the smb\&.conf file\&. Any error present in the passdb backend account record must be editted using the appropriate tool (pdbedit on the command\-line, or any other locally provided system tool)\&.
    5845 .sp .5v
    5846 .EM yellow
    5847 .RE
    5848 Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a domain controller\&.
    5849 .sp
    5850 Disable the use of roaming profiles by setting the value of this parameter to the empty string\&. For example,
    5851 \m[blue]\fBlogon path = ""\fR\m[]\&. Take note that even if the default setting in the smb\&.conf file is the empty string, any value specified in the user account settings in the passdb backend will over\-ride the effect of setting this parameter to null\&. Disabling of all roaming profile use requires that the user account settings must also be blank\&.
    5852 .sp
    5853 An example of use is:
    5854 .sp
    5855 .if n \{\
    5856 .RS 4
    5857 .\}
    5858 .fam C
    5859 .ps -1
    5860 .nf
    5861 .if t \{\
    5862 .sp -1
    5863 .\}
    5864 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    5865 .sp -1
    5866 
    5867 logon path = \e\ePROFILESERVER\ePROFILE\e%U
    5868 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    5869 .if t \{\
    5870 .sp 1
    5871 .\}
    5872 .fi
    5873 .fam
    5874 .ps +1
    5875 .if n \{\
    5876 .RE
    5877 .\}
    5878 .sp
    5879 Default:
    5880 \fI\fIlogon path\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\e\e%N\e%U\eprofile\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5881 .RE
    5882 
    5883 logon script (G)
    5884 .\" logon script
    5885 .PP
    5886 .RS 4
    5887 This parameter specifies the batch file (\FC\&.bat\F[]) or NT command file (\FC\&.cmd\F[]) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully logs in\&. The file must contain the DOS style CR/LF line endings\&. Using a DOS\-style editor to create the file is recommended\&.
    5888 .sp
    5889 The script must be a relative path to the
    5890 \fI[netlogon]\fR
    5891 service\&. If the [netlogon] service specifies a
    5892 \m[blue]\fBpath\fR\m[]
    5893 of
    5894 \FC/usr/local/samba/netlogon\F[], and
    5895 \m[blue]\fBlogon script = STARTUP\&.BAT\fR\m[], then the file that will be downloaded is:
    5896 .sp
    5897 .if n \{\
    5898 .RS 4
    5899 .\}
    5900 .fam C
    5901 .ps -1
    5902 .nf
    5903 .if t \{\
    5904 .sp -1
    5905 .\}
    5906 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    5907 .sp -1
    5908 
    5909         /usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP\&.BAT
    5910 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    5911 .if t \{\
    5912 .sp 1
    5913 .\}
    5914 .fi
    5915 .fam
    5916 .ps +1
    5917 .if n \{\
    5918 .RE
    5919 .\}
    5920 .sp
    5921 The contents of the batch file are entirely your choice\&. A suggested command would be to add
    5922 \FCNET TIME \e\eSERVER /SET /YES\F[], to force every machine to synchronize clocks with the same time server\&. Another use would be to add
    5923 \FCNET USE U: \e\eSERVER\eUTILS\F[]
    5924 for commonly used utilities, or
    5925 .sp
    5926 .if n \{\
    5927 .RS 4
    5928 .\}
    5929 .fam C
    5930 .ps -1
    5931 .nf
    5932 .if t \{\
    5933 .sp -1
    5934 .\}
    5935 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    5936 .sp -1
    5937 
    5938 \fBNET USE Q: \e\eSERVER\eISO9001_QA\fR
    5939 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    5940 .if t \{\
    5941 .sp 1
    5942 .\}
    5943 .fi
    5944 .fam
    5945 .ps +1
    5946 .if n \{\
    5947 .RE
    5948 .\}
    5949 .sp
    5950 for example\&.
    5951 .sp
    5952 Note that it is particularly important not to allow write access to the [netlogon] share, or to grant users write permission on the batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow the batch files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be breached\&.
    5953 .sp
    5954 This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&.
    5955 .sp
    5956 This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&.
    5957 .sp
    5958 Default:
    5959 \fI\fIlogon script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5960 .sp
    5961 Example:
    5962 \fI\fIlogon script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCscripts\e%U\&.bat\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5963 .RE
    5964 
    5965 lppause command (S)
    5966 .\" lppause command
    5967 .PP
    5968 .RS 4
    5969 This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job\&.
    5970 .sp
    5971 This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to pause the print job\&. One way of implementing this is by using job priorities, where jobs having a too low priority won\'t be sent to the printer\&.
    5972 .sp
    5973 If a
    5974 \fI%p\fR
    5975 is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. A
    5976 \fI%j\fR
    5977 is replaced with the job number (an integer)\&. On HPUX (see
    5978 \fIprinting=hpux \fR), if the
    5979 \fI\-p%p\fR
    5980 option is added to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status, i\&.e\&. if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will have the PAUSED status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status\&.
    5981 .sp
    5982 Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server\&.
    5983 .sp
    5984 Default:
    5985 \fI\fIlppause command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the value of the \m[blue]\fBprinting\fR\m[] parameter is \fBSYSV\fR, in which case the default is : \FClp \-i %p\-%j \-H hold\F[] or if the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter is \fBSOFTQ\fR, then the default is: \FCqstat \-s \-j%j \-h\F[]\&. \F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5986 .sp
    5987 Example:
    5988 \fI\fIlppause command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/bin/lpalt %p\-%j \-p0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    5989 .RE
    5990 
    5991 lpq cache time (G)
    5992 .\" lpq cache time
    5993 .PP
    5994 .RS 4
    5995 This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the
    5996 \FClpq\F[]
    5997 command being called too often\&. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the
    5998 \FC lpq\F[]
    5999 command used by the system, so if you use different
    6000 \FClpq\F[]
    6001 commands for different users then they won\'t share cache information\&.
    6002 .sp
    6003 The cache files are stored in
    6004 \FC/tmp/lpq\&.xxxx\F[]
    6005 where xxxx is a hash of the
    6006 \FClpq\F[]
    6007 command in use\&.
    6008 .sp
    6009 The default is 30 seconds, meaning that the cached results of a previous identical
    6010 \FClpq\F[]
    6011 command will be used if the cached data is less than 30 seconds old\&. A large value may be advisable if your
    6012 \FClpq\F[]
    6013 command is very slow\&.
    6014 .sp
    6015 A value of 0 will disable caching completely\&.
    6016 .sp
    6017 Default:
    6018 \fI\fIlpq cache time\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC30\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6019 .sp
    6020 Example:
    6021 \fI\fIlpq cache time\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC10\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6022 .RE
    6023 
    6024 lpq command (S)
    6025 .\" lpq command
    6026 .PP
    6027 .RS 4
    6028 This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to obtain
    6029 \FClpq \F[]\-style printer status information\&.
    6030 .sp
    6031 This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer status information\&.
    6032 .sp
    6033 Currently nine styles of printer status information are supported; BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX, CUPS, and SOFTQ\&. This covers most UNIX systems\&. You control which type is expected using the
    6034 \fIprinting =\fR
    6035 option\&.
    6036 .sp
    6037 Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not correctly send the connection number for the printer they are requesting status information about\&. To get around this, the server reports on the first printer service connected to by the client\&. This only happens if the connection number sent is invalid\&.
    6038 .sp
    6039 If a
    6040 \fI%p\fR
    6041 is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command\&.
    6042 .sp
    6043 Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
    6044 \fIlpq command\fR
    6045 as the
    6046 \fB$PATH \fR
    6047 may not be available to the server\&. When compiled with the CUPS libraries, no
    6048 \fIlpq command\fR
    6049 is needed because smbd will make a library call to obtain the print queue listing\&.
    6050 .sp
    6051 Default:
    6052 \fI\fIlpq command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6053 .sp
    6054 Example:
    6055 \fI\fIlpq command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/bin/lpq \-P%p\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6056 .RE
    6057 
    6058 lpresume command (S)
    6059 .\" lpresume command
    6060 .PP
    6061 .RS 4
    6062 This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print job\&.
    6063 .sp
    6064 This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to resume the print job\&. See also the
    6065 \m[blue]\fBlppause command\fR\m[]
    6066 parameter\&.
    6067 .sp
    6068 If a
    6069 \fI%p\fR
    6070 is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. A
    6071 \fI%j\fR
    6072 is replaced with the job number (an integer)\&.
    6073 .sp
    6074 Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
    6075 \fIlpresume command\fR
    6076 as the PATH may not be available to the server\&.
    6077 .sp
    6078 See also the
    6079 \m[blue]\fBprinting\fR\m[]
    6080 parameter\&.
    6081 .sp
    6082 Default: Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the value of the
    6083 \fIprinting\fR
    6084 parameter is
    6085 \fBSYSV\fR, in which case the default is:
    6086 .sp
    6087 \FClp \-i %p\-%j \-H resume\F[]
    6088 .sp
    6089 or if the value of the
    6090 \fIprinting\fR
    6091 parameter is
    6092 \fBSOFTQ\fR, then the default is:
    6093 .sp
    6094 \FCqstat \-s \-j%j \-r\F[]
    6095 .sp
    6096 \fINo default\fR
    6097 .sp
    6098 Example:
    6099 \fI\fIlpresume command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/bin/lpalt %p\-%j \-p2\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6100 .RE
    6101 
    6102 lprm command (S)
    6103 .\" lprm command
    6104 .PP
    6105 .RS 4
    6106 This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to delete a print job\&.
    6107 .sp
    6108 This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job\&.
    6109 .sp
    6110 If a
    6111 \fI%p\fR
    6112 is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. A
    6113 \fI%j\fR
    6114 is replaced with the job number (an integer)\&.
    6115 .sp
    6116 Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the
    6117 \fIlprm command\fR
    6118 as the PATH may not be available to the server\&.
    6119 .sp
    6120 Examples of use are:
    6121 .sp
    6122 .if n \{\
    6123 .RS 4
    6124 .\}
    6125 .fam C
    6126 .ps -1
    6127 .nf
    6128 .if t \{\
    6129 .sp -1
    6130 .\}
    6131 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    6132 .sp -1
    6133 
    6134 lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm \-P%p %j
    6135 
    6136 or
    6137 
    6138 lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p\-%j
    6139 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    6140 .if t \{\
    6141 .sp 1
    6142 .\}
    6143 .fi
    6144 .fam
    6145 .ps +1
    6146 .if n \{\
    6147 .RE
    6148 .\}
    6149 .sp
    6150 Default:
    6151 \fI\fIlprm command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC determined by printing parameter\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6152 .RE
    6153 
    6154 machine password timeout (G)
    6155 .\" machine password timeout
    6156 .PP
    6157 .RS 4
    6158 If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the
    6159 \m[blue]\fBsecurity = domain\fR\m[]
    6160 parameter) then periodically a running smbd process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT PASSWORD stored in the TDB called
    6161 \FCprivate/secrets\&.tdb \F[]\&. This parameter specifies how often this password will be changed, in seconds\&. The default is one week (expressed in seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server\&.
    6162 .sp
    6163 See also
    6164 \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8), and the
    6165 \m[blue]\fBsecurity = domain\fR\m[]
    6166 parameter\&.
    6167 .sp
    6168 Default:
    6169 \fI\fImachine password timeout\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC604800\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6170 .RE
    6171 
    6172 magic output (S)
    6173 .\" magic output
    6174 .PP
    6175 .RS 4
    6176 This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output created by a magic script (see the
    6177 \m[blue]\fBmagic script\fR\m[]
    6178 parameter below)\&.
    6179 .if n \{\
    6180 .sp
    6181 .\}
    6182 .RS 4
    6183 .BM yellow
    6184 .it 1 an-trap
    6185 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    6186 .nr an-break-flag 1
    6187 .br
    6188 .ps +1
    6189 \fBWarning\fR
    6190 .ps -1
    6191 .br
    6192 If two clients use the same
    6193 \fImagic script \fR
    6194 in the same directory the output file content is undefined\&.
    6195 .sp .5v
    6196 .EM yellow
    6197 .RE
    6198 Default:
    6199 \fI\fImagic output\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC<magic script name>\&.out\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6200 .sp
    6201 Example:
    6202 \fI\fImagic output\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCmyfile\&.txt\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6203 .RE
    6204 
    6205 magic script (S)
    6206 .\" magic script
    6207 .PP
    6208 .RS 4
    6209 This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed\&. This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and executed on behalf of the connected user\&.
    6210 .sp
    6211 Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon completion assuming that the user has the appropriate level of privilege and the file permissions allow the deletion\&.
    6212 .sp
    6213 If the script generates output, output will be sent to the file specified by the
    6214 \m[blue]\fBmagic output\fR\m[]
    6215 parameter (see above)\&.
    6216 .sp
    6217 Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts containing CR/LF instead of CR as the end\-of\-line marker\&. Magic scripts must be executable
    6218 \fIas is\fR
    6219 on the host, which for some hosts and some shells will require filtering at the DOS end\&.
    6220 .sp
    6221 Magic scripts are
    6222 \fIEXPERIMENTAL\fR
    6223 and should
    6224 \fINOT\fR
    6225 be relied upon\&.
    6226 .sp
    6227 Default:
    6228 \fI\fImagic script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6229 .sp
    6230 Example:
    6231 \fI\fImagic script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCuser\&.csh\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6232 .RE
    6233 
    6234 mangled names (S)
    6235 .\" mangled names
    6236 .PP
    6237 .RS 4
    6238 This controls whether non\-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to DOS\-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, or whether non\-DOS names should simply be ignored\&.
    6239 .sp
    6240 See the section on
    6241 \m[blue]\fBname mangling\fR\m[]
    6242 for details on how to control the mangling process\&.
    6243 .sp
    6244 If mangling is used then the mangling method is as follows:
    6245 .sp
    6246 .RS 4
    6247 .ie n \{\
    6248 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6249 .\}
    6250 .el \{\
    6251 .sp -1
    6252 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6253 .\}
    6254 The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters of the mangled name\&.
    6255 .RE
    6256 .sp
    6257 .RS 4
    6258 .ie n \{\
    6259 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6260 .\}
    6261 .el \{\
    6262 .sp -1
    6263 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6264 .\}
    6265 A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled name, followed by a two\-character unique sequence, based on the original root name (i\&.e\&., the original filename minus its final extension)\&. The final extension is included in the hash calculation only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three characters\&.
    6266 .sp
    6267 Note that the character to use may be specified using the
    6268 \m[blue]\fBmangling char\fR\m[]
    6269 option, if you don\'t like \'~\'\&.
    6270 .RE
    6271 .sp
    6272 .RS 4
    6273 .ie n \{\
    6274 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6275 .\}
    6276 .el \{\
    6277 .sp -1
    6278 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6279 .\}
    6280 Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be presented as DOS hidden files\&. The mangled name will be created as for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as its extension regardless of actual original extension (that\'s three underscores)\&.
    6281 .sp
    6282 .RE
    6283 The two\-digit hash value consists of upper case alphanumeric characters\&.
    6284 .sp
    6285 This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files in a directory share the same first five alphanumeric characters\&. The probability of such a clash is 1/1300\&.
    6286 .sp
    6287 The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be copied between UNIX directories from Windows/DOS while retaining the long UNIX filename\&. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename\&. Mangled names do not change between sessions\&.
    6288 .sp
    6289 Default:
    6290 \fI\fImangled names\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6291 .RE
    6292 
    6293 mangle prefix (G)
    6294 .\" mangle prefix
    6295 .PP
    6296 .RS 4
    6297 controls the number of prefix characters from the original name used when generating the mangled names\&. A larger value will give a weaker hash and therefore more name collisions\&. The minimum value is 1 and the maximum value is 6\&.
    6298 .sp
    6299 mangle prefix is effective only when mangling method is hash2\&.
    6300 .sp
    6301 Default:
    6302 \fI\fImangle prefix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6303 .sp
    6304 Example:
    6305 \fI\fImangle prefix\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC4\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6306 .RE
    6307 
    6308 mangling char (S)
    6309 .\" mangling char
    6310 .PP
    6311 .RS 4
    6312 This controls what character is used as the
    6313 \fImagic\fR
    6314 character in
    6315 \m[blue]\fBname mangling\fR\m[]\&. The default is a \'~\' but this may interfere with some software\&. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer\&. This is effective only when mangling method is hash\&.
    6316 .sp
    6317 Default:
    6318 \fI\fImangling char\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC~\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6319 .sp
    6320 Example:
    6321 \fI\fImangling char\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC^\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6322 .RE
    6323 
    6324 mangling method (G)
    6325 .\" mangling method
    6326 .PP
    6327 .RS 4
    6328 controls the algorithm used for the generating the mangled names\&. Can take two different values, "hash" and "hash2"\&. "hash" is the algorithm that was used used in Samba for many years and was the default in Samba 2\&.2\&.x "hash2" is now the default and is newer and considered a better algorithm (generates less collisions) in the names\&. Many Win32 applications store the mangled names and so changing to algorithms must not be done lightly as these applications may break unless reinstalled\&.
    6329 .sp
    6330 Default:
    6331 \fI\fImangling method\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FChash2\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6332 .sp
    6333 Example:
    6334 \fI\fImangling method\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FChash\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6335 .RE
    6336 
    6337 map acl inherit (S)
    6338 .\" map acl inherit
    6339 .PP
    6340 .RS 4
    6341 This boolean parameter controls whether
    6342 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    6343 will attempt to map the \'inherit\' and \'protected\' access control entry flags stored in Windows ACLs into an extended attribute called user\&.SAMBA_PAI\&. This parameter only takes effect if Samba is being run on a platform that supports extended attributes (Linux and IRIX so far) and allows the Windows 2000 ACL editor to correctly use inheritance with the Samba POSIX ACL mapping code\&.
    6344 .sp
    6345 Default:
    6346 \fI\fImap acl inherit\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6347 .RE
    6348 
    6349 map archive (S)
    6350 .\" map archive
    6351 .PP
    6352 .RS 4
    6353 This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit\&. The DOS archive bit is set when a file has been modified since its last backup\&. One motivation for this option is to keep Samba/your PC from making any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX\&. This can be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc\&.\&.\&.
    6354 .sp
    6355 Note that this requires the
    6356 \m[blue]\fBcreate mask\fR\m[]
    6357 parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out (i\&.e\&. it must include 100)\&. See the parameter
    6358 \m[blue]\fBcreate mask\fR\m[]
    6359 for details\&.
    6360 .sp
    6361 Default:
    6362 \fI\fImap archive\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6363 .RE
    6364 
    6365 map hidden (S)
    6366 .\" map hidden
    6367 .PP
    6368 .RS 4
    6369 This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit\&.
    6370 .sp
    6371 Note that this requires the
    6372 \m[blue]\fBcreate mask\fR\m[]
    6373 to be set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i\&.e\&. it must include 001)\&. See the parameter
    6374 \m[blue]\fBcreate mask\fR\m[]
    6375 for details\&.
    6376 .sp
    6377 \fINo default\fR
    6378 .RE
    6379 
    6380 map readonly (S)
    6381 .\" map readonly
    6382 .PP
    6383 .RS 4
    6384 This controls how the DOS read only attribute should be mapped from a UNIX filesystem\&.
    6385 .sp
    6386 This parameter can take three different values, which tell
    6387 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    6388 how to display the read only attribute on files, where either
    6389 \m[blue]\fBstore dos attributes\fR\m[]
    6390 is set to
    6391 \fBNo\fR, or no extended attribute is present\&. If
    6392 \m[blue]\fBstore dos attributes\fR\m[]
    6393 is set to
    6394 \fByes\fR
    6395 then this parameter is
    6396 \fIignored\fR\&. This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version 3\&.0\&.21\&.
    6397 .sp
    6398 The three settings are :
    6399 .sp
    6400 .RS 4
    6401 .ie n \{\
    6402 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6403 .\}
    6404 .el \{\
    6405 .sp -1
    6406 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6407 .\}
    6408 
    6409 \fBYes\fR
    6410 \- The read only DOS attribute is mapped to the inverse of the user or owner write bit in the unix permission mode set\&. If the owner write bit is not set, the read only attribute is reported as being set on the file\&. If the read only DOS attribute is set, Samba sets the owner, group and others write bits to zero\&. Write bits set in an ACL are ignored by Samba\&. If the read only DOS attribute is unset, Samba simply sets the write bit of the owner to one\&.
    6411 .RE
    6412 .sp
    6413 .RS 4
    6414 .ie n \{\
    6415 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6416 .\}
    6417 .el \{\
    6418 .sp -1
    6419 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6420 .\}
    6421 
    6422 \fBPermissions\fR
    6423 \- The read only DOS attribute is mapped to the effective permissions of the connecting user, as evaluated by
    6424 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    6425 by reading the unix permissions and POSIX ACL (if present)\&. If the connecting user does not have permission to modify the file, the read only attribute is reported as being set on the file\&.
    6426 .RE
    6427 .sp
    6428 .RS 4
    6429 .ie n \{\
    6430 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6431 .\}
    6432 .el \{\
    6433 .sp -1
    6434 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6435 .\}
    6436 
    6437 \fBNo\fR
    6438 \- The read only DOS attribute is unaffected by permissions, and can only be set by the
    6439 \m[blue]\fBstore dos attributes\fR\m[]
    6440 method\&. This may be useful for exporting mounted CDs\&.
    6441 .sp
    6442 .RE
    6443 Default:
    6444 \fI\fImap readonly\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6445 .RE
    6446 
    6447 map system (S)
    6448 .\" map system
    6449 .PP
    6450 .RS 4
    6451 This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit\&.
    6452 .sp
    6453 Note that this requires the
    6454 \m[blue]\fBcreate mask\fR\m[]
    6455 to be set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i\&.e\&. it must include 010)\&. See the parameter
    6456 \m[blue]\fBcreate mask\fR\m[]
    6457 for details\&.
    6458 .sp
    6459 Default:
    6460 \fI\fImap system\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6461 .RE
    6462 
    6463 map to guest (G)
    6464 .\" map to guest
    6465 .PP
    6466 .RS 4
    6467 This parameter is only useful in
    6468 \m[blue]\fBSECURITY = security\fR\m[]
    6469 modes other than
    6470 \fIsecurity = share\fR
    6471 and
    6472 \fIsecurity = server\fR
    6473 \- i\&.e\&.
    6474 \fBuser\fR, and
    6475 \fBdomain\fR\&.
    6476 .sp
    6477 This parameter can take four different values, which tell
    6478 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    6479 what to do with user login requests that don\'t match a valid UNIX user in some way\&.
    6480 .sp
    6481 The four settings are :
    6482 .sp
    6483 .RS 4
    6484 .ie n \{\
    6485 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6486 .\}
    6487 .el \{\
    6488 .sp -1
    6489 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6490 .\}
    6491 \fBNever\fR
    6492 \- Means user login requests with an invalid password are rejected\&. This is the default\&.
    6493 .RE
    6494 .sp
    6495 .RS 4
    6496 .ie n \{\
    6497 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6498 .\}
    6499 .el \{\
    6500 .sp -1
    6501 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6502 .\}
    6503 \fBBad User\fR
    6504 \- Means user logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and mapped into the
    6505 \m[blue]\fBguest account\fR\m[]\&.
    6506 .RE
    6507 .sp
    6508 .RS 4
    6509 .ie n \{\
    6510 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6511 .\}
    6512 .el \{\
    6513 .sp -1
    6514 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6515 .\}
    6516 \fBBad Password\fR
    6517 \- Means user logins with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped into the
    6518 \m[blue]\fBguest account\fR\m[]\&. Note that this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing their password will be silently logged on as "guest" \- and will not know the reason they cannot access files they think they should \- there will have been no message given to them that they got their password wrong\&. Helpdesk services will
    6519 \fIhate\fR
    6520 you if you set the
    6521 \fImap to guest\fR
    6522 parameter this way :\-)\&.
    6523 .RE
    6524 .sp
    6525 .RS 4
    6526 .ie n \{\
    6527 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6528 .\}
    6529 .el \{\
    6530 .sp -1
    6531 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6532 .\}
    6533 \fBBad Uid\fR
    6534 \- Is only applicable when Samba is configured in some type of domain mode security (security = {domain|ads}) and means that user logins which are successfully authenticated but which have no valid Unix user account (and smbd is unable to create one) should be mapped to the defined guest account\&. This was the default behavior of Samba 2\&.x releases\&. Note that if a member server is running winbindd, this option should never be required because the nss_winbind library will export the Windows domain users and groups to the underlying OS via the Name Service Switch interface\&.
    6535 .sp
    6536 .RE
    6537 Note that this parameter is needed to set up "Guest" share services when using
    6538 \fIsecurity\fR
    6539 modes other than share and server\&. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being requested is
    6540 \fInot\fR
    6541 sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client so the server cannot make authentication decisions at the correct time (connection to the share) for "Guest" shares\&. This parameter is not useful with
    6542 \fIsecurity = server\fR
    6543 as in this security mode no information is returned about whether a user logon failed due to a bad username or bad password, the same error is returned from a modern server in both cases\&.
    6544 .sp
    6545 For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this parameter maps to the old compile\-time setting of the
    6546 \fB GUEST_SESSSETUP\fR
    6547 value in local\&.h\&.
    6548 .sp
    6549 Default:
    6550 \fI\fImap to guest\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNever\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6551 .sp
    6552 Example:
    6553 \fI\fImap to guest\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCBad User\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6554 .RE
    6555 
    6556 map untrusted to domain (G)
    6557 .\" map untrusted to domain
    6558 .PP
    6559 .RS 4
    6560 If a client connects to smbd using an untrusted domain name, such as BOGUS\euser, smbd replaces the BOGUS domain with it\'s SAM name before attempting to authenticate that user\&. In the case where smbd is acting as a PDC this will be DOMAIN\euser\&. In the case where smbd is acting as a domain member server or a standalone server this will be WORKSTATION\euser\&.
    6561 .sp
    6562 In previous versions of Samba (pre 3\&.4), if smbd was acting as a domain member server, the BOGUS domain name would instead be replaced by the primary domain which smbd was a member of\&. In this case authentication would be deferred off to a DC using the credentials DOMAIN\euser\&.
    6563 .sp
    6564 When this parameter is set to
    6565 \fByes\fR
    6566 smbd provides the legacy behavior of mapping untrusted domain names to the primary domain\&. When smbd is not acting as a domain member server, this parameter has no effect\&.
    6567 .sp
    6568 Default:
    6569 \fI\fImap untrusted to domain\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6570 .RE
    6571 
    6572 max connections (S)
    6573 .\" max connections
    6574 .PP
    6575 .RS 4
    6576 This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited\&. If
    6577 \fImax connections\fR
    6578 is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if this number of connections to the service are already open\&. A value of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made\&.
    6579 .sp
    6580 Record lock files are used to implement this feature\&. The lock files will be stored in the directory specified by the
    6581 \m[blue]\fBlock directory\fR\m[]
    6582 option\&.
    6583 .sp
    6584 Default:
    6585 \fI\fImax connections\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6586 .sp
    6587 Example:
    6588 \fI\fImax connections\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC10\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6589 .RE
    6590 
    6591 max disk size (G)
    6592 .\" max disk size
    6593 .PP
    6594 .RS 4
    6595 This option allows you to put an upper limit on the apparent size of disks\&. If you set this option to 100 then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in size\&.
    6596 .sp
    6597 Note that this option does not limit the amount of data you can put on the disk\&. In the above case you could still store much more than 100 MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks for the amount of free disk space or the total disk size then the result will be bounded by the amount specified in
    6598 \fImax disk size\fR\&.
    6599 .sp
    6600 This option is primarily useful to work around bugs in some pieces of software that can\'t handle very large disks, particularly disks over 1GB in size\&.
    6601 .sp
    6602 A
    6603 \fImax disk size\fR
    6604 of 0 means no limit\&.
    6605 .sp
    6606 Default:
    6607 \fI\fImax disk size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6608 .sp
    6609 Example:
    6610 \fI\fImax disk size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6611 .RE
    6612 
    6613 max log size (G)
    6614 .\" max log size
    6615 .PP
    6616 .RS 4
    6617 This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log file should grow to\&. Samba periodically checks the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding a
    6618 \FC\&.old\F[]
    6619 extension\&.
    6620 .sp
    6621 A size of 0 means no limit\&.
    6622 .sp
    6623 Default:
    6624 \fI\fImax log size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC5000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6625 .sp
    6626 Example:
    6627 \fI\fImax log size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6628 .RE
    6629 
    6630 max mux (G)
    6631 .\" max mux
    6632 .PP
    6633 .RS 4
    6634 This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client it will allow\&. You should never need to set this parameter\&.
    6635 .sp
    6636 Default:
    6637 \fI\fImax mux\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC50\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6638 .RE
    6639 
    6640 max open files (G)
    6641 .\" max open files
    6642 .PP
    6643 .RS 4
    6644 This parameter limits the maximum number of open files that one
    6645 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    6646 file serving process may have open for a client at any one time\&. The This parameter can be set very high (16404) as Samba uses only one bit per unopened file\&. Setting this parameter lower than 16404 will cause Samba to complain and set this value back to the minimum of 16404, as Windows 7 depends on this number of open file handles being available\&.
    6647 .sp
    6648 The limit of the number of open files is usually set by the UNIX per\-process file descriptor limit rather than this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter\&.
    6649 .sp
    6650 Default:
    6651 \fI\fImax open files\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC16404\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6652 .RE
    6653 
    6654 max print jobs (S)
    6655 .\" max print jobs
    6656 .PP
    6657 .RS 4
    6658 This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment\&. If this number is exceeded,
    6659 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    6660 will remote "Out of Space" to the client\&.
    6661 .sp
    6662 Default:
    6663 \fI\fImax print jobs\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6664 .sp
    6665 Example:
    6666 \fI\fImax print jobs\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC5000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6667 .RE
    6668 
    6669 protocol
    6670 .\" protocol
    6671 .PP
    6672 .RS 4
    6673 This parameter is a synonym for
    6674 max protocol\&.
    6675 .RE
    6676 
    6677 max protocol (G)
    6678 .\" max protocol
    6679 .PP
    6680 .RS 4
    6681 The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level that will be supported by the server\&.
    6682 .sp
    6683 Possible values are :
    6684 .sp
    6685 .RS 4
    6686 .ie n \{\
    6687 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6688 .\}
    6689 .el \{\
    6690 .sp -1
    6691 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6692 .\}
    6693 \fBCORE\fR: Earliest version\&. No concept of user names\&.
    6694 .RE
    6695 .sp
    6696 .RS 4
    6697 .ie n \{\
    6698 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6699 .\}
    6700 .el \{\
    6701 .sp -1
    6702 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6703 .\}
    6704 \fBCOREPLUS\fR: Slight improvements on CORE for efficiency\&.
    6705 .RE
    6706 .sp
    6707 .RS 4
    6708 .ie n \{\
    6709 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6710 .\}
    6711 .el \{\
    6712 .sp -1
    6713 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6714 .\}
    6715 \fBLANMAN1\fR: First
    6716 \fI modern\fR
    6717 version of the protocol\&. Long filename support\&.
    6718 .RE
    6719 .sp
    6720 .RS 4
    6721 .ie n \{\
    6722 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6723 .\}
    6724 .el \{\
    6725 .sp -1
    6726 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6727 .\}
    6728 \fBLANMAN2\fR: Updates to Lanman1 protocol\&.
    6729 .RE
    6730 .sp
    6731 .RS 4
    6732 .ie n \{\
    6733 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6734 .\}
    6735 .el \{\
    6736 .sp -1
    6737 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6738 .\}
    6739 \fBNT1\fR: Current up to date version of the protocol\&. Used by Windows NT\&. Known as CIFS\&.
    6740 .RE
    6741 .sp
    6742 .RS 4
    6743 .ie n \{\
    6744 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6745 .\}
    6746 .el \{\
    6747 .sp -1
    6748 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6749 .\}
    6750 \fBSMB2\fR: Re\-implementation of the SMB protocol\&. Used by Windows Vista and newer\&. The Samba implementation of SMB2 is currently marked experimental!
    6751 .sp
    6752 .RE
    6753 Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate protocol\&.
    6754 .sp
    6755 Default:
    6756 \fI\fImax protocol\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNT1\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6757 .sp
    6758 Example:
    6759 \fI\fImax protocol\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCLANMAN1\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6760 .RE
    6761 
    6762 max reported print jobs (S)
    6763 .\" max reported print jobs
    6764 .PP
    6765 .RS 4
    6766 This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs displayed in a port monitor for Samba printer queue at any given moment\&. If this number is exceeded, the excess jobs will not be shown\&. A value of zero means there is no limit on the number of print jobs reported\&.
    6767 .sp
    6768 Default:
    6769 \fI\fImax reported print jobs\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6770 .sp
    6771 Example:
    6772 \fI\fImax reported print jobs\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6773 .RE
    6774 
    6775 max smbd processes (G)
    6776 .\" max smbd processes
    6777 .PP
    6778 .RS 4
    6779 This parameter limits the maximum number of
    6780 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    6781 processes concurrently running on a system and is intended as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this number of connections\&. Remember that under normal operating conditions, each user will have an
    6782 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    6783 associated with him or her to handle connections to all shares from a given host\&.
    6784 .sp
    6785 Default:
    6786 \fI\fImax smbd processes\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6787 .sp
    6788 Example:
    6789 \fI\fImax smbd processes\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6790 .RE
    6791 
    6792 max stat cache size (G)
    6793 .\" max stat cache size
    6794 .PP
    6795 .RS 4
    6796 This parameter limits the size in memory of any
    6797 \fIstat cache\fR
    6798 being used to speed up case insensitive name mappings\&. It represents the number of kilobyte (1024) units the stat cache can use\&. A value of zero, meaning unlimited, is not advisable due to increased memory useage\&. You should not need to change this parameter\&.
    6799 .sp
    6800 Default:
    6801 \fI\fImax stat cache size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC256\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6802 .sp
    6803 Example:
    6804 \fI\fImax stat cache size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC100\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6805 .RE
    6806 
    6807 max ttl (G)
    6808 .\" max ttl
    6809 .PP
    6810 .RS 4
    6811 This option tells
    6812 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    6813 what the default \'time to live\' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when
    6814 \FCnmbd\F[]
    6815 is requesting a name using either a broadcast packet or from a WINS server\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. The default is 3 days\&.
    6816 .sp
    6817 Default:
    6818 \fI\fImax ttl\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC259200\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6819 .RE
    6820 
    6821 max wins ttl (G)
    6822 .\" max wins ttl
    6823 .PP
    6824 .RS 4
    6825 This option tells
    6826 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    6827 when acting as a WINS server (\m[blue]\fBwins support = yes\fR\m[]) what the maximum \'time to live\' of NetBIOS names that
    6828 \FCnmbd\F[]
    6829 will grant will be (in seconds)\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds)\&.
    6830 .sp
    6831 Default:
    6832 \fI\fImax wins ttl\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC518400\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6833 .RE
    6834 
    6835 max xmit (G)
    6836 .\" max xmit
    6837 .PP
    6838 .RS 4
    6839 This option controls the maximum packet size that will be negotiated by Samba\&. The default is 16644, which matches the behavior of Windows 2000\&. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems\&. You should never need to change this parameter from its default value\&.
    6840 .sp
    6841 Default:
    6842 \fI\fImax xmit\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC16644\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6843 .sp
    6844 Example:
    6845 \fI\fImax xmit\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC8192\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6846 .RE
    6847 
    6848 message command (G)
    6849 .\" message command
    6850 .PP
    6851 .RS 4
    6852 This specifies what command to run when the server receives a WinPopup style message\&.
    6853 .sp
    6854 This would normally be a command that would deliver the message somehow\&. How this is to be done is up to your imagination\&.
    6855 .sp
    6856 An example is:
    6857 .sp
    6858 .if n \{\
    6859 .RS 4
    6860 .\}
    6861 .fam C
    6862 .ps -1
    6863 .nf
    6864 .if t \{\
    6865 .sp -1
    6866 .\}
    6867 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    6868 .sp -1
    6869 
    6870 \FCmessage command = csh \-c \'xedit %s;rm %s\' &\F[]
    6871 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    6872 .if t \{\
    6873 .sp 1
    6874 .\}
    6875 .fi
    6876 .fam
    6877 .ps +1
    6878 .if n \{\
    6879 .RE
    6880 .\}
    6881 .sp
    6882 This delivers the message using
    6883 \FCxedit\F[], then removes it afterwards\&.
    6884 \fINOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY\fR\&. That\'s why I have the \'&\' on the end\&. If it doesn\'t return immediately then your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover after 30 seconds, hopefully)\&.
    6885 .sp
    6886 All messages are delivered as the global guest user\&. The command takes the standard substitutions, although
    6887 \fI %u\fR
    6888 won\'t work (\fI%U\fR
    6889 may be better in this case)\&.
    6890 .sp
    6891 Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional ones apply\&. In particular:
    6892 .sp
    6893 .RS 4
    6894 .ie n \{\
    6895 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6896 .\}
    6897 .el \{\
    6898 .sp -1
    6899 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6900 .\}
    6901 \fI%s\fR
    6902 = the filename containing the message\&.
    6903 .RE
    6904 .sp
    6905 .RS 4
    6906 .ie n \{\
    6907 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6908 .\}
    6909 .el \{\
    6910 .sp -1
    6911 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6912 .\}
    6913 \fI%t\fR
    6914 = the destination that the message was sent to (probably the server name)\&.
    6915 .RE
    6916 .sp
    6917 .RS 4
    6918 .ie n \{\
    6919 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    6920 .\}
    6921 .el \{\
    6922 .sp -1
    6923 .IP \(bu 2.3
    6924 .\}
    6925 \fI%f\fR
    6926 = who the message is from\&.
    6927 .sp
    6928 .RE
    6929 You could make this command send mail, or whatever else takes your fancy\&. Please let us know of any really interesting ideas you have\&.
    6930 .sp
    6931 Here\'s a way of sending the messages as mail to root:
    6932 .sp
    6933 .if n \{\
    6934 .RS 4
    6935 .\}
    6936 .fam C
    6937 .ps -1
    6938 .nf
    6939 .if t \{\
    6940 .sp -1
    6941 .\}
    6942 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    6943 .sp -1
    6944 
    6945 \FCmessage command = /bin/mail \-s \'message from %f on %m\' root < %s; rm %s\F[]
    6946 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    6947 .if t \{\
    6948 .sp 1
    6949 .\}
    6950 .fi
    6951 .fam
    6952 .ps +1
    6953 .if n \{\
    6954 .RE
    6955 .\}
    6956 .sp
    6957 If you don\'t have a message command then the message won\'t be delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was an error\&. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code and carries on regardless, saying that the message was delivered\&.
    6958 .sp
    6959 If you want to silently delete it then try:
    6960 .sp
    6961 .if n \{\
    6962 .RS 4
    6963 .\}
    6964 .fam C
    6965 .ps -1
    6966 .nf
    6967 .if t \{\
    6968 .sp -1
    6969 .\}
    6970 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    6971 .sp -1
    6972 
    6973 \FCmessage command = rm %s\F[]
    6974 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    6975 .if t \{\
    6976 .sp 1
    6977 .\}
    6978 .fi
    6979 .fam
    6980 .ps +1
    6981 .if n \{\
    6982 .RE
    6983 .\}
    6984 .sp
    6985 Default:
    6986 \fI\fImessage command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6987 .sp
    6988 Example:
    6989 \fI\fImessage command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCcsh \-c \'xedit %s; rm %s\' &\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    6990 .RE
    6991 
    6992 min print space (S)
    6993 .\" min print space
    6994 .PP
    6995 .RS 4
    6996 This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be available before a user will be able to spool a print job\&. It is specified in kilobytes\&. The default is 0, which means a user can always spool a print job\&.
    6997 .sp
    6998 Default:
    6999 \fI\fImin print space\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7000 .sp
    7001 Example:
    7002 \fI\fImin print space\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC2000\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7003 .RE
    7004 
    7005 min protocol (G)
    7006 .\" min protocol
    7007 .PP
    7008 .RS 4
    7009 The value of the parameter (a string) is the lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support\&. Please refer to the
    7010 \m[blue]\fBmax protocol\fR\m[]
    7011 parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description of each\&. You may also wish to refer to the C source code in
    7012 \FCsource/smbd/negprot\&.c\F[]
    7013 for a listing of known protocol dialects supported by clients\&.
    7014 .sp
    7015 If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should also refer to the
    7016 \m[blue]\fBlanman auth\fR\m[]
    7017 parameter\&. Otherwise, you should never need to change this parameter\&.
    7018 .sp
    7019 Default:
    7020 \fI\fImin protocol\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCCORE\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7021 .sp
    7022 Example:
    7023 \fI\fImin protocol\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNT1\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7024 .RE
    7025 
    7026 min receivefile size (G)
    7027 .\" min receivefile size
    7028 .PP
    7029 .RS 4
    7030 This option changes the behavior of
    7031 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7032 when processing SMBwriteX calls\&. Any incoming SMBwriteX call on a non\-signed SMB/CIFS connection greater than this value will not be processed in the normal way but will be passed to any underlying kernel recvfile or splice system call (if there is no such call Samba will emulate in user space)\&. This allows zero\-copy writes directly from network socket buffers into the filesystem buffer cache, if available\&. It may improve performance but user testing is recommended\&. If set to zero Samba processes SMBwriteX calls in the normal way\&. To enable POSIX large write support (SMB/CIFS writes up to 16Mb) this option must be nonzero\&. The maximum value is 128k\&. Values greater than 128k will be silently set to 128k\&.
    7033 .sp
    7034 Note this option will have NO EFFECT if set on a SMB signed connection\&.
    7035 .sp
    7036 The default is zero, which diables this option\&.
    7037 .sp
    7038 Default:
    7039 \fI\fImin receivefile size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7040 .RE
    7041 
    7042 min wins ttl (G)
    7043 .\" min wins ttl
    7044 .PP
    7045 .RS 4
    7046 This option tells
    7047 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    7048 when acting as a WINS server (\m[blue]\fBwins support = yes\fR\m[]) what the minimum \'time to live\' of NetBIOS names that
    7049 \FCnmbd\F[]
    7050 will grant will be (in seconds)\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. The default is 6 hours (21600 seconds)\&.
    7051 .sp
    7052 Default:
    7053 \fI\fImin wins ttl\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC21600\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7054 .RE
    7055 
    7056 msdfs proxy (S)
    7057 .\" msdfs proxy
    7058 .PP
    7059 .RS 4
    7060 This parameter indicates that the share is a stand\-in for another CIFS share whose location is specified by the value of the parameter\&. When clients attempt to connect to this share, they are redirected to the proxied share using the SMB\-Dfs protocol\&.
    7061 .sp
    7062 Only Dfs roots can act as proxy shares\&. Take a look at the
    7063 \m[blue]\fBmsdfs root\fR\m[]
    7064 and
    7065 \m[blue]\fBhost msdfs\fR\m[]
    7066 options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share\&.
    7067 .sp
    7068 \fINo default\fR
    7069 .sp
    7070 Example:
    7071 \fI\fImsdfs proxy\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\eotherserver\esomeshare\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7072 .RE
    7073 
    7074 msdfs root (S)
    7075 .\" msdfs root
    7076 .PP
    7077 .RS 4
    7078 If set to
    7079 \fByes\fR, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory\&. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic links of the form
    7080 \FCmsdfs:serverA\e\eshareA,serverB\e\eshareB\F[]
    7081 and so on\&. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to the MSDFS chapter in the Samba3\-HOWTO book\&.
    7082 .sp
    7083 Default:
    7084 \fI\fImsdfs root\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7085 .RE
    7086 
    7087 name cache timeout (G)
    7088 .\" name cache timeout
    7089 .PP
    7090 .RS 4
    7091 Specifies the number of seconds it takes before entries in samba\'s hostname resolve cache time out\&. If the timeout is set to 0\&. the caching is disabled\&.
    7092 .sp
    7093 Default:
    7094 \fI\fIname cache timeout\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC660\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7095 .sp
    7096 Example:
    7097 \fI\fIname cache timeout\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7098 .RE
    7099 
    7100 name resolve order (G)
    7101 .\" name resolve order
    7102 .PP
    7103 .RS 4
    7104 This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses\&. Its main purpose to is to control how netbios name resolution is performed\&. The option takes a space separated string of name resolution options\&.
    7105 .sp
    7106 The options are: "lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast"\&. They cause names to be resolved as follows:
    7107 .sp
    7108 .RS 4
    7109 .ie n \{\
    7110 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    7111 .\}
    7112 .el \{\
    7113 .sp -1
    7114 .IP \(bu 2.3
    7115 .\}
    7116 
    7117 \fBlmhosts\fR
    7118 : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file\&. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the manpage for lmhosts for details) then any name type matches for lookup\&.
    7119 .RE
    7120 .sp
    7121 .RS 4
    7122 .ie n \{\
    7123 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    7124 .\}
    7125 .el \{\
    7126 .sp -1
    7127 .IP \(bu 2.3
    7128 .\}
    7129 
    7130 \fBhost\fR
    7131 : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system
    7132 \FC/etc/hosts \F[], NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the
    7133 \FC/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\F[]
    7134 file\&. Note that this method is used only if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type or 0x1c (domain controllers)\&. The latter case is only useful for active directory domains and results in a DNS query for the SRV RR entry matching _ldap\&._tcp\&.domain\&.
    7135 .RE
    7136 .sp
    7137 .RS 4
    7138 .ie n \{\
    7139 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    7140 .\}
    7141 .el \{\
    7142 .sp -1
    7143 .IP \(bu 2.3
    7144 .\}
    7145 \fBwins\fR
    7146 : Query a name with the IP address listed in the
    7147 \m[blue]\fBWINSSERVER\fR\m[]
    7148 parameter\&. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored\&.
    7149 .RE
    7150 .sp
    7151 .RS 4
    7152 .ie n \{\
    7153 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    7154 .\}
    7155 .el \{\
    7156 .sp -1
    7157 .IP \(bu 2.3
    7158 .\}
    7159 \fBbcast\fR
    7160 : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the
    7161 \m[blue]\fBinterfaces\fR\m[]
    7162 parameter\&. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet\&.
    7163 .sp
    7164 .RE
    7165 The example below will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined first, followed by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal system hostname lookup\&.
    7166 .sp
    7167 When Samba is functioning in ADS security mode (\FCsecurity = ads\F[]) it is advised to use following settings for
    7168 \fIname resolve order\fR:
    7169 .sp
    7170 \FCname resolve order = wins bcast\F[]
    7171 .sp
    7172 DC lookups will still be done via DNS, but fallbacks to netbios names will not inundate your DNS servers with needless querys for DOMAIN<0x1c> lookups\&.
    7173 .sp
    7174 Default:
    7175 \fI\fIname resolve order\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FClmhosts host wins bcast\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7176 .sp
    7177 Example:
    7178 \fI\fIname resolve order\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FClmhosts bcast host\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7179 .RE
    7180 
    7181 netbios aliases (G)
    7182 .\" netbios aliases
    7183 .PP
    7184 .RS 4
    7185 This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will advertise as additional names by which the Samba server is known\&. This allows one machine to appear in browse lists under multiple names\&. If a machine is acting as a browse server or logon server none of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon servers, only the primary name of the machine will be advertised with these capabilities\&.
    7186 .sp
    7187 Default:
    7188 \fI\fInetbios aliases\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # empty string (no additional names)\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7189 .sp
    7190 Example:
    7191 \fI\fInetbios aliases\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCTEST TEST1 TEST2\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7192 .RE
    7193 
    7194 netbios name (G)
    7195 .\" netbios name
    7196 .PP
    7197 .RS 4
    7198 This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known\&. By default it is the same as the first component of the host\'s DNS name\&. If a machine is a browse server or logon server this name (or the first component of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are advertised under\&.
    7199 .sp
    7200 There is a bug in Samba\-3 that breaks operation of browsing and access to shares if the netbios name is set to the literal name
    7201 \FCPIPE\F[]\&. To avoid this problem, do not name your Samba\-3 server
    7202 \FCPIPE\F[]\&.
    7203 .sp
    7204 Default:
    7205 \fI\fInetbios name\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # machine DNS name\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7206 .sp
    7207 Example:
    7208 \fI\fInetbios name\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCMYNAME\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7209 .RE
    7210 
    7211 netbios scope (G)
    7212 .\" netbios scope
    7213 .PP
    7214 .RS 4
    7215 This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will operate under\&. This should not be set unless every machine on your LAN also sets this value\&.
    7216 .sp
    7217 Default:
    7218 \fI\fInetbios scope\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7219 .RE
    7220 
    7221 nis homedir (G)
    7222 .\" nis homedir
    7223 .PP
    7224 .RS 4
    7225 Get the home share server from a NIS map\&. For UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user\'s home directory will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote server\&.
    7226 .sp
    7227 When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory server, but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two network hops would be required to access the users home directory if the logon server told the client to use itself as the SMB server for home directories (one over SMB and one over NFS)\&. This can be very slow\&.
    7228 .sp
    7229 This option allows Samba to return the home share as being on a different server to the logon server and as long as a Samba daemon is running on the home directory server, it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory server\&. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it will consult the NIS map specified in
    7230 \m[blue]\fBhomedir map\fR\m[]
    7231 and return the server listed there\&.
    7232 .sp
    7233 Note that for this option to work there must be a working NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also be a logon server\&.
    7234 .sp
    7235 Default:
    7236 \fI\fInis homedir\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7237 .RE
    7238 
    7239 nmbd bind explicit broadcast (G)
    7240 .\" nmbd bind explicit broadcast
    7241 .PP
    7242 .RS 4
    7243 This option causes
    7244 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    7245 to explicitly bind to the broadcast address of the local subnets\&. This is needed to make nmbd work correctly in combination with the
    7246 \m[blue]\fBsocket address\fR\m[]
    7247 option\&. You should not need to unset this option\&.
    7248 .sp
    7249 Default:
    7250 \fI\fInmbd bind explicit broadcast\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7251 .RE
    7252 
    7253 nt acl support (S)
    7254 .\" nt acl support
    7255 .PP
    7256 .RS 4
    7257 This boolean parameter controls whether
    7258 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7259 will attempt to map UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists\&. The UNIX permissions considered are the the traditional UNIX owner and group permissions, as well as POSIX ACLs set on any files or directories\&. This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases prior to 2\&.2\&.2\&.
    7260 .sp
    7261 Default:
    7262 \fI\fInt acl support\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7263 .RE
    7264 
    7265 ntlm auth (G)
    7266 .\" ntlm auth
    7267 .PP
    7268 .RS 4
    7269 This parameter determines whether or not
    7270 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7271 will attempt to authenticate users using the NTLM encrypted password response\&. If disabled, either the lanman password hash or an NTLMv2 response will need to be sent by the client\&.
    7272 .sp
    7273 If this option, and
    7274 \FClanman auth\F[]
    7275 are both disabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be permited\&. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to use it\&.
    7276 .sp
    7277 Default:
    7278 \fI\fIntlm auth\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7279 .RE
    7280 
    7281 nt pipe support (G)
    7282 .\" nt pipe support
    7283 .PP
    7284 .RS 4
    7285 This boolean parameter controls whether
    7286 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7287 will allow Windows NT clients to connect to the NT SMB specific
    7288 \fBIPC$\fR
    7289 pipes\&. This is a developer debugging option and can be left alone\&.
    7290 .sp
    7291 Default:
    7292 \fI\fInt pipe support\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7293 .RE
    7294 
    7295 nt status support (G)
    7296 .\" nt status support
    7297 .PP
    7298 .RS 4
    7299 This boolean parameter controls whether
    7300 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7301 will negotiate NT specific status support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients\&. This is a developer debugging option and should be left alone\&. If this option is set to
    7302 \fBno\fR
    7303 then Samba offers exactly the same DOS error codes that versions prior to Samba 2\&.2\&.3 reported\&.
    7304 .sp
    7305 You should not need to ever disable this parameter\&.
    7306 .sp
    7307 Default:
    7308 \fI\fInt status support\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7309 .RE
    7310 
    7311 null passwords (G)
    7312 .\" null passwords
    7313 .PP
    7314 .RS 4
    7315 Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords\&.
    7316 .sp
    7317 See also
    7318 \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5)\&.
    7319 .sp
    7320 Default:
    7321 \fI\fInull passwords\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7322 .RE
    7323 
    7324 obey pam restrictions (G)
    7325 .\" obey pam restrictions
    7326 .PP
    7327 .RS 4
    7328 When Samba 3\&.0 is configured to enable PAM support (i\&.e\&. \-\-with\-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba should obey PAM\'s account and session management directives\&. The default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only and to ignore any account or session management\&. Note that Samba always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of
    7329 \m[blue]\fBencrypt passwords = yes\fR\m[]\&. The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption\&.
    7330 .sp
    7331 Default:
    7332 \fI\fIobey pam restrictions\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7333 .RE
    7334 
    7335 only user (S)
    7336 .\" only user
    7337 .PP
    7338 .RS 4
    7339 This is a boolean option that controls whether connections with usernames not in the
    7340 \fIuser\fR
    7341 list will be allowed\&. By default this option is disabled so that a client can supply a username to be used by the server\&. Enabling this parameter will force the server to only use the login names from the
    7342 \fIuser\fR
    7343 list and is only really useful in
    7344 \m[blue]\fBsecurity = share\fR\m[]
    7345 level security\&.
    7346 .sp
    7347 Note that this also means Samba won\'t try to deduce usernames from the service name\&. This can be annoying for the [homes] section\&. To get around this you could use
    7348 \FCuser = %S\F[]
    7349 which means your
    7350 \fIuser\fR
    7351 list will be just the service name, which for home directories is the name of the user\&.
    7352 .sp
    7353 Default:
    7354 \fI\fIonly user\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7355 .RE
    7356 
    7357 oplock break wait time (G)
    7358 .\" oplock break wait time
    7359 .PP
    7360 .RS 4
    7361 This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and WinNT\&. If Samba responds to a client too quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock break request, then the network client can fail and not respond to the break request\&. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break request to such (broken) clients\&.
    7362 .if n \{\
    7363 .sp
    7364 .\}
    7365 .RS 4
    7366 .BM yellow
    7367 .it 1 an-trap
    7368 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    7369 .nr an-break-flag 1
    7370 .br
    7371 .ps +1
    7372 \fBWarning\fR
    7373 .ps -1
    7374 .br
    7375 DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE\&.
    7376 .sp .5v
    7377 .EM yellow
    7378 .RE
    7379 Default:
    7380 \fI\fIoplock break wait time\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7381 .RE
    7382 
    7383 oplock contention limit (S)
    7384 .\" oplock contention limit
    7385 .PP
    7386 .RS 4
    7387 This is a
    7388 \fIvery\fR
    7389 advanced
    7390 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7391 tuning option to improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple client contention for the same file\&.
    7392 .sp
    7393 In brief it specifies a number, which causes
    7394 \fBsmbd\fR(8)not to grant an oplock even when requested if the approximate number of clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this limit\&. This causes
    7395 \FCsmbd\F[]
    7396 to behave in a similar way to Windows NT\&.
    7397 .if n \{\
    7398 .sp
    7399 .\}
    7400 .RS 4
    7401 .BM yellow
    7402 .it 1 an-trap
    7403 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    7404 .nr an-break-flag 1
    7405 .br
    7406 .ps +1
    7407 \fBWarning\fR
    7408 .ps -1
    7409 .br
    7410 DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE\&.
    7411 .sp .5v
    7412 .EM yellow
    7413 .RE
    7414 Default:
    7415 \fI\fIoplock contention limit\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC2\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7416 .RE
    7417 
    7418 oplocks (S)
    7419 .\" oplocks
    7420 .PP
    7421 .RS 4
    7422 This boolean option tells
    7423 \FCsmbd\F[]
    7424 whether to issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this share\&. The oplock code can dramatically (approx\&. 30% or more) improve the speed of access to files on Samba servers\&. It allows the clients to aggressively cache files locally and you may want to disable this option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by default in Windows NT Servers)\&.
    7425 .sp
    7426 Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a share\&. See the
    7427 \m[blue]\fBveto oplock files\fR\m[]
    7428 parameter\&. On some systems oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system\&. This allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files, whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process\&. See the
    7429 \m[blue]\fBkernel oplocks\fR\m[]
    7430 parameter for details\&.
    7431 .sp
    7432 Default:
    7433 \fI\fIoplocks\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7434 .RE
    7435 
    7436 os2 driver map (G)
    7437 .\" os2 driver map
    7438 .PP
    7439 .RS 4
    7440 The parameter is used to define the absolute path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver names to OS/2 printer driver names\&. The format is:
    7441 .sp
    7442 <nt driver name> = <os2 driver name>\&.<device name>
    7443 .sp
    7444 For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5 printer driver would appear as
    7445 \FCHP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET\&.HP LaserJet 5L\F[]\&.
    7446 .sp
    7447 The need for the file is due to the printer driver namespace problem described in the chapter on Classical Printing in the Samba3\-HOWTO book\&. For more details on OS/2 clients, please refer to chapter on other clients in the Samba3\-HOWTO book\&.
    7448 .sp
    7449 Default:
    7450 \fI\fIos2 driver map\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7451 .RE
    7452 
    7453 os level (G)
    7454 .\" os level
    7455 .PP
    7456 .RS 4
    7457 This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for browse elections\&. The value of this parameter determines whether
    7458 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    7459 has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the
    7460 \m[blue]\fBworkgroup\fR\m[]
    7461 in the local broadcast area\&.
    7462 .sp
    7463 \fI Note:\fR
    7464 By default, Samba will win a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating systems except a Windows NT 4\&.0/2000 Domain Controller\&. This means that a misconfigured Samba host can effectively isolate a subnet for browsing purposes\&. This parameter is largely auto\-configured in the Samba\-3 release series and it is seldom necessary to manually override the default setting\&. Please refer to the chapter on Network Browsing in the Samba\-3 HOWTO document for further information regarding the use of this parameter\&.
    7465 \fINote:\fR
    7466 The maximum value for this parameter is 255\&. If you use higher values, counting will start at 0!
    7467 .sp
    7468 Default:
    7469 \fI\fIos level\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC20\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7470 .sp
    7471 Example:
    7472 \fI\fIos level\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC65\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7473 .RE
    7474 
    7475 pam password change (G)
    7476 .\" pam password change
    7477 .PP
    7478 .RS 4
    7479 With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2\&.2, this parameter, it is possible to use PAM\'s password change control flag for Samba\&. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in
    7480 \m[blue]\fBpasswd program\fR\m[]\&. It should be possible to enable this without changing your
    7481 \m[blue]\fBpasswd chat\fR\m[]
    7482 parameter for most setups\&.
    7483 .sp
    7484 Default:
    7485 \fI\fIpam password change\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7486 .RE
    7487 
    7488 panic action (G)
    7489 .\" panic action
    7490 .PP
    7491 .RS 4
    7492 This is a Samba developer option that allows a system command to be called when either
    7493 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7494 or
    7495 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    7496 crashes\&. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that a problem occurred\&.
    7497 .sp
    7498 Default:
    7499 \fI\fIpanic action\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7500 .sp
    7501 Example:
    7502 \fI\fIpanic action\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC"/bin/sleep 90000"\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7503 .RE
    7504 
    7505 paranoid server security (G)
    7506 .\" paranoid server security
    7507 .PP
    7508 .RS 4
    7509 Some version of NT 4\&.x allow non\-guest users with a bad passowrd\&. When this option is enabled, samba will not use a broken NT 4\&.x server as password server, but instead complain to the logs and exit\&.
    7510 .sp
    7511 Disabling this option prevents Samba from making this check, which involves deliberatly attempting a bad logon to the remote server\&.
    7512 .sp
    7513 Default:
    7514 \fI\fIparanoid server security\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7515 .RE
    7516 
    7517 passdb backend (G)
    7518 .\" passdb backend
    7519 .PP
    7520 .RS 4
    7521 This option allows the administrator to chose which backend will be used for storing user and possibly group information\&. This allows you to swap between different storage mechanisms without recompile\&.
    7522 .sp
    7523 The parameter value is divided into two parts, the backend\'s name, and a \'location\' string that has meaning only to that particular backed\&. These are separated by a : character\&.
    7524 .sp
    7525 Available backends can include:
    7526 .sp
    7527 .RS 4
    7528 .ie n \{\
    7529 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    7530 .\}
    7531 .el \{\
    7532 .sp -1
    7533 .IP \(bu 2.3
    7534 .\}
    7535 \FCsmbpasswd\F[]
    7536 \- The old plaintext passdb backend\&. Some Samba features will not work if this passdb backend is used\&. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument\&.
    7537 .RE
    7538 .sp
    7539 .RS 4
    7540 .ie n \{\
    7541 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    7542 .\}
    7543 .el \{\
    7544 .sp -1
    7545 .IP \(bu 2.3
    7546 .\}
    7547 \FCtdbsam\F[]
    7548 \- The TDB based password storage backend\&. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb\&.tdb in the
    7549 \m[blue]\fBprivate dir\fR\m[]
    7550 directory\&.
    7551 .RE
    7552 .sp
    7553 .RS 4
    7554 .ie n \{\
    7555 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    7556 .\}
    7557 .el \{\
    7558 .sp -1
    7559 .IP \(bu 2.3
    7560 .\}
    7561 \FCldapsam\F[]
    7562 \- The LDAP based passdb backend\&. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to
    7563 \FCldap://localhost\F[])
    7564 .sp
    7565 LDAP connections should be secured where possible\&. This may be done using either Start\-TLS (see
    7566 \m[blue]\fBldap ssl\fR\m[]) or by specifying
    7567 \fIldaps://\fR
    7568 in the URL argument\&.
    7569 .sp
    7570 Multiple servers may also be specified in double\-quotes\&. Whether multiple servers are supported or not and the exact syntax depends on the LDAP library you use\&.
    7571 .sp
    7572 .RE
    7573 
    7574         Examples of use are:
    7575 .sp
    7576 .if n \{\
    7577 .RS 4
    7578 .\}
    7579 .fam C
    7580 .ps -1
    7581 .nf
    7582 .if t \{\
    7583 .sp -1
    7584 .\}
    7585 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    7586 .sp -1
    7587 
    7588 passdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb\&.tdb
    7589 
    7590 or multi server LDAP URL with OpenLDAP library:
    7591 
    7592 passdb backend = ldapsam:"ldap://ldap\-1\&.example\&.com ldap://ldap\-2\&.example\&.com"
    7593 
    7594 or multi server LDAP URL with Netscape based LDAP library:
    7595 
    7596 passdb backend = ldapsam:"ldap://ldap\-1\&.example\&.com ldap\-2\&.example\&.com"
    7597 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    7598 .if t \{\
    7599 .sp 1
    7600 .\}
    7601 .fi
    7602 .fam
    7603 .ps +1
    7604 .if n \{\
    7605 .RE
    7606 .\}
    7607 .sp
    7608 Default:
    7609 \fI\fIpassdb backend\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCtdbsam\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7610 .RE
    7611 
    7612 passdb expand explicit (G)
    7613 .\" passdb expand explicit
    7614 .PP
    7615 .RS 4
    7616 This parameter controls whether Samba substitutes %\-macros in the passdb fields if they are explicitly set\&. We used to expand macros here, but this turned out to be a bug because the Windows client can expand a variable %G_osver% in which %G would have been substituted by the user\'s primary group\&.
    7617 .sp
    7618 Default:
    7619 \fI\fIpassdb expand explicit\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7620 .RE
    7621 
    7622 passwd chat debug (G)
    7623 .\" passwd chat debug
    7624 .PP
    7625 .RS 4
    7626 This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in
    7627 \fIdebug\fR
    7628 mode\&. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed in the
    7629 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7630 log with a
    7631 \m[blue]\fBdebug level\fR\m[]
    7632 of 100\&. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords to be seen in the
    7633 \FCsmbd\F[]
    7634 log\&. It is available to help Samba admins debug their
    7635 \fIpasswd chat\fR
    7636 scripts when calling the
    7637 \fIpasswd program\fR
    7638 and should be turned off after this has been done\&. This option has no effect if the
    7639 \m[blue]\fBpam password change\fR\m[]
    7640 parameter is set\&. This parameter is off by default\&.
    7641 .sp
    7642 Default:
    7643 \fI\fIpasswd chat debug\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7644 .RE
    7645 
    7646 passwd chat timeout (G)
    7647 .\" passwd chat timeout
    7648 .PP
    7649 .RS 4
    7650 This integer specifies the number of seconds smbd will wait for an initial answer from a passwd chat script being run\&. Once the initial answer is received the subsequent answers must be received in one tenth of this time\&. The default it two seconds\&.
    7651 .sp
    7652 Default:
    7653 \fI\fIpasswd chat timeout\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC2\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7654 .RE
    7655 
    7656 passwd chat (G)
    7657 .\" passwd chat
    7658 .PP
    7659 .RS 4
    7660 This string controls the
    7661 \fI"chat"\fR
    7662 conversation that takes places between
    7663 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7664 and the local password changing program to change the user\'s password\&. The string describes a sequence of response\-receive pairs that
    7665 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7666 uses to determine what to send to the
    7667 \m[blue]\fBpasswd program\fR\m[]
    7668 and what to expect back\&. If the expected output is not received then the password is not changed\&.
    7669 .sp
    7670 This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS etc)\&.
    7671 .sp
    7672 Note that this parameter only is used if the
    7673 \m[blue]\fBunix password sync\fR\m[]
    7674 parameter is set to
    7675 \fByes\fR\&. This sequence is then called
    7676 \fIAS ROOT\fR
    7677 when the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old password cleartext\&. This means that root must be able to reset the user\'s password without knowing the text of the previous password\&. In the presence of NIS/YP, this means that the
    7678 \m[blue]\fBpasswd program\fR\m[]
    7679 must be executed on the NIS master\&.
    7680 .sp
    7681 The string can contain the macro
    7682 \fI%n\fR
    7683 which is substituted for the new password\&. The old passsword (\fI%o\fR) is only available when
    7684 \m[blue]\fBencrypt passwords\fR\m[]
    7685 has been disabled\&. The chat sequence can also contain the standard macros \en, \er, \et and \es to give line\-feed, carriage\-return, tab and space\&. The chat sequence string can also contain a \'*\' which matches any sequence of characters\&. Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces in them into a single string\&.
    7686 .sp
    7687 If the send string in any part of the chat sequence is a full stop "\&.", then no string is sent\&. Similarly, if the expect string is a full stop then no string is expected\&.
    7688 .sp
    7689 If the
    7690 \m[blue]\fBpam password change\fR\m[]
    7691 parameter is set to
    7692 \fByes\fR, the chat pairs may be matched in any order, and success is determined by the PAM result, not any particular output\&. The \en macro is ignored for PAM conversions\&.
    7693 .sp
    7694 Default:
    7695 \fI\fIpasswd chat\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC*new*password* %n\en*new*password* %n\en *changed*\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7696 .sp
    7697 Example:
    7698 \fI\fIpasswd chat\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC"*Enter NEW password*" %n\en "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\en "*Password changed*"\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7699 .RE
    7700 
    7701 passwd program (G)
    7702 .\" passwd program
    7703 .PP
    7704 .RS 4
    7705 The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords\&. Any occurrences of
    7706 \fI%u\fR
    7707 will be replaced with the user name\&. The user name is checked for existence before calling the password changing program\&.
    7708 .sp
    7709 Also note that many passwd programs insist in
    7710 \fIreasonable \fR
    7711 passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion of mixed case chars and digits\&. This can pose a problem as some clients (such as Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending it\&.
    7712 .sp
    7713 \fINote\fR
    7714 that if the
    7715 \fIunix password sync\fR
    7716 parameter is set to
    7717 \fByes \fR
    7718 then this program is called
    7719 \fIAS ROOT\fR
    7720 before the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed\&. If this UNIX password change fails, then
    7721 \FCsmbd\F[]
    7722 will fail to change the SMB password also (this is by design)\&.
    7723 .sp
    7724 If the
    7725 \fIunix password sync\fR
    7726 parameter is set this parameter
    7727 \fIMUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS\fR
    7728 for
    7729 \fIALL\fR
    7730 programs called, and must be examined for security implications\&. Note that by default
    7731 \fIunix password sync\fR
    7732 is set to
    7733 \fBno\fR\&.
    7734 .sp
    7735 Default:
    7736 \fI\fIpasswd program\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7737 .sp
    7738 Example:
    7739 \fI\fIpasswd program\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/bin/passwd %u\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7740 .RE
    7741 
    7742 password level (G)
    7743 .\" password level
    7744 .PP
    7745 .RS 4
    7746 Some client/server combinations have difficulty with mixed\-case passwords\&. One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when using COREPLUS! Another problem child is the Windows 95/98 family of operating systems\&. These clients upper case clear text passwords even when NT LM 0\&.12 selected by the protocol negotiation request/response\&.
    7747 .sp
    7748 This parameter defines the maximum number of characters that may be upper case in passwords\&.
    7749 .sp
    7750 For example, say the password given was "FRED"\&. If
    7751 \fI password level\fR
    7752 is set to 1, the following combinations would be tried if "FRED" failed:
    7753 .sp
    7754 "Fred", "fred", "fRed", "frEd","freD"
    7755 .sp
    7756 If
    7757 \fIpassword level\fR
    7758 was set to 2, the following combinations would also be tried:
    7759 .sp
    7760 "FRed", "FrEd", "FreD", "fREd", "fReD", "frED", \&.\&.
    7761 .sp
    7762 And so on\&.
    7763 .sp
    7764 The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely it is that a mixed case password will be matched against a single case password\&. However, you should be aware that use of this parameter reduces security and increases the time taken to process a new connection\&.
    7765 .sp
    7766 A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be made \- the password as is and the password in all\-lower case\&.
    7767 .sp
    7768 This parameter is used only when using plain\-text passwords\&. It is not at all used when encrypted passwords as in use (that is the default since samba\-3\&.0\&.0)\&. Use this only when
    7769 \m[blue]\fBencrypt passwords = No\fR\m[]\&.
    7770 .sp
    7771 Default:
    7772 \fI\fIpassword level\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7773 .sp
    7774 Example:
    7775 \fI\fIpassword level\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC4\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7776 .RE
    7777 
    7778 password server (G)
    7779 .\" password server
    7780 .PP
    7781 .RS 4
    7782 By specifying the name of another SMB server or Active Directory domain controller with this option, and using
    7783 \FCsecurity = [ads|domain|server]\F[]
    7784 it is possible to get Samba to do all its username/password validation using a specific remote server\&.
    7785 .sp
    7786 This option sets the name or IP address of the password server to use\&. New syntax has been added to support defining the port to use when connecting to the server the case of an ADS realm\&. To define a port other than the default LDAP port of 389, add the port number using a colon after the name or IP address (e\&.g\&. 192\&.168\&.1\&.100:389)\&. If you do not specify a port, Samba will use the standard LDAP port of tcp/389\&. Note that port numbers have no effect on password servers for Windows NT 4\&.0 domains or netbios connections\&.
    7787 .sp
    7788 If parameter is a name, it is looked up using the parameter
    7789 \m[blue]\fBname resolve order\fR\m[]
    7790 and so may resolved by any method and order described in that parameter\&.
    7791 .sp
    7792 The password server must be a machine capable of using the "LM1\&.2X002" or the "NT LM 0\&.12" protocol, and it must be in user level security mode\&.
    7793 .if n \{\
    7794 .sp
    7795 .\}
    7796 .RS 4
    7797 .BM yellow
    7798 .it 1 an-trap
    7799 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    7800 .nr an-break-flag 1
    7801 .br
    7802 .ps +1
    7803 \fBNote\fR
    7804 .ps -1
    7805 .br
    7806 Using a password server means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your password server\&.
    7807 \fIDO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT YOU DON\'T COMPLETELY TRUST\fR\&.
    7808 .sp .5v
    7809 .EM yellow
    7810 .RE
    7811 Never point a Samba server at itself for password serving\&. This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba server!
    7812 .sp
    7813 The name of the password server takes the standard substitutions, but probably the only useful one is
    7814 \fI%m \fR, which means the Samba server will use the incoming client as the password server\&. If you use this then you better trust your clients, and you had better restrict them with hosts allow!
    7815 .sp
    7816 If the
    7817 \fIsecurity\fR
    7818 parameter is set to
    7819 \fBdomain\fR
    7820 or
    7821 \fBads\fR, then the list of machines in this option must be a list of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the Domain or the character \'*\', as the Samba server is effectively in that domain, and will use cryptographically authenticated RPC calls to authenticate the user logging on\&. The advantage of using
    7822 \FC security = domain\F[]
    7823 is that if you list several hosts in the
    7824 \fIpassword server\fR
    7825 option then
    7826 \FCsmbd \F[]
    7827 will try each in turn till it finds one that responds\&. This is useful in case your primary server goes down\&.
    7828 .sp
    7829 If the
    7830 \fIpassword server\fR
    7831 option is set to the character \'*\', then Samba will attempt to auto\-locate the Primary or Backup Domain controllers to authenticate against by doing a query for the name
    7832 \fBWORKGROUP<1C>\fR
    7833 and then contacting each server returned in the list of IP addresses from the name resolution source\&.
    7834 .sp
    7835 If the list of servers contains both names/IP\'s and the \'*\' character, the list is treated as a list of preferred domain controllers, but an auto lookup of all remaining DC\'s will be added to the list as well\&. Samba will not attempt to optimize this list by locating the closest DC\&.
    7836 .sp
    7837 If the
    7838 \fIsecurity\fR
    7839 parameter is set to
    7840 \fBserver\fR, then there are different restrictions that
    7841 \FCsecurity = domain\F[]
    7842 doesn\'t suffer from:
    7843 .sp
    7844 .RS 4
    7845 .ie n \{\
    7846 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    7847 .\}
    7848 .el \{\
    7849 .sp -1
    7850 .IP \(bu 2.3
    7851 .\}
    7852 You may list several password servers in the
    7853 \fIpassword server\fR
    7854 parameter, however if an
    7855 \FCsmbd\F[]
    7856 makes a connection to a password server, and then the password server fails, no more users will be able to be authenticated from this
    7857 \FCsmbd\F[]\&. This is a restriction of the SMB/CIFS protocol when in
    7858 \FCsecurity = server \F[]
    7859 mode and cannot be fixed in Samba\&.
    7860 .RE
    7861 .sp
    7862 .RS 4
    7863 .ie n \{\
    7864 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    7865 .\}
    7866 .el \{\
    7867 .sp -1
    7868 .IP \(bu 2.3
    7869 .\}
    7870 If you are using a Windows NT server as your password server then you will have to ensure that your users are able to login from the Samba server, as when in
    7871 \FC security = server\F[]
    7872 mode the network logon will appear to come from there rather than from the users workstation\&.
    7873 .sp
    7874 .RE
    7875 Default:
    7876 \fI\fIpassword server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC*\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7877 .sp
    7878 Example:
    7879 \fI\fIpassword server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNT\-PDC, NT\-BDC1, NT\-BDC2, *\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7880 .sp
    7881 Example:
    7882 \fI\fIpassword server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCwindc\&.mydomain\&.com:389 192\&.168\&.1\&.101 *\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7883 .RE
    7884 
    7885 directory
    7886 .\" directory
    7887 .PP
    7888 .RS 4
    7889 This parameter is a synonym for
    7890 path\&.
    7891 .RE
    7892 
    7893 path (S)
    7894 .\" path
    7895 .PP
    7896 .RS 4
    7897 This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the service is to be given access\&. In the case of printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to being submitted to the host for printing\&.
    7898 .sp
    7899 For a printable service offering guest access, the service should be readonly and the path should be world\-writeable and have the sticky bit set\&. This is not mandatory of course, but you probably won\'t get the results you expect if you do otherwise\&.
    7900 .sp
    7901 Any occurrences of
    7902 \fI%u\fR
    7903 in the path will be replaced with the UNIX username that the client is using on this connection\&. Any occurrences of
    7904 \fI%m\fR
    7905 will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are connecting from\&. These replacements are very useful for setting up pseudo home directories for users\&.
    7906 .sp
    7907 Note that this path will be based on
    7908 \m[blue]\fBroot dir\fR\m[]
    7909 if one was specified\&.
    7910 .sp
    7911 Default:
    7912 \fI\fIpath\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7913 .sp
    7914 Example:
    7915 \fI\fIpath\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/home/fred\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7916 .RE
    7917 
    7918 perfcount module (G)
    7919 .\" perfcount module
    7920 .PP
    7921 .RS 4
    7922 This parameter specifies the perfcount backend to be used when monitoring SMB operations\&. Only one perfcount module may be used, and it must implement all of the apis contained in the smb_perfcount_handler structure defined in smb\&.h\&.
    7923 .sp
    7924 \fINo default\fR
    7925 .RE
    7926 
    7927 pid directory (G)
    7928 .\" pid directory
    7929 .PP
    7930 .RS 4
    7931 This option specifies the directory where pid files will be placed\&.
    7932 .sp
    7933 Default:
    7934 \fI\fIpid directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC${prefix}/var/locks\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7935 .sp
    7936 Example:
    7937 \fI\fIpid directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCpid directory = /var/run/\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7938 .RE
    7939 
    7940 posix locking (S)
    7941 .\" posix locking
    7942 .PP
    7943 .RS 4
    7944 The
    7945 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    7946 daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients\&. The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX locks\&. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are consistent with those seen by POSIX compliant applications accessing the files via a non\-SMB method (e\&.g\&. NFS or local file access)\&. You should never need to disable this parameter\&.
    7947 .sp
    7948 Default:
    7949 \fI\fIposix locking\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7950 .RE
    7951 
    7952 postexec (S)
    7953 .\" postexec
    7954 .PP
    7955 .RS 4
    7956 This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is disconnected\&. It takes the usual substitutions\&. The command may be run as the root on some systems\&.
    7957 .sp
    7958 An interesting example may be to unmount server resources:
    7959 .sp
    7960 \FCpostexec = /etc/umount /cdrom\F[]
    7961 .sp
    7962 Default:
    7963 \fI\fIpostexec\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7964 .sp
    7965 Example:
    7966 \fI\fIpostexec\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCecho \e"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\e" >> /tmp/log\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7967 .RE
    7968 
    7969 preexec close (S)
    7970 .\" preexec close
    7971 .PP
    7972 .RS 4
    7973 This boolean option controls whether a non\-zero return code from
    7974 \m[blue]\fBpreexec\fR\m[]
    7975 should close the service being connected to\&.
    7976 .sp
    7977 Default:
    7978 \fI\fIpreexec close\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    7979 .RE
    7980 
    7981 exec
    7982 .\" exec
    7983 .PP
    7984 .RS 4
    7985 This parameter is a synonym for
    7986 preexec\&.
    7987 .RE
    7988 
    7989 preexec (S)
    7990 .\" preexec
    7991 .PP
    7992 .RS 4
    7993 This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is connected to\&. It takes the usual substitutions\&.
    7994 .sp
    7995 An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every time they log in\&. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example:
    7996 .sp
    7997 
    7998 \FCpreexec = csh \-c \'echo \e"Welcome to %S!\e" | /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient \-M %m \-I %I\' & \F[]
    7999 .sp
    8000 Of course, this could get annoying after a while :\-)
    8001 .sp
    8002 See also
    8003 \m[blue]\fBpreexec close\fR\m[]
    8004 and
    8005 \m[blue]\fBpostexec\fR\m[]\&.
    8006 .sp
    8007 Default:
    8008 \fI\fIpreexec\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8009 .sp
    8010 Example:
    8011 \fI\fIpreexec\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCecho \e"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\e" >> /tmp/log\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8012 .RE
    8013 
    8014 prefered master
    8015 .\" prefered master
    8016 .PP
    8017 .RS 4
    8018 This parameter is a synonym for
    8019 preferred master\&.
    8020 .RE
    8021 
    8022 preferred master (G)
    8023 .\" preferred master
    8024 .PP
    8025 .RS 4
    8026 This boolean parameter controls if
    8027 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    8028 is a preferred master browser for its workgroup\&.
    8029 .sp
    8030 If this is set to
    8031 \fByes\fR, on startup,
    8032 \FCnmbd\F[]
    8033 will force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in winning the election\&. It is recommended that this parameter is used in conjunction with
    8034 \m[blue]\fBdomain master = yes\fR\m[], so that
    8035 \FCnmbd\F[]
    8036 can guarantee becoming a domain master\&.
    8037 .sp
    8038 Use this option with caution, because if there are several hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred master browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically and continuously attempt to become the local master browser\&. This will result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing capabilities\&.
    8039 .sp
    8040 Default:
    8041 \fI\fIpreferred master\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCauto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8042 .RE
    8043 
    8044 preload modules (G)
    8045 .\" preload modules
    8046 .PP
    8047 .RS 4
    8048 This is a list of paths to modules that should be loaded into smbd before a client connects\&. This improves the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat\&.
    8049 .sp
    8050 Default:
    8051 \fI\fIpreload modules\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8052 .sp
    8053 Example:
    8054 \fI\fIpreload modules\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql\&.so\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8055 .RE
    8056 
    8057 auto services
    8058 .\" auto services
    8059 .PP
    8060 .RS 4
    8061 This parameter is a synonym for
    8062 preload\&.
    8063 .RE
    8064 
    8065 preload (G)
    8066 .\" preload
    8067 .PP
    8068 .RS 4
    8069 This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to the browse lists\&. This is most useful for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be visible\&.
    8070 .sp
    8071 Note that if you just want all printers in your printcap file loaded then the
    8072 \m[blue]\fBload printers\fR\m[]
    8073 option is easier\&.
    8074 .sp
    8075 Default:
    8076 \fI\fIpreload\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8077 .sp
    8078 Example:
    8079 \fI\fIpreload\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCfred lp colorlp\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8080 .RE
    8081 
    8082 preserve case (S)
    8083 .\" preserve case
    8084 .PP
    8085 .RS 4
    8086 This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the
    8087 \m[blue]\fBdefault case\fR\m[]\&.
    8088 .sp
    8089 See the section on
    8090 NAME MANGLING
    8091 for a fuller discussion\&.
    8092 .sp
    8093 Default:
    8094 \fI\fIpreserve case\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8095 .RE
    8096 
    8097 print ok
    8098 .\" print ok
    8099 .PP
    8100 .RS 4
    8101 This parameter is a synonym for
    8102 printable\&.
    8103 .RE
    8104 
    8105 printable (S)
    8106 .\" printable
    8107 .PP
    8108 .RS 4
    8109 If this parameter is
    8110 \fByes\fR, then clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory specified for the service\&.
    8111 .sp
    8112 Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling of print data\&. The
    8113 \m[blue]\fBread only\fR\m[]
    8114 parameter controls only non\-printing access to the resource\&.
    8115 .sp
    8116 Default:
    8117 \fI\fIprintable\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8118 .RE
    8119 
    8120 printcap cache time (G)
    8121 .\" printcap cache time
    8122 .PP
    8123 .RS 4
    8124 This option specifies the number of seconds before the printing subsystem is again asked for the known printers\&. If the value is greater than 60 the initial waiting time is set to 60 seconds to allow an earlier first rescan of the printing subsystem\&.
    8125 .sp
    8126 Setting this parameter to 0 disables any rescanning for new or removed printers after the initial startup\&.
    8127 .sp
    8128 Default:
    8129 \fI\fIprintcap cache time\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC750\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8130 .sp
    8131 Example:
    8132 \fI\fIprintcap cache time\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC600\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8133 .RE
    8134 
    8135 printcap
    8136 .\" printcap
    8137 .PP
    8138 .RS 4
    8139 This parameter is a synonym for
    8140 printcap name\&.
    8141 .RE
    8142 
    8143 printcap name (G)
    8144 .\" printcap name
    8145 .PP
    8146 .RS 4
    8147 This parameter may be used to override the compiled\-in default printcap name used by the server (usually
    8148 \FC /etc/printcap\F[])\&. See the discussion of the
    8149 [printers]
    8150 section above for reasons why you might want to do this\&.
    8151 .sp
    8152 To use the CUPS printing interface set
    8153 \FCprintcap name = cups \F[]\&. This should be supplemented by an addtional setting
    8154 \m[blue]\fBprinting = cups\fR\m[]
    8155 in the [global] section\&.
    8156 \FCprintcap name = cups\F[]
    8157 will use the "dummy" printcap created by CUPS, as specified in your CUPS configuration file\&.
    8158 .sp
    8159 On System V systems that use
    8160 \FClpstat\F[]
    8161 to list available printers you can use
    8162 \FCprintcap name = lpstat \F[]
    8163 to automatically obtain lists of available printers\&. This is the default for systems that define SYSV at configure time in Samba (this includes most System V based systems)\&. If
    8164 \fI printcap name\fR
    8165 is set to
    8166 \FClpstat\F[]
    8167 on these systems then Samba will launch
    8168 \FClpstat \-v\F[]
    8169 and attempt to parse the output to obtain a printer list\&.
    8170 .sp
    8171 A minimal printcap file would look something like this:
    8172 .sp
    8173 .if n \{\
    8174 .RS 4
    8175 .\}
    8176 .fam C
    8177 .ps -1
    8178 .nf
    8179 .if t \{\
    8180 .sp -1
    8181 .\}
    8182 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    8183 .sp -1
    8184 
    8185 print1|My Printer 1
    8186 print2|My Printer 2
    8187 print3|My Printer 3
    8188 print4|My Printer 4
    8189 print5|My Printer 5
    8190 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    8191 .if t \{\
    8192 .sp 1
    8193 .\}
    8194 .fi
    8195 .fam
    8196 .ps +1
    8197 .if n \{\
    8198 .RE
    8199 .\}
    8200 .sp
    8201 where the \'|\' separates aliases of a printer\&. The fact that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba that it\'s a comment\&.
    8202 .if n \{\
    8203 .sp
    8204 .\}
    8205 .RS 4
    8206 .BM yellow
    8207 .it 1 an-trap
    8208 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    8209 .nr an-break-flag 1
    8210 .br
    8211 .ps +1
    8212 \fBNote\fR
    8213 .ps -1
    8214 .br
    8215 Under AIX the default printcap name is
    8216 \FC/etc/qconfig\F[]\&. Samba will assume the file is in AIX
    8217 \FCqconfig\F[]
    8218 format if the string
    8219 \FCqconfig\F[]
    8220 appears in the printcap filename\&.
    8221 .sp .5v
    8222 .EM yellow
    8223 .RE
    8224 Default:
    8225 \fI\fIprintcap name\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/etc/printcap\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8226 .sp
    8227 Example:
    8228 \fI\fIprintcap name\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/etc/myprintcap\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8229 .RE
    8230 
    8231 print command (S)
    8232 .\" print command
    8233 .PP
    8234 .RS 4
    8235 After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command will be used via a
    8236 \FCsystem()\F[]
    8237 call to process the spool file\&. Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to the host\'s printing subsystem, but there is no requirement that this be the case\&. The server will not remove the spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the spool file when it has been processed, otherwise you will need to manually remove old spool files\&.
    8238 .sp
    8239 The print command is simply a text string\&. It will be used verbatim after macro substitutions have been made:
    8240 .sp
    8241 %s, %f \- the path to the spool file name
    8242 .sp
    8243 %p \- the appropriate printer name
    8244 .sp
    8245 %J \- the job name as transmitted by the client\&.
    8246 .sp
    8247 %c \- The number of printed pages of the spooled job (if known)\&.
    8248 .sp
    8249 %z \- the size of the spooled print job (in bytes)
    8250 .sp
    8251 The print command
    8252 \fIMUST\fR
    8253 contain at least one occurrence of
    8254 \fI%s\fR
    8255 or
    8256 \fI%f \fR
    8257 \- the
    8258 \fI%p\fR
    8259 is optional\&. At the time a job is submitted, if no printer name is supplied the
    8260 \fI%p \fR
    8261 will be silently removed from the printer command\&.
    8262 .sp
    8263 If specified in the [global] section, the print command given will be used for any printable service that does not have its own print command specified\&.
    8264 .sp
    8265 If there is neither a specified print command for a printable service nor a global print command, spool files will be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed\&.
    8266 .sp
    8267 Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the
    8268 \fBnobody\fR
    8269 account\&. If this happens then create an alternative guest account that can print and set the
    8270 \m[blue]\fBguest account\fR\m[]
    8271 in the [global] section\&.
    8272 .sp
    8273 You can form quite complex print commands by realizing that they are just passed to a shell\&. For example the following will log a print job, print the file, then remove it\&. Note that \';\' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts\&.
    8274 .sp
    8275 \FCprint command = echo Printing %s >> /tmp/print\&.log; lpr \-P %p %s; rm %s\F[]
    8276 .sp
    8277 You may have to vary this command considerably depending on how you normally print files on your system\&. The default for the parameter varies depending on the setting of the
    8278 \m[blue]\fBprinting\fR\m[]
    8279 parameter\&.
    8280 .sp
    8281 Default: For
    8282 \FCprinting = BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG or PLP :\F[]
    8283 .sp
    8284 \FCprint command = lpr \-r \-P%p %s\F[]
    8285 .sp
    8286 For
    8287 \FCprinting = SYSV or HPUX :\F[]
    8288 .sp
    8289 \FCprint command = lp \-c \-d%p %s; rm %s\F[]
    8290 .sp
    8291 For
    8292 \FCprinting = SOFTQ :\F[]
    8293 .sp
    8294 \FCprint command = lp \-d%p \-s %s; rm %s\F[]
    8295 .sp
    8296 For printing = CUPS : If SAMBA is compiled against libcups, then
    8297 \m[blue]\fBprintcap = cups\fR\m[]
    8298 uses the CUPS API to submit jobs, etc\&. Otherwise it maps to the System V commands with the \-oraw option for printing, i\&.e\&. it uses
    8299 \FClp \-c \-d%p \-oraw; rm %s\F[]\&. With
    8300 \FCprinting = cups\F[], and if SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any manually set print command will be ignored\&.
    8301 .sp
    8302 \fINo default\fR
    8303 .sp
    8304 Example:
    8305 \fI\fIprint command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8306 .RE
    8307 
    8308 printer admin (S)
    8309 .\" printer admin
    8310 .PP
    8311 .RS 4
    8312 This lists users who can do anything to printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS\-RPC (usually using a NT workstation)\&. This parameter can be set per\-share or globally\&. Note: The root user always has admin rights\&. Use caution with use in the global stanza as this can cause side effects\&.
    8313 .sp
    8314 This parameter has been marked deprecated in favor of using the SePrintOperatorPrivilege and individual print security descriptors\&. It will be removed in a future release\&.
    8315 .sp
    8316 Default:
    8317 \fI\fIprinter admin\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8318 .sp
    8319 Example:
    8320 \fI\fIprinter admin\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCadmin, @staff\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8321 .RE
    8322 
    8323 printer
    8324 .\" printer
    8325 .PP
    8326 .RS 4
    8327 This parameter is a synonym for
    8328 printer name\&.
    8329 .RE
    8330 
    8331 printer name (S)
    8332 .\" printer name
    8333 .PP
    8334 .RS 4
    8335 This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent\&.
    8336 .sp
    8337 If specified in the [global] section, the printer name given will be used for any printable service that does not have its own printer name specified\&.
    8338 .sp
    8339 The default value of the
    8340 \m[blue]\fBprinter name\fR\m[]
    8341 may be
    8342 \FClp\F[]
    8343 on many systems\&.
    8344 .sp
    8345 Default:
    8346 \fI\fIprinter name\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCnone\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8347 .sp
    8348 Example:
    8349 \fI\fIprinter name\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FClaserwriter\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8350 .RE
    8351 
    8352 printing (S)
    8353 .\" printing
    8354 .PP
    8355 .RS 4
    8356 This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted on your system\&. It also affects the default values for the
    8357 \fIprint command\fR,
    8358 \fIlpq command\fR,
    8359 \fIlppause command \fR,
    8360 \fIlpresume command\fR, and
    8361 \fIlprm command\fR
    8362 if specified in the [global] section\&.
    8363 .sp
    8364 Currently nine printing styles are supported\&. They are
    8365 \fBBSD\fR,
    8366 \fBAIX\fR,
    8367 \fBLPRNG\fR,
    8368 \fBPLP\fR,
    8369 \fBSYSV\fR,
    8370 \fBHPUX\fR,
    8371 \fBQNX\fR,
    8372 \fBSOFTQ\fR, and
    8373 \fBCUPS\fR\&.
    8374 .sp
    8375 To see what the defaults are for the other print commands when using the various options use the
    8376 \fBtestparm\fR(1)
    8377 program\&.
    8378 .sp
    8379 This option can be set on a per printer basis\&. Please be aware however, that you must place any of the various printing commands (e\&.g\&. print command, lpq command, etc\&.\&.\&.) after defining the value for the
    8380 \fIprinting\fR
    8381 option since it will reset the printing commands to default values\&.
    8382 .sp
    8383 See also the discussion in the
    8384 [printers]
    8385 section\&.
    8386 .sp
    8387 Default:
    8388 \fI\fIprinting\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCDepends on the operating system, see \FCtestparm \-v\&.\F[]\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8389 .RE
    8390 
    8391 printjob username (S)
    8392 .\" printjob username
    8393 .PP
    8394 .RS 4
    8395 This parameter specifies which user information will be passed to the printing system\&. Usually, the username is sent, but in some cases, e\&.g\&. the domain prefix is useful, too\&.
    8396 .sp
    8397 Default:
    8398 \fI\fIprintjob username\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC%U\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8399 .sp
    8400 Example:
    8401 \fI\fIprintjob username\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC%D\e%U\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8402 .RE
    8403 
    8404 private dir (G)
    8405 .\" private dir
    8406 .PP
    8407 .RS 4
    8408 This parameters defines the directory smbd will use for storing such files as
    8409 \FCsmbpasswd\F[]
    8410 and
    8411 \FCsecrets\&.tdb\F[]\&.
    8412 .sp
    8413 Default:
    8414 \fI\fIprivate dir\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC${prefix}/private\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8415 .RE
    8416 
    8417 profile acls (S)
    8418 .\" profile acls
    8419 .PP
    8420 .RS 4
    8421 This boolean parameter was added to fix the problems that people have been having with storing user profiles on Samba shares from Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients\&. New versions of Windows 2000 or Windows XP service packs do security ACL checking on the owner and ability to write of the profile directory stored on a local workstation when copied from a Samba share\&.
    8422 .sp
    8423 When not in domain mode with winbindd then the security info copied onto the local workstation has no meaning to the logged in user (SID) on that workstation so the profile storing fails\&. Adding this parameter onto a share used for profile storage changes two things about the returned Windows ACL\&. Firstly it changes the owner and group owner of all reported files and directories to be BUILTIN\e\eAdministrators, BUILTIN\e\eUsers respectively (SIDs S\-1\-5\-32\-544, S\-1\-5\-32\-545)\&. Secondly it adds an ACE entry of "Full Control" to the SID BUILTIN\e\eUsers to every returned ACL\&. This will allow any Windows 2000 or XP workstation user to access the profile\&.
    8424 .sp
    8425 Note that if you have multiple users logging on to a workstation then in order to prevent them from being able to access each others profiles you must remove the "Bypass traverse checking" advanced user right\&. This will prevent access to other users profile directories as the top level profile directory (named after the user) is created by the workstation profile code and has an ACL restricting entry to the directory tree to the owning user\&.
    8426 .sp
    8427 Default:
    8428 \fI\fIprofile acls\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8429 .RE
    8430 
    8431 queuepause command (S)
    8432 .\" queuepause command
    8433 .PP
    8434 .RS 4
    8435 This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue\&.
    8436 .sp
    8437 This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer\&.
    8438 .sp
    8439 This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 and NT\&.
    8440 .sp
    8441 If a
    8442 \fI%p\fR
    8443 is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command\&.
    8444 .sp
    8445 Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server\&.
    8446 .sp
    8447 \fINo default\fR
    8448 .sp
    8449 Example:
    8450 \fI\fIqueuepause command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCdisable %p\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8451 .RE
    8452 
    8453 queueresume command (S)
    8454 .\" queueresume command
    8455 .PP
    8456 .RS 4
    8457 This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue\&. It is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the previous parameter (\m[blue]\fBqueuepause command\fR\m[])\&.
    8458 .sp
    8459 This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue, such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer\&.
    8460 .sp
    8461 This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 and NT\&.
    8462 .sp
    8463 If a
    8464 \fI%p\fR
    8465 is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command\&.
    8466 .sp
    8467 Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server\&.
    8468 .sp
    8469 Default:
    8470 \fI\fIqueueresume command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8471 .sp
    8472 Example:
    8473 \fI\fIqueueresume command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCenable %p\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8474 .RE
    8475 
    8476 read list (S)
    8477 .\" read list
    8478 .PP
    8479 .RS 4
    8480 This is a list of users that are given read\-only access to a service\&. If the connecting user is in this list then they will not be given write access, no matter what the
    8481 \m[blue]\fBread only\fR\m[]
    8482 option is set to\&. The list can include group names using the syntax described in the
    8483 \m[blue]\fBinvalid users\fR\m[]
    8484 parameter\&.
    8485 .sp
    8486 This parameter will not work with the
    8487 \m[blue]\fBsecurity = share\fR\m[]
    8488 in Samba 3\&.0\&. This is by design\&.
    8489 .sp
    8490 Default:
    8491 \fI\fIread list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8492 .sp
    8493 Example:
    8494 \fI\fIread list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCmary, @students\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8495 .RE
    8496 
    8497 read only (S)
    8498 .\" read only
    8499 .PP
    8500 .RS 4
    8501 An inverted synonym is
    8502 \m[blue]\fBwriteable\fR\m[]\&.
    8503 .sp
    8504 If this parameter is
    8505 \fByes\fR, then users of a service may not create or modify files in the service\'s directory\&.
    8506 .sp
    8507 Note that a printable service (\FCprintable = yes\F[]) will
    8508 \fIALWAYS\fR
    8509 allow writing to the directory (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations\&.
    8510 .sp
    8511 Default:
    8512 \fI\fIread only\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8513 .RE
    8514 
    8515 read raw (G)
    8516 .\" read raw
    8517 .PP
    8518 .RS 4
    8519 This parameter controls whether or not the server will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data to clients\&.
    8520 .sp
    8521 If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in one packet\&. This typically provides a major performance benefit\&.
    8522 .sp
    8523 However, some clients either negotiate the allowable block size incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads\&.
    8524 .sp
    8525 In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool and left severely alone\&.
    8526 .sp
    8527 Default:
    8528 \fI\fIread raw\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8529 .RE
    8530 
    8531 realm (G)
    8532 .\" realm
    8533 .PP
    8534 .RS 4
    8535 This option specifies the kerberos realm to use\&. The realm is used as the ADS equivalent of the NT4
    8536 \FCdomain\F[]\&. It is usually set to the DNS name of the kerberos server\&.
    8537 .sp
    8538 Default:
    8539 \fI\fIrealm\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8540 .sp
    8541 Example:
    8542 \fI\fIrealm\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCmysambabox\&.mycompany\&.com\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8543 .RE
    8544 
    8545 registry shares (G)
    8546 .\" registry shares
    8547 .PP
    8548 .RS 4
    8549 This turns on or off support for share definitions read from registry\&. Shares defined in
    8550 \fIsmb\&.conf\fR
    8551 take precedence over shares with the same name defined in registry\&. See the section on registry\-based configuration for details\&.
    8552 .sp
    8553 Note that this parameter defaults to
    8554 \fIno\fR, but it is set to
    8555 \fIyes\fR
    8556 when
    8557 \fIconfig backend\fR
    8558 is set to
    8559 \fIregistry\fR\&.
    8560 .sp
    8561 Default:
    8562 \fI\fIregistry shares\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8563 .sp
    8564 Example:
    8565 \fI\fIregistry shares\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8566 .RE
    8567 
    8568 remote announce (G)
    8569 .\" remote announce
    8570 .PP
    8571 .RS 4
    8572 This option allows you to setup
    8573 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    8574 to periodically announce itself to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name\&.
    8575 .sp
    8576 This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation rules don\'t work\&. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can send IP packets to\&.
    8577 .sp
    8578 For example:
    8579 .sp
    8580 .if n \{\
    8581 .RS 4
    8582 .\}
    8583 .fam C
    8584 .ps -1
    8585 .nf
    8586 .if t \{\
    8587 .sp -1
    8588 .\}
    8589 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    8590 .sp -1
    8591 
    8592 \FCremote announce = 192\&.168\&.2\&.255/SERVERS 192\&.168\&.4\&.255/STAFF\F[]
    8593 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    8594 .if t \{\
    8595 .sp 1
    8596 .\}
    8597 .fi
    8598 .fam
    8599 .ps +1
    8600 .if n \{\
    8601 .RE
    8602 .\}
    8603 .sp
    8604 the above line would cause
    8605 \FCnmbd\F[]
    8606 to announce itself to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names\&. If you leave out the workgroup name, then the one given in the
    8607 \m[blue]\fBworkgroup\fR\m[]
    8608 parameter is used instead\&.
    8609 .sp
    8610 The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known browse masters if your network config is that stable\&.
    8611 .sp
    8612 See the chapter on Network Browsing in the Samba\-HOWTO book\&.
    8613 .sp
    8614 Default:
    8615 \fI\fIremote announce\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8616 .RE
    8617 
    8618 remote browse sync (G)
    8619 .\" remote browse sync
    8620 .PP
    8621 .RS 4
    8622 This option allows you to setup
    8623 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    8624 to periodically request synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba server that is on a remote segment\&. This option will allow you to gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks\&. This is done in a manner that does not work with any non\-Samba servers\&.
    8625 .sp
    8626 This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local clients to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation rules don\'t work\&. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can send IP packets to\&.
    8627 .sp
    8628 For example:
    8629 .sp
    8630 .if n \{\
    8631 .RS 4
    8632 .\}
    8633 .fam C
    8634 .ps -1
    8635 .nf
    8636 .if t \{\
    8637 .sp -1
    8638 .\}
    8639 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    8640 .sp -1
    8641 
    8642 \fIremote browse sync = 192\&.168\&.2\&.255 192\&.168\&.4\&.255\fR
    8643 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    8644 .if t \{\
    8645 .sp 1
    8646 .\}
    8647 .fi
    8648 .fam
    8649 .ps +1
    8650 .if n \{\
    8651 .RE
    8652 .\}
    8653 .sp
    8654 the above line would cause
    8655 \FCnmbd\F[]
    8656 to request the master browser on the specified subnets or addresses to synchronize their browse lists with the local server\&.
    8657 .sp
    8658 The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known browse masters if your network config is that stable\&. If a machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it is in fact the browse master on its segment\&.
    8659 .sp
    8660 The
    8661 \m[blue]\fBremote browse sync\fR\m[]
    8662 may be used on networks where there is no WINS server, and may be used on disjoint networks where each network has its own WINS server\&.
    8663 .sp
    8664 Default:
    8665 \fI\fIremote browse sync\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8666 .RE
    8667 
    8668 rename user script (G)
    8669 .\" rename user script
    8670 .PP
    8671 .RS 4
    8672 This is the full pathname to a script that will be run as root by
    8673 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    8674 under special circumstances described below\&.
    8675 .sp
    8676 When a user with admin authority or SeAddUserPrivilege rights renames a user (e\&.g\&.: from the NT4 User Manager for Domains), this script will be run to rename the POSIX user\&. Two variables,
    8677 \FC%uold\F[]
    8678 and
    8679 \FC%unew\F[], will be substituted with the old and new usernames, respectively\&. The script should return 0 upon successful completion, and nonzero otherwise\&.
    8680 .if n \{\
    8681 .sp
    8682 .\}
    8683 .RS 4
    8684 .BM yellow
    8685 .it 1 an-trap
    8686 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    8687 .nr an-break-flag 1
    8688 .br
    8689 .ps +1
    8690 \fBNote\fR
    8691 .ps -1
    8692 .br
    8693 The script has all responsibility to rename all the necessary data that is accessible in this posix method\&. This can mean different requirements for different backends\&. The tdbsam and smbpasswd backends will take care of the contents of their respective files, so the script is responsible only for changing the POSIX username, and other data that may required for your circumstances, such as home directory\&. Please also consider whether or not you need to rename the actual home directories themselves\&. The ldapsam backend will not make any changes, because of the potential issues with renaming the LDAP naming attribute\&. In this case the script is responsible for changing the attribute that samba uses (uid) for locating users, as well as any data that needs to change for other applications using the same directory\&.
    8694 .sp .5v
    8695 .EM yellow
    8696 .RE
    8697 Default:
    8698 \fI\fIrename user script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8699 .RE
    8700 
    8701 reset on zero vc (G)
    8702 .\" reset on zero vc
    8703 .PP
    8704 .RS 4
    8705 This boolean option controls whether an incoming session setup should kill other connections coming from the same IP\&. This matches the default Windows 2003 behaviour\&. Setting this parameter to yes becomes necessary when you have a flaky network and windows decides to reconnect while the old connection still has files with share modes open\&. These files become inaccessible over the new connection\&. The client sends a zero VC on the new connection, and Windows 2003 kills all other connections coming from the same IP\&. This way the locked files are accessible again\&. Please be aware that enabling this option will kill connections behind a masquerading router\&.
    8706 .sp
    8707 Default:
    8708 \fI\fIreset on zero vc\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8709 .RE
    8710 
    8711 restrict anonymous (G)
    8712 .\" restrict anonymous
    8713 .PP
    8714 .RS 4
    8715 The setting of this parameter determines whether user and group list information is returned for an anonymous connection\&. and mirrors the effects of the
    8716 .sp
    8717 .if n \{\
    8718 .RS 4
    8719 .\}
    8720 .fam C
    8721 .ps -1
    8722 .nf
    8723 .if t \{\
    8724 .sp -1
    8725 .\}
    8726 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    8727 .sp -1
    8728 
    8729 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\eSYSTEM\eCurrentControlSet\e
    8730            Control\eLSA\eRestrictAnonymous
    8731 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    8732 .if t \{\
    8733 .sp 1
    8734 .\}
    8735 .fi
    8736 .fam
    8737 .ps +1
    8738 .if n \{\
    8739 .RE
    8740 .\}
    8741 .sp
    8742 registry key in Windows 2000 and Windows NT\&. When set to 0, user and group list information is returned to anyone who asks\&. When set to 1, only an authenticated user can retrive user and group list information\&. For the value 2, supported by Windows 2000/XP and Samba, no anonymous connections are allowed at all\&. This can break third party and Microsoft applications which expect to be allowed to perform operations anonymously\&.
    8743 .sp
    8744 The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 1 is dubious, as user and group list information can be obtained using other means\&.
    8745 .if n \{\
    8746 .sp
    8747 .\}
    8748 .RS 4
    8749 .BM yellow
    8750 .it 1 an-trap
    8751 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    8752 .nr an-break-flag 1
    8753 .br
    8754 .ps +1
    8755 \fBNote\fR
    8756 .ps -1
    8757 .br
    8758 The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 2 is removed by setting
    8759 \m[blue]\fBguest ok = yes\fR\m[]
    8760 on any share\&.
    8761 .sp .5v
    8762 .EM yellow
    8763 .RE
    8764 Default:
    8765 \fI\fIrestrict anonymous\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8766 .RE
    8767 
    8768 root
    8769 .\" root
    8770 .PP
    8771 .RS 4
    8772 This parameter is a synonym for
    8773 root directory\&.
    8774 .RE
    8775 
    8776 root dir
    8777 .\" root dir
    8778 .PP
    8779 .RS 4
    8780 This parameter is a synonym for
    8781 root directory\&.
    8782 .RE
    8783 
    8784 root directory (G)
    8785 .\" root directory
    8786 .PP
    8787 .RS 4
    8788 The server will
    8789 \FCchroot()\F[]
    8790 (i\&.e\&. Change its root directory) to this directory on startup\&. This is not strictly necessary for secure operation\&. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries\&. It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use "\&.\&." in file names to access other directories (depending on the setting of the
    8791 \m[blue]\fBwide smbconfoptions\fR\m[]
    8792 parameter)\&.
    8793 .sp
    8794 Adding a
    8795 \fIroot directory\fR
    8796 entry other than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price\&. It absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the sub\-tree specified in the
    8797 \fIroot directory\fR
    8798 option,
    8799 \fIincluding\fR
    8800 some files needed for complete operation of the server\&. To maintain full operability of the server you will need to mirror some system files into the
    8801 \fIroot directory\fR
    8802 tree\&. In particular you will need to mirror
    8803 \FC/etc/passwd\F[]
    8804 (or a subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed for printing (if required)\&. The set of files that must be mirrored is operating system dependent\&.
    8805 .sp
    8806 Default:
    8807 \fI\fIroot directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8808 .sp
    8809 Example:
    8810 \fI\fIroot directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/homes/smb\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8811 .RE
    8812 
    8813 root postexec (S)
    8814 .\" root postexec
    8815 .PP
    8816 .RS 4
    8817 This is the same as the
    8818 \fIpostexec\fR
    8819 parameter except that the command is run as root\&. This is useful for unmounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed\&.
    8820 .sp
    8821 Default:
    8822 \fI\fIroot postexec\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8823 .RE
    8824 
    8825 root preexec close (S)
    8826 .\" root preexec close
    8827 .PP
    8828 .RS 4
    8829 This is the same as the
    8830 \fIpreexec close \fR
    8831 parameter except that the command is run as root\&.
    8832 .sp
    8833 Default:
    8834 \fI\fIroot preexec close\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8835 .RE
    8836 
    8837 root preexec (S)
    8838 .\" root preexec
    8839 .PP
    8840 .RS 4
    8841 This is the same as the
    8842 \fIpreexec\fR
    8843 parameter except that the command is run as root\&. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a connection is opened\&.
    8844 .sp
    8845 Default:
    8846 \fI\fIroot preexec\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8847 .RE
    8848 
    8849 security mask (S)
    8850 .\" security mask
    8851 .PP
    8852 .RS 4
    8853 This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits will be set when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box\&.
    8854 .sp
    8855 This parameter is applied as a mask (AND\'ed with) to the incoming permission bits, thus resetting any bits not in this mask\&. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with
    8856 \m[blue]\fBforce security mode\fR\m[], which works in a manner similar to this one but uses a logical OR instead of an AND\&.
    8857 .sp
    8858 Essentially, all bits set to zero in this mask will result in setting to zero the corresponding bits on the file permissions regardless of the previous status of this bits on the file\&.
    8859 .sp
    8860 If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing a user to set all the user/group/world permissions on a file\&.
    8861 .sp
    8862 \fI Note\fR
    8863 that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it set to
    8864 \fB0777\fR\&.
    8865 .sp
    8866 Default:
    8867 \fI\fIsecurity mask\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0777\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8868 .sp
    8869 Example:
    8870 \fI\fIsecurity mask\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0770\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    8871 .RE
    8872 
    8873 security (G)
    8874 .\" security
    8875 .PP
    8876 .RS 4
    8877 This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the most important settings in the
    8878 \FC smb\&.conf\F[]
    8879 file\&.
    8880 .sp
    8881 The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to protocol negotiations with
    8882 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    8883 to turn share level security on or off\&. Clients decide based on this bit whether (and how) to transfer user and password information to the server\&.
    8884 .sp
    8885 The default is
    8886 \FCsecurity = user\F[], as this is the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and Windows NT\&.
    8887 .sp
    8888 The alternatives are
    8889 \FCsecurity = share\F[],
    8890 \FCsecurity = server\F[]
    8891 or
    8892 \FCsecurity = domain \F[]\&.
    8893 .sp
    8894 In versions of Samba prior to 2\&.0\&.0, the default was
    8895 \FCsecurity = share\F[]
    8896 mainly because that was the only option at one stage\&.
    8897 .sp
    8898 There is a bug in WfWg that has relevance to this setting\&. When in user or server level security a WfWg client will totally ignore the username and password you type in the "connect drive" dialog box\&. This makes it very difficult (if not impossible) to connect to a Samba service as anyone except the user that you are logged into WfWg as\&.
    8899 .sp
    8900 If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their usernames on the UNIX machine then you will want to use
    8901 \FCsecurity = user\F[]\&. If you mostly use usernames that don\'t exist on the UNIX box then use
    8902 \FCsecurity = share\F[]\&.
    8903 .sp
    8904 You should also use
    8905 \FCsecurity = share\F[]
    8906 if you want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares)\&. This is commonly used for a shared printer server\&. It is more difficult to setup guest shares with
    8907 \FCsecurity = user\F[], see the
    8908 \m[blue]\fBmap to guest\fR\m[]
    8909 parameter for details\&.
    8910 .sp
    8911 It is possible to use
    8912 \FCsmbd\F[]
    8913 in a
    8914 \fI hybrid mode\fR
    8915 where it is offers both user and share level security under different
    8916 \m[blue]\fBNetBIOS aliases\fR\m[]\&.
    8917 .sp
    8918 The different settings will now be explained\&.
    8919 .sp
    8920 \fISECURITY = SHARE\fR
    8921 .sp
    8922 When clients connect to a share level security server, they need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with a username but no password when talking to a
    8923 \FCsecurity = share \F[]
    8924 server)\&. Instead, the clients send authentication information (passwords) on a per\-share basis, at the time they attempt to connect to that share\&.
    8925 .sp
    8926 Note that
    8927 \FCsmbd\F[]
    8928 \fIALWAYS\fR
    8929 uses a valid UNIX user to act on behalf of the client, even in
    8930 \FCsecurity = share\F[]
    8931 level security\&.
    8932 .sp
    8933 As clients are not required to send a username to the server in share level security,
    8934 \FCsmbd\F[]
    8935 uses several techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf of the client\&.
    8936 .sp
    8937 A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given client password is constructed using the following methods :
    8938 .sp
    8939 .RS 4
    8940 .ie n \{\
    8941 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    8942 .\}
    8943 .el \{\
    8944 .sp -1
    8945 .IP \(bu 2.3
    8946 .\}
    8947 If the
    8948 \m[blue]\fBguest only\fR\m[]
    8949 parameter is set, then all the other stages are missed and only the
    8950 \m[blue]\fBguest account\fR\m[]
    8951 username is checked\&.
    8952 .RE
    8953 .sp
    8954 .RS 4
    8955 .ie n \{\
    8956 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    8957 .\}
    8958 .el \{\
    8959 .sp -1
    8960 .IP \(bu 2.3
    8961 .\}
    8962 Is a username is sent with the share connection request, then this username (after mapping \- see
    8963 \m[blue]\fBusername map\fR\m[]), is added as a potential username\&.
    8964 .RE
    8965 .sp
    8966 .RS 4
    8967 .ie n \{\
    8968 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    8969 .\}
    8970 .el \{\
    8971 .sp -1
    8972 .IP \(bu 2.3
    8973 .\}
    8974 If the client did a previous
    8975 \fIlogon \fR
    8976 request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username\&.
    8977 .RE
    8978 .sp
    8979 .RS 4
    8980 .ie n \{\
    8981 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    8982 .\}
    8983 .el \{\
    8984 .sp -1
    8985 .IP \(bu 2.3
    8986 .\}
    8987 The name of the service the client requested is added as a potential username\&.
    8988 .RE
    8989 .sp
    8990 .RS 4
    8991 .ie n \{\
    8992 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    8993 .\}
    8994 .el \{\
    8995 .sp -1
    8996 .IP \(bu 2.3
    8997 .\}
    8998 The NetBIOS name of the client is added to the list as a potential username\&.
    8999 .RE
    9000 .sp
    9001 .RS 4
    9002 .ie n \{\
    9003 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9004 .\}
    9005 .el \{\
    9006 .sp -1
    9007 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9008 .\}
    9009 Any users on the
    9010 \m[blue]\fBuser\fR\m[]
    9011 list are added as potential usernames\&.
    9012 .sp
    9013 .RE
    9014 If the
    9015 \fIguest only\fR
    9016 parameter is not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password\&. The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the UNIX user\&.
    9017 .sp
    9018 If the
    9019 \fIguest only\fR
    9020 parameter is set, or no username can be determined then if the share is marked as available to the
    9021 \fIguest account\fR, then this guest user will be used, otherwise access is denied\&.
    9022 .sp
    9023 Note that it can be
    9024 \fIvery\fR
    9025 confusing in share\-level security as to which UNIX username will eventually be used in granting access\&.
    9026 .sp
    9027 See also the section
    9028 NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&.
    9029 .sp
    9030 \fISECURITY = USER\fR
    9031 .sp
    9032 This is the default security setting in Samba 3\&.0\&. With user\-level security a client must first "log\-on" with a valid username and password (which can be mapped using the
    9033 \m[blue]\fBusername map\fR\m[]
    9034 parameter)\&. Encrypted passwords (see the
    9035 \m[blue]\fBencrypted passwords\fR\m[]
    9036 parameter) can also be used in this security mode\&. Parameters such as
    9037 \m[blue]\fBuser\fR\m[]
    9038 and
    9039 \m[blue]\fBguest only\fR\m[]
    9040 if set are then applied and may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after the user has been successfully authenticated\&.
    9041 .sp
    9042 \fINote\fR
    9043 that the name of the resource being requested is
    9044 \fInot\fR
    9045 sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client\&. This is why guest shares don\'t work in user level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown users into the
    9046 \m[blue]\fBguest account\fR\m[]\&. See the
    9047 \m[blue]\fBmap to guest\fR\m[]
    9048 parameter for details on doing this\&.
    9049 .sp
    9050 See also the section
    9051 NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&.
    9052 .sp
    9053 \fISECURITY = DOMAIN\fR
    9054 .sp
    9055 This mode will only work correctly if
    9056 \fBnet\fR(8)
    9057 has been used to add this machine into a Windows NT Domain\&. It expects the
    9058 \m[blue]\fBencrypted passwords\fR\m[]
    9059 parameter to be set to
    9060 \fByes\fR\&. In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly the same way that a Windows NT Server would do\&.
    9061 .sp
    9062 \fINote\fR
    9063 that a valid UNIX user must still exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to\&.
    9064 .sp
    9065 \fINote\fR
    9066 that from the client\'s point of view
    9067 \FCsecurity = domain\F[]
    9068 is the same as
    9069 \FCsecurity = user\F[]\&. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the client sees\&.
    9070 .sp
    9071 \fINote\fR
    9072 that the name of the resource being requested is
    9073 \fInot\fR
    9074 sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client\&. This is why guest shares don\'t work in user level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown users into the
    9075 \m[blue]\fBguest account\fR\m[]\&. See the
    9076 \m[blue]\fBmap to guest\fR\m[]
    9077 parameter for details on doing this\&.
    9078 .sp
    9079 See also the section
    9080 NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&.
    9081 .sp
    9082 See also the
    9083 \m[blue]\fBpassword server\fR\m[]
    9084 parameter and the
    9085 \m[blue]\fBencrypted passwords\fR\m[]
    9086 parameter\&.
    9087 .sp
    9088 \fISECURITY = SERVER\fR
    9089 .sp
    9090 In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box\&. If this fails it will revert to
    9091 \FCsecurity = user\F[]\&. It expects the
    9092 \m[blue]\fBencrypted passwords\fR\m[]
    9093 parameter to be set to
    9094 \fByes\fR, unless the remote server does not support them\&. However note that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid
    9095 \FCsmbpasswd\F[]
    9096 file to check users against\&. See the chapter about the User Database in the Samba HOWTO Collection for details on how to set this up\&.
    9097 .if n \{\
    9098 .sp
    9099 .\}
    9100 .RS 4
    9101 .BM yellow
    9102 .it 1 an-trap
    9103 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    9104 .nr an-break-flag 1
    9105 .br
    9106 .ps +1
    9107 \fBNote\fR
    9108 .ps -1
    9109 .br
    9110 This mode of operation has significant pitfalls since it is more vulnerable to man\-in\-the\-middle attacks and server impersonation\&. In particular, this mode of operation can cause significant resource consuption on the PDC, as it must maintain an active connection for the duration of the user\'s session\&. Furthermore, if this connection is lost, there is no way to reestablish it, and futher authentications to the Samba server may fail (from a single client, till it disconnects)\&.
    9111 .sp .5v
    9112 .EM yellow
    9113 .RE
    9114 .if n \{\
    9115 .sp
    9116 .\}
    9117 .RS 4
    9118 .BM yellow
    9119 .it 1 an-trap
    9120 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    9121 .nr an-break-flag 1
    9122 .br
    9123 .ps +1
    9124 \fBNote\fR
    9125 .ps -1
    9126 .br
    9127 From the client\'s point of view,
    9128 \FCsecurity = server\F[]
    9129 is the same as
    9130 \FCsecurity = user\F[]\&. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the client sees\&.
    9131 .sp .5v
    9132 .EM yellow
    9133 .RE
    9134 \fINote\fR
    9135 that the name of the resource being requested is
    9136 \fInot\fR
    9137 sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client\&. This is why guest shares don\'t work in user level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown users into the
    9138 \m[blue]\fBguest account\fR\m[]\&. See the
    9139 \m[blue]\fBmap to guest\fR\m[]
    9140 parameter for details on doing this\&.
    9141 .sp
    9142 See also the section
    9143 NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&.
    9144 .sp
    9145 See also the
    9146 \m[blue]\fBpassword server\fR\m[]
    9147 parameter and the
    9148 \m[blue]\fBencrypted passwords\fR\m[]
    9149 parameter\&.
    9150 .sp
    9151 \fISECURITY = ADS\fR
    9152 .sp
    9153 In this mode, Samba will act as a domain member in an ADS realm\&. To operate in this mode, the machine running Samba will need to have Kerberos installed and configured and Samba will need to be joined to the ADS realm using the net utility\&.
    9154 .sp
    9155 Note that this mode does NOT make Samba operate as a Active Directory Domain Controller\&.
    9156 .sp
    9157 Read the chapter about Domain Membership in the HOWTO for details\&.
    9158 .sp
    9159 Default:
    9160 \fI\fIsecurity\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCUSER\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9161 .sp
    9162 Example:
    9163 \fI\fIsecurity\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCDOMAIN\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9164 .RE
    9165 
    9166 server schannel (G)
    9167 .\" server schannel
    9168 .PP
    9169 .RS 4
    9170 This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel\&.
    9171 \m[blue]\fBserver schannel = no\fR\m[]
    9172 does not offer the schannel,
    9173 \m[blue]\fBserver schannel = auto\fR\m[]
    9174 offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and
    9175 \m[blue]\fBserver schannel = yes\fR\m[]
    9176 denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel\&. This is only the case for Windows NT4 before SP4\&.
    9177 .sp
    9178 Please note that with this set to
    9179 \FCno\F[], you will have to apply the WindowsXP
    9180 \FCWinXP_SignOrSeal\&.reg\F[]
    9181 registry patch found in the docs/registry subdirectory of the Samba distribution tarball\&.
    9182 .sp
    9183 Default:
    9184 \fI\fIserver schannel\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCauto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9185 .sp
    9186 Example:
    9187 \fI\fIserver schannel\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9188 .RE
    9189 
    9190 server signing (G)
    9191 .\" server signing
    9192 .PP
    9193 .RS 4
    9194 This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB signing\&. Possible values are
    9195 \fIauto\fR,
    9196 \fImandatory\fR
    9197 and
    9198 \fIdisabled\fR\&.
    9199 .sp
    9200 When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced\&. When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either\&.
    9201 .sp
    9202 Default:
    9203 \fI\fIserver signing\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCDisabled\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9204 .RE
    9205 
    9206 server string (G)
    9207 .\" server string
    9208 .PP
    9209 .RS 4
    9210 This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection in
    9211 \FCnet view\F[]\&. It can be any string that you wish to show to your users\&.
    9212 .sp
    9213 It also sets what will appear in browse lists next to the machine name\&.
    9214 .sp
    9215 A
    9216 \fI%v\fR
    9217 will be replaced with the Samba version number\&.
    9218 .sp
    9219 A
    9220 \fI%h\fR
    9221 will be replaced with the hostname\&.
    9222 .sp
    9223 Default:
    9224 \fI\fIserver string\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCSamba %v\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9225 .sp
    9226 Example:
    9227 \fI\fIserver string\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCUniversity of GNUs Samba Server\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9228 .RE
    9229 
    9230 set directory (S)
    9231 .\" set directory
    9232 .PP
    9233 .RS 4
    9234 If
    9235 \FCset directory = no\F[], then users of the service may not use the setdir command to change directory\&.
    9236 .sp
    9237 The
    9238 \FCsetdir\F[]
    9239 command is only implemented in the Digital Pathworks client\&. See the Pathworks documentation for details\&.
    9240 .sp
    9241 Default:
    9242 \fI\fIset directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9243 .RE
    9244 
    9245 set primary group script (G)
    9246 .\" set primary group script
    9247 .PP
    9248 .RS 4
    9249 Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a primary group in addition to the auxiliary groups\&. This script sets the primary group in the unix userdatase when an administrator sets the primary group from the windows user manager or when fetching a SAM with
    9250 \FCnet rpc vampire\F[]\&.
    9251 \fI%u\fR
    9252 will be replaced with the user whose primary group is to be set\&.
    9253 \fI%g\fR
    9254 will be replaced with the group to set\&.
    9255 .sp
    9256 Default:
    9257 \fI\fIset primary group script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9258 .sp
    9259 Example:
    9260 \fI\fIset primary group script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/sbin/usermod \-g \'%g\' \'%u\'\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9261 .RE
    9262 
    9263 set quota command (G)
    9264 .\" set quota command
    9265 .PP
    9266 .RS 4
    9267 The
    9268 \FCset quota command\F[]
    9269 should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use\&.
    9270 .sp
    9271 This option is only available if Samba was configured with the argument
    9272 \FC\-\-with\-sys\-quotas\F[]
    9273 or on linux when
    9274 \FC\&./configure \-\-with\-quotas\F[]
    9275 was used and a working quota api was found in the system\&. Most packages are configured with these options already\&.
    9276 .sp
    9277 This parameter should specify the path to a script that can set quota for the specified arguments\&.
    9278 .sp
    9279 The specified script should take the following arguments:
    9280 .sp
    9281 .RS 4
    9282 .ie n \{\
    9283 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9284 .\}
    9285 .el \{\
    9286 .sp -1
    9287 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9288 .\}
    9289 1 \- quota type
    9290 .sp
    9291 .RS 4
    9292 .ie n \{\
    9293 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9294 .\}
    9295 .el \{\
    9296 .sp -1
    9297 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9298 .\}
    9299 1 \- user quotas
    9300 .RE
    9301 .sp
    9302 .RS 4
    9303 .ie n \{\
    9304 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9305 .\}
    9306 .el \{\
    9307 .sp -1
    9308 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9309 .\}
    9310 2 \- user default quotas (uid = \-1)
    9311 .RE
    9312 .sp
    9313 .RS 4
    9314 .ie n \{\
    9315 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9316 .\}
    9317 .el \{\
    9318 .sp -1
    9319 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9320 .\}
    9321 3 \- group quotas
    9322 .RE
    9323 .sp
    9324 .RS 4
    9325 .ie n \{\
    9326 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9327 .\}
    9328 .el \{\
    9329 .sp -1
    9330 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9331 .\}
    9332 4 \- group default quotas (gid = \-1)
    9333 .sp
    9334 .RE
    9335 .RE
    9336 .sp
    9337 .RS 4
    9338 .ie n \{\
    9339 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9340 .\}
    9341 .el \{\
    9342 .sp -1
    9343 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9344 .\}
    9345 2 \- id (uid for user, gid for group, \-1 if N/A)
    9346 .RE
    9347 .sp
    9348 .RS 4
    9349 .ie n \{\
    9350 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9351 .\}
    9352 .el \{\
    9353 .sp -1
    9354 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9355 .\}
    9356 3 \- quota state (0 = disable, 1 = enable, 2 = enable and enforce)
    9357 .RE
    9358 .sp
    9359 .RS 4
    9360 .ie n \{\
    9361 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9362 .\}
    9363 .el \{\
    9364 .sp -1
    9365 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9366 .\}
    9367 4 \- block softlimit
    9368 .RE
    9369 .sp
    9370 .RS 4
    9371 .ie n \{\
    9372 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9373 .\}
    9374 .el \{\
    9375 .sp -1
    9376 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9377 .\}
    9378 5 \- block hardlimit
    9379 .RE
    9380 .sp
    9381 .RS 4
    9382 .ie n \{\
    9383 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9384 .\}
    9385 .el \{\
    9386 .sp -1
    9387 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9388 .\}
    9389 6 \- inode softlimit
    9390 .RE
    9391 .sp
    9392 .RS 4
    9393 .ie n \{\
    9394 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9395 .\}
    9396 .el \{\
    9397 .sp -1
    9398 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9399 .\}
    9400 7 \- inode hardlimit
    9401 .RE
    9402 .sp
    9403 .RS 4
    9404 .ie n \{\
    9405 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9406 .\}
    9407 .el \{\
    9408 .sp -1
    9409 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9410 .\}
    9411 8(optional) \- block size, defaults to 1024
    9412 .sp
    9413 .RE
    9414 The script should output at least one line of data on success\&. And nothing on failure\&.
    9415 .sp
    9416 Default:
    9417 \fI\fIset quota command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9418 .sp
    9419 Example:
    9420 \fI\fIset quota command\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/sbin/set_quota\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9421 .RE
    9422 
    9423 share:fake_fscaps (G)
    9424 .\" share:fake_fscaps
    9425 .PP
    9426 .RS 4
    9427 This is needed to support some special application that makes QFSINFO calls to check whether we set the SPARSE_FILES bit (0x40)\&. If this bit is not set that particular application refuses to work against Samba\&. With
    9428 \m[blue]\fBshare:fake_fscaps = 64\fR\m[]
    9429 the SPARSE_FILES file system capability flag is set\&. Use other decimal values to specify the bitmask you need to fake\&.
    9430 .sp
    9431 Default:
    9432 \fI\fIshare:fake_fscaps\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9433 .RE
    9434 
    9435 share modes (S)
    9436 .\" share modes
    9437 .PP
    9438 .RS 4
    9439 This enables or disables the honoring of the
    9440 \fIshare modes\fR
    9441 during a file open\&. These modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access to a file\&.
    9442 .sp
    9443 This is a deprecated option from old versions of Samba, and will be removed in the next major release\&.
    9444 .sp
    9445 These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so they are simulated using shared memory\&.
    9446 .sp
    9447 The share modes that are enabled by this option are the standard Windows share modes\&.
    9448 .sp
    9449 This option gives full share compatibility and is enabled by default\&.
    9450 .sp
    9451 You should
    9452 \fINEVER\fR
    9453 turn this parameter off as many Windows applications will break if you do so\&.
    9454 .sp
    9455 Default:
    9456 \fI\fIshare modes\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9457 .RE
    9458 
    9459 short preserve case (S)
    9460 .\" short preserve case
    9461 .PP
    9462 .RS 4
    9463 This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8\&.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the
    9464 \m[blue]\fBdefault case\fR\m[]\&. This option can be use with
    9465 \m[blue]\fBpreserve case = yes\fR\m[]
    9466 to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowered\&.
    9467 .sp
    9468 See the section on
    9469 NAME MANGLING\&.
    9470 .sp
    9471 Default:
    9472 \fI\fIshort preserve case\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9473 .RE
    9474 
    9475 show add printer wizard (G)
    9476 .\" show add printer wizard
    9477 .PP
    9478 .RS 4
    9479 With the introduction of MS\-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2\&.2, a "Printers\&.\&.\&." folder will appear on Samba hosts in the share listing\&. Normally this folder will contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW)\&. However, it is possible to disable this feature regardless of the level of privilege of the connected user\&.
    9480 .sp
    9481 Under normal circumstances, the Windows NT/2000 client will open a handle on the printer server with OpenPrinterEx() asking for Administrator privileges\&. If the user does not have administrative access on the print server (i\&.e is not root or a member of the
    9482 \fIprinter admin\fR
    9483 group), the OpenPrinterEx() call fails and the client makes another open call with a request for a lower privilege level\&. This should succeed, however the APW icon will not be displayed\&.
    9484 .sp
    9485 Disabling the
    9486 \fIshow add printer wizard\fR
    9487 parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server to fail\&. Thus the APW icon will never be displayed\&.
    9488 .if n \{\
    9489 .sp
    9490 .\}
    9491 .RS 4
    9492 .BM yellow
    9493 .it 1 an-trap
    9494 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    9495 .nr an-break-flag 1
    9496 .br
    9497 .ps +1
    9498 \fBNote\fR
    9499 .ps -1
    9500 .br
    9501 This does not prevent the same user from having administrative privilege on an individual printer\&.
    9502 .sp .5v
    9503 .EM yellow
    9504 .RE
    9505 Default:
    9506 \fI\fIshow add printer wizard\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9507 .RE
    9508 
    9509 shutdown script (G)
    9510 .\" shutdown script
    9511 .PP
    9512 .RS 4
    9513 This a full path name to a script called by
    9514 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    9515 that should start a shutdown procedure\&.
    9516 .sp
    9517 If the connected user posseses the
    9518 \fBSeRemoteShutdownPrivilege\fR, right, this command will be run as root\&.
    9519 .sp
    9520 The %z %t %r %f variables are expanded as follows:
    9521 .sp
    9522 .RS 4
    9523 .ie n \{\
    9524 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9525 .\}
    9526 .el \{\
    9527 .sp -1
    9528 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9529 .\}
    9530 \fI%z\fR
    9531 will be substituted with the shutdown message sent to the server\&.
    9532 .RE
    9533 .sp
    9534 .RS 4
    9535 .ie n \{\
    9536 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9537 .\}
    9538 .el \{\
    9539 .sp -1
    9540 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9541 .\}
    9542 \fI%t\fR
    9543 will be substituted with the number of seconds to wait before effectively starting the shutdown procedure\&.
    9544 .RE
    9545 .sp
    9546 .RS 4
    9547 .ie n \{\
    9548 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9549 .\}
    9550 .el \{\
    9551 .sp -1
    9552 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9553 .\}
    9554 \fI%r\fR
    9555 will be substituted with the switch
    9556 \fI\-r\fR\&. It means reboot after shutdown for NT\&.
    9557 .RE
    9558 .sp
    9559 .RS 4
    9560 .ie n \{\
    9561 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9562 .\}
    9563 .el \{\
    9564 .sp -1
    9565 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9566 .\}
    9567 \fI%f\fR
    9568 will be substituted with the switch
    9569 \fI\-f\fR\&. It means force the shutdown even if applications do not respond for NT\&.
    9570 .sp
    9571 .RE
    9572 Shutdown script example:
    9573 .sp
    9574 .if n \{\
    9575 .RS 4
    9576 .\}
    9577 .fam C
    9578 .ps -1
    9579 .nf
    9580 .if t \{\
    9581 .sp -1
    9582 .\}
    9583 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    9584 .sp -1
    9585 
    9586 #!/bin/bash
    9587 
    9588 time=$2
    9589 let time="${time} / 60"
    9590 let time="${time} + 1"
    9591 
    9592 /sbin/shutdown $3 $4 +$time $1 &
    9593 
    9594 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    9595 .if t \{\
    9596 .sp 1
    9597 .\}
    9598 .fi
    9599 .fam
    9600 .ps +1
    9601 .if n \{\
    9602 .RE
    9603 .\}
    9604 .sp
    9605 Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background\&.
    9606 .sp
    9607 Default:
    9608 \fI\fIshutdown script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9609 .sp
    9610 Example:
    9611 \fI\fIshutdown script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9612 .RE
    9613 
    9614 smb encrypt (S)
    9615 .\" smb encrypt
    9616 .PP
    9617 .RS 4
    9618 This is a new feature introduced with Samba 3\&.2 and above\&. It is an extension to the SMB/CIFS protocol negotiated as part of the UNIX extensions\&. SMB encryption uses the GSSAPI (SSPI on Windows) ability to encrypt and sign every request/response in a SMB protocol stream\&. When enabled it provides a secure method of SMB/CIFS communication, similar to an ssh protected session, but using SMB/CIFS authentication to negotiate encryption and signing keys\&. Currently this is only supported by Samba 3\&.2 smbclient, and hopefully soon Linux CIFSFS and MacOS/X clients\&. Windows clients do not support this feature\&.
    9619 .sp
    9620 This controls whether the remote client is allowed or required to use SMB encryption\&. Possible values are
    9621 \fIauto\fR,
    9622 \fImandatory\fR
    9623 and
    9624 \fIdisabled\fR\&. This may be set on a per\-share basis, but clients may chose to encrypt the entire session, not just traffic to a specific share\&. If this is set to mandatory then all traffic to a share
    9625 \fImust\fR
    9626 must be encrypted once the connection has been made to the share\&. The server would return "access denied" to all non\-encrypted requests on such a share\&. Selecting encrypted traffic reduces throughput as smaller packet sizes must be used (no huge UNIX style read/writes allowed) as well as the overhead of encrypting and signing all the data\&.
    9627 .sp
    9628 If SMB encryption is selected, Windows style SMB signing (see the
    9629 \m[blue]\fBserver signing\fR\m[]
    9630 option) is no longer necessary, as the GSSAPI flags use select both signing and sealing of the data\&.
    9631 .sp
    9632 When set to auto, SMB encryption is offered, but not enforced\&. When set to mandatory, SMB encryption is required and if set to disabled, SMB encryption can not be negotiated\&.
    9633 .sp
    9634 Default:
    9635 \fI\fIsmb encrypt\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCauto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9636 .RE
    9637 
    9638 smb passwd file (G)
    9639 .\" smb passwd file
    9640 .PP
    9641 .RS 4
    9642 This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file\&. By default the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba\&.
    9643 .sp
    9644 An example of use is:
    9645 .sp
    9646 .if n \{\
    9647 .RS 4
    9648 .\}
    9649 .fam C
    9650 .ps -1
    9651 .nf
    9652 .if t \{\
    9653 .sp -1
    9654 .\}
    9655 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    9656 .sp -1
    9657 
    9658 smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd
    9659 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    9660 .if t \{\
    9661 .sp 1
    9662 .\}
    9663 .fi
    9664 .fam
    9665 .ps +1
    9666 .if n \{\
    9667 .RE
    9668 .\}
    9669 .sp
    9670 Default:
    9671 \fI\fIsmb passwd file\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC${prefix}/private/smbpasswd\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9672 .RE
    9673 
    9674 smb ports (G)
    9675 .\" smb ports
    9676 .PP
    9677 .RS 4
    9678 Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic\&.
    9679 .sp
    9680 Default:
    9681 \fI\fIsmb ports\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC445 139\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9682 .RE
    9683 
    9684 socket address (G)
    9685 .\" socket address
    9686 .PP
    9687 .RS 4
    9688 This option allows you to control what address Samba will listen for connections on\&. This is used to support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each with a different configuration\&.
    9689 .sp
    9690 Setting this option should never be necessary on usual Samba servers running only one nmbd\&.
    9691 .sp
    9692 By default Samba will accept connections on any address\&.
    9693 .sp
    9694 Default:
    9695 \fI\fIsocket address\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9696 .sp
    9697 Example:
    9698 \fI\fIsocket address\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC192\&.168\&.2\&.20\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9699 .RE
    9700 
    9701 socket options (G)
    9702 .\" socket options
    9703 .PP
    9704 .RS 4
    9705 This option allows you to set socket options to be used when talking with the client\&.
    9706 .sp
    9707 Socket options are controls on the networking layer of the operating systems which allow the connection to be tuned\&.
    9708 .sp
    9709 This option will typically be used to tune your Samba server for optimal performance for your local network\&. There is no way that Samba can know what the optimal parameters are for your net, so you must experiment and choose them yourself\&. We strongly suggest you read the appropriate documentation for your operating system first (perhaps
    9710 \FCman setsockopt\F[]
    9711 will help)\&.
    9712 .sp
    9713 You may find that on some systems Samba will say "Unknown socket option" when you supply an option\&. This means you either incorrectly typed it or you need to add an include file to includes\&.h for your OS\&. If the latter is the case please send the patch to
    9714 samba\-technical@samba\&.org\&.
    9715 .sp
    9716 Any of the supported socket options may be combined in any way you like, as long as your OS allows it\&.
    9717 .sp
    9718 This is the list of socket options currently settable using this option:
    9719 .sp
    9720 .RS 4
    9721 .ie n \{\
    9722 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9723 .\}
    9724 .el \{\
    9725 .sp -1
    9726 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9727 .\}
    9728 SO_KEEPALIVE
    9729 .RE
    9730 .sp
    9731 .RS 4
    9732 .ie n \{\
    9733 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9734 .\}
    9735 .el \{\
    9736 .sp -1
    9737 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9738 .\}
    9739 SO_REUSEADDR
    9740 .RE
    9741 .sp
    9742 .RS 4
    9743 .ie n \{\
    9744 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9745 .\}
    9746 .el \{\
    9747 .sp -1
    9748 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9749 .\}
    9750 SO_BROADCAST
    9751 .RE
    9752 .sp
    9753 .RS 4
    9754 .ie n \{\
    9755 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9756 .\}
    9757 .el \{\
    9758 .sp -1
    9759 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9760 .\}
    9761 TCP_NODELAY
    9762 .RE
    9763 .sp
    9764 .RS 4
    9765 .ie n \{\
    9766 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9767 .\}
    9768 .el \{\
    9769 .sp -1
    9770 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9771 .\}
    9772 IPTOS_LOWDELAY
    9773 .RE
    9774 .sp
    9775 .RS 4
    9776 .ie n \{\
    9777 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9778 .\}
    9779 .el \{\
    9780 .sp -1
    9781 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9782 .\}
    9783 IPTOS_THROUGHPUT
    9784 .RE
    9785 .sp
    9786 .RS 4
    9787 .ie n \{\
    9788 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9789 .\}
    9790 .el \{\
    9791 .sp -1
    9792 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9793 .\}
    9794 SO_SNDBUF *
    9795 .RE
    9796 .sp
    9797 .RS 4
    9798 .ie n \{\
    9799 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9800 .\}
    9801 .el \{\
    9802 .sp -1
    9803 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9804 .\}
    9805 SO_RCVBUF *
    9806 .RE
    9807 .sp
    9808 .RS 4
    9809 .ie n \{\
    9810 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9811 .\}
    9812 .el \{\
    9813 .sp -1
    9814 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9815 .\}
    9816 SO_SNDLOWAT *
    9817 .RE
    9818 .sp
    9819 .RS 4
    9820 .ie n \{\
    9821 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    9822 .\}
    9823 .el \{\
    9824 .sp -1
    9825 .IP \(bu 2.3
    9826 .\}
    9827 SO_RCVLOWAT *
    9828 .sp
    9829 .RE
    9830 Those marked with a
    9831 \fI\'*\'\fR
    9832 take an integer argument\&. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you don\'t specify 1 or 0\&.
    9833 .sp
    9834 To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION = VALUE for example
    9835 \FCSO_SNDBUF = 8192\F[]\&. Note that you must not have any spaces before or after the = sign\&.
    9836 .sp
    9837 If you are on a local network then a sensible option might be:
    9838 .sp
    9839 \FCsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY\F[]
    9840 .sp
    9841 If you have a local network then you could try:
    9842 .sp
    9843 \FCsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY\F[]
    9844 .sp
    9845 If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try setting IPTOS_THROUGHPUT\&.
    9846 .sp
    9847 Note that several of the options may cause your Samba server to fail completely\&. Use these options with caution!
    9848 .sp
    9849 Default:
    9850 \fI\fIsocket options\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCTCP_NODELAY\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9851 .sp
    9852 Example:
    9853 \fI\fIsocket options\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCIPTOS_LOWDELAY\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9854 .RE
    9855 
    9856 stat cache (G)
    9857 .\" stat cache
    9858 .PP
    9859 .RS 4
    9860 This parameter determines if
    9861 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    9862 will use a cache in order to speed up case insensitive name mappings\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&.
    9863 .sp
    9864 Default:
    9865 \fI\fIstat cache\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9866 .RE
    9867 
    9868 state directory (G)
    9869 .\" state directory
    9870 .PP
    9871 .RS 4
    9872 Usually, most of the TDB files are stored in the
    9873 \fIlock directory\fR\&. Since Samba 3\&.4\&.0, it is possible to differentiate between TDB files with persistent data and TDB files with non\-persistent data using the
    9874 \fIstate directory\fR
    9875 and the
    9876 \fIcache directory\fR
    9877 options\&.
    9878 .sp
    9879 This option specifies the directory where TDB files containing persistent data will be stored\&.
    9880 .sp
    9881 Default:
    9882 \fI\fIstate directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC${prefix}/var/locks\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9883 .sp
    9884 Example:
    9885 \fI\fIstate directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/var/run/samba/locks/state\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9886 .RE
    9887 
    9888 store dos attributes (S)
    9889 .\" store dos attributes
    9890 .PP
    9891 .RS 4
    9892 If this parameter is set Samba attempts to first read DOS attributes (SYSTEM, HIDDEN, ARCHIVE or READ\-ONLY) from a filesystem extended attribute, before mapping DOS attributes to UNIX permission bits (such as occurs with
    9893 \m[blue]\fBmap hidden\fR\m[]
    9894 and
    9895 \m[blue]\fBmap readonly\fR\m[])\&. When set, DOS attributes will be stored onto an extended attribute in the UNIX filesystem, associated with the file or directory\&. For no other mapping to occur as a fall\-back, the parameters
    9896 \m[blue]\fBmap hidden\fR\m[],
    9897 \m[blue]\fBmap system\fR\m[],
    9898 \m[blue]\fBmap archive\fR\m[]
    9899 and
    9900 \m[blue]\fBmap readonly\fR\m[]
    9901 must be set to off\&. This parameter writes the DOS attributes as a string into the extended attribute named "user\&.DOSATTRIB"\&. This extended attribute is explicitly hidden from smbd clients requesting an EA list\&. On Linux the filesystem must have been mounted with the mount option user_xattr in order for extended attributes to work, also extended attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel\&. In Samba 3\&.5\&.0 and above the "user\&.DOSATTRIB" extended attribute has been extended to store the create time for a file as well as the DOS attributes\&. This is done in a backwards compatible way so files created by Samba 3\&.5\&.0 and above can still have the DOS attribute read from this extended attribute by earlier versions of Samba, but they will not be able to read the create time stored there\&. Storing the create time separately from the normal filesystem meta\-data allows Samba to faithfully reproduce NTFS semantics on top of a POSIX filesystem\&.
    9902 .sp
    9903 Default:
    9904 \fI\fIstore dos attributes\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9905 .RE
    9906 
    9907 strict allocate (S)
    9908 .\" strict allocate
    9909 .PP
    9910 .RS 4
    9911 This is a boolean that controls the handling of disk space allocation in the server\&. When this is set to
    9912 \fByes\fR
    9913 the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real disk storage blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour of actually forcing the disk system to allocate real storage blocks when a file is created or extended to be a given size\&. In UNIX terminology this means that Samba will stop creating sparse files\&. This can be slow on some systems\&. When you work with large files like >100MB or so you may even run into problems with clients running into timeouts\&.
    9914 .sp
    9915 When you have an extent based filesystem it\'s likely that we can make use of unwritten extents which allows Samba to allocate even large amounts of space very fast and you will not see any timeout problems caused by strict allocate\&. With strict allocate in use you will also get much better out of quota messages in case you use quotas\&. Another advantage of activating this setting is that it will help to reduce file fragmentation\&.
    9916 .sp
    9917 To give you an idea on which filesystems this setting might currently be a good option for you: XFS, ext4, btrfs, ocfs2 on Linux and JFS2 on AIX support unwritten extents\&. On Filesystems that do not support it, preallocation is probably an expensive operation where you will see reduced performance and risk to let clients run into timeouts when creating large files\&. Examples are ext3, ZFS, HFS+ and most others, so be aware if you activate this setting on those filesystems\&.
    9918 .sp
    9919 Default:
    9920 \fI\fIstrict allocate\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9921 .RE
    9922 
    9923 strict locking (S)
    9924 .\" strict locking
    9925 .PP
    9926 .RS 4
    9927 This is an enumerated type that controls the handling of file locking in the server\&. When this is set to
    9928 \fByes\fR, the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist\&. This can be slow on some systems\&.
    9929 .sp
    9930 When strict locking is set to Auto (the default), the server performs file lock checks only on non\-oplocked files\&. As most Windows redirectors perform file locking checks locally on oplocked files this is a good trade off for improved performance\&.
    9931 .sp
    9932 When strict locking is disabled, the server performs file lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them\&.
    9933 .sp
    9934 Well\-behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it is important\&. So in the vast majority of cases,
    9935 \FCstrict locking = Auto\F[]
    9936 or
    9937 \FCstrict locking = no\F[]
    9938 is acceptable\&.
    9939 .sp
    9940 Default:
    9941 \fI\fIstrict locking\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCAuto\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9942 .RE
    9943 
    9944 strict sync (S)
    9945 .\" strict sync
    9946 .PP
    9947 .RS 4
    9948 Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing a sync to disk\&. Under UNIX, a sync call forces the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that all outstanding data in kernel disk buffers has been safely stored onto stable storage\&. This is very slow and should only be done rarely\&. Setting this parameter to
    9949 \fBno\fR
    9950 (the default) means that
    9951 \fBsmbd\fR(8)
    9952 ignores the Windows applications requests for a sync call\&. There is only a possibility of losing data if the operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is little danger in this default setting\&. In addition, this fixes many performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98 explorer shell file copies\&.
    9953 .sp
    9954 Default:
    9955 \fI\fIstrict sync\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9956 .RE
    9957 
    9958 svcctl list (G)
    9959 .\" svcctl list
    9960 .PP
    9961 .RS 4
    9962 This option defines a list of init scripts that smbd will use for starting and stopping Unix services via the Win32 ServiceControl API\&. This allows Windows administrators to utilize the MS Management Console plug\-ins to manage a Unix server running Samba\&.
    9963 .sp
    9964 The administrator must create a directory name
    9965 \FCsvcctl\F[]
    9966 in Samba\'s $(libdir) and create symbolic links to the init scripts in
    9967 \FC/etc/init\&.d/\F[]\&. The name of the links must match the names given as part of the
    9968 \fIsvcctl list\fR\&.
    9969 .sp
    9970 Default:
    9971 \fI\fIsvcctl list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9972 .sp
    9973 Example:
    9974 \fI\fIsvcctl list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCcups postfix portmap httpd\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9975 .RE
    9976 
    9977 sync always (S)
    9978 .\" sync always
    9979 .PP
    9980 .RS 4
    9981 This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always be written to stable storage before the write call returns\&. If this is
    9982 \fBno\fR
    9983 then the server will be guided by the client\'s request in each write call (clients can set a bit indicating that a particular write should be synchronous)\&. If this is
    9984 \fByes\fR
    9985 then every write will be followed by a
    9986 \FCfsync() \F[]
    9987 call to ensure the data is written to disk\&. Note that the
    9988 \fIstrict sync\fR
    9989 parameter must be set to
    9990 \fByes\fR
    9991 in order for this parameter to have any effect\&.
    9992 .sp
    9993 Default:
    9994 \fI\fIsync always\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    9995 .RE
    9996 
    9997 syslog only (G)
    9998 .\" syslog only
    9999 .PP
    10000 .RS 4
    10001 If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to the debug log files\&. There still will be some logging to log\&.[sn]mbd even if
    10002 \fIsyslog only\fR
    10003 is enabled\&.
    10004 .sp
    10005 Default:
    10006 \fI\fIsyslog only\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10007 .RE
    10008 
    10009 syslog (G)
    10010 .\" syslog
    10011 .PP
    10012 .RS 4
    10013 This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels\&. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog
    10014 \fBLOG_ERR\fR, debug level one maps onto
    10015 \fBLOG_WARNING\fR, debug level two maps onto
    10016 \fBLOG_NOTICE\fR, debug level three maps onto LOG_INFO\&. All higher levels are mapped to
    10017 \fBLOG_DEBUG\fR\&.
    10018 .sp
    10019 This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages to syslog\&. Only messages with debug level less than this value will be sent to syslog\&. There still will be some logging to log\&.[sn]mbd even if
    10020 \fIsyslog only\fR
    10021 is enabled\&.
    10022 .sp
    10023 Default:
    10024 \fI\fIsyslog\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10025 .RE
    10026 
    10027 template homedir (G)
    10028 .\" template homedir
    10029 .PP
    10030 .RS 4
    10031 When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the
    10032 \fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    10033 daemon uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user\&. If the string
    10034 \fI%D\fR
    10035 is present it is substituted with the user\'s Windows NT domain name\&. If the string
    10036 \fI%U\fR
    10037 is present it is substituted with the user\'s Windows NT user name\&.
    10038 .sp
    10039 Default:
    10040 \fI\fItemplate homedir\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/home/%D/%U\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10041 .RE
    10042 
    10043 template shell (G)
    10044 .\" template shell
    10045 .PP
    10046 .RS 4
    10047 When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the
    10048 \fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    10049 daemon uses this parameter to fill in the login shell for that user\&.
    10050 .sp
    10051 \fINo default\fR
    10052 .RE
    10053 
    10054 time offset (G)
    10055 .\" time offset
    10056 .PP
    10057 .RS 4
    10058 This parameter is a setting in minutes to add to the normal GMT to local time conversion\&. This is useful if you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight saving time handling\&.
    10059 .sp
    10060 Default:
    10061 \fI\fItime offset\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10062 .sp
    10063 Example:
    10064 \fI\fItime offset\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC60\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10065 .RE
    10066 
    10067 time server (G)
    10068 .\" time server
    10069 .PP
    10070 .RS 4
    10071 This parameter determines if
    10072 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    10073 advertises itself as a time server to Windows clients\&.
    10074 .sp
    10075 Default:
    10076 \fI\fItime server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10077 .RE
    10078 
    10079 unix charset (G)
    10080 .\" unix charset
    10081 .PP
    10082 .RS 4
    10083 Specifies the charset the unix machine Samba runs on uses\&. Samba needs to know this in order to be able to convert text to the charsets other SMB clients use\&.
    10084 .sp
    10085 This is also the charset Samba will use when specifying arguments to scripts that it invokes\&.
    10086 .sp
    10087 Default:
    10088 \fI\fIunix charset\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCUTF8\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10089 .sp
    10090 Example:
    10091 \fI\fIunix charset\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCASCII\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10092 .RE
    10093 
    10094 unix extensions (G)
    10095 .\" unix extensions
    10096 .PP
    10097 .RS 4
    10098 This boolean parameter controls whether Samba implements the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP\&. These extensions enable Samba to better serve UNIX CIFS clients by supporting features such as symbolic links, hard links, etc\&.\&.\&. These extensions require a similarly enabled client, and are of no current use to Windows clients\&.
    10099 .sp
    10100 Note if this parameter is turned on, the
    10101 \m[blue]\fBwide links\fR\m[]
    10102 parameter will automatically be disabled\&.
    10103 .sp
    10104 Default:
    10105 \fI\fIunix extensions\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10106 .RE
    10107 
    10108 unix password sync (G)
    10109 .\" unix password sync
    10110 .PP
    10111 .RS 4
    10112 This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed\&. If this is set to
    10113 \fByes\fR
    10114 the program specified in the
    10115 \fIpasswd program\fR
    10116 parameter is called
    10117 \fIAS ROOT\fR
    10118 \- to allow the new UNIX password to be set without access to the old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no access to the old password cleartext, only the new)\&.
    10119 .sp
    10120 Default:
    10121 \fI\fIunix password sync\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10122 .RE
    10123 
    10124 update encrypted (G)
    10125 .\" update encrypted
    10126 .PP
    10127 .RS 4
    10128 This boolean parameter allows a user logging on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed) password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as they log on\&. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext password over the wire, and are checked against a UNIX account database) to encrypted password authentication (the SMB challenge/response authentication mechanism) without forcing all users to re\-enter their passwords via smbpasswd at the time the change is made\&. This is a convenience option to allow the change over to encrypted passwords to be made over a longer period\&. Once all users have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd file this parameter should be set to
    10129 \fBno\fR\&.
    10130 .sp
    10131 In order for this parameter to be operative the
    10132 \m[blue]\fBencrypt passwords\fR\m[]
    10133 parameter must be set to
    10134 \fBno\fR\&. The default value of
    10135 \m[blue]\fBencrypt passwords = Yes\fR\m[]\&. Note: This must be set to
    10136 \fBno\fR
    10137 for this
    10138 \m[blue]\fBupdate encrypted\fR\m[]
    10139 to work\&.
    10140 .sp
    10141 Note that even when this parameter is set, a user authenticating to
    10142 \FCsmbd\F[]
    10143 must still enter a valid password in order to connect correctly, and to update their hashed (smbpasswd) passwords\&.
    10144 .sp
    10145 Default:
    10146 \fI\fIupdate encrypted\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10147 .RE
    10148 
    10149 use client driver (S)
    10150 .\" use client driver
    10151 .PP
    10152 .RS 4
    10153 This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 clients\&. It has no effect on Windows 95/98/ME clients\&. When serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing a valid printer driver on the Samba host, the client will be required to install a local printer driver\&. From this point on, the client will treat the print as a local printer and not a network printer connection\&. This is much the same behavior that will occur when
    10154 \FCdisable spoolss = yes\F[]\&.
    10155 .sp
    10156 The differentiating factor is that under normal circumstances, the NT/2000 client will attempt to open the network printer using MS\-RPC\&. The problem is that because the client considers the printer to be local, it will attempt to issue the OpenPrinterEx() call requesting access rights associated with the logged on user\&. If the user possesses local administator rights but not root privilege on the Samba host (often the case), the OpenPrinterEx() call will fail\&. The result is that the client will now display an "Access Denied; Unable to connect" message in the printer queue window (even though jobs may successfully be printed)\&.
    10157 .sp
    10158 If this parameter is enabled for a printer, then any attempt to open the printer with the PRINTER_ACCESS_ADMINISTER right is mapped to PRINTER_ACCESS_USE instead\&. Thus allowing the OpenPrinterEx() call to succeed\&.
    10159 \fIThis parameter MUST not be enabled on a print share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba server\&.\fR
    10160 .sp
    10161 Default:
    10162 \fI\fIuse client driver\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10163 .RE
    10164 
    10165 use mmap (G)
    10166 .\" use mmap
    10167 .PP
    10168 .RS 4
    10169 This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can depend on mmap working correctly on the running system\&. Samba requires a coherent mmap/read\-write system memory cache\&. Currently only HPUX does not have such a coherent cache, and so this parameter is set to
    10170 \fBno\fR
    10171 by default on HPUX\&. On all other systems this parameter should be left alone\&. This parameter is provided to help the Samba developers track down problems with the tdb internal code\&.
    10172 .sp
    10173 Default:
    10174 \fI\fIuse mmap\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10175 .RE
    10176 
    10177 username level (G)
    10178 .\" username level
    10179 .PP
    10180 .RS 4
    10181 This option helps Samba to try and \'guess\' at the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all\-uppercase username\&. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the username is not found on the UNIX machine\&.
    10182 .sp
    10183 If this parameter is set to non\-zero the behavior changes\&. This parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase combinations to try while trying to determine the UNIX user name\&. The higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower the discovery of usernames will be\&. Use this parameter when you have strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as
    10184 \fBAstrangeUser \fR\&.
    10185 .sp
    10186 This parameter is needed only on UNIX systems that have case sensitive usernames\&.
    10187 .sp
    10188 Default:
    10189 \fI\fIusername level\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10190 .sp
    10191 Example:
    10192 \fI\fIusername level\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC5\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10193 .RE
    10194 
    10195 username map script (G)
    10196 .\" username map script
    10197 .PP
    10198 .RS 4
    10199 This script is a mutually exclusive alternative to the
    10200 \m[blue]\fBusername map\fR\m[]
    10201 parameter\&. This parameter specifies and external program or script that must accept a single command line option (the username transmitted in the authentication request) and return a line line on standard output (the name to which the account should mapped)\&. In this way, it is possible to store username map tables in an LDAP or NIS directory services\&.
    10202 .sp
    10203 Default:
    10204 \fI\fIusername map script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10205 .sp
    10206 Example:
    10207 \fI\fIusername map script\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/etc/samba/scripts/mapusers\&.sh\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10208 .RE
    10209 
    10210 username map (G)
    10211 .\" username map
    10212 .PP
    10213 .RS 4
    10214 This option allows you to specify a file containing a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server\&. This can be used for several purposes\&. The most common is to map usernames that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX box uses\&. The other is to map multiple users to a single username so that they can more easily share files\&.
    10215 .sp
    10216 Please note that for user or share mode security, the username map is applied prior to validating the user credentials\&. Domain member servers (domain or ads) apply the username map after the user has been successfully authenticated by the domain controller and require fully qualified enties in the map table (e\&.g\&. biddle =
    10217 \FCDOMAIN\efoo\F[])\&.
    10218 .sp
    10219 The map file is parsed line by line\&. Each line should contain a single UNIX username on the left then a \'=\' followed by a list of usernames on the right\&. The list of usernames on the right may contain names of the form @group in which case they will match any UNIX username in that group\&. The special client name \'*\' is a wildcard and matches any name\&. Each line of the map file may be up to 1023 characters long\&.
    10220 .sp
    10221 The file is processed on each line by taking the supplied username and comparing it with each username on the right hand side of the \'=\' signs\&. If the supplied name matches any of the names on the right hand side then it is replaced with the name on the left\&. Processing then continues with the next line\&.
    10222 .sp
    10223 If any line begins with a \'#\' or a \';\' then it is ignored\&.
    10224 .sp
    10225 If any line begins with an \'!\' then the processing will stop after that line if a mapping was done by the line\&. Otherwise mapping continues with every line being processed\&. Using \'!\' is most useful when you have a wildcard mapping line later in the file\&.
    10226 .sp
    10227 For example to map from the name
    10228 \fBadmin\fR
    10229 or
    10230 \fBadministrator\fR
    10231 to the UNIX name
    10232 \fB root\fR
    10233 you would use:
    10234 .sp
    10235 .if n \{\
    10236 .RS 4
    10237 .\}
    10238 .fam C
    10239 .ps -1
    10240 .nf
    10241 .if t \{\
    10242 .sp -1
    10243 .\}
    10244 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10245 .sp -1
    10246 
    10247 \FCroot = admin administrator\F[]
    10248 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10249 .if t \{\
    10250 .sp 1
    10251 .\}
    10252 .fi
    10253 .fam
    10254 .ps +1
    10255 .if n \{\
    10256 .RE
    10257 .\}
    10258 .sp
    10259 Or to map anyone in the UNIX group
    10260 \fBsystem\fR
    10261 to the UNIX name
    10262 \fBsys\fR
    10263 you would use:
    10264 .sp
    10265 .if n \{\
    10266 .RS 4
    10267 .\}
    10268 .fam C
    10269 .ps -1
    10270 .nf
    10271 .if t \{\
    10272 .sp -1
    10273 .\}
    10274 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10275 .sp -1
    10276 
    10277 \FCsys = @system\F[]
    10278 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10279 .if t \{\
    10280 .sp 1
    10281 .\}
    10282 .fi
    10283 .fam
    10284 .ps +1
    10285 .if n \{\
    10286 .RE
    10287 .\}
    10288 .sp
    10289 You can have as many mappings as you like in a username map file\&.
    10290 .sp
    10291 If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then the netgroup database is checked before the
    10292 \FC/etc/group \F[]
    10293 database for matching groups\&.
    10294 .sp
    10295 You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them by using double quotes around the name\&. For example:
    10296 .sp
    10297 .if n \{\
    10298 .RS 4
    10299 .\}
    10300 .fam C
    10301 .ps -1
    10302 .nf
    10303 .if t \{\
    10304 .sp -1
    10305 .\}
    10306 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10307 .sp -1
    10308 
    10309 \FCtridge = "Andrew Tridgell"\F[]
    10310 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10311 .if t \{\
    10312 .sp 1
    10313 .\}
    10314 .fi
    10315 .fam
    10316 .ps +1
    10317 .if n \{\
    10318 .RE
    10319 .\}
    10320 .sp
    10321 would map the windows username "Andrew Tridgell" to the unix username "tridge"\&.
    10322 .sp
    10323 The following example would map mary and fred to the unix user sys, and map the rest to guest\&. Note the use of the \'!\' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on that line:
    10324 .sp
    10325 .if n \{\
    10326 .RS 4
    10327 .\}
    10328 .fam C
    10329 .ps -1
    10330 .nf
    10331 .if t \{\
    10332 .sp -1
    10333 .\}
    10334 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10335 .sp -1
    10336 
    10337 !sys = mary fred
    10338 guest = *
    10339 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10340 .if t \{\
    10341 .sp 1
    10342 .\}
    10343 .fi
    10344 .fam
    10345 .ps +1
    10346 .if n \{\
    10347 .RE
    10348 .\}
    10349 .sp
    10350 Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences of usernames\&. Thus if you connect to \e\eserver\efred and
    10351 \fBfred\fR
    10352 is remapped to
    10353 \fBmary\fR
    10354 then you will actually be connecting to \e\eserver\emary and will need to supply a password suitable for
    10355 \fBmary\fR
    10356 not
    10357 \fBfred\fR\&. The only exception to this is the username passed to the
    10358 \m[blue]\fBpassword server\fR\m[]
    10359 (if you have one)\&. The password server will receive whatever username the client supplies without modification\&.
    10360 .sp
    10361 Also note that no reverse mapping is done\&. The main effect this has is with printing\&. Users who have been mapped may have trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think they don\'t own the print job\&.
    10362 .sp
    10363 Samba versions prior to 3\&.0\&.8 would only support reading the fully qualified username (e\&.g\&.:
    10364 \FCDOMAIN\euser\F[]) from the username map when performing a kerberos login from a client\&. However, when looking up a map entry for a user authenticated by NTLM[SSP], only the login name would be used for matches\&. This resulted in inconsistent behavior sometimes even on the same server\&.
    10365 .sp
    10366 The following functionality is obeyed in version 3\&.0\&.8 and later:
    10367 .sp
    10368 When performing local authentication, the username map is applied to the login name before attempting to authenticate the connection\&.
    10369 .sp
    10370 When relying upon a external domain controller for validating authentication requests, smbd will apply the username map to the fully qualified username (i\&.e\&.
    10371 \FCDOMAIN\euser\F[]) only after the user has been successfully authenticated\&.
    10372 .sp
    10373 An example of use is:
    10374 .sp
    10375 .if n \{\
    10376 .RS 4
    10377 .\}
    10378 .fam C
    10379 .ps -1
    10380 .nf
    10381 .if t \{\
    10382 .sp -1
    10383 .\}
    10384 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10385 .sp -1
    10386 
    10387 username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users\&.map
    10388 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10389 .if t \{\
    10390 .sp 1
    10391 .\}
    10392 .fi
    10393 .fam
    10394 .ps +1
    10395 .if n \{\
    10396 .RE
    10397 .\}
    10398 .sp
    10399 Default:
    10400 \fI\fIusername map\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # no username map\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10401 .RE
    10402 
    10403 user
    10404 .\" user
    10405 .PP
    10406 .RS 4
    10407 This parameter is a synonym for
    10408 username\&.
    10409 .RE
    10410 
    10411 users
    10412 .\" users
    10413 .PP
    10414 .RS 4
    10415 This parameter is a synonym for
    10416 username\&.
    10417 .RE
    10418 
    10419 username (S)
    10420 .\" username
    10421 .PP
    10422 .RS 4
    10423 Multiple users may be specified in a comma\-delimited list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against each username in turn (left to right)\&.
    10424 .sp
    10425 The
    10426 \fIusername\fR
    10427 line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply its own username\&. This is the case for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg usernames to UNIX usernames\&. In both these cases you may also be better using the \e\eserver\eshare%user syntax instead\&.
    10428 .sp
    10429 The
    10430 \fIusername\fR
    10431 line is not a great solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate the supplied password against each of the usernames in the
    10432 \fIusername\fR
    10433 line in turn\&. This is slow and a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords\&. You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter unwisely\&.
    10434 .sp
    10435 Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security\&. This parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the supplied password\&. Users can login as whoever they please and they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a telnet session\&. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, so they cannot do anything that user cannot do\&.
    10436 .sp
    10437 To restrict a service to a particular set of users you can use the
    10438 \m[blue]\fBvalid users\fR\m[]
    10439 parameter\&.
    10440 .sp
    10441 If any of the usernames begin with a \'@\' then the name will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name\&.
    10442 .sp
    10443 If any of the usernames begin with a \'+\' then the name will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name\&.
    10444 .sp
    10445 If any of the usernames begin with a \'&\' then the name will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list of all users in the netgroup group of that name\&.
    10446 .sp
    10447 Note that searching though a groups database can take quite some time, and some clients may time out during the search\&.
    10448 .sp
    10449 See the section
    10450 NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION
    10451 for more information on how this parameter determines access to the services\&.
    10452 .sp
    10453 Default:
    10454 \fI\fIusername\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # The guest account if a guest service, else <empty string>\&.\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10455 .sp
    10456 Example:
    10457 \fI\fIusername\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCfred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10458 .RE
    10459 
    10460 usershare allow guests (G)
    10461 .\" usershare allow guests
    10462 .PP
    10463 .RS 4
    10464 This parameter controls whether user defined shares are allowed to be accessed by non\-authenticated users or not\&. It is the equivalent of allowing people who can create a share the option of setting
    10465 \fIguest ok = yes\fR
    10466 in a share definition\&. Due to its security sensitive nature, the default is set to off\&.
    10467 .sp
    10468 Default:
    10469 \fI\fIusershare allow guests\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10470 .RE
    10471 
    10472 usershare max shares (G)
    10473 .\" usershare max shares
    10474 .PP
    10475 .RS 4
    10476 This parameter specifies the number of user defined shares that are allowed to be created by users belonging to the group owning the usershare directory\&. If set to zero (the default) user defined shares are ignored\&.
    10477 .sp
    10478 Default:
    10479 \fI\fIusershare max shares\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10480 .RE
    10481 
    10482 usershare owner only (G)
    10483 .\" usershare owner only
    10484 .PP
    10485 .RS 4
    10486 This parameter controls whether the pathname exported by a user defined shares must be owned by the user creating the user defined share or not\&. If set to True (the default) then smbd checks that the directory path being shared is owned by the user who owns the usershare file defining this share and refuses to create the share if not\&. If set to False then no such check is performed and any directory path may be exported regardless of who owns it\&.
    10487 .sp
    10488 Default:
    10489 \fI\fIusershare owner only\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCTrue\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10490 .RE
    10491 
    10492 usershare path (G)
    10493 .\" usershare path
    10494 .PP
    10495 .RS 4
    10496 This parameter specifies the absolute path of the directory on the filesystem used to store the user defined share definition files\&. This directory must be owned by root, and have no access for other, and be writable only by the group owner\&. In addition the "sticky" bit must also be set, restricting rename and delete to owners of a file (in the same way the /tmp directory is usually configured)\&. Members of the group owner of this directory are the users allowed to create usershares\&. If this parameter is undefined then no user defined shares are allowed\&.
    10497 .sp
    10498 For example, a valid usershare directory might be /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares, set up as follows\&.
    10499 .sp
    10500 
    10501 .sp
    10502 .if n \{\
    10503 .RS 4
    10504 .\}
    10505 .fam C
    10506 .ps -1
    10507 .nf
    10508 .if t \{\
    10509 .sp -1
    10510 .\}
    10511 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10512 .sp -1
    10513 
    10514         ls \-ld /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares/
    10515         drwxrwx\-\-T  2 root power_users 4096 2006\-05\-05 12:27 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares/
    10516        
    10517 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10518 .if t \{\
    10519 .sp 1
    10520 .\}
    10521 .fi
    10522 .fam
    10523 .ps +1
    10524 .if n \{\
    10525 .RE
    10526 .\}
    10527 .sp
    10528 In this case, only members of the group "power_users" can create user defined shares\&.
    10529 .sp
    10530 Default:
    10531 \fI\fIusershare path\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNULL\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10532 .RE
    10533 
    10534 usershare prefix allow list (G)
    10535 .\" usershare prefix allow list
    10536 .PP
    10537 .RS 4
    10538 This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames the root of which are allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions\&. If the pathname to be exported doesn\'t start with one of the strings in this list, the user defined share will not be allowed\&. This allows the Samba administrator to restrict the directories on the system that can be exported by user defined shares\&.
    10539 .sp
    10540 If there is a "usershare prefix deny list" and also a "usershare prefix allow list" the deny list is processed first, followed by the allow list, thus leading to the most restrictive interpretation\&.
    10541 .sp
    10542 Default:
    10543 \fI\fIusershare prefix allow list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNULL\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10544 .sp
    10545 Example:
    10546 \fI\fIusershare prefix allow list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/home /data /space\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10547 .RE
    10548 
    10549 usershare prefix deny list (G)
    10550 .\" usershare prefix deny list
    10551 .PP
    10552 .RS 4
    10553 This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames the root of which are NOT allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions\&. If the pathname exported starts with one of the strings in this list the user defined share will not be allowed\&. Any pathname not starting with one of these strings will be allowed to be exported as a usershare\&. This allows the Samba administrator to restrict the directories on the system that can be exported by user defined shares\&.
    10554 .sp
    10555 If there is a "usershare prefix deny list" and also a "usershare prefix allow list" the deny list is processed first, followed by the allow list, thus leading to the most restrictive interpretation\&.
    10556 .sp
    10557 Default:
    10558 \fI\fIusershare prefix deny list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNULL\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10559 .sp
    10560 Example:
    10561 \fI\fIusershare prefix deny list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/etc /dev /private\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10562 .RE
    10563 
    10564 usershare template share (G)
    10565 .\" usershare template share
    10566 .PP
    10567 .RS 4
    10568 User defined shares only have limited possible parameters such as path, guest ok, etc\&. This parameter allows usershares to "cloned" from an existing share\&. If "usershare template share" is set to the name of an existing share, then all usershares created have their defaults set from the parameters set on this share\&.
    10569 .sp
    10570 The target share may be set to be invalid for real file sharing by setting the parameter "\-valid = False" on the template share definition\&. This causes it not to be seen as a real exported share but to be able to be used as a template for usershares\&.
    10571 .sp
    10572 Default:
    10573 \fI\fIusershare template share\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNULL\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10574 .sp
    10575 Example:
    10576 \fI\fIusershare template share\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCtemplate_share\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10577 .RE
    10578 
    10579 use sendfile (S)
    10580 .\" use sendfile
    10581 .PP
    10582 .RS 4
    10583 If this parameter is
    10584 \fByes\fR, and the
    10585 \fBsendfile()\fR
    10586 system call is supported by the underlying operating system, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that are exclusively oplocked\&. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU\'s and cause Samba to be faster\&. Samba automatically turns this off for clients that use protocol levels lower than NT LM 0\&.12 and when it detects a client is Windows 9x (using sendfile from Linux will cause these clients to fail)\&.
    10587 .sp
    10588 Default:
    10589 \fI\fIuse sendfile\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCfalse\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10590 .RE
    10591 
    10592 use spnego (G)
    10593 .\" use spnego
    10594 .PP
    10595 .RS 4
    10596 This variable controls controls whether samba will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism\&.
    10597 .sp
    10598 Unless further issues are discovered with our SPNEGO implementation, there is no reason this should ever be disabled\&.
    10599 .sp
    10600 Default:
    10601 \fI\fIuse spnego\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10602 .RE
    10603 
    10604 utmp directory (G)
    10605 .\" utmp directory
    10606 .PP
    10607 .RS 4
    10608 This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option
    10609 \FC \-\-with\-utmp\F[]\&. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server\&. By default this is not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the native system is set to use (usually
    10610 \FC/var/run/utmp\F[]
    10611 on Linux)\&.
    10612 .sp
    10613 Default:
    10614 \fI\fIutmp directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # Determined automatically\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10615 .sp
    10616 Example:
    10617 \fI\fIutmp directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/var/run/utmp\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10618 .RE
    10619 
    10620 utmp (G)
    10621 .\" utmp
    10622 .PP
    10623 .RS 4
    10624 This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option
    10625 \FC\-\-with\-utmp\F[]\&. If set to
    10626 \fByes\fR
    10627 then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a connection is made to a Samba server\&. Sites may use this to record the user connecting to a Samba share\&.
    10628 .sp
    10629 Due to the requirements of the utmp record, we are required to create a unique identifier for the incoming user\&. Enabling this option creates an n^2 algorithm to find this number\&. This may impede performance on large installations\&.
    10630 .sp
    10631 Default:
    10632 \fI\fIutmp\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10633 .RE
    10634 
    10635 valid users (S)
    10636 .\" valid users
    10637 .PP
    10638 .RS 4
    10639 This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this service\&. Names starting with \'@\', \'+\' and \'&\' are interpreted using the same rules as described in the
    10640 \fIinvalid users\fR
    10641 parameter\&.
    10642 .sp
    10643 If this is empty (the default) then any user can login\&. If a username is in both this list and the
    10644 \fIinvalid users\fR
    10645 list then access is denied for that user\&.
    10646 .sp
    10647 The current servicename is substituted for
    10648 \fI%S\fR\&. This is useful in the [homes] section\&.
    10649 .sp
    10650 Default:
    10651 \fI\fIvalid users\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # No valid users list (anyone can login) \F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10652 .sp
    10653 Example:
    10654 \fI\fIvalid users\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCgreg, @pcusers\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10655 .RE
    10656 
    10657 \-valid (S)
    10658 .\" -valid
    10659 .PP
    10660 .RS 4
    10661 This parameter indicates whether a share is valid and thus can be used\&. When this parameter is set to false, the share will be in no way visible nor accessible\&.
    10662 .sp
    10663 This option should not be used by regular users but might be of help to developers\&. Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted\&.
    10664 .sp
    10665 Default:
    10666 \fI\fI\-valid\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10667 .RE
    10668 
    10669 veto files (S)
    10670 .\" veto files
    10671 .PP
    10672 .RS 4
    10673 This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible\&. Each entry in the list must be separated by a \'/\', which allows spaces to be included in the entry\&. \'*\' and \'?\' can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards\&.
    10674 .sp
    10675 Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and must
    10676 \fInot\fR
    10677 include the unix directory separator \'/\'\&.
    10678 .sp
    10679 Note that the
    10680 \m[blue]\fBcase sensitive\fR\m[]
    10681 option is applicable in vetoing files\&.
    10682 .sp
    10683 One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important to be aware of is Samba\'s behaviour when trying to delete a directory\&. If a directory that is to be deleted contains nothing but veto files this deletion will
    10684 \fIfail\fR
    10685 unless you also set the
    10686 \m[blue]\fBdelete veto files\fR\m[]
    10687 parameter to
    10688 \fIyes\fR\&.
    10689 .sp
    10690 Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as they are scanned\&.
    10691 .sp
    10692 Examples of use include:
    10693 .sp
    10694 .if n \{\
    10695 .RS 4
    10696 .\}
    10697 .fam C
    10698 .ps -1
    10699 .nf
    10700 .if t \{\
    10701 .sp -1
    10702 .\}
    10703 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10704 .sp -1
    10705 
    10706 ; Veto any files containing the word Security,
    10707 ; any ending in \&.tmp, and any directory containing the
    10708 ; word root\&.
    10709 veto files = /*Security*/*\&.tmp/*root*/
    10710 
    10711 ; Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server
    10712 ; creates\&.
    10713 veto files = /\&.AppleDouble/\&.bin/\&.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/
    10714 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10715 .if t \{\
    10716 .sp 1
    10717 .\}
    10718 .fi
    10719 .fam
    10720 .ps +1
    10721 .if n \{\
    10722 .RE
    10723 .\}
    10724 .sp
    10725 Default:
    10726 \fI\fIveto files\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCNo files or directories are vetoed\&.\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10727 .RE
    10728 
    10729 veto oplock files (S)
    10730 .\" veto oplock files
    10731 .PP
    10732 .RS 4
    10733 This parameter is only valid when the
    10734 \m[blue]\fBoplocks\fR\m[]
    10735 parameter is turned on for a share\&. It allows the Samba administrator to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the
    10736 \m[blue]\fBveto files\fR\m[]
    10737 parameter\&.
    10738 .sp
    10739 You might want to do this on files that you know will be heavily contended for by clients\&. A good example of this is in the NetBench SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy client contention for files ending in
    10740 \FC\&.SEM\F[]\&. To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these files you would use the line (either in the [global] section or in the section for the particular NetBench share\&.
    10741 .sp
    10742 An example of use is:
    10743 .sp
    10744 .if n \{\
    10745 .RS 4
    10746 .\}
    10747 .fam C
    10748 .ps -1
    10749 .nf
    10750 .if t \{\
    10751 .sp -1
    10752 .\}
    10753 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10754 .sp -1
    10755 
    10756 veto oplock files = /\&.*SEM/
    10757 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    10758 .if t \{\
    10759 .sp 1
    10760 .\}
    10761 .fi
    10762 .fam
    10763 .ps +1
    10764 .if n \{\
    10765 .RE
    10766 .\}
    10767 .sp
    10768 Default:
    10769 \fI\fIveto oplock files\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # No files are vetoed for oplock grants\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10770 .RE
    10771 
    10772 vfs object
    10773 .\" vfs object
    10774 .PP
    10775 .RS 4
    10776 This parameter is a synonym for
    10777 vfs objects\&.
    10778 .RE
    10779 
    10780 vfs objects (S)
    10781 .\" vfs objects
    10782 .PP
    10783 .RS 4
    10784 This parameter specifies the backend names which are used for Samba VFS I/O operations\&. By default, normal disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded with one or more VFS objects\&.
    10785 .sp
    10786 Default:
    10787 \fI\fIvfs objects\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10788 .sp
    10789 Example:
    10790 \fI\fIvfs objects\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCextd_audit recycle\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10791 .RE
    10792 
    10793 volume (S)
    10794 .\" volume
    10795 .PP
    10796 .RS 4
    10797 This allows you to override the volume label returned for a share\&. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a particular volume label\&.
    10798 .sp
    10799 Default:
    10800 \fI\fIvolume\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC # the name of the share\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10801 .RE
    10802 
    10803 wide links (S)
    10804 .\" wide links
    10805 .PP
    10806 .RS 4
    10807 This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server\&. Links that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported\&.
    10808 .sp
    10809 Note: Turning this parameter on when UNIX extensions are enabled will allow UNIX clients to create symbolic links on the share that can point to files or directories outside restricted path exported by the share definition\&. This can cause access to areas outside of the share\&. Due to this problem, this parameter will be automatically disabled (with a message in the log file) if the
    10810 \m[blue]\fBunix extensions\fR\m[]
    10811 option is on\&.
    10812 .sp
    10813 Default:
    10814 \fI\fIwide links\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10815 .RE
    10816 
    10817 winbind cache time (G)
    10818 .\" winbind cache time
    10819 .PP
    10820 .RS 4
    10821 This parameter specifies the number of seconds the
    10822 \fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    10823 daemon will cache user and group information before querying a Windows NT server again\&.
    10824 .sp
    10825 This does not apply to authentication requests, these are always evaluated in real time unless the
    10826 \m[blue]\fBwinbind offline logon\fR\m[]
    10827 option has been enabled\&.
    10828 .sp
    10829 Default:
    10830 \fI\fIwinbind cache time\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC300\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10831 .RE
    10832 
    10833 winbind enum groups (G)
    10834 .\" winbind enum groups
    10835 .PP
    10836 .RS 4
    10837 On large installations using
    10838 \fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    10839 it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of groups through the
    10840 \FCsetgrent()\F[],
    10841 \FCgetgrent()\F[]
    10842 and
    10843 \FCendgrent()\F[]
    10844 group of system calls\&. If the
    10845 \fIwinbind enum groups\fR
    10846 parameter is
    10847 \fBno\fR, calls to the
    10848 \FCgetgrent()\F[]
    10849 system call will not return any data\&.
    10850 .if n \{\
    10851 .sp
    10852 .\}
    10853 .RS 4
    10854 .BM yellow
    10855 .it 1 an-trap
    10856 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    10857 .nr an-break-flag 1
    10858 .br
    10859 .ps +1
    10860 \fBWarning\fR
    10861 .ps -1
    10862 .br
    10863 Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly\&.
    10864 .sp .5v
    10865 .EM yellow
    10866 .RE
    10867 Default:
    10868 \fI\fIwinbind enum groups\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10869 .RE
    10870 
    10871 winbind enum users (G)
    10872 .\" winbind enum users
    10873 .PP
    10874 .RS 4
    10875 On large installations using
    10876 \fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    10877 it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the
    10878 \FCsetpwent()\F[],
    10879 \FCgetpwent()\F[]
    10880 and
    10881 \FCendpwent()\F[]
    10882 group of system calls\&. If the
    10883 \fIwinbind enum users\fR
    10884 parameter is
    10885 \fBno\fR, calls to the
    10886 \FCgetpwent\F[]
    10887 system call will not return any data\&.
    10888 .if n \{\
    10889 .sp
    10890 .\}
    10891 .RS 4
    10892 .BM yellow
    10893 .it 1 an-trap
    10894 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    10895 .nr an-break-flag 1
    10896 .br
    10897 .ps +1
    10898 \fBWarning\fR
    10899 .ps -1
    10900 .br
    10901 Turning off user enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly\&. For example, the finger program relies on having access to the full user list when searching for matching usernames\&.
    10902 .sp .5v
    10903 .EM yellow
    10904 .RE
    10905 Default:
    10906 \fI\fIwinbind enum users\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10907 .RE
    10908 
    10909 winbind expand groups (G)
    10910 .\" winbind expand groups
    10911 .PP
    10912 .RS 4
    10913 This option controls the maximum depth that winbindd will traverse when flattening nested group memberships of Windows domain groups\&. This is different from the
    10914 \m[blue]\fBwinbind nested groups\fR\m[]
    10915 option which implements the Windows NT4 model of local group nesting\&. The "winbind expand groups" parameter specifically applies to the membership of domain groups\&.
    10916 .sp
    10917 Be aware that a high value for this parameter can result in system slowdown as the main parent winbindd daemon must perform the group unrolling and will be unable to answer incoming NSS or authentication requests during this time\&.
    10918 .sp
    10919 Default:
    10920 \fI\fIwinbind expand groups\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC1\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10921 .RE
    10922 
    10923 winbind nested groups (G)
    10924 .\" winbind nested groups
    10925 .PP
    10926 .RS 4
    10927 If set to yes, this parameter activates the support for nested groups\&. Nested groups are also called local groups or aliases\&. They work like their counterparts in Windows: Nested groups are defined locally on any machine (they are shared between DC\'s through their SAM) and can contain users and global groups from any trusted SAM\&. To be able to use nested groups, you need to run nss_winbind\&.
    10928 .sp
    10929 Default:
    10930 \fI\fIwinbind nested groups\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10931 .RE
    10932 
    10933 winbind normalize names (G)
    10934 .\" winbind normalize names
    10935 .PP
    10936 .RS 4
    10937 This parameter controls whether winbindd will replace whitespace in user and group names with an underscore (_) character\&. For example, whether the name "Space Kadet" should be replaced with the string "space_kadet"\&. Frequently Unix shell scripts will have difficulty with usernames contains whitespace due to the default field separator in the shell\&. If your domain possesses names containing the underscore character, this option may cause problems unless the name aliasing feature is supported by your nss_info plugin\&.
    10938 .sp
    10939 This feature also enables the name aliasing API which can be used to make domain user and group names to a non\-qualified version\&. Please refer to the manpage for the configured idmap and nss_info plugin for the specifics on how to configure name aliasing for a specific configuration\&. Name aliasing takes precedence (and is mutually exclusive) over the whitespace replacement mechanism discussed previsouly\&.
    10940 .sp
    10941 Default:
    10942 \fI\fIwinbind normalize names\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10943 .sp
    10944 Example:
    10945 \fI\fIwinbind normalize names\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10946 .RE
    10947 
    10948 winbind nss info (G)
    10949 .\" winbind nss info
    10950 .PP
    10951 .RS 4
    10952 This parameter is designed to control how Winbind retrieves Name Service Information to construct a user\'s home directory and login shell\&. Currently the following settings are available:
    10953 .sp
    10954 .RS 4
    10955 .ie n \{\
    10956 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    10957 .\}
    10958 .el \{\
    10959 .sp -1
    10960 .IP \(bu 2.3
    10961 .\}
    10962 \fItemplate\fR
    10963 \- The default, using the parameters of
    10964 \fItemplate shell\fR
    10965 and
    10966 \fItemplate homedir\fR)
    10967 .RE
    10968 .sp
    10969 .RS 4
    10970 .ie n \{\
    10971 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    10972 .\}
    10973 .el \{\
    10974 .sp -1
    10975 .IP \(bu 2.3
    10976 .\}
    10977 \fI<sfu | rfc2307 >\fR
    10978 \- When Samba is running in security = ads and your Active Directory Domain Controller does support the Microsoft "Services for Unix" (SFU) LDAP schema, winbind can retrieve the login shell and the home directory attributes directly from your Directory Server\&. Note that retrieving UID and GID from your ADS\-Server requires to use
    10979 \fIidmap config DOMAIN:backend\fR
    10980 = ad as well\&.
    10981 .sp
    10982 .RE
    10983 .sp
    10984 Default:
    10985 \fI\fIwinbind nss info\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCtemplate\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10986 .sp
    10987 Example:
    10988 \fI\fIwinbind nss info\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCsfu\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    10989 .RE
    10990 
    10991 winbind offline logon (G)
    10992 .\" winbind offline logon
    10993 .PP
    10994 .RS 4
    10995 This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should allow to login with the
    10996 \fIpam_winbind\fR
    10997 module using Cached Credentials\&. If enabled, winbindd will store user credentials from successful logins encrypted in a local cache\&.
    10998 .sp
    10999 Default:
    11000 \fI\fIwinbind offline logon\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCfalse\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11001 .sp
    11002 Example:
    11003 \fI\fIwinbind offline logon\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCtrue\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11004 .RE
    11005 
    11006 winbind reconnect delay (G)
    11007 .\" winbind reconnect delay
    11008 .PP
    11009 .RS 4
    11010 This parameter specifies the number of seconds the
    11011 \fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    11012 daemon will wait between attempts to contact a Domain controller for a domain that is determined to be down or not contactable\&.
    11013 .sp
    11014 Default:
    11015 \fI\fIwinbind reconnect delay\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC30\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11016 .RE
    11017 
    11018 winbind refresh tickets (G)
    11019 .\" winbind refresh tickets
    11020 .PP
    11021 .RS 4
    11022 This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should refresh Kerberos Tickets retrieved using the
    11023 \fIpam_winbind\fR
    11024 module\&.
    11025 .sp
    11026 Default:
    11027 \fI\fIwinbind refresh tickets\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCfalse\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11028 .sp
    11029 Example:
    11030 \fI\fIwinbind refresh tickets\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCtrue\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11031 .RE
    11032 
    11033 winbind rpc only (G)
    11034 .\" winbind rpc only
    11035 .PP
    11036 .RS 4
    11037 Setting this parameter to
    11038 \FCyes\F[]
    11039 forces winbindd to use RPC instead of LDAP to retrieve information from Domain Controllers\&.
    11040 .sp
    11041 Default:
    11042 \fI\fIwinbind rpc only\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11043 .RE
    11044 
    11045 winbind separator (G)
    11046 .\" winbind separator
    11047 .PP
    11048 .RS 4
    11049 This parameter allows an admin to define the character used when listing a username of the form of
    11050 \fIDOMAIN \fR\e\fIuser\fR\&. This parameter is only applicable when using the
    11051 \FCpam_winbind\&.so\F[]
    11052 and
    11053 \FCnss_winbind\&.so\F[]
    11054 modules for UNIX services\&.
    11055 .sp
    11056 Please note that setting this parameter to + causes problems with group membership at least on glibc systems, as the character + is used as a special character for NIS in /etc/group\&.
    11057 .sp
    11058 Default:
    11059 \fI\fIwinbind separator\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\'\e\'\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11060 .sp
    11061 Example:
    11062 \fI\fIwinbind separator\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC+\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11063 .RE
    11064 
    11065 winbind trusted domains only (G)
    11066 .\" winbind trusted domains only
    11067 .PP
    11068 .RS 4
    11069 This parameter is designed to allow Samba servers that are members of a Samba controlled domain to use UNIX accounts distributed via NIS, rsync, or LDAP as the uid\'s for winbindd users in the hosts primary domain\&. Therefore, the user
    11070 \FCDOMAIN\euser1\F[]
    11071 would be mapped to the account user1 in /etc/passwd instead of allocating a new uid for him or her\&.
    11072 .sp
    11073 This parameter is now deprecated in favor of the newer idmap_nss backend\&. Refer to the
    11074 \fBidmap_nss\fR(8)
    11075 man page for more information\&.
    11076 .sp
    11077 Default:
    11078 \fI\fIwinbind trusted domains only\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11079 .RE
    11080 
    11081 winbind use default domain (G)
    11082 .\" winbind use default domain
    11083 .PP
    11084 .RS 4
    11085 This parameter specifies whether the
    11086 \fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    11087 daemon should operate on users without domain component in their username\&. Users without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd server\'s own domain\&. While this does not benifit Windows users, it makes SSH, FTP and e\-mail function in a way much closer to the way they would in a native unix system\&.
    11088 .sp
    11089 Default:
    11090 \fI\fIwinbind use default domain\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11091 .sp
    11092 Example:
    11093 \fI\fIwinbind use default domain\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11094 .RE
    11095 
    11096 wins hook (G)
    11097 .\" wins hook
    11098 .PP
    11099 .RS 4
    11100 When Samba is running as a WINS server this allows you to call an external program for all changes to the WINS database\&. The primary use for this option is to allow the dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as dynamic DNS\&.
    11101 .sp
    11102 The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script or executable that will be called as follows:
    11103 .sp
    11104 \FCwins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list\F[]
    11105 .sp
    11106 .RS 4
    11107 .ie n \{\
    11108 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    11109 .\}
    11110 .el \{\
    11111 .sp -1
    11112 .IP \(bu 2.3
    11113 .\}
    11114 The first argument is the operation and is one of "add", "delete", or "refresh"\&. In most cases the operation can be ignored as the rest of the parameters provide sufficient information\&. Note that "refresh" may sometimes be called when the name has not previously been added, in that case it should be treated as an add\&.
    11115 .RE
    11116 .sp
    11117 .RS 4
    11118 .ie n \{\
    11119 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    11120 .\}
    11121 .el \{\
    11122 .sp -1
    11123 .IP \(bu 2.3
    11124 .\}
    11125 The second argument is the NetBIOS name\&. If the name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called\&. Legal names contain only letters, digits, hyphens, underscores and periods\&.
    11126 .RE
    11127 .sp
    11128 .RS 4
    11129 .ie n \{\
    11130 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    11131 .\}
    11132 .el \{\
    11133 .sp -1
    11134 .IP \(bu 2.3
    11135 .\}
    11136 The third argument is the NetBIOS name type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number\&.
    11137 .RE
    11138 .sp
    11139 .RS 4
    11140 .ie n \{\
    11141 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    11142 .\}
    11143 .el \{\
    11144 .sp -1
    11145 .IP \(bu 2.3
    11146 .\}
    11147 The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) for the name in seconds\&.
    11148 .RE
    11149 .sp
    11150 .RS 4
    11151 .ie n \{\
    11152 \h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c
    11153 .\}
    11154 .el \{\
    11155 .sp -1
    11156 .IP \(bu 2.3
    11157 .\}
    11158 The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP addresses currently registered for that name\&. If this list is empty then the name should be deleted\&.
    11159 .sp
    11160 .RE
    11161 An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update program
    11162 \FCnsupdate\F[]
    11163 is provided in the examples directory of the Samba source code\&.
    11164 .sp
    11165 \fINo default\fR
    11166 .RE
    11167 
    11168 wins proxy (G)
    11169 .\" wins proxy
    11170 .PP
    11171 .RS 4
    11172 This is a boolean that controls if
    11173 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    11174 will respond to broadcast name queries on behalf of other hosts\&. You may need to set this to
    11175 \fByes\fR
    11176 for some older clients\&.
    11177 .sp
    11178 Default:
    11179 \fI\fIwins proxy\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11180 .RE
    11181 
    11182 wins server (G)
    11183 .\" wins server
    11184 .PP
    11185 .RS 4
    11186 This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP address for preference) of the WINS server that
    11187 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    11188 should register with\&. If you have a WINS server on your network then you should set this to the WINS server\'s IP\&.
    11189 .sp
    11190 You should point this at your WINS server if you have a multi\-subnetted network\&.
    11191 .sp
    11192 If you want to work in multiple namespaces, you can give every wins server a \'tag\'\&. For each tag, only one (working) server will be queried for a name\&. The tag should be separated from the ip address by a colon\&.
    11193 .if n \{\
    11194 .sp
    11195 .\}
    11196 .RS 4
    11197 .BM yellow
    11198 .it 1 an-trap
    11199 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    11200 .nr an-break-flag 1
    11201 .br
    11202 .ps +1
    11203 \fBNote\fR
    11204 .ps -1
    11205 .br
    11206 You need to set up Samba to point to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross\-subnet browsing to work correctly\&.
    11207 .sp .5v
    11208 .EM yellow
    11209 .RE
    11210 See the chapter in the Samba3\-HOWTO on Network Browsing\&.
    11211 .sp
    11212 Default:
    11213 \fI\fIwins server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11214 .sp
    11215 Example:
    11216 \fI\fIwins server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCmary:192\&.9\&.200\&.1 fred:192\&.168\&.3\&.199 mary:192\&.168\&.2\&.61 # For this example when querying a certain name, 192\&.19\&.200\&.1 will be asked first and if that doesn\'t respond 192\&.168\&.2\&.61\&. If either of those doesn\'t know the name 192\&.168\&.3\&.199 will be queried\&.\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11217 .sp
    11218 Example:
    11219 \fI\fIwins server\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC192\&.9\&.200\&.1 192\&.168\&.2\&.61\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11220 .RE
    11221 
    11222 wins support (G)
    11223 .\" wins support
    11224 .PP
    11225 .RS 4
    11226 This boolean controls if the
    11227 \fBnmbd\fR(8)
    11228 process in Samba will act as a WINS server\&. You should not set this to
    11229 \fByes\fR
    11230 unless you have a multi\-subnetted network and you wish a particular
    11231 \FCnmbd\F[]
    11232 to be your WINS server\&. Note that you should
    11233 \fINEVER\fR
    11234 set this to
    11235 \fByes\fR
    11236 on more than one machine in your network\&.
    11237 .sp
    11238 Default:
    11239 \fI\fIwins support\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11240 .RE
    11241 
    11242 workgroup (G)
    11243 .\" workgroup
    11244 .PP
    11245 .RS 4
    11246 This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when queried by clients\&. Note that this parameter also controls the Domain name used with the
    11247 \m[blue]\fBsecurity = domain\fR\m[]
    11248 setting\&.
    11249 .sp
    11250 Default:
    11251 \fI\fIworkgroup\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCWORKGROUP\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11252 .sp
    11253 Example:
    11254 \fI\fIworkgroup\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCMYGROUP\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11255 .RE
    11256 
    11257 writable
    11258 .\" writable
    11259 .PP
    11260 .RS 4
    11261 This parameter is a synonym for
    11262 writeable\&.
    11263 .RE
    11264 
    11265 writeable (S)
    11266 .\" writeable
    11267 .PP
    11268 .RS 4
    11269 Inverted synonym for
    11270 \m[blue]\fBread only\fR\m[]\&.
    11271 .sp
    11272 Default:
    11273 \fI\fIwriteable\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCno\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11274 .RE
    11275 
    11276 write cache size (S)
    11277 .\" write cache size
    11278 .PP
    11279 .RS 4
    11280 If this integer parameter is set to non\-zero value, Samba will create an in\-memory cache for each oplocked file (it does
    11281 \fInot\fR
    11282 do this for non\-oplocked files)\&. All writes that the client does not request to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible\&. The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client\&. Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is stored within it\&.
    11283 .sp
    11284 This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more efficient write size for RAID disks (i\&.e\&. writes may be tuned to be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free memory for userspace programs\&.
    11285 .sp
    11286 The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache (per oplocked file) in bytes\&.
    11287 .sp
    11288 Default:
    11289 \fI\fIwrite cache size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC0\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11290 .sp
    11291 Example:
    11292 \fI\fIwrite cache size\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC262144 # for a 256k cache size per file\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11293 .RE
    11294 
    11295 write list (S)
    11296 .\" write list
    11297 .PP
    11298 .RS 4
    11299 This is a list of users that are given read\-write access to a service\&. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be given write access, no matter what the
    11300 \m[blue]\fBread only\fR\m[]
    11301 option is set to\&. The list can include group names using the @group syntax\&.
    11302 .sp
    11303 Note that if a user is in both the read list and the write list then they will be given write access\&.
    11304 .sp
    11305 By design, this parameter will not work with the
    11306 \m[blue]\fBsecurity = share\fR\m[]
    11307 in Samba 3\&.0\&.
    11308 .sp
    11309 Default:
    11310 \fI\fIwrite list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11311 .sp
    11312 Example:
    11313 \fI\fIwrite list\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCadmin, root, @staff\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11314 .RE
    11315 
    11316 write raw (G)
    11317 .\" write raw
    11318 .PP
    11319 .RS 4
    11320 This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw write SMB\'s when transferring data from clients\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&.
    11321 .sp
    11322 Default:
    11323 \fI\fIwrite raw\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FCyes\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11324 .RE
    11325 
    11326 wtmp directory (G)
    11327 .\" wtmp directory
    11328 .PP
    11329 .RS 4
    11330 This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option
    11331 \FC \-\-with\-utmp\F[]\&. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the wtmp or wtmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server\&. The difference with the utmp directory is the fact that user info is kept after a user has logged out\&.
    11332 .sp
    11333 By default this is not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the native system is set to use (usually
    11334 \FC/var/run/wtmp\F[]
    11335 on Linux)\&.
    11336 .sp
    11337 Default:
    11338 \fI\fIwtmp directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11339 .sp
    11340 Example:
    11341 \fI\fIwtmp directory\fR\fR\fI = \fR\fI\FC/var/log/wtmp\F[]\fR\fI \fR
    11342 .RE
    11343 .SH "WARNINGS"
     745<xi:include></xi:include>.SH "WARNINGS"
    11344746.PP
    11345747Although the configuration file permits service names to contain spaces, your client software may not\&. Spaces will be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn\'t be a problem \- but be aware of the possibility\&.
    … …  
    11350752.PP
    11351753Use of the
    11352 \FC[homes]\F[]
     754[homes]
    11353755and
    11354 \FC[printers]\F[]
     756[printers]
    11355757special sections make life for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default attributes can be tricky\&. Take extreme care when designing these sections\&. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool directories are correct\&.
    11356758.SH "VERSION"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbcacls.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbcacls
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBCACLS" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBCACLS" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbcacls \- Set or get ACLs on an NT file or directory names
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbcacls\F[] {//server/share} {filename} [\-D\ acls] [\-M\ acls] [\-a\ acls] [\-S\ acls] [\-C\ name] [\-G\ name] [\-\-numeric] [\-t] [\-U\ username] [\-h] [\-d]
    175 .fam
     25smbcacls {//server/share} {filename} [\-D\ acls] [\-M\ acls] [\-a\ acls] [\-S\ acls] [\-C\ name] [\-G\ name] [\-\-numeric] [\-t] [\-U\ username] [\-h] [\-d]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCsmbcacls\F[]
     33smbcacls
    18434program manipulates NT Access Control Lists (ACLs) on SMB file shares\&.
    18535.SH "OPTIONS"
    18636.PP
    18737The following options are available to the
    188 \FCsmbcacls\F[]
     38smbcacls
    18939program\&. The format of ACLs is described in the section ACL FORMAT
    19040.PP
    … …  
    254104\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    255105parameter in the
    256 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     106smb\&.conf
    257107file\&.
    258108.RE
    … …  
    266116.RS 4
    267117The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    268 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     118smb\&.conf
    269119for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    270120.RE
    … …  
    303153.RS 4
    304154.\}
    305 .fam C
    306 .ps -1
    307155.nf
    308 .if t \{\
    309 .sp -1
    310 .\}
    311 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    312 .sp -1
    313 
    314156username = <value>
    315157password = <value>
    316158domain   = <value>
    317 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    318 .if t \{\
    319 .sp 1
    320 .\}
    321159.fi
    322 .fam
    323 .ps +1
    324160.if n \{\
    325161.RE
    … …  
    346182.sp
    347183Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the
    348 \FCps\F[]
     184ps
    349185command\&. To be safe always allow
    350 \FCrpcclient\F[]
     186rpcclient
    351187to prompt for a password and type it in directly\&.
    352188.RE
    … …  
    358194.RS 4
    359195.\}
    360 .fam C
    361 .ps -1
    362196.nf
    363 .BB lightgray
    364197 
    365198REVISION:<revision number>
    … …  
    367200GROUP:<sid or name>
    368201ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask>
    369 .EB lightgray
    370202.fi
    371 .fam
    372 .ps +1
    373203.if n \{\
    374204.RE
    … …  
    544374.PP
    545375The
    546 \FCsmbcacls\F[]
     376smbcacls
    547377program sets the exit status depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed\&. The exit status may be one of the following values\&.
    548378.PP
    549379If the operation succeeded, smbcacls returns and exit status of 0\&. If
    550 \FCsmbcacls\F[]
     380smbcacls
    551381couldn\'t connect to the specified server, or there was an error getting or setting the ACLs, an exit status of 1 is returned\&. If there was an error parsing any command line arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned\&.
    552382.SH "VERSION"
    … …  
    557387The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
    558388.PP
    559 \FCsmbcacls\F[]
     389smbcacls
    560390was written by Andrew Tridgell and Tim Potter\&.
    561391.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbclient.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbclient
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBCLIENT" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBCLIENT" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbclient \- ftp\-like client to access SMB/CIFS resources on servers
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbclient\F[] [\-b\ <buffer\ size>] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-e] [\-L\ <netbios\ name>] [\-U\ username] [\-I\ destinationIP] [\-M\ <netbios\ name>] [\-m\ maxprotocol] [\-A\ authfile] [\-N] [\-C] [\-g] [\-i\ scope] [\-O\ <socket\ options>] [\-p\ port] [\-R\ <name\ resolve\ order>] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-k] [\-P] [\-c\ <command>]
    175 .fam
    176 .fam C
     25smbclient [\-b\ <buffer\ size>] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-e] [\-L\ <netbios\ name>] [\-U\ username] [\-I\ destinationIP] [\-M\ <netbios\ name>] [\-m\ maxprotocol] [\-A\ authfile] [\-N] [\-C] [\-g] [\-i\ scope] [\-O\ <socket\ options>] [\-p\ port] [\-R\ <name\ resolve\ order>] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-k] [\-P] [\-c\ <command>]
    17726.HP \w'\ 'u
    178 \FCsmbclient\F[] {servicename} [password] [\-b\ <buffer\ size>] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-e] [\-D\ Directory] [\-U\ username] [\-W\ workgroup] [\-M\ <netbios\ name>] [\-m\ maxprotocol] [\-A\ authfile] [\-N] [\-C] [\-g] [\-l\ log\-basename] [\-I\ destinationIP] [\-E] [\-c\ <command\ string>] [\-i\ scope] [\-O\ <socket\ options>] [\-p\ port] [\-R\ <name\ resolve\ order>] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan] [\-k]
    179 .fam
     27smbclient {servicename} [password] [\-b\ <buffer\ size>] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-e] [\-D\ Directory] [\-U\ username] [\-W\ workgroup] [\-M\ <netbios\ name>] [\-m\ maxprotocol] [\-A\ authfile] [\-N] [\-C] [\-g] [\-l\ log\-basename] [\-I\ destinationIP] [\-E] [\-c\ <command\ string>] [\-i\ scope] [\-O\ <socket\ options>] [\-p\ port] [\-R\ <name\ resolve\ order>] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan] [\-k]
    18028.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    18129.PP
    … …  
    18432suite\&.
    18533.PP
    186 \FCsmbclient\F[]
     34smbclient
    18735is a client that can \'talk\' to an SMB/CIFS server\&. It offers an interface similar to that of the ftp program (see
    18836\fBftp\fR(1))\&. Operations include things like getting files from the server to the local machine, putting files from the local machine to the server, retrieving directory information from the server and so on\&.
    … …  
    19240.RS 4
    19341servicename is the name of the service you want to use on the server\&. A service name takes the form
    194 \FC//server/service\F[]
     42//server/service
    19543where
    19644\fIserver \fR
    … …  
    19846\fIservice\fR
    19947is the name of the service offered\&. Thus to connect to the service "printer" on the SMB/CIFS server "smbserver", you would use the servicename
    200 \FC//smbserver/printer \F[]
     48//smbserver/printer
    20149.sp
    20250Note that the server name required is NOT necessarily the IP (DNS) host name of the server ! The name required is a NetBIOS server name, which may or may not be the same as the IP hostname of the machine running the server\&.
    … …  
    20553\fI\-R\fR
    20654parameter to
    207 \FCsmbclient\F[]
     55smbclient
    20856or using the name resolve order parameter in the
    20957\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    … …  
    256104.\}
    257105\fBhost\fR: Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system
    258 \FC/etc/hosts \F[], NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the
    259 \FC/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\F[]
     106/etc/hosts, NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the
     107/etc/nsswitch\&.conf
    260108file)\&. Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise it is ignored\&.
    261109.RE
    … …  
    307155.sp
    308156One useful trick is to pipe the message through
    309 \FCsmbclient\F[]\&. For example: smbclient \-M FRED < mymessage\&.txt will send the message in the file
    310 \FCmymessage\&.txt\F[]
     157smbclient\&. For example: smbclient \-M FRED < mymessage\&.txt will send the message in the file
     158mymessage\&.txt
    311159to the machine FRED\&.
    312160.sp
    … …  
    375223.RS 4
    376224This option allows you to look at what services are available on a server\&. You use it as
    377 \FCsmbclient \-L host\F[]
     225smbclient \-L host
    378226and a list should appear\&. The
    379227\fI\-I \fR
    … …  
    403251\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    404252parameter in the
    405 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     253smb\&.conf
    406254file\&.
    407255.RE
    … …  
    415263.RS 4
    416264The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    417 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     265smb\&.conf
    418266for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    419267.RE
    … …  
    452300.RS 4
    453301.\}
    454 .fam C
    455 .ps -1
    456302.nf
    457 .if t \{\
    458 .sp -1
    459 .\}
    460 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    461 .sp -1
    462 
    463303username = <value>
    464304password = <value>
    465305domain   = <value>
    466 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    467 .if t \{\
    468 .sp 1
    469 .\}
    470306.fi
    471 .fam
    472 .ps +1
    473307.if n \{\
    474308.RE
    … …  
    495329.sp
    496330Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the
    497 \FCps\F[]
     331ps
    498332command\&. To be safe always allow
    499 \FCrpcclient\F[]
     333rpcclient
    500334to prompt for a password and type it in directly\&.
    501335.RE
    … …  
    506340\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    507341parameter in the
    508 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     342smb\&.conf
    509343file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in
    510 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]\&.
     344smb\&.conf\&.
    511345.RE
    512346.PP
    … …  
    514348.RS 4
    515349This specifies a NetBIOS scope that
    516 \FCnmblookup\F[]
     350nmblookup
    517351will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names\&. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001\&.txt and rfc1002\&.txt\&. NetBIOS scopes are
    518352\fIvery\fR
    … …  
    528362.RS 4
    529363TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the
    530 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     364smb\&.conf
    531365manual page for the list of valid options\&.
    532366.RE
    … …  
    535369.RS 4
    536370smbclient may be used to create
    537 \FCtar(1) \F[]
     371tar(1)
    538372compatible backups of all the files on an SMB/CIFS share\&. The secondary tar flags that can be given to this option are :
    539373.sp
    … …  
    692526\fITar Long File Names\fR
    693527.sp
    694 \FCsmbclient\F[]\'s tar option now supports long file names both on backup and restore\&. However, the full path name of the file must be less than 1024 bytes\&. Also, when a tar archive is created,
    695 \FCsmbclient\F[]\'s tar option places all files in the archive with relative names, not absolute names\&.
     528smbclient\'s tar option now supports long file names both on backup and restore\&. However, the full path name of the file must be less than 1024 bytes\&. Also, when a tar archive is created,
     529smbclient\'s tar option places all files in the archive with relative names, not absolute names\&.
    696530.sp
    697531\fITar Filenames\fR
    … …  
    702536.sp
    703537Restore from tar file
    704 \FCbackup\&.tar\F[]
     538backup\&.tar
    705539into myshare on mypc (no password on share)\&.
    706540.sp
    707 \FCsmbclient //mypc/yshare "" \-N \-Tx backup\&.tar \F[]
     541smbclient //mypc/yshare "" \-N \-Tx backup\&.tar
    708542.sp
    709543Restore everything except
    710 \FCusers/docs\F[]
    711 .sp
    712 \FCsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" \-N \-TXx backup\&.tar users/docs\F[]
     544users/docs
     545.sp
     546smbclient //mypc/myshare "" \-N \-TXx backup\&.tar users/docs
    713547.sp
    714548Create a tar file of the files beneath
    715 \FC users/docs\F[]\&.
    716 .sp
    717 \FCsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" \-N \-Tc backup\&.tar users/docs \F[]
     549users/docs\&.
     550.sp
     551smbclient //mypc/myshare "" \-N \-Tc backup\&.tar users/docs
    718552.sp
    719553Create the same tar file as above, but now use a DOS path name\&.
    720554.sp
    721 \FCsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" \-N \-tc backup\&.tar users\eedocs \F[]
     555smbclient //mypc/myshare "" \-N \-tc backup\&.tar users\eedocs
    722556.sp
    723557Create a tar file of the files listed in the file
    724 \FCtarlist\F[]\&.
    725 .sp
    726 \FCsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" \-N \-TcF backup\&.tar tarlist\F[]
     558tarlist\&.
     559.sp
     560smbclient //mypc/myshare "" \-N \-TcF backup\&.tar tarlist
    727561.sp
    728562Create a tar file of all the files and directories in the share\&.
    729563.sp
    730 \FCsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" \-N \-Tc backup\&.tar * \F[]
     564smbclient //mypc/myshare "" \-N \-Tc backup\&.tar *
    731565.RE
    732566.PP
    … …  
    744578.sp
    745579This is particularly useful in scripts and for printing stdin to the server, e\&.g\&.
    746 \FC\-c \'print \-\'\F[]\&.
     580\-c \'print \-\'\&.
    747581.RE
    748582.SH "OPERATIONS"
    … …  
    750584Once the client is running, the user is presented with a prompt :
    751585.PP
    752 \FCsmb:\e> \F[]
     586smb:\e>
    753587.PP
    754588The backslash ("\e\e") indicates the current working directory on the server, and will change if the current working directory is changed\&.
    … …  
    862696.RS 4
    863697Copy the file called
    864 \FCremote file name\F[]
     698remote file name
    865699from the server to the machine running the client\&. If specified, name the local copy
    866 \FClocal file name\F[]\&. Note that all transfers in
    867 \FCsmbclient\F[]
     700local file name\&. Note that all transfers in
     701smbclient
    868702are binary\&. See also the lowercase command\&.
    869703.RE
    … …  
    960794\fImask\fR
    961795is interpreted differently during recursive operation and non\-recursive operation \- refer to the recurse and mask commands for more information\&. Note that all transfers in
    962 \FCsmbclient\F[]
     796smbclient
    963797are binary\&. See also the lowercase command\&.
    964798.RE
    … …  
    983817\fImask\fR
    984818is interpreted differently during recursive operation and non\-recursive operation \- refer to the recurse and mask commands for more information\&. Note that all transfers in
    985 \FCsmbclient\F[]
     819smbclient
    986820are binary\&.
    987821.RE
    … …  
    1032866.RS 4
    1033867Copy the file called
    1034 \FClocal file name\F[]
     868local file name
    1035869from the machine running the client to the server\&. If specified, name the remote copy
    1036 \FCremote file name\F[]\&. Note that all transfers in
    1037 \FCsmbclient\F[]
     870remote file name\&. Note that all transfers in
     871smbclient
    1038872are binary\&. See also the lowercase command\&.
    1039873.RE
    … …  
    1092926A version of the DOS attrib command to set file permissions\&. For example:
    1093927.sp
    1094 \FCsetmode myfile +r \F[]
     928setmode myfile +r
    1095929.sp
    1096930would make myfile read only\&.
    … …  
    11691003.PP
    11701004It is recommended that the smbclient software be installed in the
    1171 \FC/usr/local/samba/bin/\F[]
     1005/usr/local/samba/bin/
    11721006or
    1173 \FC /usr/samba/bin/\F[]
     1007/usr/samba/bin/
    11741008directory, this directory readable by all, writeable only by root\&. The client program itself should be executable by all\&. The client should
    11751009\fINOT\fR

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbcontrol.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbcontrol
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBCONTROL" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBCONTROL" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbcontrol \- send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbcontrol\F[] [\-i] [\-s]
    175 .fam
    176 .fam C
     25smbcontrol [\-i] [\-s]
    17726.HP \w'\ 'u
    178 \FCsmbcontrol\F[] [destination] [message\-type] [parameter]
    179 .fam
     27smbcontrol [destination] [message\-type] [parameter]
    18028.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    18129.PP
    … …  
    18432suite\&.
    18533.PP
    186 \FCsmbcontrol\F[]
     34smbcontrol
    18735is a very small program, which sends messages to a
    18836\fBsmbd\fR(8), a
    … …  
    20048.RS 4
    20149The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    202 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     50smb\&.conf
    20351for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    20452.RE
    … …  
    22371\fIsmbd\fR
    22472destination causes the message to be sent to the smbd daemon specified in the
    225 \FCsmbd\&.pid\F[]
     73smbd\&.pid
    22674file\&.
    22775.sp
    … …  
    22977\fInmbd\fR
    23078destination causes the message to be sent to the nmbd daemon specified in the
    231 \FCnmbd\&.pid\F[]
     79nmbd\&.pid
    23280file\&.
    23381.sp
    … …  
    23583\fIwinbindd\fR
    23684destination causes the message to be sent to the winbind daemon specified in the
    237 \FCwinbindd\&.pid\F[]
     85winbindd\&.pid
    23886file\&.
    23987.sp
    … …  
    270118.RS 4
    271119This message causes the
    272 \FCnmbd\F[]
     120nmbd
    273121daemon to force a new browse master election\&.
    274122.RE
    … …  
    337185.\}
    338186.RS 4
    339 .BM yellow
    340187.it 1 an-trap
    341188.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    348195Not working at the moment
    349196.sp .5v
    350 .EM yellow
    351197.RE
    352198.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbcquotas.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbcquotas
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBCQUOTAS" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBCQUOTAS" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbcquotas \- Set or get QUOTAs of NTFS 5 shares
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbcquotas\F[] {//server/share} [\-u\ user] [\-L] [\-F] [\-S\ QUOTA_SET_COMMAND] [\-n] [\-t] [\-v] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-s\ configfile] [\-l\ logdir] [\-V] [\-U\ username] [\-N] [\-k] [\-A]
    175 .fam
     25smbcquotas {//server/share} [\-u\ user] [\-L] [\-F] [\-S\ QUOTA_SET_COMMAND] [\-n] [\-t] [\-v] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-s\ configfile] [\-l\ logdir] [\-V] [\-U\ username] [\-N] [\-k] [\-A]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCsmbcquotas\F[]
     33smbcquotas
    18434program manipulates NT Quotas on SMB file shares\&.
    18535.SH "OPTIONS"
    18636.PP
    18737The following options are available to the
    188 \FCsmbcquotas\F[]
     38smbcquotas
    18939program\&.
    19040.PP
    … …  
    24191\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    24292parameter in the
    243 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     93smb\&.conf
    24494file\&.
    24595.RE
    … …  
    253103.RS 4
    254104The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    255 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     105smb\&.conf
    256106for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    257107.RE
    … …  
    290140.RS 4
    291141.\}
    292 .fam C
    293 .ps -1
    294142.nf
    295 .if t \{\
    296 .sp -1
    297 .\}
    298 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    299 .sp -1
    300 
    301143username = <value>
    302144password = <value>
    303145domain   = <value>
    304 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    305 .if t \{\
    306 .sp 1
    307 .\}
    308146.fi
    309 .fam
    310 .ps +1
    311147.if n \{\
    312148.RE
    … …  
    333169.sp
    334170Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the
    335 \FCps\F[]
     171ps
    336172command\&. To be safe always allow
    337 \FCrpcclient\F[]
     173rpcclient
    338174to prompt for a password and type it in directly\&.
    339175.RE
    … …  
    358194.PP
    359195The
    360 \FCsmbcquotas\F[]
     196smbcquotas
    361197program sets the exit status depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed\&. The exit status may be one of the following values\&.
    362198.PP
    363199If the operation succeeded, smbcquotas returns an exit status of 0\&. If
    364 \FCsmbcquotas\F[]
     200smbcquotas
    365201couldn\'t connect to the specified server, or when there was an error getting or setting the quota(s), an exit status of 1 is returned\&. If there was an error parsing any command line arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned\&.
    366202.SH "VERSION"
    … …  
    371207The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
    372208.PP
    373 \FCsmbcquotas\F[]
     209smbcquotas
    374210was written by Stefan Metzmacher\&.

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbd.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbd
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBD" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBD" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbd \- server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbd\F[] [\-D] [\-F] [\-S] [\-i] [\-h] [\-V] [\-b] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-l\ <log\ directory>] [\-p\ <port\ number(s)>] [\-P\ <profiling\ level>] [\-O\ <socket\ option>] [\-s\ <configuration\ file>]
    175 .fam
     25smbd [\-D] [\-F] [\-S] [\-i] [\-h] [\-V] [\-b] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-l\ <log\ directory>] [\-p\ <port\ number(s)>] [\-P\ <profiling\ level>] [\-O\ <socket\ option>] [\-s\ <configuration\ file>]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCsmbd\F[]
     32smbd
    18333is the server daemon that provides filesharing and printing services to Windows clients\&. The server provides filespace and printer services to clients using the SMB (or CIFS) protocol\&. This is compatible with the LanManager protocol, and can service LanManager clients\&. These include MSCLIENT 3\&.0 for DOS, Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, OS/2, DAVE for Macintosh, and smbfs for Linux\&.
    18434.PP
    … …  
    19343.PP
    19444The configuration file, and any files that it includes, are automatically reloaded every minute, if they change\&. You can force a reload by sending a SIGHUP to the server\&. Reloading the configuration file will not affect connections to any service that is already established\&. Either the user will have to disconnect from the service, or
    195 \FCsmbd\F[]
     45smbd
    19646killed and restarted\&.
    19747.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    20050.RS 4
    20151If specified, this parameter causes the server to operate as a daemon\&. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port\&. Operating the server as a daemon is the recommended way of running
    202 \FCsmbd\F[]
     52smbd
    20353for servers that provide more than casual use file and print services\&. This switch is assumed if
    204 \FCsmbd \F[]
     54smbd
    20555is executed on the command line of a shell\&.
    20656.RE
    … …  
    20959.RS 4
    21060If specified, this parameter causes the main
    211 \FCsmbd\F[]
     61smbd
    21262process to not daemonize, i\&.e\&. double\-fork and disassociate with the terminal\&. Child processes are still created as normal to service each connection request, but the main process does not exit\&. This operation mode is suitable for running
    213 \FCsmbd\F[]
     63smbd
    21464under process supervisors such as
    215 \FCsupervise\F[]
     65supervise
    21666and
    217 \FCsvscan\F[]
     67svscan
    21868from Daniel J\&. Bernstein\'s
    219 \FCdaemontools\F[]
     69daemontools
    22070package, or the AIX process monitor\&.
    22171.RE
    … …  
    22474.RS 4
    22575If specified, this parameter causes
    226 \FCsmbd\F[]
     76smbd
    22777to log to standard output rather than a file\&.
    22878.RE
    … …  
    23181.RS 4
    23282If this parameter is specified it causes the server to run "interactively", not as a daemon, even if the server is executed on the command line of a shell\&. Setting this parameter negates the implicit daemon mode when run from the command line\&.
    233 \FCsmbd\F[]
     83smbd
    23484also logs to standard output, as if the
    235 \FC\-S\F[]
     85\-S
    23686parameter had been given\&.
    23787.RE
    … …  
    24999\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    250100parameter in the
    251 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     101smb\&.conf
    252102file\&.
    253103.RE
    … …  
    261111.RS 4
    262112The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    263 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     113smb\&.conf
    264114for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    265115.RE
    … …  
    288138\m[blue]\fBports\fR\m[]
    289139parameter in
    290 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     140smb\&.conf
    291141.sp
    292142The default ports are 139 (used for SMB over NetBIOS over TCP) and port 445 (used for plain SMB over TCP)\&.
    … …  
    300150.SH "FILES"
    301151.PP
    302 \FC/etc/inetd\&.conf\F[]
     152/etc/inetd\&.conf
    303153.RS 4
    304154If the server is to be run by the
    305 \FCinetd\F[]
     155inetd
    306156meta\-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta\-daemon\&.
    307157.RE
    308158.PP
    309 \FC/etc/rc\F[]
     159/etc/rc
    310160.RS 4
    311161or whatever initialization script your system uses)\&.
    … …  
    314164.RE
    315165.PP
    316 \FC/etc/services\F[]
     166/etc/services
    317167.RS 4
    318168If running the server via the meta\-daemon
    319 \FCinetd\F[], this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios\-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&.
    320 .RE
    321 .PP
    322 \FC/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\F[]
     169inetd, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios\-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&.
     170.RE
     171.PP
     172/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf
    323173.RS 4
    324174This is the default location of the
    325175\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    326176server configuration file\&. Other common places that systems install this file are
    327 \FC/usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\F[]
     177/usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf
    328178and
    329 \FC/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\F[]\&.
     179/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\&.
    330180.sp
    331181This file describes all the services the server is to make available to clients\&. See
    … …  
    336186.PP
    337187On some systems
    338 \FCsmbd\F[]
     188smbd
    339189cannot change uid back to root after a setuid() call\&. Such systems are called trapdoor uid systems\&. If you have such a system, you will be unable to connect from a client (such as a PC) as two different users at once\&. Attempts to connect the second user will result in access denied or similar\&.
    340190.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
    … …  
    386236.PP
    387237Samba stores it\'s data in several TDB (Trivial Database) files, usually located in
    388 \FC/var/lib/samba\F[]\&.
     238/var/lib/samba\&.
    389239.PP
    390240(*) information persistent across restarts (but not necessarily important to backup)\&.
    … …  
    492342.PP
    493343Sending the
    494 \FCsmbd\F[]
     344smbd
    495345a SIGHUP will cause it to reload its
    496 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     346smb\&.conf
    497347configuration file within a short period of time\&.
    498348.PP
    499349To shut down a user\'s
    500 \FCsmbd\F[]
     350smbd
    501351process it is recommended that
    502 \FCSIGKILL (\-9)\F[]
     352SIGKILL (\-9)
    503353\fINOT\fR
    504354be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the shared memory area in an inconsistent state\&. The safe way to terminate an
    505 \FCsmbd\F[]
     355smbd
    506356is to send it a SIGTERM (\-15) signal and wait for it to die on its own\&.
    507357.PP
    508358The debug log level of
    509 \FCsmbd\F[]
     359smbd
    510360may be raised or lowered using
    511361\fBsmbcontrol\fR(1)
    … …  
    513363.PP
    514364Note that as the signal handlers send a debug write, they are not re\-entrant in
    515 \FCsmbd\F[]\&. This you should wait until
    516 \FCsmbd\F[]
     365smbd\&. This you should wait until
     366smbd
    517367is in a state of waiting for an incoming SMB before issuing them\&. It is possible to make the signal handlers safe by un\-blocking the signals before the select call and re\-blocking them after, however this would affect performance\&.
    518368.SH "SEE ALSO"
    … …  
    525375\fBtestparm\fR(1),
    526376\fBtestprns\fR(1), and the Internet RFC\'s
    527 \FCrfc1001\&.txt\F[],
    528 \FCrfc1002\&.txt\F[]\&. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page
     377rfc1001\&.txt,
     378rfc1002\&.txt\&. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page
    529379http://samba\&.org/cifs/\&.
    530380.SH "AUTHOR"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbget.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbget
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBGET" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBGET" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbget \- wget\-like utility for download files over SMB
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbget\F[] [\-a,\ \-\-guest] [\-r,\ \-\-resume] [\-R,\ \-\-recursive] [\-u,\ \-\-username=STRING] [\-p,\ \-\-password=STRING] [\-w,\ \-\-workgroup=STRING] [\-n,\ \-\-nonprompt] [\-d,\ \-\-debuglevel=INT] [\-D,\ \-\-dots] [\-P,\ \-\-keep\-permissions] [\-o,\ \-\-outputfile] [\-f,\ \-\-rcfile] [\-q,\ \-\-quiet] [\-v,\ \-\-verbose] [\-b,\ \-\-blocksize] [\-O,\ \-\-stdout] [\-?,\ \-\-help] [\-\-usage] {smb://host/share/path/to/file} [smb://url2/] [\&.\&.\&.]
    175 .fam
     25smbget [\-a,\ \-\-guest] [\-r,\ \-\-resume] [\-R,\ \-\-recursive] [\-u,\ \-\-username=STRING] [\-p,\ \-\-password=STRING] [\-w,\ \-\-workgroup=STRING] [\-n,\ \-\-nonprompt] [\-d,\ \-\-debuglevel=INT] [\-D,\ \-\-dots] [\-P,\ \-\-keep\-permissions] [\-o,\ \-\-outputfile] [\-f,\ \-\-rcfile] [\-q,\ \-\-quiet] [\-v,\ \-\-verbose] [\-b,\ \-\-blocksize] [\-O,\ \-\-stdout] [\-?,\ \-\-help] [\-\-usage] {smb://host/share/path/to/file} [smb://url2/] [\&.\&.\&.]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    282132.RS 4
    283133.\}
    284 .fam C
    285 .ps -1
    286134.nf
    287 .if t \{\
    288 .sp -1
    289 .\}
    290 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    291 .sp -1
    292 
    293135smb://[[[domain;]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]]
    294 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    295 .if t \{\
    296 .sp 1
    297 .\}
    298136.fi
    299 .fam
    300 .ps +1
    301137.if n \{\
    302138.RE
    … …  
    306142.RS 4
    307143.\}
    308 .fam C
    309 .ps -1
    310144.nf
    311 .if t \{\
    312 .sp -1
    313 .\}
    314 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    315 .sp -1
    316 
    317145smb:// means all the workgroups
    318 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    319 .if t \{\
    320 .sp 1
    321 .\}
    322146.fi
    323 .fam
    324 .ps +1
    325147.if n \{\
    326148.RE
    … …  
    330152.RS 4
    331153.\}
    332 .fam C
    333 .ps -1
    334154.nf
    335 .if t \{\
    336 .sp -1
    337 .\}
    338 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    339 .sp -1
    340 
    341155smb://name/ means, if \fIname\fR is a workgroup, all the servers in this workgroup, or if \fIname\fR is a server, all the shares on this server\&.
    342 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    343 .if t \{\
    344 .sp 1
    345 .\}
    346156.fi
    347 .fam
    348 .ps +1
    349157.if n \{\
    350158.RE
    … …  
    355163.RS 4
    356164.\}
    357 .fam C
    358 .ps -1
    359165.nf
    360 .if t \{\
    361 .sp -1
    362 .\}
    363 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    364 .sp -1
    365 
    366166# Recursively download \'src\' directory
    367167smbget \-R smb://rhonwyn/jelmer/src
    … …  
    372172# Backup my data on rhonwyn
    373173smbget \-Rr smb://rhonwyn/
    374 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    375 .if t \{\
    376 .sp 1
    377 .\}
    378174.fi
    379 .fam
    380 .ps +1
    381175.if n \{\
    382176.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbgetrc.5

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbgetrc
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: File Formats and Conventions
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBGETRC" "5" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "File Formats and Conventions"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBGETRC" "5" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "File Formats and Conventions"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbgetrc \- configuration file for smbget
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17224.PP
    173 \FCsmbgetrc\F[]
     25smbgetrc
    17426.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17527.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.5

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbpasswd
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: File Formats and Conventions
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBPASSWD" "5" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "File Formats and Conventions"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBPASSWD" "5" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "File Formats and Conventions"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbpasswd \- The Samba encrypted password file
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17224.PP
    173 \FCsmbpasswd\F[]
     25smbpasswd
    17426.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17527.PP
    … …  
    18234.PP
    18335The format of the smbpasswd file used by Samba 2\&.2 is very similar to the familiar Unix
    184 \FCpasswd(5)\F[]
     36passwd(5)
    18537file\&. It is an ASCII file containing one line for each user\&. Each field ithin each line is separated from the next by a colon\&. Any entry beginning with \'#\' is ignored\&. The smbpasswd file contains the following information for each user:
    18638.PP
    … …  
    291143.RE
    292144Other flags may be added as the code is extended in future\&. The rest of this field space is filled in with spaces\&. For further information regarding the flags that are supported please refer to the man page for the
    293 \FCpdbedit\F[]
     145pdbedit
    294146command\&.
    295147.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbpasswd
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBPASSWD" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBPASSWD" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbpasswd \- change a user\'s SMB password
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbpasswd\F[] [\-a] [\-c\ <config\ file>] [\-x] [\-d] [\-e] [\-D\ debuglevel] [\-n] [\-r\ <remote\ machine>] [\-R\ <name\ resolve\ order>] [\-m] [\-U\ username[%password]] [\-h] [\-s] [\-w\ pass] [\-W] [\-i] [\-L] [username]
    175 .fam
     25smbpasswd [\-a] [\-c\ <config\ file>] [\-x] [\-d] [\-e] [\-D\ debuglevel] [\-n] [\-r\ <remote\ machine>] [\-R\ <name\ resolve\ order>] [\-m] [\-U\ username[%password]] [\-h] [\-s] [\-w\ pass] [\-W] [\-i] [\-L] [username]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18535.PP
    18636By default (when run with no arguments) it will attempt to change the current user\'s SMB password on the local machine\&. This is similar to the way the
    187 \FCpasswd(1)\F[]
     37passwd(1)
    18838program works\&.
    189 \FC smbpasswd\F[]
     39smbpasswd
    19040differs from how the passwd program works however in that it is not
    19141\fIsetuid root\fR
    … …  
    20252.PP
    20353When run by root, smbpasswd allows new users to be added and deleted in the smbpasswd file, as well as allows changes to the attributes of the user in this file to be made\&. When run by root,
    204 \FC smbpasswd\F[]
     54smbpasswd
    20555accesses the local smbpasswd file directly, thus enabling changes to be made even if smbd is not running\&.
    20656.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    20959.RS 4
    21060This option specifies that the username following should be added to the local smbpasswd file, with the new password typed (type <Enter> for the old password)\&. This option is ignored if the username following already exists in the smbpasswd file and it is treated like a regular change password command\&. Note that the default passdb backends require the user to already exist in the system password file (usually
    211 \FC/etc/passwd\F[]), else the request to add the user will fail\&.
     61/etc/passwd), else the request to add the user will fail\&.
    21262.sp
    21363This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&.
    … …  
    21767.RS 4
    21868This option can be used to specify the path and file name of the
    219 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     69smb\&.conf
    22070configuration file when it is important to use other than the default file and / or location\&.
    22171.RE
    … …  
    250100.sp
    251101If the smbpasswd file is in the \'old\' format, then
    252 \FC smbpasswd\F[]
     102smbpasswd
    253103will FAIL to enable the account\&. See
    254104\fBsmbpasswd\fR(5)
    … …  
    273123.sp
    274124Note that to allow users to logon to a Samba server once the password has been set to "NO PASSWORD" in the smbpasswd file the administrator must set the following parameter in the [global] section of the
    275 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     125smb\&.conf
    276126file :
    277127.sp
    278 \FCnull passwords = yes\F[]
     128null passwords = yes
    279129.sp
    280130This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&.
    … …  
    327177.\}
    328178\fBhost\fR: Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system
    329 \FC/etc/hosts \F[], NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the
    330 \FC/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\F[]
     179/etc/hosts, NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the
     180/etc/nsswitch\&.conf
    331181file)\&. Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise it is ignored\&.
    332182.RE
    … …  
    359209.RE
    360210The default order is
    361 \FClmhosts, host, wins, bcast\F[]
     211lmhosts, host, wins, bcast
    362212and without this parameter or any entry in the
    363213\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    … …  
    382232.RS 4
    383233This option prints the help string for
    384 \FC smbpasswd\F[], selecting the correct one for running as root or as an ordinary user\&.
     234smbpasswd, selecting the correct one for running as root or as an ordinary user\&.
    385235.RE
    386236.PP
    … …  
    388238.RS 4
    389239This option causes smbpasswd to be silent (i\&.e\&. not issue prompts) and to read its old and new passwords from standard input, rather than from
    390 \FC/dev/tty\F[]
     240/dev/tty
    391241(like the
    392 \FCpasswd(1)\F[]
     242passwd(1)
    393243program does)\&. This option is to aid people writing scripts to drive smbpasswd
    394244.RE
    … …  
    400250switch is used to specify the password to be used with the
    401251\m[blue]\fBldap admin dn\fR\m[]\&. Note that the password is stored in the
    402 \FCsecrets\&.tdb\F[]
     252secrets\&.tdb
    403253and is keyed off of the admin\'s DN\&. This means that if the value of
    404254\fIldap admin dn\fR
    … …  
    408258\-W
    409259.RS 4
    410 \FCNOTE: \F[]
     260NOTE:
    411261This option is same as "\-w" except that the password should be entered using stdin\&.
    412262.sp
    … …  
    415265switch is used to specify the password to be used with the
    416266\m[blue]\fBldap admin dn\fR\m[]\&. Note that the password is stored in the
    417 \FCsecrets\&.tdb\F[]
     267secrets\&.tdb
    418268and is keyed off of the admin\'s DN\&. This means that if the value of
    419269\fIldap admin dn\fR
    … …  
    442292.PP
    443293Since
    444 \FCsmbpasswd\F[]
     294smbpasswd
    445295works in client\-server mode communicating with a local smbd for a non\-root user then the smbd daemon must be running for this to work\&. A common problem is to add a restriction to the hosts that may access the
    446 \FC smbd\F[]
     296smbd
    447297running on the local machine by specifying either
    448298\fIallow hosts\fR

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbspool.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbspool
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBSPOOL" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBSPOOL" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbspool \- send a print file to an SMB printer
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbspool\F[] {job} {user} {title} {copies} {options} [filename]
    175 .fam
     25smbspool {job} {user} {title} {copies} {options} [filename]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    23989.PP
    24090Programs using the
    241 \FCexec(2)\F[]
     91exec(2)
    24292functions can pass the URI in argv[0], while shell scripts must set the
    24393\fBDEVICE_URI\fR
    … …  
    319169.SH "AUTHOR"
    320170.PP
    321 \FCsmbspool\F[]
     171smbspool
    322172was written by Michael Sweet at Easy Software Products\&.
    323173.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbstatus.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbstatus
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBSTATUS" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBSTATUS" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbstatus \- report on current Samba connections
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbstatus\F[] [\-P] [\-b] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-v] [\-L] [\-B] [\-p] [\-S] [\-s\ <configuration\ file>] [\-u\ <username>]
    175 .fam
     25smbstatus [\-P] [\-b] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-v] [\-L] [\-B] [\-p] [\-S] [\-s\ <configuration\ file>] [\-u\ <username>]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCsmbstatus\F[]
     32smbstatus
    18333is a very simple program to list the current Samba connections\&.
    18434.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    20656\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    20757parameter in the
    208 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     58smb\&.conf
    20959file\&.
    21060.RE
    … …  
    21868.RS 4
    21969The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    220 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     70smb\&.conf
    22171for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    22272.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbtar.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbtar
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBTAR" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBTAR" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbtar \- shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares directly to UNIX tape drives
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbtar\F[] [\-r] [\-i] [\-a] [\-v] {\-s\ server} [\-p\ password] [\-x\ services] [\-X] [\-N\ filename] [\-b\ blocksize] [\-d\ directory] [\-l\ loglevel] [\-u\ user] [\-t\ tape] {filenames}
    175 .fam
     25smbtar [\-r] [\-i] [\-a] [\-v] {\-s\ server} [\-p\ password] [\-x\ services] [\-X] [\-N\ filename] [\-b\ blocksize] [\-d\ directory] [\-l\ loglevel] [\-u\ user] [\-t\ tape] {filenames}
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCsmbtar\F[]
     32smbtar
    18333is a very small shell script on top of
    18434\fBsmbclient\fR(1)
    … …  
    23383\fI$TAPE\fR
    23484environmental variable; if not set, a file called
    235 \FCtar\&.out \F[]\&.
     85tar\&.out\&.
    23686.RE
    23787.PP
    … …  
    23989.RS 4
    24090Blocking factor\&. Defaults to 20\&. See
    241 \FCtar(1)\F[]
     91tar(1)
    24292for a fuller explanation\&.
    24393.RE
    … …  
    273123.PP
    274124The
    275 \FCsmbtar\F[]
     125smbtar
    276126script has different options from ordinary tar and from smbclient\'s tar command\&.
    277127.SH "CAVEATS"
    … …  
    299149Ricky Poulten
    300150wrote the tar extension and this man page\&. The
    301 \FCsmbtar\F[]
     151smbtar
    302152script was heavily rewritten and improved by
    303153Martin Kraemer\&. Many thanks to everyone who suggested extensions, improvements, bug fixes, etc\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/smbtree.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smbtree
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMBTREE" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMBTREE" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022smbtree \- A text based smb network browser
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCsmbtree\F[] [\-b] [\-D] [\-S]
    175 .fam
     25smbtree [\-b] [\-D] [\-S]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCsmbtree\F[]
     32smbtree
    18333is a smb browser program in text mode\&. It is similar to the "Network Neighborhood" found on Windows computers\&. It prints a tree with all the known domains, the servers in those domains and the shares on the servers\&.
    18434.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    21161\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    21262parameter in the
    213 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     63smb\&.conf
    21464file\&.
    21565.RE
    … …  
    22373.RS 4
    22474The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    225 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     75smb\&.conf
    22676for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    22777.RE
    … …  
    260110.RS 4
    261111.\}
    262 .fam C
    263 .ps -1
    264112.nf
    265 .if t \{\
    266 .sp -1
    267 .\}
    268 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    269 .sp -1
    270 
    271113username = <value>
    272114password = <value>
    273115domain   = <value>
    274 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    275 .if t \{\
    276 .sp 1
    277 .\}
    278116.fi
    279 .fam
    280 .ps +1
    281117.if n \{\
    282118.RE
    … …  
    303139.sp
    304140Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the
    305 \FCps\F[]
     141ps
    306142command\&. To be safe always allow
    307 \FCrpcclient\F[]
     143rpcclient
    308144to prompt for a password and type it in directly\&.
    309145.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/swat.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: swat
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SWAT" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SWAT" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022swat \- Samba Web Administration Tool
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCswat\F[] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-a] [\-P]
    175 .fam
     25swat [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-a] [\-P]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCswat\F[]
     32swat
    18333allows a Samba administrator to configure the complex
    18434\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    18535file via a Web browser\&. In addition, a
    186 \FCswat\F[]
     36swat
    18737configuration page has help links to all the configurable options in the
    188 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     38smb\&.conf
    18939file allowing an administrator to easily look up the effects of any change\&.
    19040.PP
    191 \FCswat\F[]
     41swat
    19242is run from
    193 \FCinetd\F[]
     43inetd
    19444.SH "OPTIONS"
    19545.PP
    … …  
    19949\fBsmbd\fR(8)
    20050server\&. This is the file that
    201 \FCswat\F[]
     51swat
    20252will modify\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    203 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     53smb\&.conf
    20454for more information\&.
    20555.RE
    … …  
    20858.RS 4
    20959This option disables authentication and places
    210 \FCswat\F[]
     60swat
    21161in demo mode\&. In that mode anyone will be able to modify the
    212 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     62smb\&.conf
    21363file\&.
    21464.sp
    … …  
    21969.RS 4
    22070This option restricts read\-only users to the password management page\&.
    221 \FCswat\F[]
     71swat
    22272can then be used to change user passwords without users seeing the "View" and "Status" menu buttons\&.
    22373.RE
    … …  
    23585\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    23686parameter in the
    237 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     87smb\&.conf
    23888file\&.
    23989.RE
    … …  
    24797.RS 4
    24898The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    249 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     99smb\&.conf
    250100for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    251101.RE
    … …  
    267117.PP
    268118After you compile SWAT you need to run
    269 \FCmake install \F[]
     119make install
    270120to install the
    271 \FCswat\F[]
     121swat
    272122binary and the various help files and images\&. A default install would put these in:
    273123.sp
    … …  
    308158.PP
    309159You need to edit your
    310 \FC/etc/inetd\&.conf \F[]
    311 and
    312 \FC/etc/services\F[]
     160/etc/inetd\&.conf
     161and
     162/etc/services
    313163to enable SWAT to be launched via
    314 \FCinetd\F[]\&.
     164inetd\&.
    315165.PP
    316166In
    317 \FC/etc/services\F[]
     167/etc/services
    318168you need to add a line like this:
    319169.PP
    320 \FCswat 901/tcp\F[]
     170swat 901/tcp
    321171.PP
    322172Note for NIS/YP and LDAP users \- you may need to rebuild the NIS service maps rather than alter your local
    323 \FC /etc/services\F[]
     173/etc/services
    324174file\&.
    325175.PP
    326176the choice of port number isn\'t really important except that it should be less than 1024 and not currently used (using a number above 1024 presents an obscure security hole depending on the implementation details of your
    327 \FCinetd\F[]
     177inetd
    328178daemon)\&.
    329179.PP
    330180In
    331 \FC/etc/inetd\&.conf\F[]
     181/etc/inetd\&.conf
    332182you should add a line like this:
    333183.PP
    334 \FCswat stream tcp nowait\&.400 root /usr/local/samba/sbin/swat swat\F[]
     184swat stream tcp nowait\&.400 root /usr/local/samba/sbin/swat swat
    335185.PP
    336186Once you have edited
    337 \FC/etc/services\F[]
    338 and
    339 \FC/etc/inetd\&.conf\F[]
     187/etc/services
     188and
     189/etc/inetd\&.conf
    340190you need to send a HUP signal to inetd\&. To do this use
    341 \FCkill \-1 PID \F[]
     191kill \-1 PID
    342192where PID is the process ID of the inetd daemon\&.
    343193.SH "LAUNCHING"
    … …  
    348198.SH "FILES"
    349199.PP
    350 \FC/etc/inetd\&.conf\F[]
     200/etc/inetd\&.conf
    351201.RS 4
    352202This file must contain suitable startup information for the meta\-daemon\&.
    353203.RE
    354204.PP
    355 \FC/etc/services\F[]
     205/etc/services
    356206.RS 4
    357207This file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., swat) to service port (e\&.g\&., 901) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&.
    358208.RE
    359209.PP
    360 \FC/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\F[]
     210/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf
    361211.RS 4
    362212This is the default location of the
    363213\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    364214server configuration file that swat edits\&. Other common places that systems install this file are
    365 \FC /usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\F[]
    366 and
    367 \FC/etc/smb\&.conf \F[]\&. This file describes all the services the server is to make available to clients\&.
     215/usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf
     216and
     217/etc/smb\&.conf\&. This file describes all the services the server is to make available to clients\&.
    368218.RE
    369219.SH "WARNINGS"
    370220.PP
    371 \FCswat\F[]
     221swat
    372222will rewrite your
    373223\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    … …  
    377227\fIcopy= \fR
    378228options\&. If you have a carefully crafted
    379 \FC smb\&.conf\F[]
     229smb\&.conf
    380230then back it up or don\'t use swat!
    381231.SH "VERSION"
    … …  
    384234.SH "SEE ALSO"
    385235.PP
    386 \FCinetd(5)\F[],
     236inetd(5),
    387237\fBsmbd\fR(8),
    388238\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/tdbbackup.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: tdbbackup
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "TDBBACKUP" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "TDBBACKUP" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022tdbbackup \- tool for backing up and for validating the integrity of samba \&.tdb files
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCtdbbackup\F[] [\-s\ suffix] [\-v] [\-h]
    175 .fam
     25tdbbackup [\-s\ suffix] [\-v] [\-h]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCtdbbackup\F[]
     32tdbbackup
    18333is a tool that may be used to backup samba \&.tdb files\&. This tool may also be used to verify the integrity of the \&.tdb files prior to samba startup or during normal operation\&. If it finds file damage and it finds a prior backup the backup file will be restored\&.
    18434.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    19242.RS 4
    19343The
    194 \FC\-s\F[]
     44\-s
    19545option allows the adminisistrator to specify a file backup extension\&. This way it is possible to keep a history of tdb backup files by using a new suffix for each backup\&.
    19646.RE
    … …  
    19949.RS 4
    20050The
    201 \FC\-v\F[]
     51\-v
    20252will check the database for damages (currupt data) which if detected causes the backup to be restored\&.
    20353.RE
    … …  
    20757.PP
    20858The
    209 \FCtdbbackup\F[]
     59tdbbackup
    21060utility can safely be run at any time\&. It was designed so that it can be used at any time to validate the integrity of tdb files, even during Samba operation\&. Typical usage for the command will be:
    21161.PP
    … …  
    22777.\}
    22878
    229 \FCsecrets\&.tdb\F[]
     79secrets\&.tdb
    23080\- usual location is in the /usr/local/samba/private directory, or on some systems in /etc/samba\&.
    23181.RE
    … …  
    24090.\}
    24191
    242 \FCpassdb\&.tdb\F[]
     92passdb\&.tdb
    24393\- usual location is in the /usr/local/samba/private directory, or on some systems in /etc/samba\&.
    24494.RE
    … …  
    253103.\}
    254104
    255 \FC*\&.tdb\F[]
     105*\&.tdb
    256106located in the /usr/local/samba/var directory or on some systems in the /var/cache or /var/lib/samba directories\&.
    257107.SH "VERSION"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/tdbdump.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: tdbdump
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "TDBDUMP" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "TDBDUMP" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022tdbdump \- tool for printing the contents of a TDB file
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCtdbdump\F[] {filename}
    175 .fam
     25tdbdump {filename}
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCtdbdump\F[]
     32tdbdump
    18333is a very simple utility that \'dumps\' the contents of a TDB (Trivial DataBase) file to standard output in a human\-readable format\&.
    18434.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/tdbtool.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: tdbtool
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "TDBTOOL" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "TDBTOOL" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022tdbtool \- manipulate the contents TDB files
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCtdbtool\F[]
    175 .fam
    176 .fam C
     25tdbtool
    17726.HP \w'\ 'u
    178 \FCtdbtool\F[] \fITDBFILE\fR [\fICOMMANDS\fR...]
    179 .fam
     27tdbtool \fITDBFILE\fR [\fICOMMANDS\fR...]
    18028.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    18129.PP
    … …  
    18432suite\&.
    18533.PP
    186 \FCtdbtool\F[]
     34tdbtool
    18735a tool for displaying and altering the contents of Samba TDB (Trivial DataBase) files\&. Each of the commands listed below can be entered interactively or provided on the command line\&.
    18836.SH "COMMANDS"
    … …  
    289137.RS 4
    290138Exit
    291 \FCtdbtool\F[]\&.
     139tdbtool\&.
    292140.RE
    293141.SH "CAVEATS"
    294142.PP
    295143The contents of the Samba TDB files are private to the implementation and should not be altered with
    296 \FCtdbtool\F[]\&.
     144tdbtool\&.
    297145.SH "VERSION"
    298146.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/testparm.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: testparm
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "TESTPARM" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "TESTPARM" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022testparm \- check an smb\&.conf configuration file for internal correctness
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCtestparm\F[] [\-s] [\-h] [\-v] [\-L\ <servername>] [\-t\ <encoding>] {config\ filename} [hostname\ hostIP]
    175 .fam
     25testparm [\-s] [\-h] [\-v] [\-L\ <servername>] [\-t\ <encoding>] {config\ filename} [hostname\ hostIP]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCtestparm\F[]
     32testparm
    18333is a very simple test program to check an
    18434\fBsmbd\fR(8)
    18535configuration file for internal correctness\&. If this program reports no problems, you can use the configuration file with confidence that
    186 \FCsmbd \F[]
     36smbd
    18737will successfully load the configuration file\&.
    18838.PP
    … …  
    19444.PP
    19545If
    196 \FCtestparm\F[]
     46testparm
    19747finds an error in the
    198 \FC smb\&.conf\F[]
     48smb\&.conf
    19949file it returns an exit code of 1 to the calling program, else it returns an exit code of 0\&. This allows shell scripts to test the output from
    200 \FCtestparm\F[]\&.
     50testparm\&.
    20151.SH "OPTIONS"
    20252.PP
    … …  
    20454.RS 4
    20555Without this option,
    206 \FCtestparm\F[]
     56testparm
    20757will prompt for a carriage return after printing the service names and before dumping the service definitions\&.
    20858.RE
    … …  
    256106.RS 4
    257107If this parameter and the following are specified, then
    258 \FCtestparm\F[]
     108testparm
    259109will examine the
    260110\fIhosts allow\fR
    … …  
    264114\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    265115file to determine if the hostname with this IP address would be allowed access to the
    266 \FCsmbd\F[]
     116smbd
    267117server\&. If this parameter is supplied, the hostIP parameter must also be supplied\&.
    268118.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/umount.cifs.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: umount.cifs
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "UMOUNT\&.CIFS" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "UMOUNT\&.CIFS" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022umount.cifs \- for normal, non\-root users, to unmount their own Common Internet File System (CIFS) mounts
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCumount\&.cifs\F[] {mount\-point} [\-nVvhfle]
    175 .fam
     25umount\&.cifs {mount\-point} [\-nVvhfle]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    24191.PP
    24292The primary mechanism for making configuration changes and for reading debug information for the cifs vfs is via the Linux /proc filesystem\&. In the directory
    243 \FC/proc/fs/cifs\F[]
     93/proc/fs/cifs
    24494are various configuration files and pseudo files which can display debug information\&. For more information see the kernel file
    245 \FCfs/cifs/README\F[]\&.
     95fs/cifs/README\&.
    24696.SH "BUGS"
    24797.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_acl_tdb.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_acl_tdb
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_ACL_TDB" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_ACL_TDB" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_acl_tdb \- Save NTFS\-ACLs in a tdb file
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = acl_tdb\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = acl_tdb
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_acl_tdb\F[]
     33vfs_acl_tdb
    18434VFS module stores NTFS Access Control Lists (ACLs) in a tdb file\&. This enables the full mapping of Windows ACLs on Samba servers\&.
    18535.PP
    18636The ACL settings are stored in
    187 \FC$LOCKDIR/file_ntacls\&.tdb\F[]\&.
     37$LOCKDIR/file_ntacls\&.tdb\&.
    18838.PP
    18939Please note that this module is
    … …  
    19444.PP
    19545There are no options for
    196 \FCvfs_acl_tdb\F[]\&.
     46vfs_acl_tdb\&.
    19747.SH "AUTHOR"
    19848.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_acl_xattr.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_acl_xattr
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_ACL_XATTR" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_ACL_XATTR" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_acl_xattr \- Save NTFS\-ACLs in Extended Attributes (EAs)
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = acl_xattr\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = acl_xattr
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_acl_xattr\F[]
     33vfs_acl_xattr
    18434VFS module stores NTFS Access Control Lists (ACLs) in Extended Attributes (EAs)\&. This enables the full mapping of Windows ACLs on Samba servers\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    18939\fInot\fR
    19040listed by
    191 \FCgetfattr \-d \FCfilename\F[]\F[]\&. To show the current value, the name of the EA must be specified (e\&.g\&.
    192 \FCgetfattr \-n security\&.NTACL \FCfilename\F[] \F[])\&.
     41getfattr \-d filename\&. To show the current value, the name of the EA must be specified (e\&.g\&.
     42getfattr \-n security\&.NTACL filename)\&.
    19343.PP
    19444Please note that this module is
    … …  
    19949.PP
    20050There are no options for
    201 \FCvfs_acl_xattr\F[]\&.
     51vfs_acl_xattr\&.
    20252.SH "AUTHOR"
    20353.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_audit.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_audit
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_AUDIT" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_AUDIT" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_audit \- record selected Samba VFS operations in the system log
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = audit\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = audit
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_audit\F[]
     33vfs_audit
    18434VFS module records selected client operations to the system log using
    18535\fBsyslog\fR(3)\&.
    … …  
    24999.RS 4
    250100.\}
    251 .fam C
    252 .ps -1
    253101.nf
    254 .if t \{\
    255 .sp -1
    256 .\}
    257 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    258 .sp -1
    259 
    260102        \fI[global]\fR
    261103        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = audit\fR\m[]
    262104        \m[blue]\fBaudit:facility = LOCAL1\fR\m[]
    263105        \m[blue]\fBaudit:priority = NOTICE\fR\m[]
    264 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    265 .if t \{\
    266 .sp 1
    267 .\}
    268106.fi
    269 .fam
    270 .ps +1
    271107.if n \{\
    272108.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_cacheprime.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_cacheprime
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_CACHEPRIME" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_CACHEPRIME" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_cacheprime \- prime the kernel file data cache
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = cacheprime\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = cacheprime
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_cacheprime\F[]
     33vfs_cacheprime
    18434VFS module reads chunks of file data near the range requested by clients in order to make sure the data is present in the kernel file data cache at the time when it is actually requested by clients\&.
    18535.PP
    18636The size of the disk read operations performed by
    187 \FCvfs_cacheprime\F[]
     37vfs_cacheprime
    18838is determined by the cacheprime:rsize option\&. All disk read operations are aligned on boundaries that are a multiple of this size\&. Each range of the file data is primed at most once during the time the client has the file open\&.
    18939.PP
    … …  
    20555.IP \(bu 2.3
    20656.\}
    207 \FCK\F[]
     57K
    20858\- BYTES is a number of kilobytes
    20959.RE
    … …  
    21767.IP \(bu 2.3
    21868.\}
    219 \FCM\F[]
     69M
    22070\- BYTES is a number of megabytes
    22171.RE
    … …  
    22979.IP \(bu 2.3
    23080.\}
    231 \FCG\F[]
     81G
    23282\- BYTES is a number of gigabytes
    23383.sp
    … …  
    24191.RS 4
    24292.\}
    243 .fam C
    244 .ps -1
    24593.nf
    246 .if t \{\
    247 .sp -1
    248 .\}
    249 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    250 .sp -1
    251 
    25294        \fI[hypothetical]\fR
    25395        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = cacheprime\fR\m[]
    25496        \m[blue]\fBcacheprime:rsize = 1M\fR\m[]
    255 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    256 .if t \{\
    257 .sp 1
    258 .\}
    25997.fi
    260 .fam
    261 .ps +1
    26298.if n \{\
    26399.RE
    … …  
    265101.SH "CAVEATS"
    266102.PP
    267 \FCcacheprime\F[]
     103cacheprime
    268104is not a a substitute for a general\-purpose readahead mechanism\&. It is intended for use only in very specific environments where disk operations must be aligned and sized to known values (as much as that is possible)\&.
    269105.SH "VERSION"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_cap.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_cap
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_CAP" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_CAP" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_cap \- CAP encode filenames
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = cap\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = cap
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232CAP (Columbia Appletalk Protocol) encoding is a technique for representing non\-ASCII filenames in ASCII\&. The
    183 \FCvfs_cap\F[]
     33vfs_cap
    18434VFS module translates filenames to and from CAP format, allowing users to name files in their native encoding\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    19444.RS 4
    19545.\}
    196 .fam C
    197 .ps -1
    19846.nf
    199 .if t \{\
    200 .sp -1
    201 .\}
    202 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    203 .sp -1
    204 
    20547        \fI[global]\fR
    20648        \m[blue]\fBdos charset = CP932\fR\m[]
    20749        \m[blue]\fBdos charset = CP932\fR\m[]
    20850        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = cap\fR\m[]
    209 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    210 .if t \{\
    211 .sp 1
    212 .\}
    21351.fi
    214 .fam
    215 .ps +1
    21652.if n \{\
    21753.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_catia.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_catia
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_CATIA" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_CATIA" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_catia \- translate illegal characters in Catia filenames
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = catia\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = catia
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The Catia CAD package commonly creates filenames that use characters that are illegal in CIFS filenames\&. The
    183 \FCvfs_catia\F[]
     33vfs_catia
    18434VFS module implements a fixed character mapping so that these files can be shared with CIFS clients\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    19242.RS 4
    19343.\}
    194 .fam C
    195 .ps -1
    19644.nf
    197 .if t \{\
    198 .sp -1
    199 .\}
    200 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    201 .sp -1
    202 
    20345        \fI[CAD]\fR
    20446        \m[blue]\fBpath = /data/cad\fR\m[]
    20547        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = catia\fR\m[]
    206 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    207 .if t \{\
    208 .sp 1
    209 .\}
    21048.fi
    211 .fam
    212 .ps +1
    21349.if n \{\
    21450.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_commit.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_commit
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_COMMIT" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_COMMIT" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_commit \- flush dirty data at specified intervals
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = commit\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = commit
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_commit\F[]
     33vfs_commit
    18434VFS module keeps track of the amount of data written to a file and synchronizes it to disk when a specified amount accumulates\&.
    18535.PP
    186 \FCvfs_commit\F[]
     36vfs_commit
    18737is useful in two circumstances\&. First, if you have very precious data, the impact of unexpected power loss can be minimized by a small commit:dthresh value\&. Secondly, write performance can be improved on some systems by flushing file data early and at regular intervals\&.
    18838.PP
    … …  
    20454.IP \(bu 2.3
    20555.\}
    206 \FCK\F[]
     56K
    20757\- BYTES is a number of kilobytes
    20858.RE
    … …  
    21666.IP \(bu 2.3
    21767.\}
    218 \FCM\F[]
     68M
    21969\- BYTES is a number of megabytes
    22070.RE
    … …  
    22878.IP \(bu 2.3
    22979.\}
    230 \FCG\F[]
     80G
    23181\- BYTES is a number of gigabytes
    23282.sp
    … …  
    24090.RS 4
    24191.\}
    242 .fam C
    243 .ps -1
    24492.nf
    245 .if t \{\
    246 .sp -1
    247 .\}
    248 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    249 .sp -1
    250 
    25193        \fI[precious]\fR
    25294        \m[blue]\fBpath = /data/precious\fR\m[]
    25395        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = commit\fR\m[]
    25496        \m[blue]\fBcommit:dthresh = 512K\fR\m[]
    255 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    256 .if t \{\
    257 .sp 1
    258 .\}
    25997.fi
    260 .fam
    261 .ps +1
    26298.if n \{\
    26399.RE
    … …  
    266102.PP
    267103On some systems, the data synchronization performed by
    268 \FCcommit\F[]
     104commit
    269105may reduce performance\&.
    270106.SH "VERSION"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_default_quota.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_default_quota
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_DEFAULT_QUOTA" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_DEFAULT_QUOTA" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_default_quota \- store default quota records for Windows clients
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = default_quota\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = default_quota
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232Many common quota implementations only store quotas for users and groups, but do not store a default quota\&. The
    183 \FCvfs_default_quota\F[]
     33vfs_default_quota
    18434module allows Samba to store default quota values which can be examined using the Windows Explorer interface\&.
    18535.PP
    18636By default, Samba returns NO_LIMIT the default quota and refuses to update them\&.
    187 \FCvfs_default_quota\F[]
     37vfs_default_quota
    18838maps the default quota to the quota record of a user\&. By default the root user is taken because quota limits for root are typically not enforced\&.
    18939.PP
    … …  
    21767.RS 4
    21868.\}
    219 .fam C
    220 .ps -1
    22169.nf
    222 .if t \{\
    223 .sp -1
    224 .\}
    225 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    226 .sp -1
    227 
    22870        \fI[global]\fR
    22971        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = default_quota\fR\m[]
    23072        \m[blue]\fBdefault_quota:uid = 65535\fR\m[]
    23173        \m[blue]\fBdefault_quota:uid nolimit = yes\fR\m[]
    232 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    233 .if t \{\
    234 .sp 1
    235 .\}
    23674.fi
    237 .fam
    238 .ps +1
    23975.if n \{\
    24076.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_dirsort.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_dirsort
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_DIRSORT" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_DIRSORT" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_dirsort \- Sort directory contents
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = dirsort\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = dirsort
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_dirsort\F[]
     33vfs_dirsort
    18434module sorts directory entries alphabetically before sending them to the client\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    19242.RS 4
    19343.\}
    194 .fam C
    195 .ps -1
    19644.nf
    197 .if t \{\
    198 .sp -1
    199 .\}
    200 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    201 .sp -1
    202 
    20345        \fI[global]\fR
    20446        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = dirsort\fR\m[]
    205 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    206 .if t \{\
    207 .sp 1
    208 .\}
    20947.fi
    210 .fam
    211 .ps +1
    21248.if n \{\
    21349.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_extd_audit.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_extd_audit
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_EXTD_AUDIT" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_EXTD_AUDIT" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_extd_audit \- record selected Samba VFS operations
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = extd_audit\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = extd_audit
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCextd_audit\F[]
     33extd_audit
    18434VFS module records selected client operations to both the
    18535\fBsmbd\fR(8)
    … …  
    19040\fBsmbd\fR(8)
    19141log,
    192 \FCvfs_extd_audit\F[]
     42vfs_extd_audit
    19343is identical to
    19444\fBvfs_audit\fR(8)\&.

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_fake_perms.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_fake_perms
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_FAKE_PERMS" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_FAKE_PERMS" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_fake_perms \- enable read only Roaming Profiles
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = fake_perms\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = fake_perms
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_fake_perms\F[]
     33vfs_fake_perms
    18434VFS module was created to allow Roaming Profile files and directories to be set (on the Samba server under UNIX) as read only\&. This module will, if installed on the Profiles share, report to the client that the Profile files and directories are writeable\&. This satisfies the client even though the files will never be overwritten as the client logs out or shuts down\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    19040.RS 4
    19141.\}
    192 .fam C
    193 .ps -1
    19442.nf
    195 .if t \{\
    196 .sp -1
    197 .\}
    198 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    199 .sp -1
    200 
    20143        \fI[Profiles]\fR
    20244        \m[blue]\fBpath = /profiles\fR\m[]
    20345        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = fake_perms\fR\m[]
    204 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    205 .if t \{\
    206 .sp 1
    207 .\}
    20846.fi
    209 .fam
    210 .ps +1
    21147.if n \{\
    21248.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_fileid.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_fileid
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_FILEID" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_FILEID" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_fileid \- Generates file_id structs with unique device id values for cluster setups
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = fileid\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = fileid
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232Samba uses file_id structs to uniquely identify files for locking purpose\&. By default the file_id contains the device and inode number returned by the
    183 \FCstat()\F[]
     33stat()
    18434system call\&. As the file_id is a unique identifier of a file, it must be the same on all nodes in a cluster setup\&. This module overloads the
    185 \FCSMB_VFS_FILE_ID_CREATE()\F[]
     35SMB_VFS_FILE_ID_CREATE()
    18636operation and generates the device number based on the configured algorithm (see the "fileid:algorithm" option)\&.
    18737.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    19040.RS 4
    19141Available algorithms are
    192 \FCfsname\F[]
     42fsname
    19343and
    194 \FCfsid\F[]\&. The default value is
    195 \FCfsname\F[]\&.
     44fsid\&. The default value is
     45fsname\&.
    19646.sp
    19747The
    198 \FCfsname\F[]
     48fsname
    19949algorithm generates device id by hashing the kernel device name\&.
    20050.sp
    20151The
    202 \FCfsid\F[]
     52fsid
    20353algorithm generates the device id from the
    204 \FCf_fsid\F[]
     54f_fsid
    20555returned from the
    206 \FCstatfs()\F[]
     56statfs()
    20757syscall\&.
    20858.RE
    … …  
    21161.RS 4
    21262This option is the legacy version of the
    213 \FCfileid:algorithm\F[]
     63fileid:algorithm
    21464option, which was used in earlier versions of fileid mapping feature in custom Samba 3\&.0 versions\&.
    21565.RE
    … …  
    21767.PP
    21868Usage of the
    219 \FCfileid\F[]
     69fileid
    22070module with the
    221 \FCfsid\F[]
     71fsid
    22272algorithm:
    22373.sp
    … …  
    22575.RS 4
    22676.\}
    227 .fam C
    228 .ps -1
    22977.nf
    230 .if t \{\
    231 .sp -1
    232 .\}
    233 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    234 .sp -1
    235 
    23678        \fI[global]\fR
    23779        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = fileid\fR\m[]
    23880        \m[blue]\fBfileid:algorithm = fsid\fR\m[]
    239 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    240 .if t \{\
    241 .sp 1
    242 .\}
    24381.fi
    244 .fam
    245 .ps +1
    24682.if n \{\
    24783.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_full_audit.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_full_audit
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_FULL_AUDIT" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_FULL_AUDIT" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_full_audit \- record Samba VFS operations in the system log
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = full_audit\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = full_audit
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_full_audit\F[]
     33vfs_full_audit
    18434VFS module records selected client operations to the system log using
    18535\fBsyslog\fR(3)\&.
    18636.PP
    187 \FCvfs_full_audit\F[]
     37vfs_full_audit
    18838is able to record the complete set of Samba VFS operations:
    18939.RS 4
    … …  
    471321.PP
    472322In addition to these operations,
    473 \FCvfs_full_audit\F[]
     323vfs_full_audit
    474324recognizes the special operation names "all" and "none ", which refer to all the VFS operations and none of the VFS operations respectively\&.
    475325.PP
    476 \FCvfs_full_audit\F[]
     326vfs_full_audit
    477327records operations in fixed format consisting of fields separated by \'|\' characters\&. The format is:
    478328.sp
    … …  
    480330.RS 4
    481331.\}
    482 .fam C
    483 .ps -1
    484332.nf
    485 .if t \{\
    486 .sp -1
    487 .\}
    488 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    489 .sp -1
    490 
    491333                smbd_audit: PREFIX|OPERATION|RESULT|FILE
    492334       
    493 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    494 .if t \{\
    495 .sp 1
    496 .\}
    497335.fi
    498 .fam
    499 .ps +1
    500336.if n \{\
    501337.RE
    … …  
    512348.IP \(bu 2.3
    513349.\}
    514 \FCPREFIX\F[]
     350PREFIX
    515351\- the result of the full_audit:prefix string after variable substitutions
    516352.RE
    … …  
    524360.IP \(bu 2.3
    525361.\}
    526 \FCOPERATION\F[]
     362OPERATION
    527363\- the name of the VFS operation
    528364.RE
    … …  
    536372.IP \(bu 2.3
    537373.\}
    538 \FCRESULT\F[]
     374RESULT
    539375\- whether the operation succeeded or failed
    540376.RE
    … …  
    548384.IP \(bu 2.3
    549385.\}
    550 \FCFILE\F[]
     386FILE
    551387\- the name of the file or directory the operation was performed on
    552388.sp
    … …  
    592428.RS 4
    593429.\}
    594 .fam C
    595 .ps -1
    596430.nf
    597 .if t \{\
    598 .sp -1
    599 .\}
    600 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    601 .sp -1
    602 
    603431        \fI[records]\fR
    604432        \m[blue]\fBpath = /data/records\fR\m[]
    … …  
    609437        \m[blue]\fBfull_audit:facility = LOCAL7\fR\m[]
    610438        \m[blue]\fBfull_audit:priority = ALERT\fR\m[]
    611 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    612 .if t \{\
    613 .sp 1
    614 .\}
    615439.fi
    616 .fam
    617 .ps +1
    618440.if n \{\
    619441.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_gpfs.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_gpfs
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_GPFS" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_GPFS" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_gpfs \- gpfs specific samba extensions like acls and prealloc
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = gpfs\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = gpfs
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCgpfs\F[]
     33gpfs
    18434VFS module is the home for all gpfs extensions that Samba requires for proper integration with GPFS\&. It uses the GPL library interfaces provided by GPFS\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    22070.RE
    22171.PP
    222 \FCNOTE:\F[]This module follows the posix\-acl behaviour and hence allows permission stealing via chown\&. Samba might allow at a later point in time, to restrict the chown via this module as such restrictions are the responsibility of the underlying filesystem than of Samba\&.
     72NOTE:This module follows the posix\-acl behaviour and hence allows permission stealing via chown\&. Samba might allow at a later point in time, to restrict the chown via this module as such restrictions are the responsibility of the underlying filesystem than of Samba\&.
    22373.PP
    22474This module is stackable\&.
    … …  
    23989.IP \(bu 2.3
    24090.\}
    241 \FCsimple(default)\F[]
     91simple(default)
    24292\- do not use special IDs in GPFS ACEs
    24393.RE
    … …  
    251101.IP \(bu 2.3
    252102.\}
    253 \FCspecial\F[]
     103special
    254104\- use special IDs in GPFS ACEs\&.
    255105.sp
    … …  
    271121.IP \(bu 2.3
    272122.\}
    273 \FCdontcare (default)\F[]
     123dontcare (default)
    274124\- copy the ACEs as they come
    275125.RE
    … …  
    283133.IP \(bu 2.3
    284134.\}
    285 \FCreject\F[]
     135reject
    286136\- stop operation and exit with error on ACL set op
    287137.RE
    … …  
    295145.IP \(bu 2.3
    296146.\}
    297 \FCignore\F[]
     147ignore
    298148\- don\'t include the second matching ACE
    299149.RE
    … …  
    307157.IP \(bu 2.3
    308158.\}
    309 \FCmerge\F[]
     159merge
    310160\- bitwise OR the 2 ace\&.flag fields and 2 ace\&.mask fields of the 2 duplicate ACEs into 1 ACE
    311161.sp
    … …  
    329179.IP \(bu 2.3
    330180.\}
    331 \FCyes\F[]
     181yes
    332182\- Enable chown if as supported by the under filesystem
    333183.RE
    … …  
    341191.IP \(bu 2.3
    342192.\}
    343 \FCno (default)\F[]
     193no (default)
    344194\- Disable chown
    345195.sp
    … …  
    353203.RS 4
    354204.\}
    355 .fam C
    356 .ps -1
    357205.nf
    358 .if t \{\
    359 .sp -1
    360 .\}
    361 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    362 .sp -1
    363 
    364206        \fI[samba_gpfs_share]\fR
    365207        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = gpfs\fR\m[]
    … …  
    367209        \m[blue]\fBnfs4: mode = special\fR\m[]
    368210        \m[blue]\fBnfs4: acedup = merge\fR\m[]
    369 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    370 .if t \{\
    371 .sp 1
    372 .\}
    373211.fi
    374 .fam
    375 .ps +1
    376212.if n \{\
    377213.RE
    … …  
    380216.PP
    381217The gpfs gpl libraries are required by
    382 \FCgpfs\F[]
     218gpfs
    383219VFS module during both compilation and runtime\&. Also this VFS module is tested to work on SLES 9/10 and RHEL 4\&.4
    384220.SH "VERSION"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_netatalk.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_netatalk
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_NETATALK" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_NETATALK" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_netatalk \- hide \&.AppleDouble files from CIFS clients
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = netatalk\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = netatalk
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_netatalk\F[]
     33vfs_netatalk
    18434VFS module dynamically hides \&.AppleDouble files, preventing spurious errors on some CIFS clients\&. \&.AppleDouble files may be created by historic implementations of AFP (Apple Filing Protocol) on servers\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    19242.RS 4
    19343.\}
    194 .fam C
    195 .ps -1
    19644.nf
    197 .if t \{\
    198 .sp -1
    199 .\}
    200 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    201 .sp -1
    202 
    20345        \fI[data]\fR
    20446        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = netatalk\fR\m[]
    205 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    206 .if t \{\
    207 .sp 1
    208 .\}
    20947.fi
    210 .fam
    211 .ps +1
    21248.if n \{\
    21349.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_notify_fam.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_notify_fam
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_NOTIFY_FAM" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_NOTIFY_FAM" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_notify_fam \- FAM support for file change notifications
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = notify_fam\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = notify_fam
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_notify_fam\F[]
     33vfs_notify_fam
    18434module makes use of the system FAM (File Alteration Monitor) daemon to implement file change notifications for Windows clients\&. FAM is generally present only on IRIX and some BSD systems\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    19242.RS 4
    19343.\}
    194 .fam C
    195 .ps -1
    19644.nf
    197 .if t \{\
    198 .sp -1
    199 .\}
    200 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    201 .sp -1
    202 
    20345        \fI[global]\fR
    20446        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = notify_fam\fR\m[]
    205 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    206 .if t \{\
    207 .sp 1
    208 .\}
    20947.fi
    210 .fam
    211 .ps +1
    21248.if n \{\
    21349.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_prealloc.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_prealloc
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_PREALLOC" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_PREALLOC" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_prealloc \- preallocate matching files to a predetermined size
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = prealloc\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = prealloc
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_prealloc\F[]
     33vfs_prealloc
    18434VFS module preallocates files to a specified size each time a new file is created\&. This is useful in environments where files are of a predetermined size will be written to a disk subsystem where extending file allocations is expensive\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    20151.IP \(bu 2.3
    20252.\}
    203 \FCK\F[]
     53K
    20454\- BYTES is a number of kilobytes
    20555.RE
    … …  
    21363.IP \(bu 2.3
    21464.\}
    215 \FCM\F[]
     65M
    21666\- BYTES is a number of megabytes
    21767.RE
    … …  
    22575.IP \(bu 2.3
    22676.\}
    227 \FCG\F[]
     77G
    22878\- BYTES is a number of gigabytes
    22979.sp
    … …  
    23787.RS 4
    23888.\}
    239 .fam C
    240 .ps -1
    24189.nf
    242 .if t \{\
    243 .sp -1
    244 .\}
    245 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    246 .sp -1
    247 
    24890        \fI[frames]\fR
    24991        \m[blue]\fBpath = /data/frames\fR\m[]
    25092        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = prealloc\fR\m[]
    25193        \m[blue]\fBprealloc:tiff = 4M\fR\m[]
    252 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    253 .if t \{\
    254 .sp 1
    255 .\}
    25694.fi
    257 .fam
    258 .ps +1
    25995.if n \{\
    26096.RE
    … …  
    26298.SH "CAVEATS"
    26399.PP
    264 \FCvfs_prealloc\F[]
     100vfs_prealloc
    265101is not supported on all platforms and filesystems\&. Currently only XFS filesystems on Linux and IRIX are supported\&.
    266102.SH "VERSION"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_preopen.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_preopen
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_PREOPEN" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_PREOPEN" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_preopen \- Hide read latencies for applications reading numbered files
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = preopen\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = preopen
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    19040.RS 4
    19141preopen:names specifies the file name pattern which should trigger the preopen helpers to do their work\&. We assume that the files are numbered incrementally\&. So if your file names are numbered FRAME00000\&.frm FRAME00001\&.frm and so on you would list them as
    192 \FCpreopen:names=/FRAME*\&.frm/\F[]
     42preopen:names=/FRAME*\&.frm/
    19343.RE
    19444.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_readahead.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_readahead
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_READAHEAD" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_READAHEAD" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_readahead \- pre\-load the kernel buffer cache
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = readahead\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = readahead
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232This
    183 \FCvfs_readahead\F[]
     33vfs_readahead
    18434VFS module detects read requests at multiples of a given offset (hex 0x80000 by default) and then tells the kernel via either the readahead system call (on Linux) or the posix_fadvise system call to pre\-fetch this data into the buffer cache\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    18939.PP
    19040The size of the disk read operations performed by
    191 \FCvfs_readahead\F[]
     41vfs_readahead
    19242is determined by the readahead:length option\&. By default this is set to the same value as the readahead:offset option and if not set explicitly will use the current value of readahead:offset\&.
    19343.PP
    … …  
    21565.IP \(bu 2.3
    21666.\}
    217 \FCK\F[]
     67K
    21868\- BYTES is a number of kilobytes
    21969.RE
    … …  
    22777.IP \(bu 2.3
    22878.\}
    229 \FCM\F[]
     79M
    23080\- BYTES is a number of megabytes
    23181.RE
    … …  
    23989.IP \(bu 2.3
    24090.\}
    241 \FCG\F[]
     91G
    24292\- BYTES is a number of gigabytes
    24393.SH "EXAMPLES"
    … …  
    24696.RS 4
    24797.\}
    248 .fam C
    249 .ps -1
    25098.nf
    251 .if t \{\
    252 .sp -1
    253 .\}
    254 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    255 .sp -1
    256 
    25799        \fI[hypothetical]\fR
    258100        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = readahead\fR\m[]
    259 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    260 .if t \{\
    261 .sp 1
    262 .\}
    263101.fi
    264 .fam
    265 .ps +1
    266102.if n \{\
    267103.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_readonly.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_readonly
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_READONLY" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_READONLY" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_readonly \- make a Samba share read only for a specified time period
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = readonly\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = readonly
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_readonly\F[]
     33vfs_readonly
    18434VFS module marks a share as read only for all clients connecting within the configured time period\&. Clients connecting during this time will be denied write access to all files in the share, irrespective of ther actual access privileges\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    19949.RS 4
    20050.\}
    201 .fam C
    202 .ps -1
    20351.nf
    204 .if t \{\
    205 .sp -1
    206 .\}
    207 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    208 .sp -1
    209 
    21052        \fI[global]\fR
    21153        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = readonly\fR\m[]
    212 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    213 .if t \{\
    214 .sp 1
    215 .\}
    21654.fi
    217 .fam
    218 .ps +1
    21955.if n \{\
    22056.RE
    … …  
    22662.RS 4
    22763.\}
    228 .fam C
    229 .ps -1
    23064.nf
    231 .if t \{\
    232 .sp -1
    233 .\}
    234 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    235 .sp -1
    236 
    23765        \fI[backup]\fR
    23866        \m[blue]\fBpath = /readonly\fR\m[]
    23967        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = readonly\fR\m[]
    24068        \m[blue]\fBreadonly:period = readonly:period = "today 9:00","today 17:00"\fR\m[]
    241 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    242 .if t \{\
    243 .sp 1
    244 .\}
    24569.fi
    246 .fam
    247 .ps +1
    24870.if n \{\
    24971.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_recycle.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_recycle
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_RECYCLE" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_RECYCLE" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_recycle \- Samba VFS recycle bin
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = recycle\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = recycle
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_recycle\F[]
     33vfs_recycle
    18434intercepts file deletion requests and moves the affected files to a temporary repository rather than deleting them immediately\&. This gives the same effect as the Recycle Bin on Windows computers\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    265115.RS 4
    266116.\}
    267 .fam C
    268 .ps -1
    269117.nf
    270 .if t \{\
    271 .sp -1
    272 .\}
    273 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    274 .sp -1
    275 
    276118        \fI[share]\fR
    277119        \m[blue]\fBpath = /data/share\fR\m[]
    … …  
    280122        \m[blue]\fBrecycle:keeptree = yes\fR\m[]
    281123        \m[blue]\fBrecycle:versions = yes\fR\m[]
    282 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    283 .if t \{\
    284 .sp 1
    285 .\}
    286124.fi
    287 .fam
    288 .ps +1
    289125.if n \{\
    290126.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_scannedonly.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_scannedonly
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_SCANNEDONLY" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_SCANNEDONLY" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_scannedonly \- Ensures that only files that have been scanned for viruses are visible and accessible to the end user\&.
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = scannedonly\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = scannedonly
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_scannedonly\F[]
     33vfs_scannedonly
    18434VFS module ensures that only files that have been scanned for viruses are visible and accessible to the end user\&. If non\-scanned files are found an anti\-virus scanning daemon is notified\&. The anti\-virus scanning daemon is not part of the Samba suite\&.
    18535.PP
    18636Scannedonly comes in two parts: a samba vfs module and (one or more) daemons\&. The daemon scans files\&. If a certain file is clean, a second file is created with prefix
    187 \FC\&.scanned:\F[]\&. The Samba module simply looks if such a
    188 \FC\&.scanned:\F[]
     37\&.scanned:\&. The Samba module simply looks if such a
     38\&.scanned:
    18939file exists, and is newer than the pertinent file\&. If this is the case, the file is shown to the user\&. If this is not the case, the file is not returned in a directory listing (configurable), and cannot be opened (configurable)\&. The Samba vfs module will notify the daemon to scan this file\&.
    19040.PP
    … …  
    19242.PP
    19343If a virus is found by the daemon, a file with a warning message is created in the directory of the user, a warning is sent to the logs, and the file is renamed to have prefix
    194 \FC\&.virus:\F[]\&. Files with the
    195 \FC\&.virus:\F[]
     44\&.virus:\&. Files with the
     45\&.virus:
    19646prefix are never shown to the user and all access is denied\&.
    19747.PP
    … …  
    19949.SH "CONFIGURATION"
    20050.PP
    201 \FCvfs_scannedonly\F[]
     51vfs_scannedonly
    20252relies on a anti\-virus scanning daemon that listens on the scannedonly socket (unix domain socket or UDP socket)\&.
    20353.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    23080scannedonly:rm_hidden_files_on_rmdir = True
    23181.RS 4
    232 Whether files that are not visible (\FC\&.scanned:\F[]
     82Whether files that are not visible (\&.scanned:
    23383files,
    234 \FC\&.failed:\F[]
     84\&.failed:
    23585files and
    236 \FC\&.virus: \F[]
     86\&.virus:
    23787files) should be deleted if the user tries to remove the directory\&. If false, the user will get the "directory is not empty" error\&.
    23888.RE
    … …  
    251101.RS 4
    252102If a non\-scanned file is opened, the vfs module will wait recheck_tries_open times for recheck_time_open milliseconds for the scanning daemon to create a
    253 \FC\&.scanned:\F[]
     103\&.scanned:
    254104file\&. For small files that are scanned by the daemon within the time (tries * time) the behavior will be just like on\-access scanning\&.
    255105.RE
    … …  
    273123.RS 4
    274124Allow access to non\-scanned files\&. The daemon is notified, however, and special files such as
    275 \FC\&.scanned:\F[]
     125\&.scanned:
    276126files\&.
    277 \FC\&.virus:\F[]
     127\&.virus:
    278128files and
    279 \FC\&.failed:\F[]
     129\&.failed:
    280130files are not listed\&.
    281131.RE
    … …  
    287137.RS 4
    288138.\}
    289 .fam C
    290 .ps -1
    291139.nf
    292 .if t \{\
    293 .sp -1
    294 .\}
    295 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    296 .sp -1
    297 
    298140        \fI[homes]\fR
    299141        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = scannedonly\fR\m[]
    300142        \m[blue]\fBscannedonly:hide_nonscanned_files = False\fR\m[]
    301 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    302 .if t \{\
    303 .sp 1
    304 .\}
    305143.fi
    306 .fam
    307 .ps +1
    308144.if n \{\
    309145.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_shadow_copy.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_shadow_copy
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_shadow_copy \- Make a Samba share read only for a specified time period
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = shadow_copy\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = shadow_copy
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_shadow_copy\F[]
     33vfs_shadow_copy
    18434VFS module functionality that is similar to Microsoft Shadow Copy services\&. When setup properly, this module allows Microsoft Shadow Copy clients to browse "shadow copies" on Samba shares\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    18737.SH "CONFIGURATION"
    18838.PP
    189 \FCvfs_shadow_copy\F[]
     39vfs_shadow_copy
    19040relies on a filesystem snapshot implementation\&. Many common filesystems have native support for this\&.
    19141.PP
    19242Filesystem snapshots must be mounted on specially named directories in order to be recognized by
    193 \FCvfs_shadow_copy\F[]\&. The snapshot mount points must be immediate children of a the directory being shared\&.
     43vfs_shadow_copy\&. The snapshot mount points must be immediate children of a the directory being shared\&.
    19444.PP
    19545The snapshot naming convention is @GMT\-YYYY\&.MM\&.DD\-hh\&.mm\&.ss, where:
    … …  
    20353.IP \(bu 2.3
    20454.\}
    205 \FCYYYY\F[]
     55YYYY
    20656is the 4 digit year
    20757.RE
    … …  
    21565.IP \(bu 2.3
    21666.\}
    217 \FCMM\F[]
     67MM
    21868is the 2 digit month
    21969.RE
    … …  
    22777.IP \(bu 2.3
    22878.\}
    229 \FCDD\F[]
     79DD
    23080is the 2 digit day
    23181.RE
    … …  
    23989.IP \(bu 2.3
    24090.\}
    241 \FChh\F[]
     91hh
    24292is the 2 digit hour
    24393.RE
    … …  
    251101.IP \(bu 2.3
    252102.\}
    253 \FCmm\F[]
     103mm
    254104is the 2 digit minute
    255105.RE
    … …  
    263113.IP \(bu 2.3
    264114.\}
    265 \FCss\F[]
     115ss
    266116is the 2 digit second\&.
    267117.sp
    … …  
    269119.PP
    270120The
    271 \FCvfs_shadow_copy\F[]
     121vfs_shadow_copy
    272122snapshot naming convention can be produced with the following
    273123\fBdate\fR(1)
    … …  
    277127.RS 4
    278128.\}
    279 .fam C
    280 .ps -1
    281129.nf
    282 .if t \{\
    283 .sp -1
    284 .\}
    285 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    286 .sp -1
    287 
    288130        TZ=GMT date +@GMT\-%Y\&.%m\&.%d\-%H\&.%M\&.%S
    289131       
    290 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    291 .if t \{\
    292 .sp 1
    293 .\}
    294132.fi
    295 .fam
    296 .ps +1
    297133.if n \{\
    298134.RE
    … …  
    305141.RS 4
    306142.\}
    307 .fam C
    308 .ps -1
    309143.nf
    310 .if t \{\
    311 .sp -1
    312 .\}
    313 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    314 .sp -1
    315 
    316144        \fI[homes]\fR
    317145        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = shadow_copy\fR\m[]
    318 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    319 .if t \{\
    320 .sp 1
    321 .\}
    322146.fi
    323 .fam
    324 .ps +1
    325147.if n \{\
    326148.RE
    … …  
    331153.PP
    332154With Samba or Windows servers,
    333 \FCvfs_shadow_copy\F[]
     155vfs_shadow_copy
    334156is designed to be an end\-user tool only\&. It does not replace or enhance your backup and archival solutions and should in no way be considered as such\&. Additionally, if you need version control, implement a version control system\&.
    335157.SH "VERSION"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_shadow_copy2.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_shadow_copy2
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY2" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY2" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_shadow_copy2 \- Expose snapshots to Windows clients as shadow copies\&.
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = shadow_copy2\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = shadow_copy2
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_shadow_copy2\F[]
     33vfs_shadow_copy2
    18434VFS module functionality that is similar to Microsoft Shadow Copy services\&. When setup properly, this module allows Microsoft Shadow Copy clients to browse "shadow copies" on Samba shares\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    21363.SH "CONFIGURATION"
    21464.PP
    215 \FCvfs_shadow_copy2\F[]
     65vfs_shadow_copy2
    21666relies on a filesystem snapshot implementation\&. Many common filesystems have native support for this\&.
    21767.PP
    21868Filesystem snapshots must be mounted on specially named directories in order to be recognized by
    219 \FCvfs_shadow_copy2\F[]\&. The snapshot mount points must be immediate children of a the directory being shared\&.
     69vfs_shadow_copy2\&. The snapshot mount points must be immediate children of a the directory being shared\&.
    22070.PP
    22171The snapshot naming convention is @GMT\-YYYY\&.MM\&.DD\-hh\&.mm\&.ss, where:
    … …  
    22979.IP \(bu 2.3
    23080.\}
    231 \FCYYYY\F[]
     81YYYY
    23282is the 4 digit year
    23383.RE
    … …  
    24191.IP \(bu 2.3
    24292.\}
    243 \FCMM\F[]
     93MM
    24494is the 2 digit month
    24595.RE
    … …  
    253103.IP \(bu 2.3
    254104.\}
    255 \FCDD\F[]
     105DD
    256106is the 2 digit day
    257107.RE
    … …  
    265115.IP \(bu 2.3
    266116.\}
    267 \FChh\F[]
     117hh
    268118is the 2 digit hour
    269119.RE
    … …  
    277127.IP \(bu 2.3
    278128.\}
    279 \FCmm\F[]
     129mm
    280130is the 2 digit minute
    281131.RE
    … …  
    289139.IP \(bu 2.3
    290140.\}
    291 \FCss\F[]
     141ss
    292142is the 2 digit second\&.
    293143.sp
    … …  
    295145.PP
    296146The
    297 \FCvfs_shadow_copy2\F[]
     147vfs_shadow_copy2
    298148snapshot naming convention can be produced with the following
    299149\fBdate\fR(1)
    … …  
    303153.RS 4
    304154.\}
    305 .fam C
    306 .ps -1
    307155.nf
    308 .if t \{\
    309 .sp -1
    310 .\}
    311 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    312 .sp -1
    313 
    314156        TZ=GMT date +@GMT\-%Y\&.%m\&.%d\-%H\&.%M\&.%S
    315157       
    316 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    317 .if t \{\
    318 .sp 1
    319 .\}
    320158.fi
    321 .fam
    322 .ps +1
    323159.if n \{\
    324160.RE
    … …  
    339175.RS 4
    340176If you enable
    341 \FCshadow:fixinodes \F[]
     177shadow:fixinodes
    342178then this module will modify the apparent inode number of files in the snapshot directories using a hash of the files path\&. This is needed for snapshot systems where the snapshots have the same device:inode number as the original files (such as happens with GPFS snapshots)\&. If you don\'t set this option then the \'restore\' button in the shadow copy UI will fail with a sharing violation\&.
    343179.RE
    … …  
    349185.RS 4
    350186.\}
    351 .fam C
    352 .ps -1
    353187.nf
    354 .if t \{\
    355 .sp -1
    356 .\}
    357 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    358 .sp -1
    359 
    360188        \fI[homes]\fR
    361189        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = shadow_copy2\fR\m[]
    362190        \m[blue]\fBshadow:snapdir = /data/snaphots\fR\m[]
    363191        \m[blue]\fBshadow:basedir = /data/home\fR\m[]
    364 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    365 .if t \{\
    366 .sp 1
    367 .\}
    368192.fi
    369 .fam
    370 .ps +1
    371193.if n \{\
    372194.RE
    … …  
    377199.PP
    378200With Samba or Windows servers,
    379 \FCvfs_shadow_copy2\F[]
     201vfs_shadow_copy2
    380202is designed to be an end\-user tool only\&. It does not replace or enhance your backup and archival solutions and should in no way be considered as such\&. Additionally, if you need version control, implement a version control system\&.
    381203.SH "VERSION"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: smb_traffic_analyzer
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "SMB_TRAFFIC_ANALYZER" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "SMB_TRAFFIC_ANALYZER" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer \- log Samba VFS read and write operations through a socket to a helper application
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = smb_traffic_analyzer\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = smb_traffic_analyzer
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_smb_traffic_analyzer\F[]
     33vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer
    18434VFS module logs client write and read operations on a Samba server and sends this data over a socket to a helper program, which feeds a SQL database\&. More information on the helper programs can be obtained from the homepage of the project at: http://holger123\&.wordpress\&.com/smb\-traffic\-analyzer/
    18535.PP
    186 \FCvfs_smb_traffic_analyzer\F[]
     36vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer
    18737currently is aware of the following VFS operations:
    18838.RS 4
    … …  
    19949.RE
    20050.PP
    201 \FCvfs_smb_traffic_analyzer\F[]
     51vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer
    20252sends the following data in a fixed format seperated by a comma through either an internet or a unix domain socket:
    20353.sp
    … …  
    20555.RS 4
    20656.\}
    207 .fam C
    208 .ps -1
    209 .nf
    210 .if t \{\
    211 .sp -1
    212 .\}
    213 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    214 .sp -1
    215 
     57.nf
    21658        BYTES|USER|DOMAIN|READ/WRITE|SHARE|FILENAME|TIMESTAMP
    21759       
    218 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    219 .if t \{\
    220 .sp 1
    221 .\}
    222 .fi
    223 .fam
    224 .ps +1
     60.fi
    22561.if n \{\
    22662.RE
    … …  
    23773.IP \(bu 2.3
    23874.\}
    239 \FCBYTES\F[]
     75BYTES
    24076\- the length in bytes of the VFS operation
    24177.RE
    … …  
    24985.IP \(bu 2.3
    25086.\}
    251 \FCUSER\F[]
     87USER
    25288\- the user who initiated the operation
    25389.RE
    … …  
    26197.IP \(bu 2.3
    26298.\}
    263 \FCDOMAIN\F[]
     99DOMAIN
    264100\- the domain of the user
    265101.RE
    … …  
    273109.IP \(bu 2.3
    274110.\}
    275 \FCREAD/WRITE\F[]
     111READ/WRITE
    276112\- either "W" for a write operation or "R" for read
    277113.RE
    … …  
    285121.IP \(bu 2.3
    286122.\}
    287 \FCSHARE\F[]
     123SHARE
    288124\- the name of the share on which the VFS operation occured
    289125.RE
    … …  
    297133.IP \(bu 2.3
    298134.\}
    299 \FCFILENAME\F[]
     135FILENAME
    300136\- the name of the file that was used by the VFS operation
    301137.RE
    … …  
    309145.IP \(bu 2.3
    310146.\}
    311 \FCTIMESTAMP\F[]
     147TIMESTAMP
    312148\- a timestamp, formatted as "yyyy\-mm\-dd hh\-mm\-ss\&.ms" indicating when the VFS operation occured
    313149.sp
    … …  
    348184.RS 4
    349185.\}
    350 .fam C
    351 .ps -1
    352 .nf
    353 .if t \{\
    354 .sp -1
    355 .\}
    356 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    357 .sp -1
    358 
     186.nf
    359187        \fI[example_share]\fR
    360188        \m[blue]\fBpath = /data/example\fR\m[]
    … …  
    362190        \m[blue]\fBsmb_traffic_analyzer:mode = unix_domain_socket\fR\m[]
    363191       
    364 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    365 .if t \{\
    366 .sp 1
    367 .\}
    368 .fi
    369 .fam
    370 .ps +1
     192.fi
    371193.if n \{\
    372194.RE
    … …  
    378200.RS 4
    379201.\}
    380 .fam C
    381 .ps -1
    382 .nf
    383 .if t \{\
    384 .sp -1
    385 .\}
    386 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    387 .sp -1
    388 
     202.nf
    389203        \fI[example_share]\fR
    390204        \m[blue]\fBpath = /data/example\fR\m[]
    … …  
    393207        \m[blue]\fBsmb_traffic_analyzer:port = 3491\fR\m[]
    394208       
    395 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    396 .if t \{\
    397 .sp 1
    398 .\}
    399 .fi
    400 .fam
    401 .ps +1
     209.fi
    402210.if n \{\
    403211.RE
    … …  
    409217.RS 4
    410218.\}
    411 .fam C
    412 .ps -1
    413 .nf
    414 .if t \{\
    415 .sp -1
    416 .\}
    417 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    418 .sp -1
    419 
     219.nf
    420220        \fI[example_share]\fR
    421221        \m[blue]\fBpath = /data/example\fR\m[]
    … …  
    425225        \m[blue]\fBsmb_traffic_analyzer:anonymize_prefix = User\fR\m[]
    426226       
    427 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    428 .if t \{\
    429 .sp 1
    430 .\}
    431 .fi
    432 .fam
    433 .ps +1
     227.fi
    434228.if n \{\
    435229.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_streams_depot.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_streams_depot
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_STREAMS_DEPOT" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_STREAMS_DEPOT" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_streams_depot \- EXPERIMENTAL module to store alternate data streams in a central directory\&.
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = streams_depot\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = streams_depot
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18333.PP
    18434The
    185 \FCvfs_streams_depot\F[]
     35vfs_streams_depot
    18636enables storing of NTFS alternate data streams in the file system\&. As a normal posix file system does not support the concept of multiple data streams per file, the streams_depot module stores the data in files in a separate directory\&.
    18737.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    19646.RS 4
    19747.\}
    198 .fam C
    199 .ps -1
    20048.nf
    201 .if t \{\
    202 .sp -1
    203 .\}
    204 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    205 .sp -1
    206 
    20749        \fI[share]\fR
    20850        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = streams_depot\fR\m[]
    209 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    210 .if t \{\
    211 .sp 1
    212 .\}
    21351.fi
    214 .fam
    215 .ps +1
    21652.if n \{\
    21753.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_streams_xattr.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_streams_xattr
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_STREAMS_XATTR" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_STREAMS_XATTR" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_streams_xattr \- Store alternate data streams in posix xattrs
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = streams_xattr\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = streams_xattr
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_streams_xattr\F[]
     33vfs_streams_xattr
    18434enables storing of NTFS alternate data streams in the file system\&. As a normal posix file system does not support the concept of multiple data streams per file, the streams_xattr module stores the data in posix extended attributes (xattrs)\&. The name of these attributes is user\&.DosStream\&."ADS\-NAME"\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    19242.RS 4
    19343.\}
    194 .fam C
    195 .ps -1
    19644.nf
    197 .if t \{\
    198 .sp -1
    199 .\}
    200 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    201 .sp -1
    202 
    20345        \fI[share]\fR
    20446        \m[blue]\fBvfs objects = streams_xattr\fR\m[]
    205 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    206 .if t \{\
    207 .sp 1
    208 .\}
    20947.fi
    210 .fam
    211 .ps +1
    21248.if n \{\
    21349.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfs_xattr_tdb.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfs_xattr_tdb
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFS_XATTR_TDB" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFS_XATTR_TDB" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfs_xattr_tdb \- Save Extended Attributes (EAs) in a tdb file
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfs objects = xattr_tdb\F[]
    175 .fam
     25vfs objects = xattr_tdb
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCvfs_xattr_tdb\F[]
     33vfs_xattr_tdb
    18434VFS module stores Extended Attributes (EAs) in a tdb file\&. This enables the usage of Extended Attributes on OS and filesystems which do not support Extended Attributes by themselves\&.
    18535.PP
    … …  
    19040.RS 4
    19141Name of the tdb file the EAs are stored in\&. If this option is not set, the default filename
    192 \FCxattr\&.tdb\F[]
     42xattr\&.tdb
    19343is used\&.
    19444.RE

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/vfstest.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: vfstest
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "VFSTEST" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "VFSTEST" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022vfstest \- tool for testing samba VFS modules
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCvfstest\F[] [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-c\ command] [\-l\ logdir] [\-h]
    175 .fam
     25vfstest [\-d\ debuglevel] [\-c\ command] [\-l\ logdir] [\-h]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCvfstest\F[]
     32vfstest
    18333is a small command line utility that has the ability to test dso samba VFS modules\&. It gives the user the ability to call the various VFS functions manually and supports cascaded VFS modules\&.
    18434.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    21363\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    21464parameter in the
    215 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     65smb\&.conf
    21666file\&.
    21767.RE
    … …  
    22575.RS 4
    22676The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    227 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     77smb\&.conf
    22878for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    22979.RE
    … …  
    24797.IP \(bu 2.3
    24898.\}
    249 \FCload <module\&.so>\F[]
     99load <module\&.so>
    250100\- Load specified VFS module
    251101.RE
    … …  
    259109.IP \(bu 2.3
    260110.\}
    261 \FCpopulate <char> <size>\F[]
     111populate <char> <size>
    262112\- Populate a data buffer with the specified data
    263113.RE
    … …  
    271121.IP \(bu 2.3
    272122.\}
    273 \FCshowdata [<offset> <len>]\F[]
     123showdata [<offset> <len>]
    274124\- Show data currently in data buffer
    275125.RE
    … …  
    283133.IP \(bu 2.3
    284134.\}
    285 \FCconnect\F[]
     135connect
    286136\- VFS connect()
    287137.RE
    … …  
    295145.IP \(bu 2.3
    296146.\}
    297 \FCdisconnect\F[]
     147disconnect
    298148\- VFS disconnect()
    299149.RE
    … …  
    307157.IP \(bu 2.3
    308158.\}
    309 \FCdisk_free\F[]
     159disk_free
    310160\- VFS disk_free()
    311161.RE
    … …  
    319169.IP \(bu 2.3
    320170.\}
    321 \FCopendir\F[]
     171opendir
    322172\- VFS opendir()
    323173.RE
    … …  
    331181.IP \(bu 2.3
    332182.\}
    333 \FCreaddir\F[]
     183readdir
    334184\- VFS readdir()
    335185.RE
    … …  
    343193.IP \(bu 2.3
    344194.\}
    345 \FCmkdir\F[]
     195mkdir
    346196\- VFS mkdir()
    347197.RE
    … …  
    355205.IP \(bu 2.3
    356206.\}
    357 \FCrmdir\F[]
     207rmdir
    358208\- VFS rmdir()
    359209.RE
    … …  
    367217.IP \(bu 2.3
    368218.\}
    369 \FCclosedir\F[]
     219closedir
    370220\- VFS closedir()
    371221.RE
    … …  
    379229.IP \(bu 2.3
    380230.\}
    381 \FCopen\F[]
     231open
    382232\- VFS open()
    383233.RE
    … …  
    391241.IP \(bu 2.3
    392242.\}
    393 \FCclose\F[]
     243close
    394244\- VFS close()
    395245.RE
    … …  
    403253.IP \(bu 2.3
    404254.\}
    405 \FCread\F[]
     255read
    406256\- VFS read()
    407257.RE
    … …  
    415265.IP \(bu 2.3
    416266.\}
    417 \FCwrite\F[]
     267write
    418268\- VFS write()
    419269.RE
    … …  
    427277.IP \(bu 2.3
    428278.\}
    429 \FClseek\F[]
     279lseek
    430280\- VFS lseek()
    431281.RE
    … …  
    439289.IP \(bu 2.3
    440290.\}
    441 \FCrename\F[]
     291rename
    442292\- VFS rename()
    443293.RE
    … …  
    451301.IP \(bu 2.3
    452302.\}
    453 \FCfsync\F[]
     303fsync
    454304\- VFS fsync()
    455305.RE
    … …  
    463313.IP \(bu 2.3
    464314.\}
    465 \FCstat\F[]
     315stat
    466316\- VFS stat()
    467317.RE
    … …  
    475325.IP \(bu 2.3
    476326.\}
    477 \FCfstat\F[]
     327fstat
    478328\- VFS fstat()
    479329.RE
    … …  
    487337.IP \(bu 2.3
    488338.\}
    489 \FClstat\F[]
     339lstat
    490340\- VFS lstat()
    491341.RE
    … …  
    499349.IP \(bu 2.3
    500350.\}
    501 \FCunlink\F[]
     351unlink
    502352\- VFS unlink()
    503353.RE
    … …  
    511361.IP \(bu 2.3
    512362.\}
    513 \FCchmod\F[]
     363chmod
    514364\- VFS chmod()
    515365.RE
    … …  
    523373.IP \(bu 2.3
    524374.\}
    525 \FCfchmod\F[]
     375fchmod
    526376\- VFS fchmod()
    527377.RE
    … …  
    535385.IP \(bu 2.3
    536386.\}
    537 \FCchown\F[]
     387chown
    538388\- VFS chown()
    539389.RE
    … …  
    547397.IP \(bu 2.3
    548398.\}
    549 \FCfchown\F[]
     399fchown
    550400\- VFS fchown()
    551401.RE
    … …  
    559409.IP \(bu 2.3
    560410.\}
    561 \FCchdir\F[]
     411chdir
    562412\- VFS chdir()
    563413.RE
    … …  
    571421.IP \(bu 2.3
    572422.\}
    573 \FCgetwd\F[]
     423getwd
    574424\- VFS getwd()
    575425.RE
    … …  
    583433.IP \(bu 2.3
    584434.\}
    585 \FCutime\F[]
     435utime
    586436\- VFS utime()
    587437.RE
    … …  
    595445.IP \(bu 2.3
    596446.\}
    597 \FCftruncate\F[]
     447ftruncate
    598448\- VFS ftruncate()
    599449.RE
    … …  
    607457.IP \(bu 2.3
    608458.\}
    609 \FClock\F[]
     459lock
    610460\- VFS lock()
    611461.RE
    … …  
    619469.IP \(bu 2.3
    620470.\}
    621 \FCsymlink\F[]
     471symlink
    622472\- VFS symlink()
    623473.RE
    … …  
    631481.IP \(bu 2.3
    632482.\}
    633 \FCreadlink\F[]
     483readlink
    634484\- VFS readlink()
    635485.RE
    … …  
    643493.IP \(bu 2.3
    644494.\}
    645 \FClink\F[]
     495link
    646496\- VFS link()
    647497.RE
    … …  
    655505.IP \(bu 2.3
    656506.\}
    657 \FCmknod\F[]
     507mknod
    658508\- VFS mknod()
    659509.RE
    … …  
    667517.IP \(bu 2.3
    668518.\}
    669 \FCrealpath\F[]
     519realpath
    670520\- VFS realpath()
    671521.sp
    … …  
    682532.IP \(bu 2.3
    683533.\}
    684 \FCconf <smb\&.conf>\F[]
     534conf <smb\&.conf>
    685535\- Load a different configuration file
    686536.RE
    … …  
    694544.IP \(bu 2.3
    695545.\}
    696 \FChelp [<command>]\F[]
     546help [<command>]
    697547\- Get list of commands or info about specified command
    698548.RE
    … …  
    706556.IP \(bu 2.3
    707557.\}
    708 \FCdebuglevel <level>\F[]
     558debuglevel <level>
    709559\- Set debug level
    710560.RE
    … …  
    718568.IP \(bu 2.3
    719569.\}
    720 \FCfreemem\F[]
     570freemem
    721571\- Free memory currently in use
    722572.RE
    … …  
    730580.IP \(bu 2.3
    731581.\}
    732 \FCexit\F[]
     582exit
    733583\- Exit vfstest
    734584.SH "VERSION"

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/wbinfo.1

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: wbinfo
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: User Commands
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "WBINFO" "1" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "WBINFO" "1" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "User Commands"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022wbinfo \- Query information from winbind daemon
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCwbinfo\F[] [\-a\ user%password] [\-\-all\-domains] [\-\-allocate\-gid] [\-\-allocate\-uid] [\-c] [\-D\ domain] [\-\-domain\ domain] [\-g] [\-\-getdcname\ domain] [\-\-get\-auth\-user] [\-G\ gid] [\-h] [\-i\ user] [\-I\ ip] [\-K\ user%password] [\-m] [\-n\ name] [\-N\ netbios\-name] [\-\-own\-domain] [\-p] [\-r\ user] [\-\-remove\-uid\-mapping\ uid,sid] [\-\-remove\-gid\-mapping\ gid,sid] [\-s\ sid] [\-\-separator] [\-\-sequence] [\-\-set\-auth\-user\ user%password] [\-\-set\-uid\-mapping\ uid,sid] [\-\-set\-gid\-mapping\ gid,sid] [\-S\ sid] [\-t] [\-u] [\-\-uid\-info\ uid] [\-\-user\-domgroups\ sid] [\-\-user\-sids\ sid] [\-U\ uid] [\-V] [\-Y\ sid] [\-\-verbose]
    175 .fam
     25wbinfo [\-a\ user%password] [\-\-all\-domains] [\-\-allocate\-gid] [\-\-allocate\-uid] [\-c] [\-D\ domain] [\-\-domain\ domain] [\-g] [\-\-getdcname\ domain] [\-\-get\-auth\-user] [\-G\ gid] [\-h] [\-i\ user] [\-I\ ip] [\-K\ user%password] [\-m] [\-n\ name] [\-N\ netbios\-name] [\-\-own\-domain] [\-p] [\-r\ user] [\-\-remove\-uid\-mapping\ uid,sid] [\-\-remove\-gid\-mapping\ gid,sid] [\-s\ sid] [\-\-separator] [\-\-sequence] [\-\-set\-auth\-user\ user%password] [\-\-set\-uid\-mapping\ uid,sid] [\-\-set\-gid\-mapping\ gid,sid] [\-S\ sid] [\-t] [\-u] [\-\-uid\-info\ uid] [\-\-user\-domgroups\ sid] [\-\-user\-sids\ sid] [\-U\ uid] [\-V] [\-Y\ sid] [\-\-verbose]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18131.PP
    18232The
    183 \FCwbinfo\F[]
     33wbinfo
    18434program queries and returns information created and used by the
    18535\fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    … …  
    18939\fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    19040daemon must be configured and running for the
    191 \FCwbinfo\F[]
     41wbinfo
    19242program to be able to return information\&.
    19343.SH "OPTIONS"
    … …  
    20151.\}
    20252.RS 4
    203 .BM yellow
    20453.it 1 an-trap
    20554.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    21362\fBntlm_auth\fR(1)\&.
    21463.sp .5v
    215 .EM yellow
    21664.RE
    21765.RE
    … …  
    464312\fBwinbindd\fR(8)
    465313daemon is not working
    466 \FCwbinfo\F[]
     314wbinfo
    467315will always return failure\&.
    468316.SH "VERSION"
    … …  
    478326The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
    479327.PP
    480 \FCwbinfo\F[]
     328wbinfo
    481329and
    482 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     330winbindd
    483331were written by Tim Potter\&.
    484332.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/winbind_krb5_locator.7

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: winbind_krb5_locator
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: 7
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "WINBIND_KRB5_LOCATOR" "7" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "7"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "WINBIND_KRB5_LOCATOR" "7" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "7"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022winbind_krb5_locator \- A plugin for MIT and Heimdal Kerberos for detecting KDCs using Windows semantics\&.
    17123.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    … …  
    17628.PP
    17729
    178 \FCwinbind_krb5_locator\F[]
     30winbind_krb5_locator
    17931is a plugin that permits MIT and Heimdal Kerberos libraries to detect Kerberos Servers (for the KDC and kpasswd service) using the same semantics that other tools of the Samba suite use\&. This include site\-aware DNS service record lookups and caching of closest dc\&. The plugin uses the public locator API provided by most modern Kerberos implementations\&.
    18032.SH "PREREQUISITES"
    … …  
    18739.PP
    18840The
    189 \FCwinbind_krb5_locator\&.so\F[]
     41winbind_krb5_locator\&.so
    19042file needs to be manually copied to the plugin directory of the system Kerberos library\&. For MIT Kerberos this is often:
    191 \FC/usr/lib/krb5/plugins/libkrb5/\F[]\&. For Heimdal Kerberos this is often:
    192 \FC/usr/lib/plugin/krb5/\F[]\&. Please check your local Kerberos installation for the correct paths\&. No modification in
    193 \FC/etc/krb5\&.conf\F[]
     43/usr/lib/krb5/plugins/libkrb5/\&. For Heimdal Kerberos this is often:
     44/usr/lib/plugin/krb5/\&. Please check your local Kerberos installation for the correct paths\&. No modification in
     45/etc/krb5\&.conf
    19446is required to enable the use of this plugin\&.
    19547.PP
    19648After copying the locator plugin to the appropriate plugin directory it should immediately be available for use\&. Users should be able to kinit into their kerberized Windows environment without any modification or servers being put manually into
    197 \FC/etc/krb5\&.conf\F[]\&.
     49/etc/krb5\&.conf\&.
    19850.SH "VERSION"
    19951.PP

  • vendor/current/docs/manpages/winbindd.8

    r478 r594  
     1'\" t
    12.\"     Title: winbindd
    23.\"    Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section]
    3 .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.74.0 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
    4 .\"      Date: 06/18/2010
     4.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.75.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/>
     5.\"      Date: 03/06/2011
    56.\"    Manual: System Administration tools
    67.\"    Source: Samba 3.5
    78.\"  Language: English
    89.\"
    9 .TH "WINBINDD" "8" "06/18/2010" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    10 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    11 .\" * (re)Define some macros
    12 .\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    13 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    14 .\" toupper - uppercase a string (locale-aware)
    15 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    16 .de toupper
    17 .tr aAbBcCdDeEfFgGhHiIjJkKlLmMnNoOpPqQrRsStTuUvVwWxXyYzZ
    18 \\$*
    19 .tr aabbccddeeffgghhiijjkkllmmnnooppqqrrssttuuvvwwxxyyzz
    20 ..
    21 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    22 .\" SH-xref - format a cross-reference to an SH section
    23 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    24 .de SH-xref
    25 .ie n \{\
    26 .\}
    27 .toupper \\$*
    28 .el \{\
    29 \\$*
    30 .\}
    31 ..
    32 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    33 .\" SH - level-one heading that works better for non-TTY output
    34 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    35 .de1 SH
    36 .\" put an extra blank line of space above the head in non-TTY output
    37 .if t \{\
    38 .sp 1
    39 .\}
    40 .sp \\n[PD]u
    41 .nr an-level 1
    42 .set-an-margin
    43 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    44 .fi
    45 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    46 .ti 0
    47 .HTML-TAG ".NH \\n[an-level]"
    48 .it 1 an-trap
    49 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    50 .nr an-break-flag 1
    51 \." make the size of the head bigger
    52 .ps +3
    53 .ft B
    54 .ne (2v + 1u)
    55 .ie n \{\
    56 .\" if n (TTY output), use uppercase
    57 .toupper \\$*
    58 .\}
    59 .el \{\
    60 .nr an-break-flag 0
    61 .\" if not n (not TTY), use normal case (not uppercase)
    62 \\$1
    63 .in \\n[an-margin]u
    64 .ti 0
    65 .\" if not n (not TTY), put a border/line under subheading
    66 .sp -.6
    67 \l'\n(.lu'
    68 .\}
    69 ..
    70 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    71 .\" SS - level-two heading that works better for non-TTY output
    72 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    73 .de1 SS
    74 .sp \\n[PD]u
    75 .nr an-level 1
    76 .set-an-margin
    77 .nr an-prevailing-indent \\n[IN]
    78 .fi
    79 .in \\n[IN]u
    80 .ti \\n[SN]u
    81 .it 1 an-trap
    82 .nr an-no-space-flag 1
    83 .nr an-break-flag 1
    84 .ps \\n[PS-SS]u
    85 \." make the size of the head bigger
    86 .ps +2
    87 .ft B
    88 .ne (2v + 1u)
    89 .if \\n[.$] \&\\$*
    90 ..
    91 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    92 .\" BB/BE - put background/screen (filled box) around block of text
    93 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    94 .de BB
    95 .if t \{\
    96 .sp -.5
    97 .br
    98 .in +2n
    99 .ll -2n
    100 .gcolor red
    101 .di BX
    102 .\}
    103 ..
    104 .de EB
    105 .if t \{\
    106 .if "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    107 .sp -1
    108 .\}
    109 .br
    110 .di
    111 .in
    112 .ll
    113 .gcolor
    114 .nr BW \\n(.lu-\\n(.i
    115 .nr BH \\n(dn+.5v
    116 .ne \\n(BHu+.5v
    117 .ie "\\$2"adjust-for-leading-newline" \{\
    118 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'+.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    119 .\}
    120 .el \{\
    121 \M[\\$1]\h'1n'\v'-.5v'\D'P \\n(BWu 0 0 \\n(BHu -\\n(BWu 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    122 .\}
    123 .in 0
    124 .sp -.5v
    125 .nf
    126 .BX
    127 .in
    128 .sp .5v
    129 .fi
    130 .\}
    131 ..
    132 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    133 .\" BM/EM - put colored marker in margin next to block of text
    134 .\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
    135 .de BM
    136 .if t \{\
    137 .br
    138 .ll -2n
    139 .gcolor red
    140 .di BX
    141 .\}
    142 ..
    143 .de EM
    144 .if t \{\
    145 .br
    146 .di
    147 .ll
    148 .gcolor
    149 .nr BH \\n(dn
    150 .ne \\n(BHu
    151 \M[\\$1]\D'P -.75n 0 0 \\n(BHu -(\\n[.i]u - \\n(INu - .75n) 0 0 -\\n(BHu'\M[]
    152 .in 0
    153 .nf
    154 .BX
    155 .in
    156 .fi
    157 .\}
    158 ..
     10.TH "WINBINDD" "8" "03/06/2011" "Samba 3\&.5" "System Administration tools"
    15911.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    16012.\" * set default formatting
    … …  
    16719.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE *
    16820.\" -----------------------------------------------------------------
    169 .SH "Name"
     21.SH "NAME"
    17022winbindd \- Name Service Switch daemon for resolving names from NT servers
    171 .SH "Synopsis"
    172 .fam C
     23.SH "SYNOPSIS"
    17324.HP \w'\ 'u
    174 \FCwinbindd\F[] [\-D] [\-F] [\-S] [\-i] [\-Y] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-n]
    175 .fam
     25winbindd [\-D] [\-F] [\-S] [\-i] [\-Y] [\-d\ <debug\ level>] [\-s\ <smb\ config\ file>] [\-n]
    17626.SH "DESCRIPTION"
    17727.PP
    … …  
    18030suite\&.
    18131.PP
    182 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     32winbindd
    18333is a daemon that provides a number of services to the Name Service Switch capability found in most modern C libraries, to arbitrary applications via PAM and
    184 \FCntlm_auth\F[]
     34ntlm_auth
    18535and to Samba itself\&.
    18636.PP
    18737Even if winbind is not used for nsswitch, it still provides a service to
    188 \FCsmbd\F[],
    189 \FCntlm_auth\F[]
     38smbd,
     39ntlm_auth
    19040and the
    191 \FCpam_winbind\&.so\F[]
     41pam_winbind\&.so
    19242PAM module, by managing connections to domain controllers\&. In this configuraiton the
    19343\m[blue]\fBidmap uid\fR\m[]
    … …  
    19747.PP
    19848The Name Service Switch allows user and system information to be obtained from different databases services such as NIS or DNS\&. The exact behaviour can be configured through the
    199 \FC/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\F[]
     49/etc/nsswitch\&.conf
    20050file\&. Users and groups are allocated as they are resolved to a range of user and group ids specified by the administrator of the Samba system\&.
    20151.PP
    20252The service provided by
    203 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     53winbindd
    20454is called `winbind\' and can be used to resolve user and group information from a Windows NT server\&. The service can also provide authentication services via an associated PAM module\&.
    20555.PP
    20656The
    207 \FCpam_winbind\F[]
     57pam_winbind
    20858module supports the
    20959\fIauth\fR,
    … …  
    21464\fIaccount\fR
    21565module simply performs a getpwnam() to verify that the system can obtain a uid for the user, as the domain controller has already performed access control\&. If the
    216 \FClibnss_winbind\F[]
     66libnss_winbind
    21767library has been correctly installed, or an alternate source of names configured, this should always succeed\&.
    21868.PP
    … …  
    22272.RS 4
    22373This feature is only available on IRIX\&. User information traditionally stored in the
    224 \FChosts(5)\F[]
     74hosts(5)
    22575file and used by
    226 \FCgethostbyname(3)\F[]
     76gethostbyname(3)
    22777functions\&. Names are resolved through the WINS server or by broadcast\&.
    22878.RE
    … …  
    23181.RS 4
    23282User information traditionally stored in the
    233 \FCpasswd(5)\F[]
     83passwd(5)
    23484file and used by
    235 \FCgetpwent(3)\F[]
     85getpwent(3)
    23686functions\&.
    23787.RE
    … …  
    24090.RS 4
    24191Group information traditionally stored in the
    242 \FCgroup(5)\F[]
     92group(5)
    24393file and used by
    244 \FCgetgrent(3)\F[]
     94getgrent(3)
    24595functions\&.
    24696.RE
    24797.PP
    24898For example, the following simple configuration in the
    249 \FC/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\F[]
     99/etc/nsswitch\&.conf
    250100file can be used to initially resolve user and group information from
    251 \FC/etc/passwd \F[]
     101/etc/passwd
    252102and
    253 \FC/etc/group\F[]
     103/etc/group
    254104and then from the Windows NT server\&.
    255105.sp
    … …  
    257107.RS 4
    258108.\}
    259 .fam C
    260 .ps -1
    261109.nf
    262 .if t \{\
    263 .sp -1
    264 .\}
    265 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    266 .sp -1
    267 
    268110passwd:         files winbind
    269111group:          files winbind
    … …  
    273115hosts:          files dns wins
    274116
    275 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    276 .if t \{\
    277 .sp 1
    278 .\}
    279117.fi
    280 .fam
    281 .ps +1
    282118.if n \{\
    283119.RE
    … …  
    285121.PP
    286122The following simple configuration in the
    287 \FC/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\F[]
     123/etc/nsswitch\&.conf
    288124file can be used to initially resolve hostnames from
    289 \FC/etc/hosts\F[]
     125/etc/hosts
    290126and then from the WINS server\&.
    291127.sp
    … …  
    293129.RS 4
    294130.\}
    295 .fam C
    296 .ps -1
    297131.nf
    298 .if t \{\
    299 .sp -1
    300 .\}
    301 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    302 .sp -1
    303 
    304132hosts:          files wins
    305 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    306 .if t \{\
    307 .sp 1
    308 .\}
    309133.fi
    310 .fam
    311 .ps +1
    312134.if n \{\
    313135.RE
    … …  
    318140.RS 4
    319141If specified, this parameter causes the server to operate as a daemon\&. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background on the appropriate port\&. This switch is assumed if
    320 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     142winbindd
    321143is executed on the command line of a shell\&.
    322144.RE
    … …  
    325147.RS 4
    326148If specified, this parameter causes the main
    327 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     149winbindd
    328150process to not daemonize, i\&.e\&. double\-fork and disassociate with the terminal\&. Child processes are still created as normal to service each connection request, but the main process does not exit\&. This operation mode is suitable for running
    329 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     151winbindd
    330152under process supervisors such as
    331 \FCsupervise\F[]
     153supervise
    332154and
    333 \FCsvscan\F[]
     155svscan
    334156from Daniel J\&. Bernstein\'s
    335 \FCdaemontools\F[]
     157daemontools
    336158package, or the AIX process monitor\&.
    337159.RE
    … …  
    340162.RS 4
    341163If specified, this parameter causes
    342 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     164winbindd
    343165to log to standard output rather than a file\&.
    344166.RE
    … …  
    356178\m[blue]\fB\%smb.conf.5.html#\fR\m[]
    357179parameter in the
    358 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     180smb\&.conf
    359181file\&.
    360182.RE
    … …  
    368190.RS 4
    369191The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server\-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See
    370 \FCsmb\&.conf\F[]
     192smb\&.conf
    371193for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
    372194.RE
    … …  
    387209.RS 4
    388210Tells
    389 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     211winbindd
    390212to not become a daemon and detach from the current terminal\&. This option is used by developers when interactive debugging of
    391 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     213winbindd
    392214is required\&.
    393 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     215winbindd
    394216also logs to standard output, as if the
    395 \FC\-S\F[]
     217\-S
    396218parameter had been given\&.
    397219.RE
    … …  
    409231.PP
    410232Users and groups on a Windows NT server are assigned a security id (SID) which is globally unique when the user or group is created\&. To convert the Windows NT user or group into a unix user or group, a mapping between SIDs and unix user and group ids is required\&. This is one of the jobs that
    411 \FC winbindd\F[]
     233winbindd
    412234performs\&.
    413235.PP
    … …  
    418240.PP
    419241Configuration of the
    420 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     242winbindd
    421243daemon is done through configuration parameters in the
    422244\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
    … …  
    559381.PP
    560382In
    561 \FC/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\F[]
     383/etc/nsswitch\&.conf
    562384put the following:
    563385.sp
    … …  
    565387.RS 4
    566388.\}
    567 .fam C
    568 .ps -1
    569389.nf
    570 .if t \{\
    571 .sp -1
    572 .\}
    573 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    574 .sp -1
    575 
    576390passwd: files winbind
    577391group:  files winbind
    578 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    579 .if t \{\
    580 .sp 1
    581 .\}
    582392.fi
    583 .fam
    584 .ps +1
    585393.if n \{\
    586394.RE
    … …  
    588396.PP
    589397In
    590 \FC/etc/pam\&.d/*\F[]
     398/etc/pam\&.d/*
    591399replace the
    592400\fI auth\fR
    … …  
    596404.RS 4
    597405.\}
    598 .fam C
    599 .ps -1
    600406.nf
    601 .if t \{\
    602 .sp -1
    603 .\}
    604 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    605 .sp -1
    606 
    607407auth  required    /lib/security/pam_securetty\&.so
    608408auth  required    /lib/security/pam_nologin\&.so
    … …  
    610410auth  required    /lib/security/pam_unix\&.so \e
    611411                  use_first_pass shadow nullok
    612 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    613 .if t \{\
    614 .sp 1
    615 .\}
    616412.fi
    617 .fam
    618 .ps +1
    619 .if n \{\
    620 .RE
    621 .\}
    622 .sp
    623 .if n \{\
    624 .sp
    625 .\}
    626 .RS 4
    627 .BM yellow
     413.if n \{\
     414.RE
     415.\}
     416.sp
     417.if n \{\
     418.sp
     419.\}
     420.RS 4
    628421.it 1 an-trap
    629422.nr an-no-space-flag 1
    … …  
    637430The PAM module pam_unix has recently replaced the module pam_pwdb\&. Some Linux systems use the module pam_unix2 in place of pam_unix\&.
    638431.sp .5v
    639 .EM yellow
    640432.RE
    641433.PP
    … …  
    648440Now replace the account lines with this:
    649441.PP
    650 \FCaccount required /lib/security/pam_winbind\&.so \F[]
     442account required /lib/security/pam_winbind\&.so
    651443.PP
    652444The next step is to join the domain\&. To do that use the
    653 \FCnet\F[]
     445net
    654446program like this:
    655447.PP
    656 \FCnet join \-S PDC \-U Administrator\F[]
     448net join \-S PDC \-U Administrator
    657449.PP
    658450The username after the
    … …  
    661453.PP
    662454Next copy
    663 \FClibnss_winbind\&.so\F[]
     455libnss_winbind\&.so
    664456to
    665 \FC/lib\F[]
     457/lib
    666458and
    667 \FCpam_winbind\&.so \F[]
     459pam_winbind\&.so
    668460to
    669 \FC/lib/security\F[]\&. A symbolic link needs to be made from
    670 \FC/lib/libnss_winbind\&.so\F[]
     461/lib/security\&. A symbolic link needs to be made from
     462/lib/libnss_winbind\&.so
    671463to
    672 \FC/lib/libnss_winbind\&.so\&.2\F[]\&. If you are using an older version of glibc then the target of the link should be
    673 \FC/lib/libnss_winbind\&.so\&.1\F[]\&.
     464/lib/libnss_winbind\&.so\&.2\&. If you are using an older version of glibc then the target of the link should be
     465/lib/libnss_winbind\&.so\&.1\&.
    674466.PP
    675467Finally, setup a
    … …  
    680472.RS 4
    681473.\}
    682 .fam C
    683 .ps -1
    684474.nf
    685 .if t \{\
    686 .sp -1
    687 .\}
    688 .BB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    689 .sp -1
    690 
    691475[global]
    692476        winbind separator = +
    … …  
    699483        security = domain
    700484        password server = *
    701 .EB lightgray adjust-for-leading-newline
    702 .if t \{\
    703 .sp 1
    704 .\}
    705485.fi
    706 .fam
    707 .ps +1
    708486.if n \{\
    709487.RE
    … …  
    711489.PP
    712490Now start winbindd and you should find that your user and group database is expanded to include your NT users and groups, and that you can login to your unix box as a domain user, using the DOMAIN+user syntax for the username\&. You may wish to use the commands
    713 \FCgetent passwd\F[]
     491getent passwd
    714492and
    715 \FCgetent group \F[]
     493getent group
    716494to confirm the correct operation of winbindd\&.
    717495.SH "NOTES"
    718496.PP
    719497The following notes are useful when configuring and running
    720 \FCwinbindd\F[]:
     498winbindd:
    721499.PP
    722500\fBnmbd\fR(8)
    723501must be running on the local machine for
    724 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     502winbindd
    725503to work\&.
    726504.PP
    … …  
    728506.PP
    729507If more than one UNIX machine is running
    730 \FCwinbindd\F[], then in general the user and groups ids allocated by winbindd will not be the same\&. The user and group ids will only be valid for the local machine, unless a shared
     508winbindd, then in general the user and groups ids allocated by winbindd will not be the same\&. The user and group ids will only be valid for the local machine, unless a shared
    731509\m[blue]\fBidmap backend\fR\m[]
    732510is configured\&.
    … …  
    736514.PP
    737515The following signals can be used to manipulate the
    738 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     516winbindd
    739517daemon\&.
    740518.PP
    … …  
    749527.RS 4
    750528The SIGUSR2 signal will cause
    751 \FC winbindd\F[]
     529winbindd
    752530to write status information to the winbind log file\&.
    753531.sp
    … …  
    756534.SH "FILES"
    757535.PP
    758 \FC/etc/nsswitch\&.conf(5)\F[]
     536/etc/nsswitch\&.conf(5)
    759537.RS 4
    760538Name service switch configuration file\&.
    … …  
    764542.RS 4
    765543The UNIX pipe over which clients communicate with the
    766 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     544winbindd
    767545program\&. For security reasons, the winbind client will only attempt to connect to the winbindd daemon if both the
    768 \FC/tmp/\&.winbindd\F[]
     546/tmp/\&.winbindd
    769547directory and
    770 \FC/tmp/\&.winbindd/pipe\F[]
     548/tmp/\&.winbindd/pipe
    771549file are owned by root\&.
    772550.RE
    … …  
    775553.RS 4
    776554The UNIX pipe over which \'privileged\' clients communicate with the
    777 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     555winbindd
    778556program\&. For security reasons, access to some winbindd functions \- like those needed by the
    779 \FCntlm_auth\F[]
     557ntlm_auth
    780558utility \- is restricted\&. By default, only users in the \'root\' group will get this access, however the administrator may change the group permissions on $LOCKDIR/winbindd_privileged to allow programs like \'squid\' to use ntlm_auth\&. Note that the winbind client will only attempt to connect to the winbindd daemon if both the
    781 \FC$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privileged\F[]
     559$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privileged
    782560directory and
    783 \FC$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privileged/pipe\F[]
     561$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privileged/pipe
    784562file are owned by root\&.
    785563.RE
    … …  
    795573\fI\-\-with\-lockdir\fR
    796574option\&. This directory is by default
    797 \FC/usr/local/samba/var/locks \F[]\&.
     575/usr/local/samba/var/locks\&.
    798576.RE
    799577.PP
    … …  
    807585.SH "SEE ALSO"
    808586.PP
    809 \FCnsswitch\&.conf(5)\F[],
     587nsswitch\&.conf(5),
    810588\fBsamba\fR(7),
    811589\fBwbinfo\fR(1),
    … …  
    817595The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
    818596.PP
    819 \FCwbinfo\F[]
     597wbinfo
    820598and
    821 \FCwinbindd\F[]
     599winbindd
    822600were written by Tim Potter\&.
    823601.PP
Note: See TracChangeset for help on using the changeset viewer.